JP7239129B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention comprises game control means capable of displaying a variable display game that variably displays identification information on a display unit, and generates a special game state advantageous to the player when the stop result of the variable display game results in a special result. It relates to a game machine that allows you to play.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there are gaming machines that can change settings (set values) related to game conditions (for example, Patent Literature 1). Also, the setting value is lit on the display during and after the setting change.

JP 2017-035150 A

However, in the conventional gaming machine, it may be difficult to determine whether or not the set values have been set .

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to reliably set a set value in a gaming machine.

In a typical embodiment of the present invention, game control means is provided for executing a variable display game that variably displays identification information based on establishment of a starting condition, and when the stop result of the variable display game is a special result, In a game machine for generating a special game state advantageous to a player, a setting means capable of setting a set value corresponding to a setting relating to a game, and information about the set value composed of a plurality of digits and emitting light from a light-emitting member. and a display unit capable of alternatively displaying information about the performance of the game machine, wherein the setting means comprises a switch for shifting to a setting possible state in which the setting value can be set, The switch can be converted into a first form that allows transition to the settable state and a second form that terminates the settable state , and the game control means is powered off. A storage means is provided which can hold the information stored even in the state and can store the information of the set value before the power is cut off, and the storage means includes a game work area and a game stack related to game control. and a non-game work area and a non-game stack area related to the performance of the game machine. The information stored in the non-gaming work area and the non-gaming stack area is excluded from the information stored in the non-game stack area. Continuing the game stop state until the power is cut off in the game stop state, the power is cut off after the game stop state, and the switch is set to the first mode when the power is turned on again. , if a specific condition for shifting to the settable state is established, the memory means is initialized in response to the settable state, and when the power is turned on again, the specific condition is satisfied. is not established, the game stop state is set again, and when the switch is in the first mode and in the settable state , display data is set based on the set value, and the display unit When the switch is in the second mode and the set value cannot be set, display data for displaying information about the performance of the game machine is set. When the settable state changes to the settable state, the display of information on the set value is switched to the display of information on the performance of the game machine. A predetermined display can be displayed during switching, and the predetermined display is a mode in which a light emission pattern that is not used in the display of the information regarding the set value and the display of the information regarding the performance of the gaming machine is displayed in all of the plurality of digits. is displayed.

ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to one aspect of this invention, setting of a setting value can be performed reliably.

It is a perspective view of the game machine viewed from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure which shows the structure of a batch display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the game control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the production|presentation control system of a game machine. 10 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first half of the main processing; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second half of the main processing; FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of RAM of the microcomputer for games of a game control apparatus. 4 is a flow chart showing a procedure of timer interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart showing a procedure of output processing; It is a flow chart showing the procedure of a winning opening switch/state monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a game state check process. 9 is a flow chart showing a procedure of probability setting value change processing; 9 is a flowchart showing the procedure of probability set value confirmation processing; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure game process. 4 is a flow chart showing a procedure of a starting port switch monitoring process; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure starting mouth switch common process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure reservation information determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure usual process. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a jackpot flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a jackpot flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big-hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of small hit determination processing. It is a figure which illustrates the big-hit probability and small-hit probability of a special figure fluctuation display game with respect to each setting (each setting value). It is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop design setting process. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop design setting process. It is a figure which illustrates big-hit design distribution (big-hit breakdown) of a special figure fluctuation display game with respect to each setting. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of processing during a special figure fluctuation|variation. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of design variation control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of normal figure game processing. 4 is a flow chart showing a procedure of gate switch monitoring processing; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of normal figure usual processing. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first half of external information editing processing; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second half of the external information editing process; FIG. It is a figure which shows the example (1) of a display of the collective display apparatus during probability setting change. It is a figure which shows the example (2) of a display of the collective display apparatus during probability setting change. It is a figure which shows the example (3) of a display of the collective display apparatus during probability setting change. It is a figure which shows the example (4) of a display of the collective display apparatus during probability setting change. It is a figure which shows the example (5) of a display of the collective display apparatus during probability setting change. It is a figure which shows the example (6) of a display of a batch display apparatus during probability setting change. It is a figure which shows the other structural example of a batch display apparatus. It is a figure which shows another structure of a batch display apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing of the production control device. 9 is a flowchart showing received command check processing; 9 is a flowchart showing received command analysis processing; 10 is a flowchart showing single-shot command processing; It is a flow chart showing a look-ahead pattern system command process. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing look-ahead variation command processing; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows design system command processing. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing variable command processing; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows change production setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows big-hit system command processing. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a stop symbol setting process according to the second embodiment; FIG. It is a figure explaining the chance eye stop design mode in the chance eye look-ahead effect according to the second embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example which selects the chance eye stop design aspect which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a screen transition diagram (part 1) according to the second embodiment; FIG. 11 is a screen transition diagram (part 2) according to the second embodiment; It is a back view of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the production|presentation control system of the game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view when the board effect device of the game board according to the third embodiment operates. FIG. 11 is a front view when the frame effect device for the glass frame according to the third embodiment operates. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of movable body control processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of the initial operation control process according to the third embodiment. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing an example of timing of initial operation control processing according to a comparative example of the third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing the procedure of a set value receiving process according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a table for determining the initial light emission mode of the setting suggestion effect of the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the procedure of fanfare effect setting processing according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the table for determining the promotion lottery color of setting suggestion production|presentation of 4th Embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing the procedure of an ending effect setting process according to a modified example of the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a procedure of processing when receiving the number of out balls according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the procedure of RTC read processing according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing a procedure of count information setting processing according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. In 4th Embodiment, it is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of a display apparatus at the time of becoming a big hit. In the fourth embodiment, it is a diagram showing another example of the display screen of the display device when the jackpot is won. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of a table for determining a display mode of a setting suggestion effect in the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing a procedure of hall/player setting mode processing according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. In the fourth embodiment, it is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the display device in the hole setting mode. In the fourth embodiment, it is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the display device in the player setting mode. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the procedure of a customer waiting demonstration setting process according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. In the fifth embodiment, it is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order, and is an example of the screen transition of the entire game when the holding display during special figure fluctuation of the holding digestion area changes. In the fifth embodiment, it is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order, and is an example of the screen transition of the entire game when a predetermined effect occurs in the effect display area. In the fifth embodiment, it is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order, and is another example of the screen transition of the entire game when a predetermined effect occurs in the pending digestion area or the effect display area. is. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a procedure of timer interrupt processing according to the sixth embodiment; FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the LED driver which concerns on 6th Embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating character codes and corresponding character lighting patterns according to the sixth embodiment; FIG. 14 is a diagram showing the relationship between an initial setting command and latches transmitted to the LED driver according to the sixth embodiment; FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the procedure of LED driver initial setting processing according to the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing the relationship between LED commands and latches transmitted to the LED driver according to the sixth embodiment; FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the procedure of LED data transmission processing according to the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing details of cascade connection of LED drivers according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment; FIG. 78A is a diagram showing details of a state display device according to a first modification of the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 78A is a diagram showing details of a character product ratio display unit that constitutes the state display device and displays character product ratios; FIG. 78(B) is a view showing the details of the number of discharged balls display section for displaying the number of discharged balls and the payout rate display section for displaying the payout rate, which constitute the state display device. FIG. 21 is a timing chart showing initial setting commands sent to a role ratio driver and a ball payout rate/number of discharged balls driver according to a first modification of the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing procedures of initial setting processing of a role ratio driver and a ball payout rate/number of discharged balls driver according to a first modification of the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a timing chart showing LED commands sent to a role ratio driver and a ball payout rate/number of discharged balls driver according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the procedure of LED data transmission processing according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a game control system of a game machine according to a second modification of the sixth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing details of cascade connection of LED drivers according to a second modification of the sixth embodiment; FIG. 21 is a timing chart showing initial setting commands sent to a collective driver, a role ratio driver, and a ball payout rate/number of discharged balls driver according to a second modification of the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing procedures of an initial setting process of a collective driver, a role ratio driver, and a ball payout rate/number of discharged balls driver according to a second modification of the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a timing chart showing LED commands sent to a batch driver, a role ratio driver, and a ball payout rate/discharged ball number driver according to a second modification of the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the procedure of LED data transmission processing according to the second modification of the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a procedure of probability setting value change processing according to the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram showing the lighting pattern data transmitted to the probability setting value display device and the test-firing test signal transmitted to the test-firing test device when the settings are changed in the seventh embodiment; FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram showing the lighting pattern data transmitted to the probability set value display device and the test-firing test signal transmitted to the test-firing test device when the settings are changed in the first modified example of the seventh embodiment; FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the procedure of probability setting value change processing according to the second modification of the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram showing the lighting pattern data transmitted to the probability set value display device and the test-firing test signal transmitted to the test-firing test device when the settings are changed in the second modification of the seventh embodiment; It is a block diagram which shows the structural example (1) of the game control system which concerns on 8th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example (part 2) of the game control system which concerns on 8th Embodiment. Timing chart showing an example of external information output timing when setting is changed according to the ninth embodiment FIG. 21 is a timing chart showing a modification of external information output timing when setting is changed according to the ninth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a timing chart showing an example of timing of external information output when setting is finalized according to the ninth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a timing chart showing a modification of the timing of outputting external information when confirming settings according to the ninth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a timing chart showing an example of external information output timing when settings are changed according to a modification of the ninth embodiment; FIG. 10 is another example in which the timing of outputting external information is changed when changing settings according to the modification of the ninth embodiment. In the tenth embodiment, it is a diagram illustrating the lighting pattern of the symbol number and the first special figure variation display portion 51 of the batch display device corresponding to the symbol number, and the lighting pattern of the probability set value. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing details of a state display device for displaying information about a payout rate according to the tenth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing details of a state display device for displaying numbers indicating probability setting values according to the tenth embodiment; It is a figure (the 1) which illustrates the big-hit probability and small-hit probability of the special figure fluctuation display game which concerns on 11th Embodiment with respect to each setting (each setting value). It is a figure (the 2) which illustrates the big-hit probability and small-hit probability of the special figure fluctuation display game which concerns on 11th Embodiment with respect to each setting (each setting value). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit flag 1 setting processing concerning an 11th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot flag 2 setting process which concerns on 11th Embodiment. It is a diagram showing an opening mode (small hit open pattern) of the special variable winning device in the small hit state. In the eleventh embodiment, it is a diagram illustrating the hit probability of the normal pattern variation display game for each setting (each set value). In the eleventh embodiment, it is a diagram illustrating a display screen (customer waiting screen) of the display device during customer waiting. In 11th Embodiment, it is a figure which shows the light emission mode of a special-figure fluctuation|variation display part. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an external device according to an eleventh embodiment; It is a figure which shows a mode that the removable parts which concern on 12th Embodiment are attached to the game machine. It is a figure which shows roughly the structural example of the game board and parts which concern on 12th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows another example of the game board and parts which concern on 12th Embodiment. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the configuration of a parallel-to-serial converter of an identification board according to a twelfth embodiment; FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a first modification of the identification board (particularly the parallel-to-serial converter) according to the twelfth embodiment; FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a second modification of the identification board (particularly the parallel-to-serial converter) according to the twelfth embodiment; FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a third modified example of the identification substrate according to the twelfth embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the main process of the production|presentation control apparatus which concerns on 12th Embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a procedure of parts collation processing according to the twelfth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a reference table that associates model designation commands with model identification information in the twelfth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a game control system of a game machine according to a thirteenth embodiment; FIG. 21 is a diagram for explaining a transition state when power is turned on (power is restored) of the gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a procedure of probability setting value change processing according to the thirteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a procedure of a set value reception process according to the thirteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the procedure of segment LED editing processing according to the thirteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of the probability set value confirmation display period when the setting is changed according to the thirteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a display device when settings are changed according to the thirteenth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a timing chart showing a first modified example of the timing of the confirmation display period of the probability set value when the setting is changed according to the thirteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a timing chart showing a second modified example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability set value when the setting is changed according to the thirteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the time of setting change of the status display device according to the second modification of the thirteenth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a timing chart showing a third modified example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability set value when the setting is changed according to the thirteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a timing chart showing a fourth modified example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability set value when the setting is changed according to the thirteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 131 is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of the confirmation display period of the probability set value at the time of setting confirmation according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a display device when confirming settings according to the thirteenth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a timing chart showing a modified example of the timing of the confirmation display period of the probability set value at the time of setting confirmation according to the thirteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a modification of the display screen of the display device when confirming settings according to the thirteenth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram showing a display mode of probability setting values in a gaming machine according to a fourteenth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram showing a first modified example of the display mode of probability setting values in the gaming machine of the fourteenth embodiment; A second modified example of the display mode of the probability set value in the gaming machine of the fourteenth embodiment, in which the display mode of the probability set value at the time of setting change is compared with the display mode of the probability set value at the time of setting confirmation. It is a schematic diagram. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram showing a third modification of the display mode of the probability setting values in the gaming machine of the fourteenth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram showing a fourth modification of the display mode of probability setting values in the gaming machine of the fourteenth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram showing a fifth modification of the display mode of probability set values in the gaming machine of the fourteenth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the procedure of variation pattern setting processing according to the fifteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a procedure of 2-byte allocation processing according to the fifteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing the procedure of sorting processing according to the fifteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing the procedure of a change start information setting process according to the fifteenth embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot end process which concerns on 15th Embodiment. It is a figure which illustrates the big hit probability and small hit probability which concern on 15th Embodiment with respect to each setting (each setting value). It is a figure which illustrates big-hit design distribution (big-hit breakdown) with respect to each setting which concerns on 15th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a selection rate table that defines the selection rate of numbers (variation pattern group numbers) of variation group tables A to E according to the fifteenth embodiment. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a variation group table A (in the case of probability variation and loss) according to the fifteenth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a variation group table B (in the case of probability variation and loss) according to the fifteenth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a variation group table C (in the case of probability variation and loss) according to the fifteenth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing variation group tables D and D′ (probability variation state and loss) according to the fifteenth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing variation group tables E and E′ (probability variation state and loss) according to the fifteenth embodiment; It is a diagram showing a variation group table A (in the case of probability variation state and small hit) according to the fifteenth embodiment. It is a diagram showing a variation group table B (in the case of probability variation state and small hit) according to the fifteenth embodiment. It is a diagram showing a variation group table C (in the case of probability variation state and small hit) according to the fifteenth embodiment. It is a diagram showing the variation group table D, D' according to the fifteenth embodiment (in the case of probability variation state and small hit). It is a diagram showing the variation group table E, E' according to the fifteenth embodiment (in the case of probability variation state and small hit). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big-hit completion|finish process which concerns on the modification of 15th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big-hit completion|finish process which concerns on the modification of 15th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a front view of a game board according to a sixteenth embodiment; It is a figure which illustrates the jackpot probability and production|presentation pattern which concern on 16th Embodiment with respect to each setting (each setting value). It is a figure which illustrates another example of the big-hit probability and production|presentation pattern which concern on 16th Embodiment with respect to each setting (each setting value). FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing a procedure of variable effect setting processing according to the sixteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing a procedure of second half advance notice distribution group table change processing according to the sixteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22B is another example of a flowchart showing the procedure of the second half advance notice distribution group table change process according to the sixteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram exemplifying a second half advance notice distribution group table according to the sixteenth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing the procedure of prefetch variation command processing according to the sixteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing the procedure of a prefetch effect distribution table setting process according to the sixteenth embodiment; FIG. It is another example of the flowchart which shows the procedure of the look-ahead effect distribution table setting process which concerns on 16th Embodiment. It is a figure which illustrates the look-ahead effect distribution table which concerns on 16th Embodiment. FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating a lucky number distribution table according to the sixteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating a change pattern of the lucky number allocation table set corresponding to the setting value and the previous lucky number in the sixteenth embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure information setting processing which concerns on 16th Embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing a procedure of variation pattern setting processing according to a modification of the sixteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing the procedure of a variation group table change process according to the modification of the sixteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 131 is another example of a flowchart showing the procedure of the variation group table change processing according to the modification of the sixteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram exemplifying a variation group table according to a modification of the sixteenth embodiment; FIG.

[First embodiment]
Preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. Note that front, back, left, and right in the description of the gaming machine refer to directions seen by the player during the game.

[General view of game machine]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a gaming machine.

The game machine 10 has an opening/closing frame attached to a frame 11 fixed to an island facility via a hinge so as to be freely opened/closed. The opening/closing frame is composed of a front frame 12 (body frame) and a glass frame 15 .

A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game visual recognition area that makes a game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 visible.

The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be opened individually. For example, by opening only the glass frame 15, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed. Also, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not opened, it is possible to access the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 7) etc. arranged on the back side of the game board 30. can be done.

Various frame-constituting members are arranged on the edge portion of the glass frame 15 around the cover glass 14 .

Decoration devices 18a and 18b capable of emitting light according to the game state are arranged at the upper center and left side of the glass frame 15. As shown in FIG. The decoration devices 18a and 18b accommodate lighting members such as LEDs therein, and perform light emission effects according to the game state. The illumination members arranged inside these decoration devices 18a and 18b constitute part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

Upper speakers 19a are arranged at the upper right corner portion and the upper left corner portion of the glass frame 15, respectively. Two lower speakers 19b are provided in the lower part of the game machine 10 separately from the upper speakers 19a. The lower speaker 19 b is arranged at the lower left corner portion of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner portion of the front frame 12 . These upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b emit sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds, and the like.

On the right side of the glass frame 15, a protruding effect unit 13 that extends in the vertical direction of the gaming machine 10 and protrudes forward (toward the player) is arranged. The projecting effect unit 13 is a effect device that performs light emitting effects and the like according to the progress of the game. A lighting member arranged inside the projecting effect unit 13 also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

An upper plate unit having an upper plate 21 capable of storing game balls is attached to the lower portion of the glass frame 15 . The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape with an open top. The game balls stored in the upper tray 21 are supplied one by one to a ball shooting device (not shown).

The upper tray unit further includes a performance operation device for receiving input operations from the players, a ball lending operation device for receiving input operations from the players, and a decoration device 22 for performing light-emitting performance or the like according to the game state. .

The effect operation device is an operation device in which a touch panel 25b is incorporated in the effect button 25, and is provided at the upper center of the upper tray unit so that the player can easily operate it.

By operating the effect operating device by the player, it is possible to perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the special figure variation display game or the like displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode), or execute an advance notice effect that gives advance notice of the result of the variable display game corresponding to the starting memory. Note that the variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and when simply referred to as a variable display game, this specification refers to a special figure variable display game.

Also, the effect pattern may be changed not only during execution of the variable display game but also by the player operating the effect operation device while the game is not being executed.

The game state when the variable display game is executed consists of a plurality of game states. The normal game state (normal state) is a game state in which no special game state occurs. In addition, the special game state is, for example, a state with a high probability of occurrence of a special result (for example, a big hit) in a time-saving state or a variable display game as a specific game state (variable probability state, probability variable state), a big hit state (special game state ), a small hit game state (small hit state).

Here, the probability variable state (specific game state) continues until the next big hit occurs (loop type), continues until a predetermined number of variable display games are executed (number cut type, ST), and There is one that continues until a predetermined probability fall lottery is won (fall lottery type).

Furthermore, whether or not to generate the probability variable state may be always generated when the big hit occurs without determining whether or not to generate the probability variable state by the big hit pattern random number, or a prize winning device having a specific area may be provided and specified. A variable probability state may be generated when a game ball passes through the area.

The ball lending operation device is an operation device operated by the player when borrowing game balls, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper tray unit. The ball lending operation device includes a ball lending button 27, a return button 28, and a balance display section 26. - 特許庁A ball lending button 27 is a button operated by a player when borrowing a game ball, and a return button 28 is used when ejecting a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. These are buttons operated by the player. The balance display portion 26 is a display area for displaying the balance of a prepaid card or the like.

The decoration device 22 accommodates an illumination member such as an LED inside, and is a device that performs light emission effect or the like according to the game state, and is provided in the front portion of the upper tray unit. The illumination member arranged inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

Beneath the glass frame 15 including the above-described upper tray unit and the like, and below the front frame 12, there are an operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of a ball shooting device (not shown) and a game ball capable of being stored. A lower plate 23 is provided.

The operating handle 24 is arranged in the lower right portion of the front frame 12 and below the right lower speaker 19b. When the player rotates the operation handle 24 , the ball shooting device shoots game balls supplied from the upper tray 21 to the game area 32 of the game board 30 . The shooting speed of the game ball shot from the ball shooting device is set to increase as the amount of rotation of the operating handle 24 increases. That is, the ball shooting device can change the shooting force (speed) of shooting the game ball into the game area in response to the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and the game can be played in various shooting modes with different shooting force. Can shoot balls. The shooting modes include left hitting (normal hitting) in which the game ball flows down on the left side of the game area 32 and right hitting in which the game ball flows down on the right side of the game area 32 .

The lower tray 23 is arranged below the upper tray unit with a predetermined gap from the upper tray unit. The lower plate 23 has a ball removal hole 23a vertically passing through the bottom surface of the lower plate 23, and an opening/closing operation portion 23b for opening and closing the ball removal hole 23a. When the player operates the opening/closing operation portion 23b to open the ball extraction hole 23a, the game balls stored in the lower tray 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball extraction hole 23a.

[Game board]
Next, the game board 30 of the game machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 2A. FIG. 2A is a front view of a game board 30 provided in the game machine 10. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 2A, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-like game board main body 30a that serves as an attachment base for various members. The game board main body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin, and a game area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31 is provided on the front surface of the game board main body 30a. The game machine 10 is configured to play a game by shooting game balls from a ball shooting device into a game area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31 . In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails, etc. are arranged as members for changing the flowing direction of the game ball.

At approximately the center of the game area 32, a center case (front structure) 40 is attached to form a window that serves as a display area for the variable display game. Behind the window formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 is arranged as a performance display device (variable display device) that variably displays (variably displays) a plurality of pieces of identification information. The display device 41 includes, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that display contents can be visually recognized from the front side of the game board 30 through the window portion of the center case 40 . The display device 41 is not limited to having a liquid crystal display, and may have a display such as an EL or a CRT.

A plurality of variable display areas are provided on the display screen (display unit) of the display device 41, and identification information (special symbols) and characters for producing a variable display game are displayed in each variable display area. In addition, images based on the progress of the game (big win display, fanfare display, ending display, etc.) are displayed on the display screen.

The center case 40 also has an inflow port 40a to a warp passage 40e for guiding game balls flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a stage on which game balls that have passed through the warp passage 40e can roll. A portion 40b is provided. Since the stage portion 40b of the center case 40 is arranged above the starting winning port 36 and the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball rolling on the stage portion 40b enters the starting winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37. It is easier to win prizes.

An upper effect unit 40c and a side effect unit 40d are provided in the upper part and the right part of the center case 40, respectively. The upper effect unit 40c and the side effect unit 40d constitute a part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and the board effect device 44 (see FIG. 4).

A normal pattern start gate (normal pattern start gate) 34 is provided in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40 . Inside the normal pattern starting gate 34, a gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided. When the game ball hit into the game area 32 passes through the normal pattern starting gate 34, the normal pattern fluctuation display game is executed.

A general prize winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40 , and a general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the lower right game area 32 of the center case 40 . Winning of game balls into these general winning openings 35 is detected by winning opening switches (SW) 35a to 35n (see FIG. 3) provided in the general winning openings 35. FIG.

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, there is provided a start winning opening (first starting winning area) 36 that provides the starting condition of the special figure fluctuation display game, and directly below it is a second starting winning opening (second A normal variable winning device 37 having a starting winning area) is provided. The normal variable winning device 37 is provided with a movable member (movable piece) 37b that converts into a state in which game balls can easily flow in by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls down toward the near side. When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game balls cannot win the normal variable winning device 37.例文帳に追加When the game ball wins the starting winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, a special figure variable display game is executed as an auxiliary game.

The movable member 37b is a so-called tongue type normal electric accessory, and rotates via a normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) when the result of the normal pattern variation display game is in a predetermined stop display mode. , and changes to an open state in which game balls tend to flow into the normal variable winning device 37 (an easy winning state advantageous to the player).

The movable member 37b is controlled by a game control device 100, which will be described later. The game control device 100 shortens the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game or makes the hit probability of the normal pattern fluctuation display game higher than usual, thereby increasing the frequency of occurrence of the easy-to-win state, or normal game state. By making the occurrence time of the easy winning state longer than the easy winning state generated in , a time saving state (general electric support state) is generated as the above-mentioned specific game state. In addition, even in the probability variable state (excluding the latent probability variable state), a time-saving state (general electric support state) occurs in duplicate.

In the game area 32 on the lower right side of the normal variable winning device 37, there is an attacker type opening the big winning opening by rotating in the direction in which the upper end side falls forward by the big winning opening solenoid (39b) (see FIG. 3). A special variable winning device 39 having an opening/closing door 39c is provided. The special variable winning device 39 converts the state of the large winning opening closed (blocked state unfavorable to the player) to an open state (special game state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variable display game, thereby winning a large prize. By facilitating the inflow of game balls into the mouth, predetermined game values (prize balls) are awarded to the player. In addition, a count switch 39a (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the big winning hole as a detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the big winning hole. In addition, one or a plurality of large winning opening LEDs 39d (full-color LEDs) that illuminate the large winning opening are arranged in the special variable winning device 39 or in the vicinity of the large winning opening (around the large winning opening). .

When the game ball wins the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, and the special variable winning device 39, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) determines the type of the winning winning opening. The number of prize balls corresponding to . In addition, in the game area 32 below the normal variable prize winning device 37, an out port 30b for collecting game balls that do not win a prize such as a prize winning port is provided.

In addition, outside the game area 32 and in the lower right corner of the game board main body 30a, a special figure variation display game (a special figure 1 variation display game, a special figure 2 variation display game) and a normal figure variation display game are executed. A collective display device 50 is provided. The collective display device 50 includes display units 51 to 60 for displaying information such as the current game state (see FIG. 2B).

FIG. 2B is a diagram showing the configuration of the collective display device 50. As shown in FIG. The collective display device 50 includes a first special figure variation display unit 51 (special figure 1 indicator, lamp D1) and a second special figure variation for a variation display game composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) Display unit 52 (special figure 2 indicator, lamp D2), variation display unit 53 for normal figure variation display game (normal figure indicator, lamps D8, D10, D18), and start (hold) of each variation display game It has a storage display unit (special figure 1 reservation indicator 54, special figure 2 reservation indicator 55, general figure reservation indicator 56) for notifying the number of memories. The special figure 1 reservation indicator 54 is composed of lamps D11 and D12. Special figure 2 reservation indicator 55 is configured by lamps D13 and D14. The general map holding display 56 is configured by lamps D15 and D16.

In addition, the collective display device 50 has a first game state display unit 57 (first game state display, lamp D7), a second game state display unit 58 (second game state display, lamp D17) that lights up when a time saving state occurs to notify the occurrence of the time saving state, and a high probability state of a big hit when the game machine 10 is turned on. 3rd game state display unit 59 (third game state display unit, probability state display unit, lamp D9) for displaying the status, and the number of rounds at the time of the big hit (the number of opening and closing times of the special variable winning device 39) is displayed. A round display portion 60 (lamps D3 to D6) is provided.

In the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52, the variable display game is executed by a variable display in which the identification information (for example, the central segment) is repeatedly turned on and off (blinking). In addition, the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 are not limited to such a segment type display unit, and may be configured by an aggregate of a plurality of LEDs, and when performing variable display In addition, all LEDs provided as indicators are all lit and all extinguished (simultaneous blinking of all LEDs), cyclic lighting (lighting from any one LED in a predetermined order at predetermined time intervals and extinguishing), or multiple may be performed by lighting and extinguishing (blinking) or cyclic lighting by a predetermined number of LEDs among the LEDs. Also in the normal figure display device 53, the variable display game is executed by a variable display (blinking) in which the lamps D10 and D18 are repeatedly turned on and off. In addition, the general figure indicator 53 can also be appropriately configured in the same manner as the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52.

The lamp display device 80 includes lamp display units 1 and 2 (LEDs) that perform variable display (blinking) that repeats lighting display and light-off display as symbols (fourth special symbols to be described later), and start of each special symbol variation display game. (Holding) It has a lamp display section 3-6 (LED) for notifying the number of memories. Note that the lamp display device 80 is controlled by an effect control device 300 (described later).

The lamp display units 1 and 2 blink at a predetermined blinking cycle (for example, 200 msec (milliseconds)) as a variable display. While the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the special figure 1 indicator 51, the special figure 2 indicator 52, and the general figure indicator 53 of the collective display device 50 is measured by the game control device 100, the lamp of the lamp display device 80 The fluctuation time of the display units 1 and 2 is measured by the production control device 300 (described later).

Lamp display units 3 and 4 (special figure 1 reserved LED 1, special figure 1 reserved LED 2) display the special figure 1 reserved number (first start memory number) by a combination of off state, lighting state, and blinking state. Similarly, the lamp display units 5 and 6 (special figure 2 pending LED1, special figure 2 pending LED2) display the special figure 2 pending number (second start memory number) by a combination of off state, lit state, and blinking state do. The lamp display unit 3-6 terminates the display of the number of reservations due to the occurrence of a big hit, but displays the number of reservations in cases other than the state of the big hit (including the case where a reach, which will be described later, occurs on the display device 41). conduct.

Next, details of the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10, the normal figure variation display game, and the special figure variation display game will be described.

In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by shooting game balls toward the game area 32 from a ball shooting device (not shown). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstructing nails, windmills, etc. arranged at various places in the game area 32, and enters a normal figure start gate 34, a general prize winning opening 35, and a starting winning opening. 36, wins a normal variable winning device 37 or a special variable winning device 39, or flows into an out port 30b provided at the bottom of the game area 32, and is discharged from the game area 32. When game balls enter the general winning port 35, the starting winning port 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 39, the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of the winning winning port is sent through the payout device. It is discharged to the upper tray 21 .

The normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 . When the game ball passes through the normal pattern start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the normal pattern variation display game is executed based on the determination result of the hit determination random number value extracted at this time.

A state where the normal pattern fluctuation display game cannot be started, for example, when the normal pattern fluctuation display game has already been played and the normal pattern fluctuation display game has not ended, or the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is a hit. When the variable prize winning device 37 is converted to the open state, when the game ball passes through the normal pattern start gate 34, if the normal pattern start memory number is less than the upper limit number, the memory number is added (+1).

The normal pattern start memory stores a hit judgment random value for determining the hit or miss of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, and when this hit judgment random value matches the judgment value, the normal pattern fluctuation display A game wins and a specific result mode (specific result) is derived.

The normal pattern fluctuation display game is executed by the normal pattern display device 53 provided in the collective display device 50 . The normal figure display 53 is composed of an LED that indicates a hit in the case of a lit state as normal identification information (normal figure), and indicates a deviation in the case of an off state. After a predetermined variable display time has elapsed, the result is displayed by turning on or off the LED.

When the normal pattern random number value extracted when passing the normal pattern starting gate 34 is a winning value, the normal pattern displayed on the normal pattern display device 53 stops in a winning state and becomes a winning state. At this time, by driving the general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3), the movable member 37b is converted to an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds), and the game balls to the normal variable winning device 37 Winning is allowed.

Winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 and winning to the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3) and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). A game ball that has won a prize in a starting prize winning port 36 is detected as a prize winning ball in a special figure 1 variable display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number, and a game ball that has won a prize in a normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 is a special figure 2. It is detected as the starting winning ball of the variable display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit.

At the time of detection of the starting prize ball of the special figure variation display game, a big hit random number value, a big hit pattern random number value, each variation pattern random number value, etc. are extracted. These random numbers are stored in the special figure reservation storage area (a part of RAM) of the game control device 100 as special figure start winning memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of 8 times). The number of memories of the special figure start winning memory is displayed on the special figure 1 reservation display 54 and the special figure 2 reservation display 55 for notifying the number of starting prizes of the collective display device 50, and also on the display screen of the display device 41 Is displayed.

The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game with the special figure 1 indicator 51 based on the winning to the start winning opening 36 or the first start memory. Also, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 variable display game on the special figure 2 display device 52 based on the winning to the normal variation winning device 37 or the second start memory.

The special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game) and special figure 2 variation display game (second special figure variation display game) are identified by the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 ( It is performed by stopping and displaying a predetermined result mode after variably displaying special symbols, special symbols). Also, in the display device 41, a decorative special figure variation display game is executed in which a plurality of types of identification information (eg, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) are variably displayed corresponding to each special figure variation display game.

In the decorative special symbol variation display game on the display device 41, the decorative special symbols (identification information) composed of the numbers etc. described above are left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), middle (third special symbol ), the variable display (scroll display) is started in order, and after a predetermined time, the varying symbols are sequentially stopped, and the results of the special figure variation display game are displayed. In addition, the display device 41 performs various presentation displays such as the appearance of characters to enhance interest. Furthermore, in the decorative special symbol variation display game, as another decorative special symbol (identification information), in the lamp display units 1 and 2 of the lamp display device 80, the fourth special symbol is displayed by repeating (blinking) the lighting display and the extinguishing display. fluctuate. After a predetermined time from the start, the variable display of the lamp display parts 1 and 2 stops with "lights out" in the case of a loss, and "lights up" in the case of a big hit or a small hit.

When the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 is made at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random value at the time of winning detection is a big hit value), as a result of the special figure fluctuation display game A specific result mode (special result mode) is derived from the displayed symbols, and a jackpot state (special game state) is established. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as "7, 7, 7" are aligned).

At this time, in the special variable prize winning device 39, the special prize winning opening solenoid (39b) (see FIG. 3) is energized, so that the large winning opening is changed from closed to open for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). In other words, the big winning opening provided in the special variable winning device 39 opens wide for a predetermined time or until a predetermined number of game balls win, and during this time the player is given the privilege of being able to win a lot of game balls. be.

When the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 is made at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random value at the time of winning detection is a small winning value), a special figure fluctuation display game As a result, a specific result mode (small hit result mode) is derived by the display pattern, and a small win state is entered. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a small hit result mode. In addition, in this embodiment, although a big hit random number value is used also for determination of a small hit, a small hit value (small hit determination value) differs from a big hit value (big hit determination value).

At this time, in the special variable prize winning device 39, the special prize winning port solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3) is energized so that the special prize winning port is changed from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined short period of time. In addition, since the total opening time of the big winning opening is shorter in the small winning state (small winning game state) than in the big winning state (special game state), the game in which the player can win more in the small winning state than in the big winning state The value (the number of acquired balls) is small. In both the small winning state and the big winning state, the big winning opening is opened, but the big winning state may be called the first special game state, and the small winning state may be called the second special game state.

Here, the difference between the big win and the small win will be explained.

A big win is a special result that involves the operation of a conditional device, and a small win is a specific result that does not involve the operation of a conditional device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit pattern). It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 39 is set. The fact that the conditional device does not operate means that the above-mentioned specific flag is not set as in the case of winning a small prize lottery, for example. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on and off. In addition, "conditional device" is a term commonly used in the field of pachinko machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of electric accessories, and the same applies in this specification. It is used as a term having the meaning of

Specifically, in the case of a big hit, the special variable winning device is opened by setting the big hit flag, whereas in the case of a small hit, the special variable winning device is set by setting the small hit flag. is released.

In addition, the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 may be configured as separate indicators or may be configured as the same indicator, but each special figure variation display game is not executed at the same time. is set to

Regarding the decorative special figure variation display game on the display device 41, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game may be executed on separate display devices or separate display areas, or the same display may be performed. You may make it perform by a device or a display area. In this case, the decoration special figure variation display games corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are not executed at the same time. In addition, the special figure 2 variation display game is to be executed with priority over the special figure 1 variation display game, and there is a start memory of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, When the execution of the figure fluctuation display game becomes possible, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as the special figure variation display game.

In addition, although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the count switch (39a) ) uses a non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that detects a game ball by utilizing a phenomenon in which a magnetic field changes when a metal object approaches the coil. ing. In addition, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 etc. of the game machine 10 and the front frame open detection switch 64 (main body frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 etc. A microswitch with positive contacts can be used.

[Game control device]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the game control system of the game machine 10. As shown in FIG. The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100 (main board), and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls the game in general, and is a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer). ) 111, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., and a data bus 140 connecting between the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. And so on.

The CPU unit 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates the CPU operation clock, timer interrupt, and the reference clock for the random number generation circuit. It has an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 to enable operation. be done.

The power supply device 400 includes an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32V from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of a lower level such as 12V or 5V from a voltage of 32V DC, and a normal power supply unit 410. , It has a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 111 at the time of power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal that inform the game control device 100 of power failure occurrence and recovery. A control signal generator 430 for generating and outputting control signals such as .

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, the main It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are subject to replacement when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the embodiment. By providing it, it is possible to remove it from the object of replacement and to reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured with one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. Backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (especially built-in RAM) of the game control device 100 so that the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power outage or after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, and when it drops below 17 V, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and changes the power failure monitoring signal after a predetermined time. to output Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, the reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

In addition, the game control device 100 (main board) includes a setting key switch 93 that is turned on by an operator's turning operation or the like to change the setting value related to the game condition (game), and and a setting value change switch 102 that can change the setting value related to the game condition. In this embodiment, the set value related to the game condition (game) is the probability set value of the jackpot probability, but other game conditions other than the jackpot probability (such as the small hit probability and the probability variation inrush rate) are also set according to the probability set value. Can be changed. The setting key switch 93 and the set value change switch 102 constitute setting change means (setting change device 42) capable of changing settings (set values) relating to game conditions. In the present embodiment, the touch switch signal of the touch switch provided on the operating handle 24 is used as the confirmation signal for confirming the setting value, but an operable confirmation button switch (operation means, operation unit) is used. It may be provided in the game control device 100 and the signal from the confirmation button switch may be used as the confirmation signal for confirming the set value.

The setting key switch 93 and the set value change switch 102 are arranged on the game control device 100 inside the game machine 10 so that they cannot be operated (inaccessible positions) unless the front frame 12 (body frame) is opened. be done. That is, general players cannot access and operate the setting key switch 93 and the set value change switch 102 . In the present embodiment, the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 are installed on the game control device 100, but the front frame 12 (body frame) is open such as on the power supply board of the power supply device 400. It may be provided in a location that would otherwise be inaccessible.

When the gaming machine 10 is powered on, the operator operates the set value change switch 102 (set value change button) when the front frame 12 (body frame) is opened and the setting key switch 93 is turned on. By doing so, it is possible to change the setting (set value) related to the game conditions such as the probability of a big hit and the variable probability entry rate. That is, when the power is turned on, the state in which the front frame 12 is opened and the setting key switch 93 is turned on is the variable setting state in which the setting (set value) can be changed. In a normal procedure, when the operator opens the front frame 12 and rotates the setting key switch 93 to the ON position to turn on the power, the setting variable state corresponding to the state in which the setting is being changed is entered. The setting variable state may be notified by sound from a speaker. The setting variable state may be a state in which the glass frame 15 is opened and the setting key switch 93 is turned on when the power is turned on, or a state in which both the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 are opened and the setting key switch 93 is turned on. The state may be a configurable state

In the present embodiment, the set values related to the game conditions are defined in six stages, set value 1 (setting 1), setting value 2 (setting 2), setting value 3 (setting 3), setting value 4 (setting 4), There are setting value 5 (setting 5) and setting value 6 (setting 6). A setting value of 1 is the most unfavorable setting for the player, and a setting value of 6 is the most advantageous setting for the player. Setting values 1 and 2 are low settings, setting values 3 and 4 are intermediate settings (intermediate settings), and setting values 5 and 6 are high settings.

In the set value change process, each time the set value change switch 102 (set value change button) is operated by the operator, the set value (setting) is changed from set value 1 to set value 2 to set value 3 to set value 4 to setting. Change and select value 5 → set value 6 → set value 1 → set value 2 → . Note that the setting value may be changed by rotating the setting key switch 93 to a predetermined position instead of operating the setting value change button. Also, the set value is not limited to six steps. Then, the selected set values 1 to 6 are displayed on the probability set value display device 143 or the like, which is a 7-segment display. Note that the probability set value display device 143 may change the display in direct association with the operation of the set value change switch 102 via an electric circuit. As will be described later, the selected set values 1 to 6 are displayed on the first special figure variation display section 51 and/or the second special figure variation display section 52 for the variation display game of the collective display device 50. good too.

When the touch switch signal is input to the game control device 100 by the operator touching the operating handle 24, the selected (changed) set value (that is, setting) is determined and the probability set value in the RWM (storage means) is determined. area, and the set value change process ends. Regardless of the touch switch signal, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off after the setting value is changed, or when a predetermined time elapses after the setting variable state, the game control device 100 determines and stores the setting value (that is, the setting). A configuration is also possible.

On the other hand, after the game machine 10 is powered on, the front frame 12 (body frame) is opened and the setting key switch 93 is rotated to turn it on from the off state, thereby entering the setting value confirmation mode (setting confirmation state). In the setting value confirmation mode, the setting value displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 can be confirmed. The selected set values 1 to 6 may be displayed and confirmed on the first special figure variation display unit 51 and / or the second special figure variation display unit 52 for the variation display game of the collective display device 50 . The setting value confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) may be notified by voice from a speaker.

The set value change switch 102 (set value change button) can also be used as a RAM initialization switch (RAM clear switch). A switch signal is generated, and based on this, a process of forcibly initializing information stored in the RAM 111c in the game microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111 . A reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The game microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a, a read-only ROM (read only memory) 111b, and a RAM (random access memory) 111c that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111b stores non-volatile information (programs, fixed data, judgment values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111c is a work area for the CPU 111a and a storage area for various signals and random values during game control. used as An electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111b or RAM 111c.

Further, the ROM 111b stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the content of the effect, the presence or absence of the occurrence of the ready-to-win state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as start memory to determine the fluctuation pattern. In addition, the variation pattern table includes a winning variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a big hit variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include tables for determining the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), fluctuation before reaching the reach state Tables for determining the first half variation pattern (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) are included.

Here, reach (reach state) means that the display device has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. In the gaming machine 10 in which the game state becomes a game state (special game state) advantageous to the player when the special result mode is set, a part of a plurality of display results has not yet been derived and displayed. A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the conditions for the special result mode. In other words, the ready-to-reach state means that even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, the display conditions for the special result mode are not met. It refers to a display mode that does not exist. And, for example, a state in which variable display is performed using a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are uniform (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. In addition, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It means a display state when at least some of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas that are present satisfy the conditions for the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decoration special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes the plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the condition for the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas satisfy the condition for the special result mode (for example, the same identification information This state (excluding the special result mode) may be set as the ready-to-win state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the ready-to-win state.

The ready-to-win state includes a plurality of ready-to-reach effects, and the system of ready-to-win effects with different possibilities (different expected values) of deriving a special result mode (jackpot mode) includes normal reach (N reach) and special 1 reach. (SP1 reach), special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The degree of expectation (expected value) of the big hit increases in the order of no reach<normal reach<special 1 reach<special 2 reach<special 3 reach<premier reach. Also, the ready-to-win state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when the game becomes a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it becomes a loss). Therefore, the state in which the ready-to-win state has occurred is a state with a high possibility of winning a big hit compared to the case in which the ready-to-win state has not occurred.

The CPU 111a executes a game control program in the ROM 111b to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300, or to generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device, and output the game machine. 10 overall control. In addition, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates a jackpot random number for determining a jackpot in a special figure variation display game, a jackpot pattern random number for determining a jackpot pattern, and a small hit pattern for determining a small hit pattern. A random number generation circuit for generating variation pattern random numbers, etc. for determining pattern random numbers and variation patterns in special figure variation display games (including the execution time of variation display games in various reach and non-reach variation displays) and a clock generator for generating a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 msec (milliseconds)) for the CPU 111a based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock for updating the random number generation circuit. ing.

In addition, the CPU 111a acquires any one variation pattern table from among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b in the processing relating to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111a, the game result of the special figure fluctuation display game (big hit or lose), the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state (normal probability state or high probability state), the number of starting memories Any one variation pattern table is selected and acquired from among a plurality of variation pattern tables based on the above. Here, the CPU 111a serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b when executing the special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives a payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to produce a prize ball. control to pay out Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit 600, and performs control for paying out the rental balls.

The input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111 includes a radio wave sensor 62 (board radio wave sensor) that detects the emission of radio waves to the game machine, a gate switch 34a of the normal figure start gate 34, and a start port 1 in the first start winning port 36. It is connected to the switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the second start winning port 37, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 39a of the special variable winning device 39, and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level. An interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is provided for inputting a negative logic signal such as 7V and converting it to a positive logic signal of 0V-5V.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the gate switch 34a, the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the prize winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 39a are input to the third input port 124. .

Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or switch is detected are input to the second input port 123 .

Further, the second input port 123 receives the detection signal of the fraud detection magnetic sensor switch 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or the like, and the glass frame opening detection signal provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the like. A signal is input from a switch 63 and a front frame open detection switch 64 (main body frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame 12 (main body frame) or the like. A vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and a detection signal may be input to the second input port 123 .

The second input port 123 (input port 3) takes in a setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and a set value change switch signal from the set value change switch 102 and outputs them to the game microcomputer via the data bus 140. 111.

In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 through the relay board 70 to a test fire test device (not shown). Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage of 5 V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It's becoming

The data held by the third input port 124 is read by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to a valid level) by decoding the address assigned to the third input port 124 by the gaming microcomputer 111. be able to. The same applies to the second input port 123 and the first input port 122 which will be described later.

In addition, the input unit 120 receives a frame radio fraud signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating payout abnormality, a shoot ball cut switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow. The overflow switch signal, the touch switch signal based on the input of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24, and the out ball detection switch signal from the out ball detection switch are taken in and supplied to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. An input port 122 is provided. The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that the lower tray 23 is filled with a predetermined amount or more of game balls (that the tray is full). The frame radio wave illegal signal is a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by a frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 (body frame). This is a signal indicating whether or not In this embodiment, the out-ball detection switch (not shown) detects all game balls that have been shot into the game area and finished playing. The out ball detection switch (not shown) may detect only game balls passing through the out port 30b.

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the game microcomputer 111 and the like. It has the function of removing noise from A power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving signals from the outside provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the game microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output section 130 . In addition, by outputting the reset signal RST directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, the test-firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test-firing test apparatus is turned off. is configured as

Also, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test-firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 . Note that the reset signal RST is not supplied to each port 122 , 123 , 124 of the input section 120 . The data set to each port of the output section 130 by the game microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input must be reset to prevent malfunction of the system. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the game microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200 . Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is made into the one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal to the game control apparatus 100 from the production control apparatus 300 side.

In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying the special symbol pattern information of the variable display game to a test firing test device of an accredited organization (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the big hit, and the like via the relay board 70. A buffer 133 for output is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass-produced product) installed in amusement arcades. A detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a starting switch, output from the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133 .

On the other hand, detection signals such as those from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the radio wave sensor 62, which cannot be directly supplied to the test-firing test device, are temporarily taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. An error signal indicating that it is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 through the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 to the test-firing apparatus.

The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. there is A chip enable signal CE output from the game microcomputer 111 is also supplied to a port on the relay board 70, and a signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and outputs opening/closing data of a solenoid (universal electrical solenoid) 37c for opening the normal variable winning device 37 and a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid) 39b for opening the special variable winning device 39. A second output port 134 is provided for output.

The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminals of the LEDs are connected in accordance with the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50 , and the collective display device 50 . A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on/off data for the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

The output unit 130 is also provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as big win information to the external information terminal 71 . The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in the game parlor, so that information on the game machine 10 can be sent to an external device. It is ready to be fed to the device. Also, a firing permission signal is output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132 .

The output unit 130 is also provided with a sixth output port 141 (probability setting value display output port) for outputting information on the setting value (probability setting value) to the probability setting value display device 143 . In the present embodiment, the probability setting value display device 143 is a 7-segment display (LED lamp), but the information of the setting value (probability setting value) is transmitted from the sixth output port 141 to the driver (LED driver). It may be output to the probability set value display device 143 via.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a first driver (driving circuit) 138a that receives open/close data signals of the general electric solenoid 37c and the big winning opening solenoid 39b output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal. , a second driver 138b that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 that is output from the third output port 135, and the current of the collective display device 50 that is output from the fourth output port 136. A third driver 138c for outputting an ON/OFF drive signal for the lead-in side digit line, and a fourth driver 138d for outputting an external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal 71. is provided.

DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so as to drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. Also, the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50 is supplied with DC 12V. The third driver 138c, which drives the digit lines, draws current from the digit lines according to display data, so the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A second driver 138b that outputs 12 V supplies a current to the anode terminal of the LED through a segment line, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws current from the cathode terminal through the segment line. A power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in , and the LEDs are lit. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal 71, is supplied with DC 12V to give the external information signal a level of 12V. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided on the output section 130 of the game control device 100, that is, not on the main board but on the relay board 70 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as the identification code and program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 250 . The photocoupler 139 is configured to allow two-way communication so that the game microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 250 by serial communication. It should be noted that since the transmission and reception of such data is performed using a serial communication terminal of the game microcomputer 111 as in a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 has a driver 150 that receives serial data (control data, lighting pattern data, character code, etc.) output from the second output port 134 and drives a status display device 152. is provided. In this embodiment, the status display device 152 is composed of a plurality (four) of 7-segment (8-segment including dots) indicators (LED lamps), and the driver 150 is an LED driver. is not limited to

The state display device 152 is provided on the game control device 100 (main board), but may be provided at another location. For example, the status display device 152 is a 4-digit, 7-segment display (8-segment display including the dots), and is capable of displaying the ratio of the character, the ball output rate, and the number of discharged balls. Note that the status display device 152 is not limited to directly displaying the role product ratio, the ball payout ratio, and the number of discharged balls, but may indirectly display the number of discharged balls, the payout ratio, and the role product ratio. good. That is, the state display device 152 only needs to be able to display information regarding the ratio of the role product, the ball output rate, and the number of discharged balls.

Here, the number of discharged balls is the number of game balls discharged from the game area 32 (also referred to as the number of out balls), and the number of game balls passed through the winning opening (winning number) and the number of games passing through the out opening 30b. It is the sum with the number of balls. The number of ejected balls is basically the same as the number of shot balls, which is the number of game balls shot from the ball shooting device to the game area 32 . The number of ejected balls can be obtained by counting the signal of the out-ball detection switch. In this embodiment, the winning openings include a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting opening 1), a normal variable winning opening 37 (second starting winning opening, starting opening 2), and A special variable winning device 39 (big winning opening) is included. The number of ejected balls is counted down, and (100-number of ejected balls) is displayed, and the number is counted only up to 100 (predetermined number). Note that the number of discharged balls may be displayed by counting up from "00" to "99".

The ball output rate is the ratio (percentage) of the total number of prize balls to the number of discharged balls (or the number of fired balls), and is calculated by (number of acquired balls÷number of discharged balls)×100(%). That is, the ball output rate is the number of winning balls (total number of prize balls) per 100 discharged balls.

Note that, in the present embodiment, the ball output rate is easily obtained from the number of balls obtained between 0 and 100 discharged balls every time the number of discharged balls reaches 100. That is, the number of discharged balls is counted only up to 100 (predetermined number). It should be noted that every time the number of discharged balls reaches 100 (predetermined number), the payout ball rate is updated to the latest payout rate until the number of discharged balls changes from 1 to 100. Thus, if the number of winning balls (total number of winning balls) is displayed as it is on the state display device 152, the ball output rate is displayed.

For example, the role ratio is the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) obtained by entering a prize slot for a predetermined period (for example, from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present). It is the ratio (%) (=so-called continuous role ratio) of the number of prize balls (number of winning balls by role) obtained by winning the big prize mouth. In addition, the role ratio may be the ratio of the number of prize balls (during the big win state and the small win state) obtained by winning the big prize hole out of the total number of prize balls (= big prize hole ratio). , or the ratio of the number of prize balls obtained by winning the big winning opening and the normal variable winning device 37 (second start winning opening) (= the so-called role ratio (total role ratio )).

[Production control device]
Next, the configuration of the production control device 300 (sub board) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram of the effect control system of the gaming machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The effect control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC) similar to the game microcomputer 111, and a command and data from the main control microcomputer 311 for displaying images on the display device 41. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling sound output for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speaker 19 .

The main control microcomputer 311 includes a program ROM 321 consisting of a PROM (programmable read-only memory) that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and retains memory contents even if power is not supplied during a power failure. An FeRAM 323 capable of performing the operation, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 338 that constitutes timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day of the week, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311 .

A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 . The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the content of the performance, instructs the VDP 312 on the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce sound, lights the decoration lamp, and controls the motor. , solenoid drive control, performance time management, etc.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area, and a scaler 312b that enlarges and reduces images. The VDP 312 also includes an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 are connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in parallel. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing. STS is entered. The VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to inform the processing status such as the completion of drawing to the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT or the like for the purpose is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313 , and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313 . Is displayed.

A sound ROM 327 in which voice data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314 . The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340 . An interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311 . The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12 . The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b through the amplifier circuit 337. FIG.

Also, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 for receiving commands transmitted from the game control device 100 . Via the command I / F331, the decoration special figure pending number command, the decoration special figure command, the variation command, the stop information command, etc., transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300, the production control command signal (production command) receive as Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. there is

In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18, etc.) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided, and a board effect provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling the device 44 (for example, a movable accessory or the like that enhances the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41). Note that the board decoration device 46 may include the aforementioned lamp display device 80 .

These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address/data bus 340 . A frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling a frame effect device such as a motor provided in the glass frame 15 may be provided.

Furthermore, the effect control device 300 includes a effect button switch 25a built into the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the effect button 25, and a motor inside the board effect device 44. A function of detecting the on/off state of the production accessory switch 47 (production motor switch) that detects the initial position etc. and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and a volume control switch provided in the production control device 300 A switch input circuit 336 is provided for detecting the state of 335 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 .

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 supplies a desired level of DC voltage to the production control device 300 having the configuration described above and the electronic components controlled by it, and drives a motor and a solenoid. DC 32 V, display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC 12 V for driving motors and LEDs, DC 5 V as power supply voltage for command I/F 331, and DC 15 V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers. is configured to

Furthermore, when using an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC- A DC converter is provided in the performance control device 300 . Note that the DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply section 410 .

The reset signal generated by the control signal generator 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to reset the device. In addition, in the form output from the main control microcomputer 311, the VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives the speaker, and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control lamps, motors, etc. signal) to put them in the reset state. A cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the game machine 10 is connected to the performance control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the performance control device 300 is powered on.

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described. In the CPU 111a of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal game start gate 34, the random number for determining the hit of the normal game is extracted and stored in the ROM 111b. is compared with the determination value stored in , and the hit/loss of the normal pattern variation display game is determined.

Then, after the identification symbols are variably displayed for a predetermined period of time on the normal pattern display device, the normal pattern variability display game that is stopped and displayed is displayed. If the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is a hit, a special result mode is displayed on the normal pattern display, the general electric solenoid 37c is operated, and the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 is held for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) Control to open is performed as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is a loss, control is performed to display the result mode of the loss on the normal pattern display.

In addition, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36, the starting winning prize (starting memory) is stored, and based on the starting memory, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game big hit determination The random number for use is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine the hit or miss of the special figure 1 variable display game.

In addition, based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variable winning device 37, the start memory is stored, and based on the start memory, the random value for judging the big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine the hit or miss of the special figure 2 variation display game.

And CPU111a of the game control apparatus 100 outputs the control signal (production|presentation control command) containing the determination result of a special figure 1 fluctuation display game and a special figure 2 fluctuation display game to the production|presentation control apparatus 300. FIG. Then, after the identification symbols are variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52, a special figure variation display game that is stopped and displayed is displayed. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37). form.

Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 displays the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the setting of the production state, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the processing of controlling the light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. In other words, the effect control device 300 serves as effect control means for controlling effects related to games (such as variable display games).

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is hit, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52, and generates a special game state. Let In the processing for generating the special game state, for example, the CPU 111a controls the opening/closing door 39c of the special variable prize winning device 39 by the big prize winning port solenoid 39b to enable the inflow of game balls into the big prize winning port. .

Then, either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the big winning opening, or a predetermined openable time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses after the opening of the big winning opening. 1 round (R) is to open the big winning opening until the condition is achieved, and this is continued (repeated) control (cycle game) for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 times, 11 times or 2 times). I do. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening/closing control means for controlling opening and closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. In addition, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is lost, the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52 are controlled to display the result mode of the loss.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the special game state is finished based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state (variable probability state) is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than the normal probability state. In addition, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result mode of any special figure variation display game of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game Both are high probability states.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a time-saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the special game state ends, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the time reduction state, control is performed to put the normal figure fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 in the time reduction operation state, and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 per unit time is higher than when the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 is in the normal operation state. is controlled so that the opening time of the is substantially increased, so it becomes a general electricity support state. In addition, even in the high-probability state (normal probability state) except for the latent probability state, the normal power supply support is performed in a time-saving state.

For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to shorten the time to change the execution time (ordinary figure fluctuation time) of the above-mentioned normal figure fluctuation display game to a second fluctuation display time shorter than the normal first fluctuation display time (for example , 10000 msec is 1000 msec). In addition, in the time saving state, the execution time of the special figure variation display game (special figure variation time) is also shortened than usual, and the time shortening variation of the special figure variation display game is also performed.

In addition, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the normal pattern stop time for displaying the results of the normal pattern fluctuation display game to be the second stop time (for example, 704 msec) shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 msec). is.

In addition, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation display game results in a win and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (general electric opening time) is the first opening time (for example, 100 msec) in the normal state. It is possible to control the second opening time (for example, 1352 msec) to be longer.

In addition, in the time saving state, the number of openings of the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 (the number of openings of the general electric power) is greater than the first number of openings (for example, 2 times) for one hit result of the normal figure fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the second number of openings to (eg, 4 times). In addition, in the time-saving state, it is possible to make the probability of a winning result in the normal pattern variation display game (normal pattern probability) higher than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operation state.

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the open state by changing one or more of the normal pattern fluctuation time, the normal pattern stop time, the normal pattern open number of times, the normal pattern open time, and the normal pattern probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. Thus, in the time-saving state, winning to the normal variable prize winning device 37 becomes easier than in the normal game state, and the number of executions of the special figure variable display game per unit time can be increased more than in the normal game state. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time-saving states with different things to be changed. Also, it may be set so that the movable member 37b is not opened in the normal operation state (normal pattern probability is 0). Alternatively, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected when a win is achieved. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Also, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently of each other, both can be generated at the same time, or only one of them can be generated.

[Control of game control device]
The control of the gaming machine that performs such games will be described below. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control processing by the game microcomputer 111 mainly consists of main processing shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B and timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 9 which is performed at predetermined time intervals (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main processing will be explained. 5A and 5B are flowcharts showing the procedure of main processing by the game control device 100. FIG. Main processing is started when the power is turned on. In addition, in the flowchart of the processing executed by the game control device 100, the code (number) of the step is expressed as "A****".

As shown in FIG. 5A, when starting the main process, the game control device 100 first executes a process of prohibiting an interrupt (A1001). Furthermore, a stack pointer setting process is executed to set a stack pointer, which is the top address of the area where the values of registers and the like are saved when an interrupt occurs (A1002).

Subsequently, the register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, if the RAM address ranges from 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

Next, the game control device 100 outputs a signal for prohibiting the firing and sets the firing permission signal to the prohibited state (A1005). When at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal for prohibiting the shooting, the shooting permission signal is set to the prohibited state, and the shooting of the game ball is prohibited. After that, the game control device 100 reads the state of the input port 3 (second input port 123) (A1006). Thereby, signals from the setting key switch 93, the set value change switch 102, the glass frame open detection switch 63, and the front frame open detection switch 64 (body frame open detection switch) can be read.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 sets a power delay timer (A1007). By setting a predetermined initial value to the power delay timer, subordinate control means (for example, payout control device 200 and effect control device 300) program for performing various controls according to instructions from the game control device 100 forming the main control means A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) is set for waiting until the is normally activated. As a result, when the power is turned on, if the game control device 100 starts up first and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, the slave control device can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) when the power is turned on, and waits for the start of the sub-control device (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It constitutes waiting means for setting a waiting time.

In addition, the power supply delay timer clocks time using a storage area that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation) (RAM area not subject to validity determination, registers, or the like). As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of the RAM area, there is no need to exclude a part of the RAM area from the calculation, so control at power-on can be prevented from becoming complicated.

A setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and a set value change switch signal from the set value change switch 102 are input to the second input port 123 (input port 3). By reading the state of the second input port 123 before the start of , the operation of the setting key switch 93 or the set value change switch 102 can be reliably detected. That is, if the states of the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 are read after the waiting time has passed, the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 are operated after the waiting time has passed, and the power is turned on. It is necessary to keep operating the setting key switch 93 and the set value change switch 102 until the standby time elapses. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by operating the setting key switch 93 immediately after turning on the power without performing such troublesome operations. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the operation of the setting value change switch 102 is not accepted.

When the power delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 performs a process of timing the waiting time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the waiting time (A1008 to A1012).

When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first sets the number of times (for example, two times) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and data bus ( A1008), and it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is ON (A1009).

Game control device 100, when the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1009 is "Y"), whether or not the power failure monitoring signal has been turned on for the number of checks set in the process of step A1008. Determine (A1010). If the power failure monitoring signal has not been turned on for the number of checks (the result of A1010 is "N"), the process returns to step A1009 to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on.

Further, the game control device 100, if the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (the result of A1010 is "Y"), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the gaming machine Wait until the power is turned off. In this way, by judging that a power failure has occurred when a power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise, etc., and to appropriately handle problems that occur when the power is turned on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during a predetermined waiting time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which constitutes the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with troubles at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the standby time is over, and the memory contents of the previous power shutdown are still retained, so backup processing, etc. will be performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, if the power failure monitoring signal is not ON (the result of A1009 is "N"), that is, if the power failure does not occur, -1 update the power-on delay timer (A1011), It is determined whether or not the timer value is 0 (A1012). If the timer value is not 0 (the result of A1012 is "N"), that is, if the standby time has not expired, the process returns to step A1008 for setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal.

In addition, when the value of the timer is 0 (result of A1012 is "Y"), that is, when the waiting time is over, the game control device 100 can read and write RAM, EEPROM, etc. memory) is permitted (A1013), and OFF data is output to all output ports (set to a state of no output) (A1014).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a serial port (a port pre-installed in the game microcomputer 111 and used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) (A1015 ). Further, the driver 150 that drives the status display device 152 is initialized (A1016).

Here, the game control device 100 writes a command including control data corresponding to the content of the initial setting to the transmission buffer of the second output port 134 (serial communication circuit) and transmits it to the driver 150 . For example, the game control device 100 sets the duty ratio in initial setting. The duty ratio corresponds to the brightness of each LED of status display device 152 . The control data corresponding to the duty ratio is used in the duty setting section of the driver 150 (LED driver). The duty ratio of driver 150 may be lower than normal to make each LED darker with less power consumption. Next, the game control device 100 sets the number of digits used for the state display device 152 in the initial setting. In this embodiment, the number of digits used is four. The control data corresponding to the number of digits used is used in the number-of-digits setting section of the driver 150 (LED driver).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1017). If it is normal (the result of A1017 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the value of power failure inspection area 2 in RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1018).

Furthermore, the game control device 100, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (result of A1018 is "Y"), the checksum for calculating the checksum of the predetermined area (for example, game control work area) in the RWM Calculation processing is executed (A1019), and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum matches the checksum at power-off (A1020). If the checksums match (the result of A1020 is "Y"), the RAM 111c is normal and the RAM clear top address 2 is set (A1021).

FIG. 5C is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 111c of the gaming microcomputer 111. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 5C, the RAM clear start address 2 is set so as to exclude the probability set value area from the RAM area to be cleared. According to the RAM clear start address 2, the RAM area to be cleared becomes the clear area #2 in FIG. 5C. The clear area #2 includes a random number area, a control information area, and a game control stack area. The random number area includes an initial value random number area for storing various initial value random numbers and a variation pattern random number area for storing variation pattern random numbers. The control information area is an area from the power failure inspection area 1 to the checksum area, and includes the power failure inspection area 1, the power failure inspection area 2, the checksum area, and the like. Note that the random number area may be excluded from the clear area #2. The clear area #2 includes a status display work area for storing information to be displayed on the status display device 152, such as the character ratio, and a status display stack area for processing the information to be displayed on the status display device 152. can't

In addition, in FIG. 5C, an unused area may be provided between the game control work area and the game control stack area, which consist of the probability set value area, the random number area, and the control information area. Also, an unused area may be provided between the status display work area and the status display stack area. Also, the state display stack area may be arranged at the end of the address of the RAM 111c, and the unused area at the end of FIG. 5C (the bottom of FIG. 5C) may be eliminated.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting is being changed (during the variable setting state, during the setting change state) (A1022). When the game control device 100 is in the process of changing the probability setting (the result of A1022 is "Y"), it executes the process of changing the probability setting in steps A1036-A1041. When the probability setting value changing flag (A1038) is set, it can be determined that the probability setting is being changed.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the front frame 12 (body frame) is in the open state when the probability setting is not being changed (the result of A1022 is "N") (A1023). When a signal is input from the front frame open detection switch 64 (body frame open detection switch), it can be determined that the front frame 12 (body frame) is in the open state. In step A1023, it may be determined whether or not the glass frame 15 is in the open state instead of the front frame 12, or whether or not both the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 are in the open state may be determined. good too. Incidentally, when the signal from the glass frame open detection switch 63 is input, it can be determined that the glass frame 15 is in the open state.

When the front frame 12 (body frame) is open (result of A1023 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the setting key switch 93 is ON (A1024). When the setting key switch 93 is ON (the result of A1024 is "Y"), the RAM is initialized in the variable setting state in steps A1036-A1041 because it is in the variable setting state in which the setting (set value) can be changed. processing (RAM clearing processing) and processing during setting change.

The game control device 100, when the front frame 12 (body frame) is not in the open state (in the case of the closed state) (the result of A1023 is "N"), or when the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A1024 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the set value change switch 102 is on (A1025). If the set value change switch 102 is not turned on (the result of A1025 is "N"), the normal power-on (power recovery) processing of steps A1031 to A1035 is executed.

On the other hand, when the set value change switch 102 is on (the result of A1025 is "Y"), the game control device 100 executes the RAM initialization (RAM clear) processing of steps A1042-A1045. Here, with the setting key switch 93 in the off state, the set value change switch 102 is operated (pushed) and turned on when the power is turned on. RAM clear switch). In fact, there is no situation in which the set value change switch 102 is turned on when the front frame 12 is closed (result of A1023 is "N"). The set value change switch 102 which can also function as an initialization switch constitutes an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 is stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. It serves as initialization means for initializing data.

In addition, the game control device 100, if it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (the result of A1017 is "N", or the result of A1018 is "N"), if the checksum does not match (the result of A1020 is "N"), the RAM 111c has an abnormality, and the process proceeds to the processing for dealing with the RAM abnormality from step A1026 onwards. First, the RAM clear top address 1 is set (A1026). As shown in FIG. 5C, since the RAM clear top address 1 is the top address of the game control work area, the probability setting value area is also included in the clear target RAM area. The RAM area to be cleared is set to the clear area #1 in FIG. 5C by the RAM clear start address 1. FIG. The clear area #1 includes a game control work area (consisting of a probability set value area, a random number area, and a control information area) and a game control stack area. The clear area #1 does not include a status display work area for storing information to be displayed on the status display device 152 and a status display stack area for processing information to be displayed on the status display device 152 .

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the front frame 12 (body frame) is in the open state (A1027). When a signal is input from the front frame open detection switch 64 (body frame open detection switch), it can be determined that the front frame 12 is in the open state.

When the front frame 12 is open (the result of A1027 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the setting key switch 93 is on (A1028). If the setting key switch 93 is ON (result of A1028 is "Y"), it is in a setting variable state in which the setting value can be changed, so the RAM initialization processing in the setting variable state of steps A1036 to A1041 ( RAM clear processing) and processing during setting change. Note that the RAM area to be cleared in the RAM initialization process in this case is the clear area #1 in FIG. 5C. Therefore, the RAM abnormality can be resolved.

The game control device 100, when the front frame 12 (body frame) is not in the open state (in the case of the closed state) (the result of A1027 is "N"), or when the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A1028 is "N"), and transmits a setting change instruction command for prompting the player to change the setting to the production control device 300 (production control board) (A1029). In addition, the effect control device 300 that has received the setting change instruction command displays on the display device 41 a setting change instruction display prompting the player to change the setting. By the setting change instruction display, the setting key switch 93 is turned on in order for the player to change the setting (the result of A1028 is "Y"), and the RAM abnormality is resolved by the RAM clear processing (A1036) at the time of setting change. can.

After that, the game control device 100 executes processing for prohibiting access to the RWM (A1030), and waits until the gaming machine is powered off.

Next, the processing at steps A1031 to A1035 when the power is turned on normally (when the power is restored) will be described.

The game control device 100 first saves the initial value at the time of power failure recovery in the area to be initialized (A1031). The area to be initialized is the clear area #2 (random number area, control information area, game control stack area) in FIG. 5C. Here, the control information area includes a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error monitoring. The busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept commands, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. It is in an indeterminate state. After that, the game control device 100 checks the area storing the game state in the RWM and determines whether the game state is a high probability state (A1032).

Here, when the game state is not a high probability state (the result of A1032 is "N"), the game control device 100 skips the processing of steps A1033 and A1034 and proceeds to the processing of step A1035. Also, if the gaming state is a high probability state (the result of A1032 is "Y"), the ON information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (A1033), for example, a high probability notification LED provided in the collective display device 50 The ON (lighting) data of (third game state display unit 59, error indicator) is saved in the segment area (A1034). Then, the command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special game processing described later is transmitted to the production control device 300 (production control board) (A1035), and step A1046 Go to processing.

Next, the RAM initialization processing (RAM clear processing) in the variable setting state in steps A1036 to A1041 and the processing during setting change will be described.

The game control device 100 first clears the RAM area to be cleared to 0 (A1036). If the RAM 111c is normal (the result of A1020 is "Y"), the RAM area to be cleared is the clear area #2 in FIG. 5C because the RAM clear start address 2 is set. If the RAM 111c is abnormal (the result of A1020 is "N"), the clear area #1 in FIG. 5C is set because the RAM clear head address 1 is set. That is, the probability setting value area is not cleared when the RAM is normal, but the probability setting value area is also cleared when the RAM is abnormal.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1037). At this time, it is assumed that the front frame 12 is in an open state, and the initial value of a security signal control timer (described later) for outputting a security signal is saved, and the front frame 12 (body frame) is opened. It is possible to output information such as what has been done to an external device (hall computer, etc.). When the probability setting value area is cleared when the RAM is abnormal, a default value (for example, setting value 1) may be saved in the probability setting value area as an initial value.

Then, the game control device 100 sets a probability set value changing flag indicating that the setting is in a variable setting state in which the setting can be changed (that is, that the setting is being changed) (A1038). Subsequently, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area as initial data when changing the probability setting value (A1039), the value of the probability setting value area is loaded, and the probability setting value is changed. It is saved in the work probability set value area as initial data at the time of change (A1040). Subsequently, a command during probability setting change indicating that the setting variable state (probability setting is being changed) is transmitted to the production control device 300 (production control board) (A1041), and the process proceeds to step A1046. By the command during probability setting change, production control device 300 can recognize that it is in a setting variable state (probability setting is being changed).

Next, the RAM initialization (RAM clear) processing by the RAM initialization switch (RAM clear switch, set value change switch 102) in steps A1042 to A1045 will be described.

The game control device 100 first sets the RAM clear head address 2 (A1042), and clears the RAM area to be cleared to 0 (A1043). Since the clear head address 2 is set, the RAM area RAM to be cleared is the clear area #2 in FIG. 5C. Therefore, in the processing of RAM initialization (RAM clear) by operating the RAM initialization switch (set value change switch 102), the probability set value area is not cleared.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1044). Here, the area to be initialized is, for example, a customer waiting demonstration area and an area related to the setting of the production mode. And, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to production control device 300 (production control board) (A1045), it moves to the processing of step A1046.

It should be noted that the power failure recovery command transmitted in the process of step A1035 and the RAM initialization command transmitted in the process of step A1045 include a model designation command indicating the type of game machine, special figures 1 and 2 pending Decoration special figure 1 reservation number command and decoration special figure 2 reservation number command indicating the number, probability information command indicating the state of probability are included. Also, depending on the state when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, if the special figure fluctuation display game was running when the power was turned off, the recovery screen command, and if the customer was waiting when the power was turned off, the customer waiting demo command , includes a power-on command indicating that the power has been turned on. Furthermore, depending on the model, a performance mode information command indicating the state of the performance mode, a performance number information command, and a high probability number information command indicating the number of remaining games in the high probability state are included. The command for RAM initialization includes a RAM initialization command (RAM clear command). The effect control device 300 that has received the RAM initialization command (RAM clear command) displays, for example, a customer waiting demonstration on the display device 41, and initializes the RAM (RAM clear) is announced for 30 seconds.

Further, the command for power failure recovery and the command for RAM initialization include a setting value information command (probability setting value information command) indicating setting value information that is information on the setting value (probability setting value) of the gaming machine 10. be The game control device 100 only needs to transmit the setting value information command to the production control device 300 only once when the power is restored (turned on), and thereafter, the production control device 300 refers to the setting value information stored by itself. You can control the production.

After the processing of steps A1035, A1041, and A1045, the game control device 100 activates a CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator). Start up (A1046). Incidentally, the CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111 . The clock generator includes a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111a based on the frequency-divided signal. and a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for triggering random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After executing the CTC activation process of step A1046, the game control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1047). Specifically, the CPU 111a sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, the bit permutation pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generating circuit is set.

The bit permutation pattern is a method of permuting the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). is a pattern that defines

In this embodiment, by replacing the bits of the random number according to the bit permutation pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the secrecy of the random number can be enhanced. The bit transposition pattern may be a single fixed pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of prepared patterns. In addition, the user may be able to set them arbitrarily.

After that, the game control device 100 extracts the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on, and corresponding various initial value random numbers (random numbers for determining jackpot patterns (jackpot patterns) Random number 1, jackpot pattern random number 2), random number to determine the small winning pattern (small winning pattern random number), random number to determine the hit of the normal pattern (hit random number), random number to determine the winning pattern of the general pattern (hit pattern random number) etc.) as an initial value (start value) in a predetermined area of RWM (A1048), and interrupts are permitted (A1049). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time power is turned on. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, making it difficult for the player to acquire illegal random numbers.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes an initial value random number update process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and destroying the regularity of the random numbers (A1050). Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the jackpot random numbers, jackpot pattern random numbers, and hit random numbers are configured to be generated using random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock with a speed equal to or faster than the CPU operating clock, and the jackpot pattern random number and winning random number have the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing, which is the processing unit of the program. It is a "low-speed counter" updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing).

In addition, in the jackpot pattern random number and the winning pattern random number, a so-called "initial value change method" is adopted in which the start value is changed using each initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number makes a round. Note that each random number may be updated by a counter with +1 or 1, or may be updated by a random method in which all values within a range appear separately without duplication until one round is completed. That is, the jackpot random numbers are random numbers updated only by hardware, and the jackpot pattern random numbers and winning random numbers are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process of step A1050, the game control device 100 sets the number of times of reading and checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and data bus (A1051), and monitors power failure. It is determined whether or not the signal is on (A1052). If the power failure monitoring signal is not ON (the result of A1052 is "N"), the process returns to the initial value random number updating process of step A1050. That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number updating process and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop process) are repeated. By enabling the interrupt (A1049) before the initial value random number update process (A1050), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process will be executed with priority, and the timer interrupt will be initialized. It is possible to avoid pressure on the interrupt process due to waiting due to the value random number update process. It should be noted that while the setting is being changed (during the variable setting state), the processing of steps A1046, A1047, A1048, and A1050 related to updating the initial value random number may not be executed.

Note that the initial value random number update process in step A1050 may be performed in the main process or in the timer interrupt process. In order to avoid the execution of the update process, when the initial value random number update process is performed in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt before updating and releasing the interrupt. On the other hand, if the initial value random number update process is not performed in the timer interrupt process as in the present embodiment, but only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. It has the advantage of simplifying the main processing.

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1052 is "Y"), the game control device 100 checks whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of times set in the process of step A1051. Judge (A1053). If the power failure monitoring signal has not been on for the number of checks (the result of A1053 is "N"), the process returns to step A1052 to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on.

In addition, the game control device 100, if the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (the result of A1053 is "Y"), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, once interrupt is prohibited (A1054), and OFF data is output to all output ports (A1055).

Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves power failure inspection area check data 1 in power failure inspection area 1 (A1056), and saves power failure inspection area check data 2 in power failure inspection area 2 (A1057). Further, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum when the RWM is powered off is executed (A1058), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1059). Finally, a process of prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1060), and the game machine waits until the power is cut off.

In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is shut off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutoff has been correctly backed up. A decision can be made at the time of re-insertion.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that controls the game overall, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to the instructions from the main control means ), the main control means delays the activation of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control device when the power is turned on (game control device 100) and power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during the predetermined waiting time.

Also, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) , it is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period of time.

In addition, the main control means (game control device 100) is based on the operation of the RAM 111c capable of storing data, the initialization operation section (initialization switch) that can be operated from the outside, and the initialization operation section. An initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111c is provided, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.

Also, the main control means (game control device 100) permits access to the RAM 111c after the waiting time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 6 is a flow chart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing. Timer interrupt processing is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the game microcomputer 111, timer interrupt processing is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the game control device 100 first designates register bank 1 as the register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM top address in a predetermined register (A1302). By switching from the register bank 0 used in the main process to the register bank 1 at the start of the timer interrupt process, it becomes equivalent to saving the registers used in the main process. Note that when the timer interrupt process is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

Next, the game control device 100 executes an input process of taking in inputs and signals from various sensors and switches, that is, reading the state of each input port (A1303). Furthermore, based on the output data set in various processes, output processing for driving control of actuators such as solenoids (large winning opening solenoid 39b) is executed (A1304). Note that when a firing prohibition signal is output in the processing of step A1005 in the main processing, a firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to a permission state. .

Next, the game control device 100 executes random number update processing 1 (A1305) and random number update processing 2 (A1306). The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small winning symbol random number, the winning random number, and the winning symbol random number which are targets of the initial value random number updating process. The random number update process 2 is a process of updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display games of special figure 1 and special figure 2. FIG. Note that the random number update process 1 and the random number update process 2 need not be executed when the probability setting is being changed (setting variable state). After that, monitoring whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 39a, and monitoring errors (front frame and (A1307).

Next, the game control device 100 executes probability setting value change processing for changing the probability setting value (A1308). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the probability setting is being changed (setting variable state) (A1309). Whether or not the probability setting is being changed can be determined by the probability setting value changing flag (A1038). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability setting is being confirmed (setting confirmation state) (A1310). When a probability setting value confirmation mode flag, which will be described later, is set, it can be determined that the probability setting is being confirmed.

When the game control device 100 is neither changing the probability setting nor confirming the probability setting (the result of A1310 is "N"), the payout command transmission process of outputting the command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200 is performed. Execute (A1311). Furthermore, a special figure game process for performing a process relating to a special figure variation display game is executed (A1312), and then a general figure game process for performing processing relating to a normal figure variation display game is performed (A1313). If the game control device 100 is in the process of changing the probability setting (the result of A1309 is "Y") or is in the process of confirming the probability setting (the result of A1310 is "Y"), there is no need to transmit the payout command. Processing (A1311), special figure game processing (A1312), normal figure game processing (A1313) are not executed, and the process proceeds to step A1314.

Next, the game control device 100 is provided in the game machine 10, and executes a segment LED editing process for driving the segment LEDs for displaying various information about special figure variation games and games so as to display desired contents. (A1314).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 executes magnet fraud monitoring processing for checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and determining whether or not there is an abnormality (A1315). For example, in the magnet fraud monitoring process, if there is an abnormality, the magnet fraud occurrence flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area. Furthermore, the radio wave fraud monitoring process (board radio wave fraud monitoring process) is executed to check the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board to determine whether or not there is an abnormality (A1316). For example, in the radio wave fraud monitoring process, if there is an abnormality, the radio wave fraud occurrence flag is saved in the radio wave fraud flag area.

After that, the game control device 100 executes external information editing processing for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer (A1317). Then, a state display edit output process for editing and outputting the output data to the state display device 152 is executed (A1318). In the state display editing output process, as output data to the state display device 152, the ratio of the character, the ball output rate, the number of discharged balls, and the like may be calculated. In the status display edit output processing, when the power is turned on (power is restored), the checksum of the status display work area is calculated. You may clear the stack area. After that, the timer interrupt processing ends. When the timer interrupt processing returns, the restoration of the interrupt disabled state and the restoration of the register bank designation are automatically performed. Alternatively, a process of returning the designation of the register bank to the register bank 0 may be performed.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output processing (A1304) in the timer interrupt processing described above will be described. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the procedure of output processing.

The game control device 100 first outputs (resets) OFF data to the port 135 (see FIG. 3) that outputs segment data of the collective display device (LED) 50 (A1601). Next, the data output to the solenoid output port 134 that outputs the data of the big winning opening solenoid 39b is synthesized and output (A1602).

Then, the game control device 100 updates the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 (A1603). Further, the output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is obtained (A1604). Then, the acquired data and external information data are combined (A1605), and the combined data is output to the fourth output port 136 for digit output/external information output (A1606). After that, the segment line output data is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (A1607), and the loaded data is output to the third output port 135 for segment output (A1608).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 loads and synthesizes the data to be output to the external information terminal 71 (A1609), further synthesizes the synthesized data and the output data of launch permission (A1610), and finally synthesizes. The data is output to the fifth output port 137 for external information/fire enable signal output (A1611).

Next, the game control device 100 sets off output data for the probability set value display (A1612). The OFF output data is output data (blank data for turning off the light) during a period in which probability set value display is not performed. Then, it is determined whether or not the probability set value display permission flag for permitting the display of the probability set value is set (A1613). The probability setting value display permission flag is set in the probability setting value changing process described later.

When the probability setting value display permission flag is set (the result of A1613 is "Y"), the game control device 100 loads the probability setting value display data from the probability setting value display data area (A1614) and loads the data. The probability setting value display data is output to the probability setting value display output port (sixth output port 141) (A1615). When the probability setting value display permission flag is not set (the result of A1613 is "N"), the probability setting value display data is not loaded, and the off output data is sent to the probability setting value display output port (sixth output port 141). (A1615). Therefore, when the probability setting value display permission flag is set, the probability setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143, and when the probability setting value display permission flag is not set, the probability setting value display device 143 turns off (blank display).

Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 for outputting the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (A1616). After that, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 for outputting the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (A1617).

Next, the game control device 100 loads and synthesizes the data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device, (A1618). Furthermore, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test firing test device is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( A1619). Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 for outputting the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (A1620), the output process is terminated.

After that, the game control device 100 loads the test signal output data of the probability set value (A1621). Here, the display data of the probability setting value display device 143 (7-segment type display), ie, the probability setting value display data of the probability setting value display data area, is output as the test signal output data related to the probability setting values. The test signal output data may be numerical data (1 to 6) representing set values, or output data in other forms. Then, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is on (A1622). When the setting key switch 93 is ON (result of A1622 is "Y"), the loaded data and the setting key switch ON information are synthesized (A1623), and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 6 (A1624). ). On the other hand, when the setting key switch 93 is off (result of A1622 is "N"), the test signal output data of the probability setting value is directly output to the test signal output port 6 (A1624).

[Winning gate switch/state monitoring process]
FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the winning hole switch/state monitoring process. Winning hole switch/state monitoring processing is executed at step A1307 in the timer interrupt processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the probability setting is being changed (setting variable state) (A2001). When the game control device 100 is not changing the probability setting (result of A2001 is "N"), it determines whether or not the probability setting is being checked (setting confirmation state) (A2002). If the probability setting is not being confirmed (the result of A2001 is "N"), the monitoring processing and the like from steps A2003 to A2010 are executed as usual. On the other hand, when the probability setting is being changed (the result of A2001 is "Y") or when the probability setting is being confirmed (the result of A2002 is "Y"), the glass frame 15 may be released. There is a possibility that a game ball can be put into any of the winning holes by hand, and there is no point in performing monitoring processing, etc., so the monitoring processing, etc. from steps A2003 to A2010 are not executed, and the processing shifts to step A2011. do.

When the probability setting is not being changed (the result of A2001 is "N"), the game control device 100 wins a prize corresponding to one of the big winning mouth switches 39a (two pieces) in the big winning mouth (special variable winning device 39). A mouth monitoring table 1 is prepared (A2003). Then, fraud and winning monitoring processing is executed to monitor whether there is an illegal winning in the big winning opening even though the big winning opening is not open and to detect a normal winning (A2004).

After that, the game control device 100 prepares the winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other of the big winning opening switches 39a (two pieces) in the big winning opening (special variable winning device 39) (A2005). Then, fraud & winning monitoring processing is executed to monitor fraudulent winning and detect normal winning (A2006).

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table corresponding to the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning apparatus 37 (A2007). Then, fraud & winning monitoring processing is executed to monitor fraudulent winning and detect normal winning (A2008). Subsequently, a winning opening monitoring table for winning opening switches that do not require fraud monitoring is prepared (A2009). Winning opening switches that do not require fraud monitoring are the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the winning opening switch (SW) 35a of the general winning opening 35.

Next, the game control device 100 executes winning number counter update processing for updating the winning number (A2010). Then, the state scan counter for sequentially designating which of the plurality of switches and signals whose state is to be monitored and which switch or signal is to be monitored this time is updated (A2011). The state scan counter is updated with a range of 0-3.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored according to the value of the state scan counter (A2012). Then, a gaming machine state check process is executed to determine whether an error has occurred or not (A2013). Details of the gaming machine state check process will be described later.

By referring to the game machine state monitoring table 1 for the value of the state scan counter, when the value of the state scan counter is 0, the state based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector (switch abnormality) 1 error) monitoring is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 1, monitoring of the state (shot ball running out error) based on the shot ball running out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. If the value of the state scan counter is 2, monitoring of the state based on the overflow switch signal (overflow error) is set, and if the value of the state scan counter is 3, the state based on the payout error status signal (payout error). monitoring is set.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored according to the value of the state scan counter (A2014). Then, a gaming machine state check process is executed to determine whether an error has occurred or not (A2015).

By referring to the game machine state monitoring table 2 for the value of the state scan counter, when the value of the state scan counter is 0, the state (glass frame open error) is monitored based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch. is set, and if the value of the state scan counter is 1, monitoring of the state (body frame open error, front frame open error) based on the signal output from the front frame open detection switch is set. When the value of the state scan counter is 2, monitoring of the state based on the frame radio wave fraud signal (frame radio wave fraud) is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, monitoring of the state based on the touch switch signal is set. is set.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the state scan counter is 0 (A2016). Then, when the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (the result of A2016 is "N"), the winning opening switch/state monitoring process is terminated. In this case, there is no state to be monitored in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 to be referred to next.

Further, when the value of the error scan counter is 0 (the result of A2016 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prepares the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 (A2017), and determines whether an error has occurred. A gaming machine state check process for determining the state of is executed (A2018).

By referring to the game machine state monitoring table 3 for the value of the state scan counter, if the value of the state scan counter is 0, the state based on the abnormality detection signal 2 output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector (switch abnormality) 2 error) monitoring is set. Incidentally, in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3, when the state scan counter is 1 to 3, it is not defined.

Thereafter, the game control device 100 executes payout busy signal check processing for setting a busy signal status (payout busy signal flag) based on a payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start payout control (A2019 ), ending the winning slot switch/status monitoring process.

Note that the processing from steps A2017 to A2019 is executed only when the value of the state scan counter, which is updated for each timer interrupt, is 0, so it is executed once every four timer interrupts. . That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, the processing from A2017 to A2019 is performed every 16 ms.

In the cheating & winning monitoring process (A2008), the number of winnings related to the big winning opening (special variable winning device 39) and the normal variable winning device 37 and the number of winning balls for each accessory (total number of winning balls) are counted and stored. Furthermore, information on the number of prizes won and the number of winning balls for each accessory may be set as a production command. In the winning number counter update process (A2010), the number of winnings and the number of winning balls for each role (total number of winning balls) regarding the starting winning hole 36 and the general winning hole 35 are counted and stored, Information on the number of acquired balls may be set as an effect command. In addition, in the winning hole switch/state monitoring process (FIG. 8), the out ball detection switch counts and stores the number of out balls (the number of ejected balls), and furthermore, the information of the number of out balls is produced by a production command (number of out balls command). can be set as The ball output rate is the ratio (percentage) of the total number of prize balls (the number of winning balls for each role) to the number of discharged balls. The role ratio is, for example, the ratio (%) of the number of prize balls (number of balls won by each role) out of the total number of prize balls (= the so-called continuous role ratio). be. In the state display edit output process (A1318), as the output data to the state display device 152, the character ratio, the ball output rate, the number of discharged balls, etc. may be calculated.

[Game machine status check processing]
FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the gaming machine state check process. The gaming machine status check process is executed at steps A2013, A2015 and A2018 in the winning opening switch/status monitoring process shown in FIG.

The game control device 100 first acquires the state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter (A2201). The state scan counter is set to a value ranging from 0 to 3 corresponding to the game state. Incidentally, the relationship between the state monitoring table and the state scan counter is as described in the winning opening switch/state monitoring process shown in FIG.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the signal to be checked is ON (A2202). If the signal to be checked is not ON (the result of A2202 is "N"), that is, if the signal to be checked is OFF, a state OFF flag is prepared as a state flag (A2203), and the target state OFF command is acquired. and prepare (A2204). Furthermore, the target state OFF monitoring timer comparison value is obtained (A2205). The state-off flag indicates a normal state with respect to error-related signals, and indicates a no-touch state with respect to touch switch signals.

On the other hand, when the signal to be checked is ON (the result of A2202 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prepares a state ON flag as a state flag (A2206), acquires the target state ON command, prepares (A2207). Furthermore, the target state ON monitoring timer comparison value is obtained (A2208). The state-on flag indicates an abnormal or illegal state for error-related signals, and indicates a touched state for touch switch signals.

When the processing of step A2205 or step A2208 ends, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target signal control region matches the acquired signal state (A2209). If they match (the result of A2209 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A2212. If they do not match (the result of A2209 is "N"), the acquired signal state is saved in the target signal control area (A2210), and the target state monitoring timer is cleared (A2211).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 updates the target state monitoring timer by +1 (A2212). Further, it is determined whether or not the value of the updated status monitoring timer is greater than or equal to the corresponding timer comparison value (A2213). If the value of the updated status monitoring timer is less than the corresponding timer comparison value (the result of A2213 is "N"), the gaming machine status check process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the value of the updated state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (the result of A2213 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the state monitoring timer by -1, and the timer comparison value - The value remains at 1 (A2214). Further, it is determined whether or not the prepared status flag matches the value of the target status flag area (A2215). If they match (the result of A2215 is "Y"), the gaming machine state check process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (the result of A2215 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the prepared state flag in the target state flag area. (A2216). Finally, an effect command setting process for setting an effect command is executed (A2217), and the gaming machine state check process is terminated. The effect command here is either a state off command or a state on command. If the state ON command is an error type command, the effect control device 300 is made to start error notification. In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. - 特許庁

[Probability setting value change processing]
Next, details of the probability setting value change processing (A1308) in the timer interrupt processing described above will be described. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the procedure of probability setting value change processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the probability set value is being changed (during the variable setting state) (A2401). If the probability setting value is not being changed (the result of A2401 is "N"), a probability setting value confirmation process is executed to confirm the probability setting value (A2402).

Game control device 100, when the probability setting value is being changed (the result of A2401 is "Y"), if the probability setting value light-off timer is not 0, -1 is updated (A2403), and the probability setting value light-off timer is 0 (A2404). When the probability setting value turn-off timer is 0 (the result of A2404 is "Y"), the probability setting value display permission flag is set (A2405), and the process proceeds to step A2406. If the probability setting value turn-off timer is not 0 (the result of A2404 is "N"), nothing is done and the process proceeds to step A2406.

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability set value has been changed in step A2406 (A2406). If a probability setting value changed flag, which will be described later, is set, the probability setting value has been changed. If the probability setting value has already been changed (the result of A2406 is "Y"), the setting change end processing of steps A2416 to A2421 is executed.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input from the set value change switch 102 when the probability set value has not been changed (the result of A2406 is "N") (A2407). If there is no input from the set value change switch 102 (result of A2407 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2411.

When there is an input from the set value change switch 102 (the result of A2407 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the value of the working probability set value area by +1 within the range of 0 to 5 (A2408). In this manner, the value in the working probability setting value area is increased by one each time the setting value change switch 102 is operated. After the value in the work probability setting value area has become 5, the value in the work probability setting value area may return to 0 when the set value change switch 102 is operated. Values 0 to 5 in the work probability setting value area correspond to probability setting values 1 to 6 in six stages. Note that the probability setting values are not limited to six stages.

Then, the game control device 100 saves the probability setting value display data corresponding to the working probability setting value in the probability setting value display data area (A2409). Next, an initial value (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the probability set value turn-off timer area (A2410). This initial value corresponds to an extinguishing period (blank period) during which the probability setting value display device 143 is extinguished (blank display).

In this way, when the probability set value turn-off timer is 0, by setting the probability set value display permission flag, the probability set value display data is probabilistically set as the probability set value (probability set value for work) being changed. It is displayed on the set value display device 143, and when the probability set value turn-off timer is not 0, the probability set value display device 143 is turned off. Since the set value change switch 102 (set value change button) is operated by the set value change switch 102 (set value change button) by the probability set value turn off timer, the light is turned off for a predetermined turn off period, so even if there is only one setting (when the set value is only 1) , the operation of the set value change switch 102 can be visually recognized on the probability set value display device 143 .

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input of a touch switch signal from the touch switch provided on the operating handle 24 (A2411). If there is no input of the touch switch signal (the result of A2411 is "N"), the probability set value change process is terminated. If there is a touch switch signal input (result of A2411 is "Y"), the value in the working probability setting value area is loaded and saved in the probability setting value area (A2412). The touch switch signal serves as a confirmation signal for confirming the set value. Values 0 to 5 corresponding to the determined probability setting values are stored in the probability setting value area.

A configuration is also possible in which the probability setting value is determined and stored in the probability setting value area when the setting key switch 93 is turned off or when a predetermined time elapses after the variable setting state. Also, an operable confirmation button switch (operating means, operation unit) may be newly provided in the game control device 100, and a signal from this confirmation button switch may be used as a confirmation signal for confirming the setting value. . That is, instead of operating the touch switch, operation of a newly provided confirmation button switch may be used as the confirmation operation.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the probability set value display data corresponding to the probability set value in the probability set value display data area (A2413). As a result, the determined probability setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 . Then, a probability setting value changed flag indicating that the probability setting value has been changed is set (A2414), and a probability setting value change command indicating that the probability setting value has been changed is issued to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A2415), and ends the probability set value change process.

In the setting change end processing from step A2416 to A2421, the game control device 100 first determines whether or not the setting key switch 93 is off (A2416). If the setting key switch 93 is in the ON state (the result of A2416 is "N"), the probability set value changing process is terminated. When the setting key switch 93 is in the OFF state (result of A2416 is "Y"), the RAM clear start address 3 is set (A2417), and the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (A2418). The RAM area to be cleared here is the clear area #3 in FIG. 5C. Clear area #3 consists of control information area (area from blackout inspection area 1 to checksum area) and stack area for game control, probability set value area and random number area are excluded. Note that the clear area #3 is obtained by removing the random number area from the clear area #2, and the random numbers updated during the setting change are not wasted. By clearing the RAM area to be cleared to 0, the information and flags used for setting change, such as the information in the working probability setting value area, the probability setting value changing flag, and the probability setting value changed flag, are cleared. be.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A2419). Since this is the end of the setting change, the initial value of the security signal control timer (described later) for outputting the security signal is saved, and the external device (hall computer, etc.). After that, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (A2420). As a result, the probability setting value at the end of the setting change is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 and maintained.

Next, the game control device 100 transmits a probability setting change end command indicating that the probability setting change is completed to the production control device 300 (production control board) (A2421), returns to the main process (FIG. 5B), The process proceeds to step A1049. Commands to be sent here are the above-mentioned model designation command, decoration special figure 1 reservation number command, decoration special figure 2 reservation number command, probability information command, setting value information command (probability setting value information command), probability setting change end It is a command (a command for RAM initialization may be used). Depending on the model, an effect mode information command, an effect number information command, and a high probability number information command are transmitted. The effect control device 300 that has received the command to end the probability setting change, for example, displays a customer waiting demonstration on the display device 41, and notifies the RAM initialization (RAM clear) by the LED of the board decoration device 46 and the sound of the speaker. Do for 30 seconds.

[Probability setting value confirmation process]
Next, details of the probability set value confirmation processing (A2402) in the probability set value change processing described above will be described. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing the procedure of probability set value confirmation processing.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is in a probability set value confirmation mode (in a set value confirmable state), which is a mode in which the probability set value can be confirmed (A2501). When a probability setting value confirmation mode flag, which will be described later, is set, it can be determined that the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress. If the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress (the result of A2501 is "Y"), the processing from step A2509 onwards is executed.

When the game control device 100 is not in the probability set value confirmation mode (the result of A2501 is "N"), it clears the probability set value display permission flag (A2502). Then, it is determined whether or not the game is in progress (A2503). For example, if a variable display game is being executed or a jackpot state is in progress, it can be determined that a game is being played. If the game is being played (the result of A2503 is "Y"), the probability setting value confirmation processing is terminated to disable confirmation of the probability setting value. If the game is not being played (the result of A2503 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is on (A2504). If the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A2504 is "N"), the probability set value confirmation process is terminated.

When the setting key switch 93 is ON (the result of A2504 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets the probability setting value confirmation mode flag (A2505). As a result, when the probability setting value is not being changed (setting variable state) (the result of A2401 is "N"), if the setting key switch 93 is turned on, the probability setting value confirmation mode ( set value can be checked). Subsequently, the probability setting value display permission flag is set (A2506). As a result, the probability setting values are displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 based on the probability setting value display data loaded from the probability setting value display data area by the output processing (FIG. 7).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value in the security signal control timer area in order to enable the output of the security signal (A2507). When the set value is confirmed, a security signal is output, and the fact that the front frame 12 is opened can be output to an external device (such as a hall computer). A command during probability setting value confirmation is transmitted to the production control device 300 (production control board) (A2508), and the probability setting value confirmation processing is terminated.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the setting key switch 93 is ON (A2509) when it is in the probability setting value confirmation mode (the result of A2501 is "Y"). When the setting key switch 93 is ON (result of A2509 is "Y"), the probability setting value confirmation mode continues, and the probability setting value confirmation probability setting value confirmation processing ends.

When the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A2509 is "N"), the game control device 100 clears the probability set value confirmation mode flag (A2510). Therefore, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, the probability set value confirmation mode is terminated. Then, in order to prevent the probability setting value from being displayed on the probability setting value display device 143, the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (A2511). Then, the command of the probability set value confirmation end indicating that the probability set value confirmation has ended is transmitted to the production control device 300 (production control board) (A2512).

In the above, the set value change switch 102 is configured to be usable as a RAM initialization switch (RAM clear switch), but a RAM initialization switch may be provided separately from the set value change switch 102 . In this case, when the power is turned on (power is restored), if the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch are turned on, the setting variable state (setting change state) occurs. If the setting key switch 93 is OFF and the RAM initialization switch is ON, the RAM can be initialized (RAM clear). It may be configured such that when the initialization switch is off, a normal power-on (power recovery) state is established. Further, the set value (setting) may be determined when the setting key switch 93 is turned off from on.

[Special game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game process (A1312) in the above timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure game processing. In the special figure game processing, monitoring of the input of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a, control of the entire processing relating to the special figure variation display game, and setting of the display of the special figure are performed.

The game control device 100 first executes a starting opening switch monitoring process for monitoring the winning of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (A2601). In the starting opening switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins in a starting winning opening 36 or a normal variable winning device 37 forming a second starting winning opening, various random numbers (such as a jackpot random number) are extracted, and special figure fluctuation display is performed based on the winning. A game result pre-determination is performed to determine a game result based on a prize winning at a stage before the start of the game. Details of the starting port switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a big winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602). In the big winning opening switch monitoring process, detection of game balls by the count switch 39a provided in the special variable winning device 39 is monitored. The details of the big winning opening switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the special figure game processing timer by -1 if it is not 0 (subtracts only 1) (A2603). The special figure game processing timer is clocked by the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing by -1 update. In addition, the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure game processing timer is 0 (A2604). When the special figure game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A2604 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2619.

The game control device 100, when the special game processing timer is 0 (the result of A2604 is "Y"), that is, when the time has expired or has already timed up, it corresponds to the special game processing number. A special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to processing is set in the register (A2605). Furthermore, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the special figure game sequence branch table (A2606). Subsequently, a subroutine call is made according to the special game processing number, and game branch processing is executed according to the special game processing number (A2607).

When the game processing number is "0" in step A2607, the game control device 100 monitors the start of variation of the special figure variation display game, sets the variation start of the special figure variation display game, sets the effect, To perform the special figure normal processing to set the information necessary for performing the special figure fluctuation processing (A2608). In addition, the detail of a special figure usual process is later mentioned in FIG.

If the game processing number is "1" at step A2607, the game control device 100 sets the stop display time of the special figure, sets the information necessary for performing the special figure display processing, etc. During figure fluctuation processing is executed (A2609). In addition, the details of the processing during special figure fluctuation will be described later with reference to FIG. 28 .

When the game processing number is "2" in step A2607, if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the game control device 100 sets a fanfare command according to the type of big win, and sets each big win. Fanfare time corresponding to the large winning opening opening pattern, fanfare/interval processing, etc. are executed during special figure display processing for setting information necessary for processing (A2610). For example, in the special figure display process, if the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, set necessary information such as a big win fanfare command (production command), a big win fanfare time, a probability information command (low probability), Set the processing number "3" for fanfare/interval processing and save it in the special game processing number area. If the result of the special figure variation display game is a small win, set necessary information such as a small win fanfare command (production command) and a small win fanfare time, and set the processing number "7" relating to the small win fanfare mid-process. and save it in the special game processing number area. If the result of the special figure variation display game is not a big hit or a small hit, the processing number "0" relating to the special figure normal processing is set and saved in the special figure game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "3" at step A2607, the game control device 100 sets the opening time of the big winning gate, updates the number of openings, and sets the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning gate. A fanfare/during-interval process for setting etc. is executed (A2611). For example, in the fanfare/interval process, necessary information such as the round command (production command) corresponding to the round of the round game to be executed and the opening time of the big winning opening is set, and the processing number related to the big winning opening opening process is set. Set "4" and save it in the special game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "4" at step A2607, the game control device 100 sets an interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting an ending command if it is the final round; A process during the opening of the big winning opening for setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball processing for the big winning opening is executed (A2612). For example, in the process during the opening of the big winning opening, necessary information such as an interval command and an ending command are set as effect commands, a processing number "5" relating to the remaining ball processing of the big winning opening is set, and a special game processing number area is set. save to .

If the game processing number is "5" at step A2607, the game control device 100 sets the time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening if the big winning round is the final round, A big winning hole remaining ball process for setting information necessary for performing the jackpot end process is executed (A2613). For example, in the big winning hole remaining ball processing, if it is not the final round, the interval time is saved in the special game processing timer area, and the processing number "3" related to the fanfare/interval processing is set to the special game processing number area. Save. If it is the final round, the ending time is saved in the special game processing timer area, the processing number "6" relating to the jackpot end processing is set, and saved in the special game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "6" at step A2607, the game control device 100 executes jackpot end processing for setting information necessary for executing special figure normal processing (A2614). For example, in the jackpot end processing, set the necessary information such as the probability state after the end of the jackpot state and the general electric support state (time saving state) after the end of the jackpot state. command), set the processing number "0" related to the special figure normal processing and save it in the special figure game processing number area. The probability information command includes the probability state (high probability / low probability) after the end of the jackpot state, and the number of continuous games (time reduction fluctuation number, electric support number) in the general electric support state (time reduction state) after the end of the jackpot state. including information on

When the game processing number is "7" in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets the opening time of the big winning opening, updates the number of times of opening, and sets information necessary for performing small winning medium processing. (A2615). For example, in the small winning fanfare middle processing, necessary information such as the small winning opening time of the big winning opening is set, the processing number "8" relating to the small winning middle processing is set, and saved in the special game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "8" at step A2607, the game control device 100 executes small-hit medium processing for setting information necessary for performing small-hit remaining ball processing (A2616). For example, in the small-hit medium process, necessary information such as the small-hit remaining ball processing time is set, the processing number "9" relating to the big winning opening remaining ball processing is set, and saved in the special game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "9" at step A2607, the game control device 100 executes small-hit remaining ball processing for setting information necessary for performing small-hit end processing (A2617). For example, in the small hit remaining ball processing, necessary information such as the small winning ending time is set, the processing number "10" relating to the special figure small hitting end processing is set, and the game is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "10" at step A2607, the game control device 100 executes small winning end processing for setting information necessary for executing special figure normal processing (A2618).

When the processing based on the special figure game processing number is completed, the game control device 100 prepares the special figure 1 variation control table for controlling the variation of the special figure 1 indicator 51 (A2619), then the special figure 1 indicator 51 is executed (A2620). Then, after preparing the special figure 2 variation control table for controlling the variation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (A2621), the symbol variation control process related to the special figure 2 indicator 52 is executed (A2622). Details of the pattern variation control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start-up switch monitoring process (A2601) in the special game process will be described. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the starting port switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first prepares a winning monitoring table for the starting winning port 36 (starting port 1) (A2701), executes hardware random number acquisition processing (A2702), and determines whether or not there is a winning to the starting winning port 36. (A2703). When there is no winning to the start winning opening 36 (the result of A2703 is "N"), the processing after step A2709 is executed. On the other hand, if there is a prize to the start winning port 36 (the result of A2703 is "Y"), it is determined whether it is during the special figure time saving (during the general electricity support state) (A2704).

When the game control device 100 determines that it is not during the special figure time saving (during the general electricity support state) (the result of A2704 is "N"), it executes the processing after step A2707. On the other hand, if it is during the special figure time saving (during the general electricity support state) (the result of A2704 is "Y"), prepare the right-handed instruction notification command as the production command (A2705), and execute the production command setting process ( A2706).

That is, if it is in the general electricity support state (time saving state), regardless of the probability state (high probability state/low probability state) of the variable display game, the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared and the production command setting process is executed. . In the case of the present embodiment, a prize is not awarded to the starting prize-winning port 36 unless the ball is hit to the left, and a prize is not awarded to the normal fluctuation prize-winning device 37 unless the ball is hit to the right. Moreover, the game ball does not pass through the normal figure start gate 34 unless it is hit to the right. Therefore, in the general electricity support state (time saving state), right-handed hitting is more advantageous than left-handed hitting, but if there is a prize at the start winning opening 36 during the general electricity support state (that is, during the general electricity support state When hit to the left), a right hitting instruction notification command is transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 executes a notification (warning) instructing to hit to the right by the display device 41 or the like.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on suspension by the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2707), and then executes special figure starting opening switch common processing (A2708). Then, a winning monitoring table for the second starting winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) is prepared (A2709), hardware random number acquisition processing is executed (A2710), and whether or not there is a winning to the second starting winning opening is determined. Judge (A2711). If there is no winning to the second starting winning opening (the result of A2711 is "N"), the starting opening switch monitoring process is terminated.

On the other hand, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the normal electric accessory (normal variable prize winning device 37) is in operation when there is a prize to the second start prize winning port (the result of A2711 is "Y"). That is, it is determined whether or not the normal variable winning device 37 is in an open state in which the game ball can win (A2712). If the normal electric accessory is in operation (the result of A2712 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A2714.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the normal electric accessory is not in operation (the result of A2712 is "N"), determines whether the normal electric fraud is occurring (A2713). When the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5), it is determined that general electrical fraud is occurring. The normal variable winning device 37 cannot win a game ball when it is closed, and can win a game ball only when it is open. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some kind of abnormality or dishonesty has occurred, and if there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent wins. Then, when the number of fraudulent prizes thus counted is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (upper limit value) for determination of fraud occurrence, it is determined that fraud is occurring.

The game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on suspension by the second starting winning port (normal variable winning device 37) when the electric fraud is not occurring (the result of A2713 is "N") (A2714). , Executes the special figure starting opening switch common processing (A2715), and ends the starting opening switch monitoring processing. Also, if it is determined at A2713 that the electric power irregularity is occurring (the result of A2713 is "Y"), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second starting memory is prevented from being generated any more.

[Common process for special figure start switch]
Next, the details of the special figure starting opening switch common processing (A2708, A2715) in the starting opening switch monitoring processing will be described. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure start opening switch common processing. Special figure starting opening switch common processing, when there is an input of starting opening 1 switch 36a or starting opening 2 switch 37a, is processing that is performed in common for each input.

First, the game control device 100 outputs information about the number of winnings to the monitored starter switch 36a and the starter 2 switch 37a to a management device outside the gaming machine 10. is loaded (A2901), the loaded value is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether or not the output count overflows (A2903). If the number of outputs does not overflow (result of A2903 is "N"), the updated value is saved in the starting signal output count area of RWM (A2904), and the process proceeds to step A2905. On the other hand, if the output count overflows (result of A2903 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A2905. In this embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the starting signal output count area. Then, when the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is determined that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, the game control device 100, of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a, whether or not the update target special figure holding number (starting memory number) corresponding to the monitoring target starting port switch is less than the upper limit (A2905). If the special figure pending number to be updated is not less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is "N"), the special figure start opening switch common processing is terminated. Also, if the number of special figures pending to be updated is less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is "Y"), the number of special figures pending to be updated (the number of special figures 1 pending or the number of special figures 2 pending) + 1 update Then (A2906), the target starting gate winning flag is saved (A2907).

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting switch to be monitored and the special figure reservation number (A2908), and stores the jackpot random number prepared in step A2805 as the RWM jackpot random number. Save in area (A2909). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starting switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (A2910), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2911).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is a prize to the starting prize winning port 36 (starting port 1) (A2912). In the case of not winning the starting prize winning port 36 (the result of A2912 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2915. On the other hand, if the winning is to the starting winning port 36 (the result of A2912 is "Y"), the small winning design random number is extracted, prepared (A2913), and saved in the small winning design random number storage area of RWM (A2914). ).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the corresponding RWM variation pattern random number storage area (A2915), and executes special figure reservation information determination processing (A2916). Then, prepare the decorative special figure reservation number command corresponding to the starting opening switch to be monitored and the number of special figure reservations as a production command (A2917), execute the production command setting process (A2918), common to the special figure starting opening switch End the process.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the starting winning port 36 or the starting winning region of the normal variable winning device 37, and becomes the execution right of the variable display game. It constitutes a start memory means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a start memory. In addition, the starting memory means (game control device 100) stores various random values extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning port (starting winning port 36) as the first starting memory up to a predetermined number. Various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting winning port (normal variable winning device 37) are stored as the second starting memory up to a predetermined number as the upper limit.

[Special Figure Reservation Information Judgment Process]
Next, the details of the special figure reservation information determination processing (A2916) in the starting port switch common processing will be described. FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure reservation information determination processing. The special figure reservation information determination process is a look-ahead (preliminary determination) process that determines the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

The game control device 100 first checks the starting opening winning flag saved in step A2907 to determine whether or not the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) is won (A3001). If there is no winning to the startup winning port 36 (the result of A3001 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A3004. On the other hand, if it is a prize to the start winning port 36 (result of A3001 is "Y"), it is determined whether it is during special figure time saving (during general electricity support state) (A3002).

The game control device 100 ends the special figure reservation information determination process when it is during the special figure time saving (during the general electricity support state) (the result of A3002 is "Y"). On the other hand, if it is not during the special figure time saving (the result of A3002 is "N"), it is determined whether it is during the big hit or the small hit (A3003). When it is during the big hit or during the small hit (result of A3003 is "Y"), the special figure reservation information determination processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the game control device 100 is not in the midst of a big hit or a small hit (the result of A3003 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the big hit is a big hit by whether or not the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. (A3004). Then, if the judgment result is a big hit (the result of A3005 is "Y"), a big hit pattern random number check table corresponding to the target starting switch is set (A3006), and the big hit pattern random number prepared in step A2910 is set. The corresponding stop symbol information is acquired (A3007), and the process proceeds to step A3014.

When the determination result is not a big hit (the result of A3005 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the first start opening (start winning opening 36) is won (A3008). If the winning to the start winning opening 36 is not achieved (the result of A3008 is "N"), set stop symbol information (A3013) and shift to the processing of step A3014.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not it is a small hit by whether or not the big hit random value matches the small hit determination value when the prize is won to the start winning port 36 (the result of A3008 is "Y"). Hit determination processing is executed (A3009). Then, when the determination result is not a small hit (the result of A3010 is "N"), stop design information of losing is set (A3013), and the process proceeds to step A3014. On the other hand, if the judgment result is a small hit (result of A3010 is "Y"), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (A3011), and a stop symbol corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A143. Information is acquired (A3012), and the process proceeds to step A3014.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target start switch and stop symbol information as an effect command (A3014), and executes effect command setting processing (A3015). Next, a special figure information setting process for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern is performed (A3016), and a variation pattern setting process for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed (A3017 ).

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game (A3018 ), effect command setting processing is performed (A3019), and the special figure reservation information determination processing is terminated. In addition, the special figure information setting process in step A3016 and the variation pattern setting process in step A3017 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal process. In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. - 特許庁

By the above processing, the look-ahead pattern command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead object and the look-ahead variation pattern command including the information of the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. and transmitted to the effect control device 300 . As a result, the judgment result (read-ahead result) of the result-related information (whether it is a big hit or the type of variation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is produced before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory. It is possible to inform the device 300, especially by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, etc., to the player before the start timing of the special figure fluctuation display game. It is possible to notify.

That is, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the start memory in the start memory means (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result will be obtained). etc.) constitutes prior determination means. The timing for determining the random value stored corresponding to the starting memory in advance is not limited to the time when the starting memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is played. good.

[Large winning opening switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the big winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602) in the special game process will be described. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big winning opening switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the value of the special game processing number is "4", that is, whether or not the large winning opening is being processed (A3101). When the big winning opening is being processed (result of A3101 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A3105. In addition, if the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is not being performed (the result of A3101 is "N"), it is determined whether the value of the special game processing number is "5", that is, whether or not the remaining ball processing for the large winning opening is being performed. Judge (A3102).

When the game control device 100 is in the middle of the big winning hole remaining ball processing (the result of A3102 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A3105. Also, if the big winning hole remaining ball processing is not being performed (the result of A3105 is "N"), it is determined whether the value of the special game processing number is "8", that is, whether or not the small winning process is being performed. (A3103). If it is during small hit processing (result of A3104 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A3105. Also, if it is not during the small hit process (the result of A3103 is "N"), it is determined whether the value of the special game processing number is "9", that is, whether the small hit remaining ball is being processed ( A3104). Since the special game processing number does not move to the next until the special game processing timer reaches 0, the progress of the game can be checked by the special game processing number in this way.

The game control device 100 ends the big winning opening switch monitoring process when the small winning remaining ball process is not being performed (the result of A3104 is "N"). Further, when the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (the result of A3104 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A3105. Then, the winning counter is set to 0 (A3105), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the big winning opening switch 1 (one big winning opening switch 39a) (A3106).

The game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the large winning opening switch 2 (the other large winning opening switch 39a) when there is no input to the large winning opening switch 1 (the result of A3106 is "N"). (A3110). Also, when there is an input to the big winning hole switch 1 (result of A3106 is "Y"), a big winning hole count command is prepared as an effect command (A3107), and effect command setting processing (A3108) is executed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (A3109), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the big winning opening switch 2 (the other big winning opening switch 39a) (A3110).

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the winning counter is 0 (A3114) when there is no input to the big winning opening switch 2 (the result of A3110 is "N"). Also, when there is an input to the big winning hole switch 2 (result of A3110 is "Y"), a big winning hole count command is prepared as an effect command (A3111), and effect command setting processing (A3112) is executed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (A3113), and it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter is 0 (A3114).

When the value of the winning counter is 0 (the result of A3114 is "Y"), the game control device 100 ends the big winning opening switch monitoring process. Also, if the value of the winning counter is not 0 (the result of A3114 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the big winning hole remaining ball processing is in progress (A3115). If the large winning opening remaining balls are being processed (the result of A3115 is "Y"), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated, and if the large winning opening remaining balls are not being processed (the result of A3115 is "N"), the small It is determined whether or not the hit remaining ball processing is in progress (A3116).

The game control device 100 ends the big winning opening switch monitoring process when the small hit remaining ball process is in progress (the result of A3116 is "Y"), and when the small hit remaining ball process is not in progress (the result of A3116 is " N"), the value of the winning counter (1 or 2) is added to the number of large winning opening counts (A3117), and the number of large winning opening counts reaches the upper limit (the number of game balls that can be won in one round. For example, "9" ) or more (A3118).

The game control device 100 terminates the large winning opening switch monitoring process when the large winning opening count number is not equal to or greater than the upper limit value (result of A3118 is "N"). In addition, when the number of large winning opening counts is equal to or greater than the upper limit (the result of A3118 is "Y"), the number of large winning openings is kept at the upper limit (A3119), and the special game processing timer area is cleared to 0. (A3120), it is determined whether it is during small hit processing (A3121).

If the game control device 100 is not in the middle of a small winning process (the result of A3121 is "N"), it ends the big winning opening switch monitoring process, and if it is in the middle of a small winning process (the result of A3121 is "Y"). , saves the value for ending the small winning opening operation in the big winning opening control pointer area (A3122), and ends the big winning opening switch monitoring process. As a result, the big winning opening is closed and one round ends.

[Special normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure normal processing (A2608) in the special figure game processing will be described. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 reservation number (second start memory number) is 0 (A3201). When the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 (the result of A3201 is "Y"), it is determined whether the special figure 1 reservation number (first start memory number) is 0 (A3205). Then, if the number of special figures 1 pending is 0 (the result of A3205 is "Y"), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has started (A3209), and if the customer waiting demonstration has not started (A3209 If the result is "N"), a customer waiting demonstration flag indicating a customer waiting demonstration state (a customer waiting demonstration state) is set in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (A3210).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a customer waiting demo command as an effect command (A3211), performs effect command setting processing (A3212), and sets "0" relating to special figure normal processing as a processing number ( A3213). On the other hand, in step A3209, when the customer waiting demonstration has already started (the result of A3209 is "Y"), "0" relating to special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (A3213). After that, the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (A3214), and the variable design discrimination flag area is cleared (A3215). Then, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A3216), and the special figure normal processing is terminated.

In this way, the customer waiting demo command is transmitted when the special figure 1 reservation number (first start memory number) and the special figure 2 reservation number (second start memory number) are 0, and the customer waiting demo command is received The effect control device 300 performs setting to display the customer waiting demonstration on the display device 41 or the like. The game control device 100 can also be configured to transmit the customer waiting demo command only when the touch switch signal from the touch switch of the operating handle 24 becomes an off signal.

In addition, the game control device 100, when the special figure 2 reservation number is not 0 (the result of A3201 is "N"), executes the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202), the decoration special corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number Prepare the figure reservation number command (decorative special figure 2 reservation number command) as a production command (A3203), execute the production command setting process (A3204), and end the special figure normal process.

In addition, the game control device 100, when the special figure 1 reserved number is not 0 (the result of A3205 is "N"), executes the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3206), and the decoration special corresponding to the special figure 1 reserved number Prepare the figure reservation number command (decorative special figure 1 reservation number command) as a production command (A3207), execute the production command setting process (A3208), and end the special figure normal process.

In this way, by performing the check of the special figure 2 reservation number before the special figure 1 reservation number check, if the special figure 2 reservation number is not 0, special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (A3202) is executed The Rukoto. That is, the special figure 2 variation display game is preferentially executed over the special figure 1 variation display game. That is, when the second start memory means (game control device 100) has the second start memory, the game control device 100 changes the variable display game based on the second start memory to the variable display based on the first start memory. It constitutes a priority control means for executing with priority over the game.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3206) in the special figure usual process will be described. FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game.

The game control device 100 saves the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (special figure 1 here) in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (A3401). Subsequently, a jackpot flag 1 setting process for setting deviation information and jackpot information to the jackpot flag 1 for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is a jackpot is executed (A3402). The details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information) (A3403). The details of the special figure 1 stop design setting process will be described later. Furthermore, the game control device 100 executes a special figure information setting process for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern (A3404).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is set (A3405 ). After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the special figure 1 variation display game (A3406).

Next, the game control device 100 executes a fluctuation start information setting process for setting the information of the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (A3407), and ends the special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In the fluctuation start information setting process, the fluctuation time value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) is acquired and saved in the special figure game processing timer area. Then, regarding the special figure 1 variable display game, a variable command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variable pattern number is prepared as an effect command, and the effect command setting process is performed.

Then, the game control device 100 sets "1" relating to special figure fluctuation processing as the processing number (A3408), and saves the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (A3409).

Then, the game control device 100 clears the customer waiting demonstration flag area (A3410), and saves the signal regarding the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 in the test signal output data area (A3411). After that, save the fluctuating flag in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (A3412), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (the blinking cycle timer of the special figure 1 indicator 51) in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area (for example 100 ms) (A3413). Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern number area (A3414), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is ended.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202) in the special figure usual process will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game, and the same process as the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. 18 is performed for the second start memory. It is something to do.

The game control device 100 first saves a special figure 2 variation flag indicating the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) in a variation symbol discrimination flag area (A3501). Subsequently, a big hit flag 2 setting process for setting deviation information and big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit is executed (A3502).

Next, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information) (A3503). Furthermore, the special figure information setting processing which sets the special figure information which is the parameter in order to set fluctuation pattern is executed (A3504). Subsequently, prepare a special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game is set (A3505).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game (A3506). And, the fluctuation start information setting process for setting the information of the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed (A3507). In the fluctuation start information setting process, the fluctuation time value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) is acquired and saved in the special figure game processing timer area. Then, regarding the special figure 2 variation display game, the variation command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variation pattern number is prepared as an effect command, and effect command setting processing is performed.

Next, the game control device 100 first sets "1" relating to special figure fluctuation processing as the processing number (A3508), and saves the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (A3509).

Then, the game control device 100 clears the customer waiting demonstration flag area (A3510), and saves the signal regarding the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 in the test signal output data area (A3511). After that, save the fluctuating flag in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (A3512), and in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area, the initial value of the blinking control timer (the blinking period timer of the special figure 2 indicator 52) (for example 100 ms) (A3513). Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern number area (A3414), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is ended.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (A3402) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 1 setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves the deviation information in the small hit flag area (A3601), and saves the deviation information in the big hit flag 1 area (A3602). Next, load the jackpot random number from the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) of RWM, prepare (A3603), and clear the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) to 0 (A3604). It should be noted that the reservation number 1 use is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory of which digestion order is the first (here the first among the special figures 1). After that, according to whether or not the prepared big-hit random number coincides with the big-hit judgment value, a big-hit determination process is executed (A3605).

When the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3605) is a big hit (the result of A3606 is "Y"), the game control device 100 overwrites the big hit flag 1 area where the losing information is saved in step A3602 with the big hit information. Save (A3607) and end the jackpot flag 1 setting process. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3605) is not a big hit (the result of A3606 is "N"), whether the prepared big hit random number matches the small hit determination value or not. A small hit determination process for determining whether is executed (A3608).

When the judgment result of the small hit determination process (A3608) is a small hit (the result of A3609 is "Y"), the game control device 100 stores the small hit information in the small hit flag area where the loss information is saved in step A3601. Overwrite and save (A3610), and end the jackpot flag 1 setting process. On the other hand, if the judgment result of the small hit determination process (A3608) is not a small hit (the result of A3609 is "N"), set the big hit flag 1 while saving the loss information in the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag area End the process. Thus, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is one of "big win", "minor win", and "lose".
[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 2 setting process (A3502) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 2 setting process. This process performs the same process as the big hit flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 20 for the second start memory.

The game control device 100 first saves the deviation information in the jackpot flag 2 area (A3701). Next, load the jackpot random number from the RWM special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1), prepare (A3702), and clear the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number 1 reservation) to 0. (A3703). It should be noted that the reservation number 1 use is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory of which digestion order is the first (here, the first among the special figures 2). After that, according to whether or not the prepared big-hit random number coincides with the big-hit judgment value, big-hit judgment processing is executed to judge whether or not the game is a big-hit (A3704).

When the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3704) is a big hit (the result of A3705 is "Y"), the game control device 100 overwrites the big hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step A3701 with the big hit information. Save (A3706) and end the jackpot flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3704) is not a big hit (the result of A3705 is "N"), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated while the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is either "big hit" or "loss".

[Jackpot determination process]
Next, the details of the jackpot determination processing (A3605, A3704) in the jackpot flag 1 setting processing and the jackpot flag 2 setting processing will be described. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process. It should be noted that the big hit determination process is a process common to the big hit determination process in other processes performed during the timer interrupt process, and is also performed in step A3004 of the special figure reservation information determination process.

The game control device 100 first sets a table of upper limit judgment values (upper limit judgment value table) corresponding to probability setting values (A3801). The upper limit decision value table defines the upper limit decision value according to the set probability value for each of the high probability state and the low probability state. Then, the lower limit judgment value of the big hit judgment value is set (A3802), and it is judged whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A3803). A big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a series of multiple values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value, and below the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value , is determined to be a jackpot.

When the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A3803 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets a failure (other than a jackpot) as the judgment result (A3808), and ends the jackpot judgment processing. do.

In addition, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A3803 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability of occurrence of the jackpot is in a high probability state (probability variable state). (A3804). If it is in a high probability state (the result of A3804 is "Y"), the upper limit judgment value table is used to set the upper limit judgment value in high probability corresponding to the probability setting value (A3805). On the other hand, if it is not a high probability state (the result of A3804 is "N"), the upper limit judgment value table is used to set the upper limit judgment value in the low probability corresponding to the probability setting value (A3806).

After setting the upper limit judgment value of the value of the jackpot random number, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the target jackpot random number value is greater than the upper limit judgment value (A3807). If the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3807 is "Y"), the judgment result is set to be a failure (other than the jackpot) (A3808). On the other hand, if the value of the big hit random number is not greater than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3807 is "N"), a big hit is set as the judgment result (A3809). When the determination result is set, the big hit determination process is terminated.

[Small hit determination process]
Next, details of the small hit determination process (A3608) in the big hit flag 1 setting process will be described. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the small hit determination process. In addition, the small hit determination process is a process common to the small hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3009 of the special figure reservation information determination process.

The game control device 100 first sets a small hit upper limit determination value corresponding to the probability set value (A3901). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number of the target (special figure 1) is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (A3902). It should be noted that the small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of continuous values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the small hit lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit, which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. If it is equal to or less than the judgment value, it is judged to be a small hit.

Of course, in order to avoid that the result of the same special figure fluctuation display game becomes a small hit and a big hit, the range of the small hit judgment value (between the small hit lower limit judgment value and the small hit upper limit judgment value) is the above-mentioned big hit judgment It does not overlap with the value range (between the lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value). In addition, in this embodiment, the small hit random number is not provided independently, and the big hit random number is used for the judgment of the small hit, but the configuration of providing the unique small hit random number is also possible.

When the value of the jackpot random number of the target (special figure 1) is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (the result of A3902 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets the deviation as the judgment result (A3904), and the small hit End the determination process.

In addition, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (the result of A3902 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines that the jackpot random number value of the object (special figure 1) is the small hit upper limit judgment value. It is determined whether or not it is greater than (A3903). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A3903 is "Y"), the deviation is set as the judgment result (A3904). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A3903 is "N"), a small hit is set as the judgment result (A3905). When the determination result is set, the small hit determination process is terminated.

[Big hit probability, Small hit probability]
24(A), (B), and (C) show the big hit probability and the small hit probability of the special figure variation display game determined as a result of the above-described big hit determination process (FIG. 22) and small hit determination process (FIG. 23). It is a table illustrating each setting (each setting value).

The example of FIG. 24(A) shows a case where the big hit probability and the small hit probability are different for each setting (each set value). The big win probability (when the probability is low and when the probability is high) and the small win probability increase as the set value increases (higher setting), and the larger the set value, the more likely the big win occurs, which is advantageous to the player. Incidentally, the jackpot probability is obtained by dividing the difference between the upper limit judgment value and the lower limit judgment value in FIG. 22 by the value range of the jackpot random number. The jackpot probability can be changed according to the set value by changing the lower limit judgment value or the value range of the jackpot random number in addition to the upper limit judgment value. In another example, only one of the low-probability jackpot probability and the high-probability jackpot probability may be increased as the set value increases. By changing the big win probability and the small win probability according to the setting (set value), the player enjoys estimating the setting (set value) from the big win probability and the small win probability, and the amusement of the game is improved.

In the example of FIG. 24(B), setting 1, 2, 3 (setting value 1, 2, 3) and setting 4, 5, 6 (setting value 4, 5, 6) big hit probability and small hit probability are the same is set. In settings 1 to 3 or settings 4 to 6, the big win probability and the small win probability increase as the set value increases (higher setting). In the example of FIG. 24B, it becomes more difficult for the player to estimate the setting (set value) from the big win probability and the small win probability than in the case of FIG.

In the example of FIG. 24(C), regardless of the setting (set value), the big hit probability (when the probability is low and when the probability is high) and the small hit probability are the same. In this case, the player estimates the setting (setting value) from other setting determination elements.

Other setting determination elements include the probability variable inrush rate (described later), the number of continuations of the general electric support after the end of the jackpot (described later), the number of times the probability variable state continues in the ST machine, the number of jackpot rounds (upper limit of the number of rounds), Variation pattern of figure variation display game (variation time value), various times set in special figure game processing (stop display time, fanfare time, etc.) and the like. If the probability of selecting the predetermined content of these setting discrimination elements is made different for each setting value, the player can estimate the setting value from these setting discrimination elements.

[Special figure 1 stop pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 stop design setting process (A3403) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop design setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (A4001). ) to load a jackpot pattern random number (A4002). Next, a special figure 1 jackpot design table is set (A4003).

Subsequently, the stop design number corresponding to the loaded jackpot design random number is obtained and saved in the special figure 1 stop design number area (A4004). The type of special result (type of jackpot) is selected by this process.

After that, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 1 jackpot stop symbol information table (A4005), acquires the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4006). The stop design pattern is for setting the stop design in the special figure display device (here special figure 1 display device 51) and the stop design in the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (A4007).

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number and saves it in the time reduction determination data area (A4008). The time reduction determination data includes information on the presence or absence of the general electric support state (time reduction state) after the end of the jackpot state.

After that, the game control device 100 saves the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state (A4009). Then, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4018).

In addition, the production mode transition information is information for shifting the production mode. The performance mode transition information here is set in the case of a big hit (the result of A4001 is "Y") and used in the big hit end processing. That is, the performance mode transition information allows the performance mode to be shifted with a big hit as a trigger. In addition, as described above, the production mode transition information is set according to the jackpot stop pattern pattern (probability variable jackpot pattern / normal jackpot pattern, etc.), so the jackpot ends with the type of jackpot pattern (type of jackpot). The shift destination of the production mode that shifts later changes. In addition, since production mode transition information is set according to the probability state as described above, the production mode transition destination is affected by whether or not the current special figure high probability state (variable probability state).

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (the result of A4001 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the small hit flag is a small hit (A4010), and if it is a small hit (result of A4011 is "Y"), load the small hit design random number from the special figure 1 small hit design random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (A4011). Next, a special figure 1 small hit design table is set (A4012), a stop design number corresponding to the loaded small hit design random number is acquired, and saved in a special figure 1 stop design number area (A4013).

After that, the game control device 100 acquires the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4014), and saves the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4015). The production mode transition information here is set in the case of a small hit (the result of A4010 is "Y"), and the production mode can be shifted with the small hit as a trigger. Then, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (A4018).

Also, if the small hit flag is not a small hit (the result of A4010 is "N"), the stop design number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop design number area (A4016), and the stop design pattern is changed to the stop design pattern. Save it in the area (A4017), and prepare a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4018). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (A4019), and the production command setting process is executed (A4020). This decoration special figure command is transmitted to the production control device 300 . Then, the pattern data corresponding to the stop pattern number is saved in the test signal output data area (A4021), the special figure 1 jackpot pattern random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (A4022), and the special figure 1 small hit. The symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) is cleared to 0 (A4023), and the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 stop design setting process (A3503) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop design setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (A4101). ) to load a jackpot pattern random number (A4102). Next, a special figure 2 big hit design table is set (A4103). Subsequently, the stop design number corresponding to the loaded jackpot design random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop design number area (A4104). The type of special result (type of jackpot) is selected by this process.

After that, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 2 big hit stop design information table (A4105), acquires the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number, and saves it in the stop design pattern area (A4106). The stop design pattern is for setting the stop design in the special figure display device (here special figure 2 display device 52) and the stop design in the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (A4107).

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number,
Save in the time reduction determination data area (A4108). The time reduction determination data includes information on the presence or absence of the general electric support state (time reduction state) after the end of the jackpot state.

After that, the game control device 100 saves the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state (A4109). The presentation mode transition information here is set in the case of a big hit (the result of A4101 is "Y") and used in the big hit end processing. Then, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4112).

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (the result of A4101 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the stop pattern number at the time of loss in the special figure 2 stop pattern number area (A4110), and the loss stop pattern pattern. is saved in the stop design pattern area (A4111), and a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop design pattern is prepared (A4112). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (A4113), and production command setting processing is executed (A4114). This decoration special figure command is transmitted to the production control device 300 . Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (A4115), the special figure 2 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (A4116), and the special figure 2 stop symbol End the setting process.

[Example of special jackpot pattern distribution]
FIG. 27 is a table exemplifying the jackpot pattern allocation (jackpot breakdown) of the special figure variation display game controlled by the above-described special figure game process for each setting.

FIG. 27 exemplifies a jackpot pattern table defining jackpot pattern numbers 1 to 6 (stop pattern numbers) indicating the types of jackpots and their distribution ratios for each setting. As shown in FIG. 27, the distribution rate of the jackpot pattern numbers (jackpot types, patterns 1 to 6) can be changed according to the setting (set value). be advantageous. In addition, the probability variable entry rate is the ratio of the probability variable jackpot symbols that the probability state after the jackpot ends to a high probability occupies all the symbols. In addition, the number of times of general electric support after the end of the jackpot, especially for the normal jackpot (the probability state after the end of the jackpot becomes low probability), in settings 1 to 3 or settings 4 to 6, the larger the set value growing. The number of times of general electric support is set to be the same for settings 1, 2, and 3 (setting values 1, 2, and 3) and settings 4, 5, and 6 (setting values 4, 5, and 6). In addition, in the ST machine, it is also possible to configure such that the number of times of continuation of the variable probability state increases as the set value increases.

In addition, in FIG. 27, the number of rounds (the upper limit of the number of rounds, such as 2R, 6R, and 16R) given for one big hit does not change with respect to the set value, but the number of rounds is increased as the set value increases. configuration is also possible. In addition, in FIG. 27, for the jackpot of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, a larger number of rounds is likely to be given than the jackpot of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is more special. This is more advantageous to the player than the 1-variation display game.

Incidentally, as in FIG. 24(C), it is also possible to make the big hit pattern distribution (big hit breakdown) the same regardless of the setting (setting value).

[Processing during special figure fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (A2609) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing the procedure of processing during special figure fluctuation.

First, the game control device 100 prepares a symbol stop command (a special figure 1 symbol stop command or a special figure 2 symbol stop command) corresponding to the symbol being changed as an effect command (A4701), and executes effect command setting processing. (A4702). The symbol during variation can be determined from the variation pattern determination flag (special figure 1 variation flag or special figure 2 variation flag). The production control device 300 that has received the symbol stop command stops the corresponding decoration special figure variation display game (decoration special figure 1 variation display game or decoration special figure 2 variation display game).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern number indicating the stop symbol pattern (A4703), and saves the set display time in the special figure game processing timer area (A4704). In the case of this embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is a winning symbol pattern, a big winning symbol pattern and a small winning symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 msec in common.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the processing number "2" relating to the processing during special figure display (A4705), and saves the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (A4706).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the signal related to the end of fluctuation of Toku-zu 1 in the test signal output data area (A4707), and further saves the signal related to the end of fluctuation of Toku-zu 2 to the test signal output data area ( A4708).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 puts the control timer initial value (for example, 256 msec) into the pattern confirmation number signal control timer area used when outputting the number of confirmation symbol signal related to the number of executions of the special figure variation display game to the external information terminal. is saved (A4709).

After that, the game control device 100, as information for controlling the special figure 1 variation display game on the special figure 1 indicator 51, sets the stop flag related to the variation stop on the special figure 1 indicator 51 to the special figure 1 variation control flag area (A4710). Furthermore, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 indicator 52, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 indicator 52 is saved in the special figure 2 variation control flag area (A4711) , To end the process transition setting process during special figure fluctuation.

[Symbol variation control process]
FIG. 29 shows the symbol variation control process (A2620, A2622) in the above-described special figure game process and the symbol variation control process in the general figure game process described later. The symbol variation control process includes control of variation of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, etc.) and normal symbols (normal symbol) of the variable display game in the variation display section of the batch display device 50, and control of variation of special symbols and normal symbols. This is the process of setting the display data of the design.

The game control device 100 first checks whether or not the variation control flag for the pattern to be controlled (for example, any one of the first special figure, the second special figure, and the normal figure) is changing (A7501). In the case of this embodiment, on the variation control table prepared in steps A2619, A2621, and A7614, the lower address of the variation control flag area, the initial value of the flashing control timer, the variation pattern number upper limit judgment value, the display table 2 ( (for stop) and the address of display table 1 (for variation) are defined.

The game control device 100 acquires a symbol display table (for variation) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled (A7503) when the in-variation flag for the symbol to be controlled is fluctuating (the result of A7502 is "Y"). ). In the case of this embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for variation, display table 1) is defined on the variation control table prepared in steps A2619, A2621 and A7614.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the blinking control timer to be controlled by -1 (A7504), determines whether the blinking control timer after updating is 0 (A7505), and the blinking control timer after updating If it is not 0 (the result of A7505 is "N"), display data corresponding to the value of the variable pattern number area to be controlled is obtained (A7508). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7511), and the pattern variation control process is terminated.

Also, if the flashing control timer after updating is 0 (result of A7505 is "Y"), save the flashing control timer initial value corresponding to the target flashing timer area (A7506), and control target variable pattern number is updated by +1 in the corresponding range (A7507), and the display data corresponding to the value of the variable pattern number area to be controlled is obtained (A7508). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7511), and the pattern variation control process is terminated.

On the other hand, the game control device 100 acquires a symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled when the in-varying flag for the symbol to be controlled is not changing (the result of A7502 is "N"). (A7509). In the case of this embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for stop, display table 2) is defined on the variation control table prepared in steps A2619, A2621 and A7614. Next, the display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (A7510), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7511), and the symbol variation control process ends.

As the flashing control timer initial value saved in step A7506, the value defined in the variation control table prepared according to the game to be processed is saved. Here, a value corresponding to 100 msec is defined as the blink control timer initial value. This blinking control timer initial value is an interval for updating the lighting pattern in the collective display device 50 during the variable time.

Further, the corresponding range in step A7507 is defined by the variation symbol number upper limit determination value defined in the variation control table prepared according to the game to be processed. In step A7507, when the fluctuation pattern number reaches the upper limit value by updating the fluctuation pattern number by +1, the fluctuation pattern number is set to 0, and the fluctuation pattern number is from 0 to (the fluctuation pattern number upper limit judgment value -1 ) are updated sequentially. In steps A7508 and A7511, the display data (lighting pattern) corresponding to this variable pattern number is set to be acquired and displayed, and the lighting pattern is updated (changed) the number of times equal to the upper limit determination value of the variable pattern number. is performed, the display is repeated.

By defining the flashing control timer initial value and the variable pattern number upper limit value in the variable control table prepared according to the game to be processed in this way, the interval and display for updating the lighting pattern in the collective display device 50 are completed. You can set the number of updates for each game.

[General map game processing]
Next, the details of the general-purpose game process (A1313) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing the procedure of normal game processing. In the general-purpose game processing, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the overall processing related to the general-purpose variation display game is controlled, and the display of the general-purpose pattern is set.

The game control device 100 first executes a gate switch monitoring process for monitoring an input from the gate switch 34a (A7601). Details of the gate switch monitoring process will be described later.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes general electric winning switch monitoring processing for monitoring input from the starting port 2 switch 37a (A7602).

Next, the game control device 100 updates the normal game processing timer by -1 if it is not 0 (subtracts only 1) (A7603). In addition, the minimum value of the general-purpose game processing timer is set to zero. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the normal game processing timer has become 0 (A7604).

The game control device 100, when the value of the normal game processing timer is 0 (the result of A7604 is "Y"), that is, when the time has expired or has already timed up, the normal game processing number A general-purpose game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the corresponding process is set in the register (A7605).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 acquires the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the general-purpose game processing number based on the set general-purpose game sequence branch table (A7606). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the general-purpose game processing number, and game branch processing is executed according to the general-purpose game processing number (A7607).

When the game processing number is "0" in step A7607, the game control device 100 monitors the start of fluctuation of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, sets the start of fluctuation of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, sets the effect, Execute normal pattern normal processing to set information necessary for performing processing during normal pattern fluctuation (A7608). The details of the normal pattern normal processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 32 .

In addition, if the game processing number is "1" at step A7607, the game control device 100 executes normal pattern fluctuation processing for setting information necessary for performing normal pattern display processing ( A7609). For example, in the process during normal map fluctuation, in order to shift to the process during normal map display, set "2" as the game processing number and save it in the normal map game processing number area, Save in the processing timer area.

Further, if the game processing number is "2" at step A7607, if the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game is a hit, the game control device 100 Setting of the open time and processing during the normal diagram display, such as setting of information necessary for performing processing during the normal diagram per execution (A7610). For example, in the normal pattern display processing, when the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a hit, in order to shift to the normal pattern winning process, "3" is set as the game processing number and the normal pattern game processing number area is set. On the other hand, in the case of a failure, in order to shift to the normal game process, the game process number is set to "0" and saved in the normal game process number area.

Further, if the game processing number is "3" at step A7607, the game control device 100 continues the processing during normal game winning, or sets information necessary for performing normal electric remaining ball processing. Processing during drawing is executed (A7611). For example, in the normal per game process, after setting for opening the normal variation winning device 37 for a predetermined number of times, "4" is set as the game process number to shift to the normal electric remaining ball process. Save in normal game processing number area.

In addition, when the game processing number is "4" at step A7607, the game control device 100 executes normal electric remaining ball processing for setting information necessary for performing normal per pattern end processing (A7612 ). For example, in the normal electric remaining ball processing, in order to shift to the end processing for the normal game, set "5" as the game processing number and save it in the normal game processing number area, and the normal game ending time Save in the processing timer area.

In addition, when the game processing number is "5" at step A7607, the game control device 100 executes normal pattern per end processing for setting information necessary for performing normal pattern normal processing (A7608). (A7613). For example, in the end processing for the general pattern, in order to shift to the normal processing for the general pattern, "0" is set as the game processing number and saved in the general pattern game processing number area.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a normal pattern fluctuation control table for controlling the normal pattern fluctuation by the normal pattern display device 53 (A7614). After that, a symbol variation control process relating to control of variation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 53 is executed (A7615), and the normal symbol game process is terminated.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the value of the normal game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A7604 is "N"), that is, when the time is not up, executes the processing after step A7614.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing the procedure of gate switch monitoring processing. The gate switch monitoring process is executed at step A7601 in the normal game process shown in FIG.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (A7701). Then, if there is an input to the gate switch 34a (the result of A7701 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the game state is for hitting to the right (A7702). The right-handed game state is a big hit state, a small hit state, and a time saving state (general electric support state). If the game state is to hit to the right (the result of A7702 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A7705. If the game state is not right-handed (result of A7702 is "N"), a left-handed instruction notification command (left-handed instruction command) is prepared as an effect command (A7703), and an effect command setting process is executed (A7704). The effect control device 300 that has received the left-handed instruction notification command executes notification (warning) instructing to hit left-handed by the display device 41 or the like.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the normal pattern reservation number and determines whether or not the normal pattern reservation number is less than the upper limit value (for example, 4) (A7705). Game control device 100, when the number of normal pattern reservations is less than the upper limit (the result of A7705 is "Y"), updates the number of normal pattern reservations by +1 (A7706), corresponds to the number of normal pattern reservations after updating Then, the address of the random number storage area is calculated (A7707). Then, the winning random number is extracted and saved in the winning random number storage area of the RWM (A7708), the winning design random number is extracted and saved in the winning design random number storage area (A7709), and the gate switch monitoring process is completed.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, if there is no input to the gate switch 34a (the result of A7701 is "N"), or if it is determined that the number of normal pattern reservations is not less than the upper limit (the result of A7705 is " N") to end the gate switch monitoring process.

[Usually normal processing]
Next, the details of the general-purpose normal processing (A7608) in the general-purpose processing will be described. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the general/universal figure normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the number of normal pattern reservations is 0 (A7901). If the number of reserved patterns is not 0 (the result of A7901 is "N"), the random number is loaded from the random number storage area per general pattern of RWM (for the number of reservations 1), and the random number storage area per pattern of RWM. Load the per pattern random number from (for the number of reservations 1), and clear the general per pattern random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) and the general per pattern random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) after loading to 0 (A7902) ). In addition, whether the probability of a hit result in the normal pattern fluctuation display game is higher than normal (in a high probability state), that is, whether it is in a short time state (normal support state) (A7903). In addition, the probability per normal pattern in the high probability is 250/251, and the probability per normal pattern in the low probability is 0/251.

If the game control device 100 is not in the normal pattern high probability (the result of A7903 is "N"), it sets the low probability lower limit judgment value (here, 251) which is the lower limit judgment value in the normal pattern low probability (A7904). , If it is in the normal pattern high probability (the result of A7903 is "Y"), set the high probability lower limit judgment value (here 1) which is the lower limit judgment value in the normal pattern high probability (A7905), step A7906 Go to processing.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (here, 251) (A7906). It should be noted that the upper limit judgment value here is common during normal pattern high probability and during normal pattern low probability. If the hit random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A7906 is "Y"), that is, if the win is lost, the process proceeds to step A7908. If the winning random number is less than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A7906 is "N"), it is determined whether the winning random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A7907).

When the winning random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A7907 is "Y"), that is, in the case of losing, the game control device 100 saves the losing information in the winning flag area (A7908). Furthermore, the losing stop pattern number is set as the normal stop symbol number (A7909), the losing pattern information is saved in the normal stop symbol information area (A7910), and the process proceeds to step A7914.

If the winning random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A7907 is "N"), that is, if it is a winning, the game control device 100 saves the winning information in the winning flag area (A7911), and loads the loaded winning symbol random number. The corresponding winning stop symbol number is set (A7912), the winning stop symbol information corresponding to the winning stop symbol number is saved in the normal stop symbol information area (A7913), and the process proceeds to step A7914. Incidentally, there may be several types of hit stop symbols, and two in this embodiment.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number in the normal pattern stop symbol area (A7914), saves the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A7915), and shifts the normal per pattern random number storage area. (A7916), after clearing the free space after the shift to 0 (A7917), update the number of general chart reservations by -1 (A7918).

That is, with the execution of the normal pattern fluctuation display game related to the oldest normal pattern reservation number 1, the positions of the normal pattern reservation numbers 2 to 4 that are reserved after the normal pattern reservation number 1 are advanced one by one. By this process, the values for the general pattern holding number 2 to the general pattern holding number 4 in the general pattern random number storage area are moved from the general pattern holding number 1 to the general pattern holding number 3 in the general pattern random number storage area. It will be done. Then, the value for the normal pattern reservation number 4 in the normal pattern random number storage area is cleared, and the normal pattern reservation number is decremented by 1.

Next, the game control device 100 extracts the variation pattern random number 3 (A7919), sets the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern random number 3, and saves it in the general pattern game processing timer area (A7920). For example, the variable time is divided into 500 msec with a probability of 200/256, 1500 msec with a probability of 40/256, and 3000 msec with a probability of 16/256. And, during the normal figure fluctuation process transition setting processing is executed (A7921), the normal figure usual process is ended. For example, in the process transition setting process during normal pattern fluctuation, "1" is set as the process number for shifting to the process during normal pattern fluctuation, and the process number is saved in the normal pattern game process number area. Then, save the flashing control timer initial value (for example, 100 msec), which is the initial value of the timer of the flashing cycle of the general pattern display, in the general pattern flashing control timer area, and the initial value (here, 0) in the general pattern fluctuation pattern number area save the

In addition, the game control device 100, when the normal pattern reservation number is 0 (the result of A7901 is "Y"), sets "0" as the processing number for shifting to the normal pattern normal process (A7922). , the process number is saved in the normal game process number area (A7923). After that, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the general electric fraud monitoring period flag area (A7924), and the general/universal diagram normal processing is terminated.

[External information editing process]
Next, the details of the external information editing process (A1317) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the procedure of external information editing processing. FIG. 33A shows the first half of the external information editing process, and FIG. 33B shows the second half of the external information editing process. In the external information editing process, information Information to be output to an external device such as a collection terminal, a game arcade internal management device, or a test shooting test device is created and set in an output buffer.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not a glass frame open error is occurring (A9501). If the glass frame open error is not occurring (the result of A9501 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the body frame open error (front frame open error) is occurring (A9502). If the body frame open error is not occurring (the result of A9502 is "N"), the OFF data of the door/frame open signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9503), and the OFF data of the security signal is saved as the external information output data. Save to area (A9504).

Game control device 100, when the glass frame open error is occurring (the result of A9501 is "Y"), or when the body frame open error is occurring (the result of A9502 is "Y"), The ON data of the frame open signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9505), and the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9506).

After steps A9504 and A9506, the game control device 100 updates the security signal control timer by -1 if it is not 0 (A9507), and checks whether the security signal control timer is 0 (whether the time has expired). Judge (A9508). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set to a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec) when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch (set value change switch 102) or when the setting change is completed. (A1044, A2419 of main processing). The security signal control timer starts counting from the time of RAM initialization or the end of setting change. The initial value of the security signal control timer is set when the setting variable state (setting change mode) or setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) is entered by operating the setting key switch 93 or the setting value change switch 102 ( A1037 and A2507 of the main processing), during setting change (during variable setting state) in which the probability setting value changing flag is set, or in the setting confirmation state in which the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is set, the security signal is issued. You may make it output all the time. Note that when the probability set value changed flag is set (A2414) instead of clearing the probability set value changing flag (A2418), the security signal control timer is set to 0 and the security signal is output. Terminating configurations are also possible.

If the security signal control timer is not 0 (the result of A9508 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the security signal ON data in the external information output data area (A9509), and proceeds to the processing of step A9510. That is, the external information indicating that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output.

When the security signal control timer is 0 (the result of A9508 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether magnet fraud is occurring (A9510). Note that when the magnet fraud occurrence flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area, it can be determined that the magnet fraud is occurring. If magnet fraud is not occurring (the result of A9510 is "N"), it is further determined whether or not board radio fraud is occurring (A9511). If the radio wave fraud occurrence flag is saved in the radio wave fraud flag area, it can be determined that the radio wave fraud is occurring.

If board radio fraud is not occurring (the result of A9511 is "N"), the game control device 100 further determines whether or not frame radio fraud is occurring (A9512). If frame radio wave fraud is not occurring (the result of A9512 is "N"), it is further determined whether or not general electricity fraud is occurring (A9513). If the general electric fraud is not occurring (the result of A9513 is "N"), it is further determined whether or not the big winning opening fraud is occurring (A9514). Incidentally, when a fraudulent winning occurrence flag relating to the large winning opening is saved in the fraud flag area by the fraud & winning monitoring process, it can be determined that the large winning opening fraud is occurring. If the big winning hole fraud is not occurring (the result of A9514 is "N"), it is determined whether or not a switch abnormality error is occurring (A9515).

When a switch abnormality error such as disconnection of the switch connector (the above-mentioned switch abnormality 1 error) is occurring (the result of A9515 is "N"), the game control device 100 turns OFF data of the game machine error state signal into a test signal. Save in the output data area (A9516). If a switch abnormality error is occurring (result of A9515 is "Y"), the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9518).

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when magnet fraud is occurring (result of A9510 is "Y"), when board radio fraud is occurring (result of A9511 is "Y"), frame radio fraud occurs. If it is inside (the result of A9512 is "Y"), if the electric power fraud is occurring (the result of A9513 is "Y"), or if the big winning mouth fraud is occurring (the result of A9514 is " Y"), the ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9517), and the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9518). By setting the security signal to ON data, the security signal is output as external information to an external device (such as a hall computer).

After steps A9516 and A9518, the game control device 100 executes main prize ball signal editing processing for setting information on the number of prize balls to be paid out (A9519). Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes start-up signal editing processing for editing the winning signal of the start-up (A9520).

Next, the game control device 100 updates the symbol determination count control timer for controlling the output time of information related to the execution count of the special figure variation display game by -1 if it is not 0 (A9521). In addition, the minimum value of the pattern determination count control timer is set to zero.

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the symbol determination count control timer is 0 (A9522). If the value of the design determination count control timer is 0 (the result of A9522 is "Y"), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, the design determination count signal is turned off as external information output data. Save the data in the area (A9523) and end the external information editing process.

In addition, when the value of the symbol determination count control timer is not 0 (the result of A9522 is "N"), that is, when the time is not up, the game control device 100 outputs the ON data of the symbol determination count signal as external information. The data is saved in the output data area (A9524), and the external information editing process ends.

[Display of collective display device during setting change]
FIG. 34 shows the display of each display unit of the collective display device 50 during the probability setting change (during the setting variable state in which the setting can be changed), that is, each light emitting unit (LED lamps D1 to D18) of the collective display device 50. It is a figure explaining the light emission mode (mode of lighting/extinguishing) of.

During the probability setting change, the game control device 100 displays a predetermined display for the special figure fluctuation display game of the collective display device 50 regardless of the state (game state, etc.) of the gaming machine 10 at the time of power shutdown before power on. is displayed on the display units 51 and 52 of the . For example, even if the jackpot symbols are stopped and displayed when the power is turned off before the power is turned on, the game control device 100 collectively displays a predetermined display regardless of the state of the collective display device 50 when the power is turned off during the probability setting change. It can be displayed on the display units 51 and 52 of the display device 50 . Therefore, during the probability setting change (setting variable state), by a predetermined display in the display units 51 and 52 for the special figure variation display game that can be easily visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine 10, the probability setting is being changed, It can be suggested that the gaming machine 10 is in a state in which a game (for example, a variable display game) cannot be played.

In FIG. 34A, during the probability setting change (during the variable setting state), the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (7-segment type LED lamp D1) for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game of the collective display device 50, a predetermined A probability setting value (here, 6) is displayed as a display. In this way, while the probability setting is being changed, the first special figure variation display section 51 displays a different display from when the variation is stopped (display different from normal), thereby making the gaming machine 10 unable to play (for example, a variation display game). It can be clearly shown on the front of the game machine 10 that it is. It should be noted that, in the stop display at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the first special figure fluctuation display section 51 and the second special figure fluctuation display section 52, the numbers 1 to 6 indicating the probability setting value shall not be used.

For example, the game control device 100, based on the probability setting value display data (A2409) corresponding to the working probability setting value and the probability setting value display data (A2413) corresponding to the probability setting value, the third output port 135 and the third 4 Output data to the output port 136, the working probability setting value and the probability setting value may be lit or blinked on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (LED lamp D1) (A1603- A1608).

It should be noted that the second special figure variation display unit 52 (7-segment type LED lamp D2) for the special figure 2 variation display game of the collective display device 50, the probability setting value may be lit display or blinking display. Further, both the first special figure variation display unit 51 and the second special figure variation display unit 52 may be used to display the probability setting value in a lighting display or a blinking display.

Furthermore, even if the probability setting value is lit or blinked by making the brightness weaker than usual, it is difficult for a person who does not have the authority to change the setting to visually recognize the probability setting value at a place away from the gaming machine 10. good.

In FIG. 34B, while the probability setting is being changed, the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (LED lamp D1) is changed as a predetermined display, indicating that the probability setting is being changed (during the setting variable state). Information display during change (eg the letter “P”) is displayed. In this way, during the probability setting change, by performing a display different from that at the time of stopping the fluctuation (display different from normal) on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51, it is possible to indicate that the gaming machine 10 is in a state where the game cannot be played. 10 can be clearly seen in front. In addition, in the stop display at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 and the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52, the same identification information (special symbol) as the information display during change (for example, the character "P") is not used. shall be

For example, the game control device 100, when it is determined that the probability setting is being changed (the result of A2401 is "Y"), the output data regarding the information display during change to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136 (Adding a processing step to FIG. 10), the changing information display may be lit or blinking on the first special figure variation display unit 51 (output processing A1603-A1608). Further, for example, the game control device 100, when the front frame 12 (body frame) is in the open state and the setting key switch 93 is ON (the result of A1024 is "Y"), sets the probability setting value changing flag. When (A1038), the output data is output to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136, and the changing information display is displayed in the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (LED lamp D1) lit or blinking. may

In addition, the second special figure variation display unit 52 (7-segment type LED lamp D2) for the special figure 2 variation display game of the collective display device 50 may be lit or blinked during change. Further, using both the first special figure variation display section 51 and the second special figure variation display section 52, the information display during change may be lit or blinked.

In FIG. 34C, during the probability setting change, the same display as the stop result (loss result) of the variable display game other than the special result (other than the big hit) is displayed on the first special figure variation display unit 51 as the predetermined display. . In this embodiment, the lost result (lost pattern) is a display in which the central segment of the first special figure variation display portion 51 (7-segment type LED lamp D1) lights up. In this way, by performing a predetermined display on the first special figure variation display section 51 while the probability setting is being changed, it is possible to indicate in front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 is not executing a game. In addition, the RAM area is cleared to 0 at the end of the setting change (A2418), but by displaying the losing result (losing pattern) from the probability setting change, the initial data displayed on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 Value setting (A2419) may not be necessary.

For example, the game control device 100, when it is determined that the probability setting is being changed (the result of A2401 is "Y"), the result (loose pattern) to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136 By executing the process of generating output data for display (adding a processing step to FIG. 10), the display of the deviation result may be lit and displayed in the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (output process A1603-A1608) . Further, for example, the game control device 100, when the front frame 12 (body frame) is in the open state and the setting key switch 93 is ON (the result of A1024 is "Y"), sets the probability setting value changing flag. Sometimes (A1038), the output data is output to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136, and the display of the deviation result may be lit and displayed on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (LED lamp D1) .

In addition, the second special figure variation display unit 52 (LED lamp D2) for the special figure 2 variation display game of the collective display device 50 may be lit and displayed. In addition, using both the first special figure fluctuation display section 51 and the second special figure fluctuation display section 52, the display of the deviation result may be lit and displayed.

In FIG. 34D, during the probability setting change, the extinguished display is displayed as a predetermined display on the first special figure variation display section 51 (LED lamp D1). In this way, during the probability setting change, by performing a display different from that at the time of stopping the fluctuation (display different from normal) on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51, it is possible to indicate that the gaming machine 10 is in a state where the game cannot be played. 10 can be clearly seen in front. In addition, in the stop display at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the first special figure fluctuation display section 51 and the second special figure fluctuation display section 52, the extinguished display shall not be used.

For example, the game control device 100, until the probability set value has been changed from power-on (power restoration) (result of A2406 is "Y"), the first special to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136 The output data for the figure fluctuation display section 51 is not generated, and the extinguished display may be displayed on the first special figure fluctuation display section 51 .

In addition, the second special figure variation display portion 52 (7-segment type LED lamp D2) for the special figure 2 variation display game of the collective display device 50 may be extinguished. Also, both the first special figure variation display portion 51 and the second special figure variation display portion 52 may be displayed in the off state.

34A to 34D above, during the probability setting change, LED lamps other than the special figure variation display game display units 51, 52 (D1, D2) (for example, LED lamps D3-D18) are turned off. Alternatively, the lights may be cyclically illuminated to display an animation.

In FIGS. 34E and 34F, during the probability setting change, all display units (that is, all light emitting units: LED lamps D1 to D18) of the collective display device 50 are lit or blinked to display as a predetermined display. , all lighting display or all blinking display are displayed on the collective display device 50 . In this way, during the change of the probability setting, a display different from that at the time of stoppage of variation (a display different from normal) is performed on the batch display device 50, so that the player is notified in front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 is in a state in which the game cannot be played. can be specified.

Note that the all blinking display in FIG. 34F is performed by repeating the all off display and the all on display of the collective display device 50 at predetermined time intervals.

For example, the game control device 100, when it is determined that the probability setting is being changed (the result of A2401 is "Y"), all lighting display or all blinking display to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136 All lighting display or all blinking display may be displayed on the batch display device 50 by executing the processing for generating the output data related to (A1603-A1608 of the output processing). Further, for example, the game control device 100, when the front frame 12 (body frame) is in the open state and the setting key switch 93 is ON (the result of A1024 is "Y"), sets the probability setting value changing flag. Sometimes (A1038), the output data may be output to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136 to display all lighting display or all blinking display on the collective display device 50 (LED lamps D1 to D18). .

FIG. 34G shows another configuration example of the collective display device 50 of FIGS. 34A-34F. In FIG. 34G, a performance display regarding the performance (spec) of the gaming machine 10 is displayed around the LED lamps D1 to D18 of the collective display device 50. In FIG. Although the performance display is printed, it may be displayed by emitting light from an LED lamp, a liquid crystal display, or the like. As a performance display, the display 85a of the jackpot probability at low probability at setting 1 (minimum setting) and setting 6 (maximum setting) "1/300 and 1/200", the display 85b of the number of prize balls "3 & 2 & 10 & 14", the upper limit of the number of rounds A value display 85c "2, 6, 16", a model (formal name) display 85d "CRxxxx", and a limit presence/absence display 85e (here, "no limit") regarding the probability variable jackpot are displayed.

In the display 85b of the number of winning balls, the number of winning balls of the starting winning port 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the general winning port 35, and the special variable winning device 39 are displayed in order. The limit on the probability variable jackpot means that the number of consecutive probability variable jackpots is limited to a predetermined limit number of times (a predetermined limit number of hits (number of times in a row) can occur Become).

Since the jackpot probability display 85a at the time of low probability is displayed only for setting 1 (lowest setting) and setting 6 (highest setting), it can be displayed so as to fit in the empty area around the collective display device 50. FIG. In addition, the display 85a of the jackpot probability at the time of low probability is displayed only for setting 3 (intermediate setting), or the display 85a of the jackpot probability at the time of low probability is set to setting 1 (lowest setting) and setting 6 (highest setting). Either one (one of the lowest value 1/300 and the highest value 1/200) may be displayed, or the range of jackpot probability (1/300 to 1/200) at the time of low probability may be displayed.

In addition, among the jackpot probabilities at the time of low probability, those that cannot be displayed around the LED lamps D1 to D18 of the batch display device 50 (jackpot probabilities such as settings 2, 4, and 5) are collectively displayed outside the game area 32. It may be displayed in an empty area of a member different from the display device 50 . In addition, what is displayed on the collective display device 50 may be displayed in duplicate on this separate member. For example, the jackpot probability at the time of low probability for setting 2, 4, 5, etc. is displayed in the upper right, lower left, and upper left empty areas of the game board of FIG. may Alternatively, the jackpot probabilities at low probabilities for settings 2, 4, 5, etc. may be displayed in an empty area within the game area (for example, the surface of the lower left general prize winning opening 35). In addition, the display 85e indicating whether or not there is a limit for the variable probability big win displays "with limit" only when there is a limit, and when there is no limit, nothing needs to be displayed. In this way, the items displayed as the performance display around the LED lamps D1 to D18 of the collective display device 50 can be changed as appropriate. For example, the display 85c of the round number upper limit value at the time of the big hit is displayed in another area or the display device 41, etc. Some or all items displayed as performance display are displayed on the collective display device 50 as necessary, It does not have to be displayed.

In addition, the effect control device 300 may display the jackpot probability at the time of low probability for settings 2, 4, 5, etc. on the display device 41 during setting change, setting confirmation, and/or during customer waiting. . The effect control device 300 may store the jackpot probability at the time of low probability in the memory (program ROM 321, etc.) in advance. In addition, what is displayed on the collective display device 50 may be displayed on the display device 41 in an overlapping manner. The switching of the display of the jackpot probability of each setting may be executed by operating the operation unit such as the effect button 25 or the cross key.

35 (A) and (B) show a predetermined display on the first special figure fluctuation display section 51 or the second special figure fluctuation display section 52 of the collective display device 50 during the probability setting change (here, the probability setting value 6) is displayed, a configuration is shown in which it is difficult to visually recognize a predetermined display from an oblique direction other than the front of the game machine 10. FIG. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a person who is not authorized to change the setting from viewing the predetermined display (particularly the probability setting value) from an oblique direction of the gaming machine 10 while the probability setting is being changed.

In FIG. 35(A), two recessed portions 51a and 51b (recessed portions) are provided on the front of the collective display device 50, and the first special figure variation display portion 51 or the second special figure is provided in the recessed portions 51a and 51b, respectively. A variable display section 52 is arranged. In FIG. 35(B), an annular wall portion 50a (convex portion) surrounding the first special figure variation display portion 51 and the second special figure variation display portion 52 is provided on the front of the collective display device 50 . This makes it difficult to visually recognize the display of the first special figure variation display portion 51 or the second special figure variation display portion 52 from an oblique direction.

[Control of production control device]
Below, the control (process) which the production|presentation control apparatus 300 performs by the program for production|presentation control is demonstrated.

[Main processing (production control device)]
First, the details of the main process executed by the effect control device 300 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the main process (main program) executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG. The main processing is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (production microcomputer) when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. In addition, in the flowchart of the processing executed by the effect control device 300, the code (number) of the step is expressed as "B****".

When the execution of the main process is started, the effect control device 300 first prohibits an interrupt (B0001). Next, the CPU 311 and VDP 312 are initialized (B0002, B0003), and interrupts are permitted (B0004). When the interruption is permitted, the command reception interruption process for receiving the command transmitted from the game control device 100 can be executed.

Next, the effect control device 300 permits generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 or the like (B0005), and sets a random number seed used for random number generation (B0006). Then, the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (B0007).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 clears the WDT (watchdog timer) (B0008). The WDT is activated by the CPU initialization (B0002) described above, and monitors whether the CPU 311 is operating normally. If the WDT is not cleared after a certain period, the WDT times out and the CPU 311 is reset.

After that, the effect control device 300 executes an RTC reading process for reading time information from an RTC (real time clock) 338 as a clock means (B0009).

In the RTC reading process, time information may be read from the RTC 338 at predetermined intervals (for example, every minute), and it is not necessary to read time information each time the process proceeds to step B0009. In addition, when power is turned on to the effect control device 300 (that is, power is turned on to the gaming machine 10), the RTC reading process may be executed only once (by changing the position of the RTC reading process, for example, step B0003 and B0004). The production control device 300 sets a time timer (timekeeping means) for measuring time in the timer area in the RAM, and reads the time information from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle or only once when the power is turned on. The time timer may be adjusted to match the time of the RTC 338 when the information is read. And the production|presentation control apparatus 300 replaces with RTC338, and may perform various processes using the timer for time. By doing so, the number of times of processing for reading the time from the RTC 338 can be reduced, and the load on the CPU 311 is reduced.

In the RTC reading process, when the read time matches any one of a plurality of predetermined times (first predetermined time, second predetermined time, . . . ), a predetermined effect may be executed. The player can estimate the set value from this time interval by drawing a lottery for the time interval of the predetermined time at a probability corresponding to the set value. For example, a lottery may be made so that the selection rate for a long time interval decreases as the set value increases. In addition, the player can estimate the set value from the execution period of the predetermined effect by drawing lots for the execution period for executing the predetermined effect with a probability corresponding to the set value. For example, a lottery may be made so that the selection rate for a long execution period increases as the set value increases.

Next, the effect control device 300 detects the operation signal of the effect button 25 by the player (signal of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b), or changes the effect content (setting) according to the detected signal. A production button input process is executed (B0010). Subsequently, hall/player setting mode processing for receiving operations such as changes in the brightness of LEDs and liquid crystals and volume by the person in charge of the game parlor (game parlor) and players is executed (B0011). In the hole/player setting mode process, the player can customize the effect according to the effect points described later.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes effect point control processing for adding and clearing effect points (B0012). In the production point control process, production points are added when the production or operation to which the production points are to be added is executed. For example, information including performance point information is displayed on the display device 41 as a QR code (registered trademark). For example, the effect control device 300 can display a QR code (registered trademark) on the display device 41 in the hall/player setting mode process. By drawing lots for the value (additional value) to be added to the performance points with a probability corresponding to the set value, the player can estimate the set value from the added value. For example, lottery may be performed so that the selection rate of a large additional value increases as the set value increases.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes random number update processing for updating the random number such as the effect random number (B0013), analyzes the received command received from the game control device 100, and executes the corresponding received command check processing. (B0014). Details of the received command check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the production control device 300 updates various data in accordance with the content to be displayed on the display device (display means) such as the display device 41, or sets the drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. effect display edit processing is executed (B0015). The drawing data set at this time can update the image of the display device 41 without any problem if the drawing data can be completed by the VDP 312 within 1/30 second (approximately 33.3 msec) of the frame period. Then, the drawing preparation for the display frame buffer is completed, and drawing command preparation end setting is executed (B0016).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not it is frame switching timing (B0017). If it is not the frame switching timing (the result of B0017 is "N"), the process of B0017 is repeated until the frame switching timing comes. Screen drawing is instructed (B0018). Since the frame period of this embodiment is 1/30 second, for example, when periodic V blanking (image update) is performed twice every 1/60 second (1/2 of the frame period), the frame is switched. . Note that the image may not be updated every 1/60th of a second, and the interval may be increased.

In addition, the effect control device 300 executes sound control processing for controlling the sound output from the speaker 19 (B0019).

In addition, the effect control device 300 executes decoration control processing for controlling decoration devices (the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18) composed of LEDs and the like (B0020). In the decoration control process, for example, light emission control of a decoration device such as an LED is executed.

Furthermore, the effect control device 300 executes movable body control processing for controlling effect devices (board effect device 44, frame effect device) such as electric accessories driven by motors and solenoids (B0021). In the movable body control process, for example, a performance for driving a motor is set.

And the production|presentation control apparatus 300 returns to the process of B0008, after finishing the process of above-mentioned B0021. Thereafter, the processing from B0008 to B0021 is repeated.

[Receive command check processing]
Next, details of the reception command check process (B0014) in the above-described main process (FIG. 36) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the received command check process executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

The effect control device 300 first loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the command reception number in order to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of received commands is 0 (B1102). If the number of received commands is 0, that is, if there is no command received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "N"), there is no command to be analyzed, so the received command check process is terminated.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, if the command reception number is not 0, that is, if the command is received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "Y"), the command reception counter of the command reception counter area After subtracting the number of received commands from the value (B1103), the content of the received command buffer in the RAM is copied to the command area for analysis (B1104). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem even if the number of received commands is subtracted before copying the contents in the buffer to the command area. Also, even if a new command is received during copying, the data will not be overwritten.

Then, the effect control device 300 updates the command reading index by +1 (adds only 1) within the range of 0 to 31 (B1105). The received command buffer is configured to store up to 32 received commands. Received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of command read indexes 0 to 31. Here, the received commands are read in order of index and copied to the command area for analysis. At the timing when copying to the command area for analysis is completed, the storage area of the received command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the copy of the commands for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1106), and if the copy is not completed (the result of B1106 is "N ”), and the processing from steps B1104 to B1106 is repeated.

When the command transmitted from the game control device 100 is received by the performance control device 300, the contents of the received command are stored in the received command buffer and at the same time the command reception counter value of the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the received command buffer, the received commands are analyzed separately in a command area for analysis. Then, when the content of the received command is copied to the command area for analysis, the received command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. In this way, it is possible to prepare for receiving a large amount of commands by constantly securing an empty area in the received command buffer without performing direct analysis.

Subsequently, when the copy is completed (the result of B1106 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 loads the received command contents of the command area for analysis (B1107), and analyzes the contents of the received command analysis. The processing is executed (B1108) The details of the received command analysis processing will be described later with reference to Fig. 38. Also, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109), followed by the processing of step B1101. (B1110). If the analysis is not completed (the result of B1110 is "N"), the processing from steps B1107 to B1110 is performed. repeat. When the analysis is completed (the result of B1110 is "Y"), the received command check process is terminated.

[Receive command analysis processing]
Next, details of the received command analysis processing (B1108) in the received command check processing (FIG. 37) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the received command analysis process executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

The effect control device 300 first separates the upper byte of the received command as a MODE section and the lower byte as an ACTION section (ACT section) (B1201). A command transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 is composed of a MODE section (MODE command) and an ACTION section (ACTION command), and is usually continuously transmitted from the MODE section indicating the type of command. be. Therefore, the upper and lower order of the received command are composed of the MODE section and the ACTION section in that order.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section is within the normal range (B1202). That is, it is determined whether or not the MODE portion indicating the type of command is a value that can be taken (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the type). Then, if the MODE part is within the normal range (the result of B1202 is "Y"), it is similarly determined whether or not the ACTION part is within the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a value (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the content) that can be taken by the ACTION section indicating the content of the command (specific effect instruction, etc.). Then, if the ACTION part is within the normal range (the result of B1203 is "Y"), it is further determined whether or not the ACTION part for the MODE part is a correct combination (B1204). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the ACTION section is a value that can be taken by the type of command specified by the MODE section. Then, if the combination is correct (the result of B1204 is "Y"), the command processing corresponding to the command system is executed in the processing after B1205.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE portion is within the range of the variation command (B1205). It should be noted that the variation command is a command for instructing a variation pattern of the decorative special design, and there is a variation command (set in the variation start information setting process of FIG. 42). If the MODE part indicates a variable command (the result in B1205 is "Y"), the variable command process is executed (B1206), and the received command analysis process ends.

If the MODE part does not represent the variation command (the result of B1205 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE part is within the range of the jackpot command (B1207). It should be noted that the jackpot system command is a command to command the operation (display of the fanfare screen, round screen, etc.) related to the performance during the jackpot. middle processing), an interval command (set during the big winning mouth opening process), an ending command (set during the big winning mouth opening process), and the like. Then, if the MODE part indicates a big win command (the result of B1207 is "Y"), a big win command process is executed (B1208), and the received command analysis process ends.

If the MODE part does not indicate a jackpot command (the result of B1207 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE part is within the range of the symbol command (B1209). It should be noted that the symbol-based commands include a decoration special figure 1 command (A4018) and a decoration special figure 2 command (A4112) corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. If the MODE part indicates a symbolic command (the result of B1209 is "Y"), symbolic command processing is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

If the MODE part does not represent a pattern-based command (the result of B1209 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE part is within the range of single-shot commands (B1211). If the MODE part indicates a single-shot command (the result of B1211 is "Y"), single-shot command processing is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis processing ends.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent a single-shot system command (the result of B1211 is "N"), then determines whether the MODE part is within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (B1213). . The look-ahead symbol system command includes the look-ahead stop symbol command (A3014 in FIG. 15). Then, when the MODE part indicates a look-ahead symbol system command (the result of B1213 is "Y"), a look-ahead symbol system command process is executed (B1214), and the received command analysis process ends.

If the MODE part does not represent the look-ahead pattern system command (the result of B1213 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the look-ahead variation system command (B1215 ). The look-ahead variation commands include the look-ahead variation pattern command (A3018 in FIG. 15). If the MODE part indicates a prefetch variation command (result of B1215 is "Y"), prefetch variation command processing is executed (B1216), and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

On the other hand, the production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent a prefetch variation command (the result of B1215 is "N"), may have received an unexpected command (for example, a command used only during the test mode). Therefore, the received command analysis process is terminated. Also, if the MODE part is out of the normal range (the result of B1202 is "N"), if the ACTION part is out of the normal range (the result of B1203 is "N"), or if the ACTION part for the MODE part is not a correct combination ( If the result of B1204 is "N"), the received command analysis process ends.

[Single-shot command processing]
Next, details of the one-shot command processing (B1212) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing the procedure of single command processing executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE section represents a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine (B1301). Then, if the MODE part indicates a model specifying command (result of B1301 is "Y"), model setting processing for setting the type of game machine is executed (B1302), and single-shot command processing ends.

If the MODE part does not represent a model designation command (the result of B1301 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE part represents a RAM initialization command (B1303 ). If the MODE part indicates a command for RAM initialization (result of B1303 is "Y"), RAM initialization setting processing for notifying RAM initialization is executed (B1304), and one-shot command processing is executed. finish.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent the command of RAM initialization (the result of B1303 is "N"), then determines whether the MODE part represents the command at the time of power failure recovery. (B1305). Then, if the MODE part indicates a command for power failure recovery (the result of B1305 is "Y"), power failure recovery setting processing is executed (B1306), and single-shot command processing is terminated.

If the MODE part does not represent the command at the time of power failure recovery (the result of B1305 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE part represents the customer waiting demo command ( B1307). If the MODE part indicates a customer waiting demonstration command (the result of B1307 is "Y"), the customer waiting demonstration setting process is executed (B1308), and the one-shot command process ends.

If the MODE part does not represent the customer waiting demo command (the result of B1307 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then displays the MODE part displaying the decoration special figure 1 reserved number command (A2917, A3207). (B1309). And, when the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (the result of B1309 is "Y"), the special figure 1 reservation information setting process is executed (B1310), and the single-shot system command process is terminated.

If the MODE part does not represent the special figure 1 reserved number command (the result of B1309 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then displays the special figure 2 reserved number command in the MODE part (A2917, A3203 ) (B1311). And, when the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B1311 is "Y"), the special figure 2 reservation information setting process is executed (B1312), and the single-shot system command process is terminated.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B1311 is "N"), then determines whether the MODE part represents the probability information command (B1313). Then, if the MODE part indicates a probability information command (the result of B1313 is "Y"), the probability information setting process is executed (B1314), and the one-shot command process ends.

If the MODE part does not represent a probability information command (the result of B1313 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE part represents an error/illegal command ( B1315). Examples of error/fraud commands include a fraud occurrence command (set in fraud & winning monitoring processing when fraud occurs), fraud cancellation command (set in fraud & winning monitoring processing when fraud is canceled), There is a state off command (A2204) and a state on command (A2207). As a state ON command, a signal is generated from the glass frame open detection switch 63 (glass frame open error) and a signal is generated from the front frame open detection switch 64 (body frame open detection switch) (body frame open error, front frame There is a command that indicates an open error). A state off command also indicates that no error has occurred.

If the MODE part indicates an error/illegal command (the result of B1315 is "Y"), error/illegal setting processing is executed to notify or cancel the notification of an error or illegality (B1316), Ends single-shot command processing.

Effect control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent an error / illegal command (the result of B1315 is "N"), then the MODE part is a command for effect mode switching (processing during special figure display etc.) is determined (B1317). Then, when the MODE part indicates a command for switching the production mode (the result of B1317 is "Y"), the production mode switching setting process is executed (B1318), and the one-shot system command process is terminated.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent the command for effect mode switching (the result of B1317 is "N"), then determines whether the MODE part represents the number of out balls command. (B1319). Then, if the MODE part indicates the number of out-balls command (result of B1319 is "Y"), the number of out-balls reception processing is executed (B1320), and the single-shot command processing ends.

If the MODE part does not represent the number of out balls command (the result of B1319 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then commands the MODE part to count (A3107, A3111 big winning mouth count command) (B1321). If the MODE part indicates a count command (the result of B1321 is "Y"), count information setting processing is executed (B1322), and the one-shot command processing ends.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent the command of the count (the result of B1321 is "N"), determines whether the MODE part represents the setting value information command (probability setting value information command) (B1323). The set value information command is included in the command for restoration from power failure in step A1035 of FIG. 5B and the command for RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1045. In addition, as described above, along with the probability setting change end command in step A2421, the set value information command is transmitted from the game control device 100 when the probability setting change ends. Then, if the MODE part indicates a setting value information command (the result of B1323 is "Y"), the setting value reception processing is executed (B1324), and the one-shot command processing ends. In the setting value reception processing, the setting value (probability setting value) is stored in a storage unit such as a RAM, and necessary processing is executed.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent the setting value information command (the result of B1323 is "N"), determines whether or not the MODE part represents a setting change system command (B1325). The setting change commands include, for example, a setting change instruction command (A1029), a probability setting changing command (A1041), a probability setting value change command (A2415), and a probability setting change end command (A2421). If the MODE part indicates a setting change command (the result of B1325 is "Y"), the setting change information setting process is executed (B1326), and the one-shot command process ends. In the setting change system information setting process, the contents of the setting change system command are stored, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a setting change instruction command is received, the setting change information setting process displays on the display device 41 a setting change instruction display prompting the player to change the setting. Further, when a command indicating that the probability setting is being changed is received, in the setting change information setting process, a setting change indication is displayed on the display device 41 to inform the player that the setting is being changed.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent a command of the setting change system (the result of B1325 is "N"), determines whether the MODE part represents a command of the setting confirmation system (B1327). . The setting confirmation commands include, for example, a probability setting value confirming command (A2508) and a probability setting value confirmation end command (A2512). If the MODE part indicates a setting confirmation type command (the result of B1327 is "Y"), setting confirmation type information setting processing is executed (B1328), and the one-shot type command processing ends. In the setting confirmation system information setting process, the contents of the setting confirmation system command are stored, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a command indicating that the probability setting value is being confirmed is received, in the setting confirmation system information setting process, a setting confirmation display is displayed on the display device 41 to notify the player that the setting is being confirmed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the MODE portion indicates a symbol stop command (B1329). In addition, the symbol stop command includes, for example, a special figure 1 symbol stop command and a special figure 2 symbol stop command. Then, if the MODE part represents a command to stop the pattern (the result of B1329 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 next determines whether the command of the MODE part is a normal command ( B1330).

When the command of the MODE section is a normal command (the result of B1330 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 sets the stop mode of the corresponding special figure (B1331), and the game after all symbols have stopped. The state flag is set to the normal state (B1332), and the single-shot command processing is terminated. In the process of B1332, as an example, the game state flag is set to a normal state, but depending on the timing at which this process is executed, the game state flag may be changed to a "fluctuation", "big hit", or "small hit" flag. is set.

On the other hand, if the MODE part does not represent a symbol stop command (the result of B1329 is "N"), or if the command of the MODE part is not normal (the result of B1330 is "N"), the effect control device 300 ends the single-shot command processing.

[Prefetching pattern command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the details of the prefetch symbol system command process (B1214) in the received command analysis process (FIG. 38) described above will be described. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the look-ahead symbol-based command process executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

Production control device 300, first, whether or not the latest pending information is the information of special figure 1 suspension (special figure 1 start memory), for example, the decoration special figure reservation number command received at the latest is the number of decoration special figure 1 reservation It is determined whether or not it is a command (B1601). If the latest pending information is the information of the special figure 1 pending (the result of B1601 is "Y"), the look-ahead pattern system command (look-ahead stop design command) to the special figure 1 look-ahead pattern command area corresponding to the number of special figure 1 reservations Save (B1602).

Production control device 300, if the latest pending information is not the information of the special figure 1 pending (the result of B1601 is "N"), that is, the decoration special figure pending number command received at the latest is the decorative special figure 2 pending number command In the case, save the look-ahead symbol system command (look-ahead stop symbol command) in the special figure 2 look-ahead symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number (B1603).

Effect control device 300, after steps B1602 and B1603, sets a look-ahead variation-based command reception waiting flag indicating that it is waiting for reception of a look-ahead variation-based command (B1604). This is because the look-ahead symbol system command and the look-ahead variation system command are set, and therefore the game control device 100 transmits the look-ahead variation system command following the look-ahead design system command. After that, the look-ahead symbol system command processing is terminated.

[Prefetching variation command processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 41, the details of the prefetch variation-related command processing (B1216) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) described above will be described. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the prefetch variation command process executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

Effect control device 300 first determines whether or not it is waiting for reception of a look-ahead variation command (B1701). If the above-mentioned prefetch variation-related command reception waiting flag (B1604) is set, it can be determined that reception of a prefetch variation-related command is waiting. If the prefetch variation command is not waiting to be received (the result of B1701 is "N"), the prefetch variation command processing is terminated. If the prefetch variation command is waiting for reception (the result in B1701 is "Y"), the prefetch variation command reception wait flag is cleared (B1702).

Next, the effect control device 300 (sub-board) sets the look-ahead variation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of suspensions of the design of the latest suspension information (special figure 1 or special figure 2) (B1703), and of the look-ahead variation system command The MODE portion of the intra-sub prefetch variation command is acquired corresponding to the MODE portion (B1704). Next, a look-ahead variation ACT conversion table is set (B1705), and an intra-sub look-ahead variation command ACT portion corresponding to the ACTION portion (ACT portion) of the look-ahead variation command is acquired (B1706).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not both the converted MODE section and ACT section (that is, sub-inside look-ahead variation command MODE section and ACT section) are other than 0 (B1707). If the command is normal (effective), it is converted to a value other than 0. If both the MODE part and ACT part after conversion are other than 0 (the result of B1707 is "Y"), the converted command consisting of the MODE part and ACT part after conversion corresponds to the latest pending information and pending number. Save to the prefetching variation command area (special figure 1 prefetching variation command area or special figure 2 prefetching variation command area) (B1708). Then, prefetch command consistency check processing is executed (B1709), and it is determined whether or not the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is normal (B1710).

It should be noted that the time of the first half variation corresponding to the MODE part changes depending on the number of suspensions when the variation display game is started. When the pending change display game is started, if there is no other pending, the first half variation is longer, and if there is a new pending and the number of pending is large, the first half is shorter. Therefore, even if the time value of the first half variation changes, the MODE part of the received prefetch variation system command is converted into the sub internal prefetch variation command MODE part so that the internal command of the performance control device 300 can be handled in the same way.

Also, since the type of reach is not related to the number of reservations, the second half variation corresponding to the intra-sub prefetch variation command ACT section does not depend on the number of reservations. However, since there are types in the reach of the same system, if the production control device 300 uses it as it is without converting the ACT part (value of the latter half fluctuation) of the look-ahead fluctuation system command, the number will increase and it will be difficult to check. . For example, normal reach also has types such as normal reach minus 1 stop failure and normal reach plus 1 stop failure. Therefore, by converting the ACT portion indicating the reach of the same system to the same intra-sub prefetch variation command ACT portion, the number is reduced and the load of check processing such as prefetch command matching check processing is reduced.

Next, the effect control device 300, if at least one of the converted MODE section and ACT section (that is, the sub-inside look-ahead variation command MODE section and ACT section) is 0 (the result of B1707 is "N"), or If the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is not normal (the result of B1710 is "N"), it is determined that the command after conversion is abnormal, and the look-ahead variation command processing is terminated.

Effect control device 300, when the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is normal (the result of B1710 is "Y"), loads the prefetch target pending information (latest pending information) from the prefetching variation command area. (B1711), the prefetch lottery process for the latest pending prefetch effect is executed (B1712). As the look-ahead effect, for example, there are a continuous notice effect (including chance look-ahead effect), a look-ahead zone effect, and a pending change notice. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the latest hold preview effect (hold change notice, etc.) is generated (B1713). If the latest pending pre-reading preview effect occurs (the result of B1713 is "Y"), point information corresponding to the selected pre-reading effect is set (B1714).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the generated pre-reading notice effect (holding change notice) is the effect to start immediately (B1715). If the pre-reading advance notice effect to be generated is an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1715 is "Y"), the display corresponding to the selected pre-reading effect is set (B1716). Then, the read-ahead variation command processing ends.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, if the latest pending pre-reading preview effect does not occur (the result of B1713 is "N"), or if the generated pre-reading preview effect is not an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1715 is "N" ), as is. Terminates look-ahead variation command processing.

[Processing of pattern-based commands]
Next, with reference to FIG. 42, details of the pattern-based command processing (B1210) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) described above will be described. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing the procedure of symbol-based command processing executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

The effect control device 300 sets the special figure type corresponding to the MODE part of the received pattern system command (decoration special figure 1 command or decoration special figure 2 command) (B1801). The special figure classification is special figure 1 or special figure 2. Then, the symbol type corresponding to the combination of the MODE part and the ACTION part (ACT part) of the symbol system command is set and saved in a predetermined area such as RAM (B1802). Here, in special figure 1 and special figure 2, since the distribution ratio of the design changes, using the table for each MODE, the design classification is set. It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the symbol types are the missing symbols, the 2R probability variable jackpot symbols (2R-A1 etc.) shown in FIG. etc.), 6R normal jackpot patterns (6R-A2 etc.), 16R probability variable jackpot patterns (16R-A1 etc.), 16R normal jackpot patterns (16R-A2 etc.).

[Processing of variable commands]
Next, with reference to FIG. 43, details of the variable command processing (B1206) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) described above will be described. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the variable command process executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

Effect control device 300 determines whether or not the special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the received variation command (variation command) is undecided (B1901). If the special figure type is undetermined (the result of B1901 is "Y"), end the variation system command processing. If the special figure type is not undetermined (the result of B1901 is "N"), check the combination of the received variation system command and symbol system command (B1902), whether the variation system command and symbol type are inconsistent is determined (B1903). Here, the inconsistency means a contradiction in effecting, for example, when a winning variation command is received but a jackpot symbol symbol command is received. If the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "Y"), the variation command processing is terminated.

Effect control device 300, when the variation system command and the pattern type are not inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "N"), determines the variation pattern type from the variation system command (variation command) (B1904), and in the effect during variation A variable effect setting process for setting a certain variable effect is executed (B1905). It should be noted that there are multiple effects for the same variable command. Subsequently, the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) is set to be during special figure fluctuation (B1906), and the number of times of the read-ahead effect of the continuous notice effect (remaining number of times of the continuous notice effect) is not 0 -1 updated (B1907).

[Variation effect setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 44, details of the variable effect setting process (B1905) in the variable command process (FIG. 43) described above will be described. FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the variable production setting process executed by the production control device 300. As shown in FIG.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the variation pattern type is reachless variation (variation that does not reach the reach state) (B2001). If the variation pattern type is no reach variation (the result of B2001 is "Y"), the number of points of production points, model code, special figure type, production mode, setting value (probability setting value) corresponding to the first half notice distribution Set the group address table (B2002), acquire the address of the first half advance notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE part of the variation command (variation command) and the number of reservations of the special figure type (B2003). In the case of non-reach fluctuation, the higher the number of reservations, the shorter the fluctuation time, so the address of the table corresponding to the number of reservations is acquired.

Production control device 300, if the variation pattern type is not a reach-less variation (the result of B2001 is "N"), that is, if there is a reach variation, the number of production points, the model code, the special figure type, the production mode, A first half advance notice distribution group address table corresponding to the symbol type and set value (probability setting value) is set (B2004), and a first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE part of the fluctuation command (variation command) and the fluctuation pattern type is set. (B2005).

Effect control device 300, after steps B2003 and B2005, performs a lottery for notice that appears during the first half fluctuation (before reach) (B2006). Note that the lottery probability of the advance notice depends on the set value. Subsequently, the number of production points, the model code, the special type, the production mode, the pattern type, the setting value (probability setting value) corresponding to the second half advance notice distribution group address table is set (B2007), and the variable command The address of the second half advance notice allocation group table corresponding to the ACT part is acquired (B2008), and a lottery for the notice that appears during the second half fluctuation (during reach) is performed (B2009). Note that the lottery probability of the advance notice depends on the set value. After that, the content of the variation effect corresponding to the MODE part and the ACT part of the variation command (variation command) is determined (B2010). In addition, you can see the fluctuation time and main reach contents from the fluctuation system command.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines the content of the effect (notice effect) corresponding to the lottery result of the notice (B2011). After that, a stop symbol setting process for determining the stop symbol of the decoration special symbol variation display game is executed according to the content of the variable effect such as the ready-to-win effect and the notice effect (B2012). Here, the decoration stop pattern is specifically determined, such as determining a loose pattern in the case of a missing pattern.

Next, the effect control device 300 performs display settings for variable effects such as ready-to-win effects (B2013), and performs display settings for advance notice effects (B2014). Subsequently, the display setting of the pending decrease (holding shift) corresponding to the special figure type is performed, and for example, the display that the pending display corresponding to the decoration special figure that fluctuates this time is set is set (B2015). Subsequently, a sound number that determines the mode of presentation (sound output mode) by the sound of the speaker and a decoration number that determines the mode of presentation by the light emission of the decoration device are set (B2016). The decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) has a plurality of decorative light emitting units (decoration LEDs, etc.), and emits light in a light emission mode (color of each LED, light emission timing, etc.) determined by the decoration number. .

It should be noted that the voice number and decoration number can be set not only based on the content of the effect, but also by lottery with a lottery probability corresponding to a set value (probability set value). In this way, the player can enjoy guessing the set value (probability set value) of the gaming machine 10 from the light emission mode of the decoration device, that is, the light emission mode of the decorative light emitting unit (LED).

Next, the effect control device 300 performs the display setting of the decorative special figure fluctuation corresponding to the special figure type (B2017), and the fourth special figure in addition to the above-mentioned first to third special symbols that fluctuate on the display device 41 The display setting of the 4th symbol variation related to (4th symbol, identification information) is performed (B2018). The fourth symbol variation is displayed by the lamp display units 1 and 2 (LEDs) of the above-described lamp display device 80 provided in addition to the display device 41. FIG.

[Jackpot command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 45, details of the jackpot command processing (B1208) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) described above will be described. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big hit command process executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE portion of the received jackpot command indicates fanfare (B2101). If the MODE part of the jackpot command indicates fanfare (the result of B2101 is "Y"), that is, if the jackpot command is a fanfare command, a fanfare effect setting process for setting a fanfare effect is executed (B2102). . The fanfare command includes information on the upper limit of the number of rounds for this big hit. Subsequently, the game state flag indicating the current game state (P machine state) of the game machine 10 is set to "fanfare in progress" (B2103), and the big win system command processing is terminated. In addition, the round number upper limit value can also be obtained from the symbol type determined from the symbol system command (decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern).

If the MODE portion of the received jackpot command does not represent fanfare (the result of B2101 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE portion of the jackpot command indicates a round ( B2104). If the MODE part indicates a round (the result of B2104 is "Y"), that is, if the jackpot command is a round command, the effect control device 300 executes a round effect setting process, and the current game of the gaming machine 10 is executed. A game state flag indicating the state (P machine state) is set to be in a round (B2105, B2106), and the big win system command processing is terminated.

When the MODE portion of the received jackpot command does not represent a round (the result of B2104 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE portion of the jackpot command indicates an interval ( B2107). When the MODE part represents an interval (the result of B2107 is "Y"), that is, when the jackpot command is an interval command, the effect control device 300 executes the interval effect setting process, and the current game of the gaming machine 10 The game state flag indicating the state (P machine state) is set to be in the interval (B2108, B2109), and the jackpot system command processing is terminated.

When the MODE portion of the received jackpot command does not represent an interval (the result of B2107 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE portion of the jackpot command indicates an ending ( B2110). When the MODE part indicates the ending (the result of B2110 is "Y"), that is, when the jackpot command is the ending command, the effect control device 300 executes the ending effect setting process for setting the ending effect, The game state flag indicating the current game state (P machine state) of the game machine 10 is set to "ending" (B2111, B2112), and the jackpot command process is terminated.

In addition, when the MODE part of the received jackpot command does not represent the ending (the result of B2110 is "N"), the effect control device 300 ends the jackpot command processing without executing any processing. do.

[Actions and effects of the first embodiment]
According to the first embodiment, the gaming machine 10 displays a variable display game that variably displays identification information based on establishment of a start condition (for example, winning a prize in a start winning slot). Alternatively, a game control means (game control device 100) that can be displayed on the second special figure variation display unit 52) is provided, and when the stop result of the variation display game becomes a special result, a special game state advantageous to the player is generated. Let The setting change means (for example, the setting key switch 93 and the set value change switch 102) can change the setting regarding the game condition (or the setting regarding the game) when the gaming machine 10 is turned on. The game control means (game control device 100) can shift to a variable setting state in which settings can be changed when power is turned on to the gaming machine 10, and when power is turned off before shifting to the variable setting state. A predetermined display is displayed on the display unit regardless of the state of the gaming machine 10 (FIG. 34).

Therefore, in the setting variable state (during setting change), a predetermined display on the display unit for the special figure variation display game, which is easy to see from the front of the gaming machine 10, indicates that the setting is being changed, and that the gaming machine 10 is playing the game. It can be suggested that it is in a state where it is impossible to play (for example, a variable display game). In addition, even in the setting variable state, the state of the gaming machine 10 at the time of power shutdown is maintained, and the normal display (losing pattern, big hit pattern) etc. at the time of stopping the fluctuation is displayed on the display unit for the special figure fluctuation display game. In this case, for example, when the front frame 12 (body frame) is closed before the setting change is completed, there is a possibility that the user may misunderstand that the game is ready to play.

According to the first embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) can display a variable display game that variably displays the identification information based on the establishment of the starting condition on the light emitting unit (for example, the LED lamps D1 and D2). . The gaming machine 10 includes this light emitting unit and a display device (collective display device 50) including another light emitting unit different from the light emitting unit. The game control means may blink all the light emitting parts of the display device in the setting variable state in which the setting can be changed (FIG. 34F).

Therefore, in the variable setting state (during setting change), the display device (collective display device 50) displays a different display than usual, so that the gaming machine 10 can be clearly displayed in front of the gaming machine 10 in a state in which the game cannot be played. .

According to the first embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) displays information suggesting that the setting variable state is in the variable setting state (during setting change) on the display unit (for example, the first special figure fluctuation display It may be displayed on the part 51 or the second special figure fluctuation display part 52) (FIG. 34B).

Therefore, in the setting variable state (during setting change), by displaying a display different from usual on the variable display game display section, it is possible to clearly indicate in front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 is in a state in which the game cannot be played.

According to the first embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) displays the display unit (for example, the first special figure variation display unit 51 and the second special figure variation display unit 52 in the setting variable state (during setting change) ) may be extinguished (FIG. 34D).

Therefore, in the setting variable state (during setting change), by performing a display different from normal on the display unit for the variable display game (a display different from when the variable display game is stopped), the gaming machine 10 can be in a state where the game cannot be played. One thing can be clearly shown on the front of the gaming machine 10 .

According to the first embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) displays the same display as the stop result (loss result) of the variable display game other than the special result (other than the big hit result) in the setting variable state (for example, , 1st special figure fluctuation display section 51 or 2nd special figure fluctuation display section 52) may be displayed (Fig. 34C).

Therefore, by displaying a predetermined display on the variable display game display section in the variable setting state (during setting change), it is possible to indicate in front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 is not executing a game. By displaying the stop result (loss result) of the variable display game other than the special result (other than the big hit result) during the setting change, the data displayed on the display unit for the variable display game can be changed to the initial state when the setting change is completed. No need to set the value.

[Second embodiment]
A second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 49. FIG. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first embodiment. In addition, in the following embodiment, the same reference numerals are used for the configuration having the same function as in the first embodiment, and overlapping descriptions are omitted as appropriate.

The first embodiment relates to a look-ahead effect of the chance (a look-ahead notice of the chance) by a losing symbol. A chance lottery, which is a specific stop result mode (specific losing stop pattern mode) of a decoration special figure variation display game, can be drawn or selected according to a set value (probability set value), and the set value is suggested or notified by the chance number. enable.

[Stop symbol setting process]
Stop symbol setting processing according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the stop symbol setting process (B2012) executed by the effect control device 300 in the variable effect setting process (FIG. 44) when executing the special figure variation display game. In the stop symbol setting process, the stop symbol (stop result) of the decorative special symbol variation display game is determined.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the special figure variation display game related to the received variation command is a big hit (B2301). When the special figure variation display game is a big hit (the result of B2301 is "Y"), a big hit stop pattern ("2, 2, 2", etc.) is selected according to the pattern type (B1802) (B2302).

When the special figure variation display game is not a big hit (the result of B2301 is "N"), the effect control device 300 sets the number of times of the look-ahead effect (remaining number of times of the continuous effect) of the chance look-ahead effect as the continuous notice effect to 0. It is determined whether or not there is (B2303). When the number of times of look-ahead effect (remaining number of continuous advance notice effects) is 0 (result of B2303 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step B2308. In addition, the initial value of the number of prefetch effects (remaining number of continuous notice effects) is the expectation of the prefetch target hold jackpot, that is, the special figure fluctuation display game executed by the prefetch target hold. can be set.

Effect control device 300, when the number of prefetch effects (remaining number of continuous advance notice effects) is not 0 (the result of B2303 is "N"), the chance stop symbol mode (chance mode, lost symbol group) is the prefetch target. It is set according to the degree of expectation of the pending jackpot (B2304). The chance eye stop symbol mode includes a normal mode in which a set value cannot be suggested or reported, a special mode in which a set value can be suggested (set value suggestion mode), and a confirmed mode in which a set value can be definitely reported. (setting notification mode) (see FIG. 47).

For example, when a special 1 reach (SP1 reach) occurs in a special figure variation display game related to the hold (starting memory) of the look-ahead target, the chance eye stop pattern mode is set to a normal mode, and a special 2 reach (SP2 reach) is generated. can be set to a special mode when , and can be set to a definite mode when a special 3 reach (SP3 reach) occurs. As described above, the expected degree (expected value) of the big hit is in the order of SP1 reach<SP2 reach<SP3 reach, so the chance stop symbol mode can be set according to the expected degree of the reserved big hit of the look-ahead target. Conversely, when SP3 reach occurs in the special figure variation display game related to the reservation of the prefetch target, the chance stop symbol mode is set to the normal mode, and when SP2 reach occurs, it is set to the special mode, It may be set to the definite mode when SP3 reach occurs.

As described above, by setting the chance stop symbol mode corresponding to the ready-to-win type (system of ready-to-win production) of the prefetch target hold, the chance eye stop symbol mode is set according to the expectation of the prefetch target hold jackpot. can be set. Therefore, according to the chance stop symbol mode, it is possible to notify the degree of expectation of the big hit of the reservation of the prefetch object as the prefetch effect. In addition, the reach type generated in the special figure variation display game related to the hold of the lookahead target can be understood from the lookahead variation pattern command as the lookahead variation system command (B1215) and the contents of the variation effect (B2010).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not to execute a setting suggestion effect (setting-related effect) for suggesting or notifying a set value (B2305). When the chance stop symbol mode is the normal mode and the setting suggestion effect is not executed (the result of B2305 is "N"), the lost symbol mode (lost symbol group) of the normal mode is lost and stopped regardless of the set value. is selected (B2306), and the stop symbol setting process is terminated. When the chance stop symbol mode is a special mode or a fixed mode, and the setting suggestion effect is executed (the result of B2305 is "Y"), if it is a special mode, from the special mode lost symbol mode (lost symbol group) A lost stop pattern is selected by lottery probability according to the set value, and if it is a fixed mode, a lost stop pattern is fixed (determined) from the lost pattern mode (loose pattern group) of the fixed mode according to the set value (B2307). .

Effect control device 300, when the number of times of look-ahead effect (remaining number of times of continuous notice effect) is 0 (the result of B2303 is "Y"), executes the setting suggestion effect (setting related effect) to suggest or notify the setting value. It is determined whether or not to do so (B2308). For example, if a lottery is held and the player wins, it may be determined that the setting suggesting effect is to be executed. When the setting suggesting effect is not executed (the result of B2308 is "N"), a drawing for a stop symbol is drawn regardless of the set value (B2309). When the setting suggesting effect is to be executed (the result of B2308 is "Y"), a deviated stop symbol is drawn with a drawing probability according to the set value (B2310). In this way, even if the number of prefetch effects (remaining number of continuous advance notice effects) is 0 and the chance prefetch effects are not executed (the result of B2303 is "Y"), the setting suggestion effect is performed independently of the chance prefetch effects. can run.

Note that the processing from steps B2308 to B2310 is optional and may not be executed.

[Chance eye stop pattern mode]
FIG. 47 is a diagram for explaining the chance stop symbol mode in the chance look-ahead effect. The chance eye stop symbol mode includes a normal mode, a special mode (setting suggestion mode), and a fixed mode (setting notification mode).

In the lost pattern mode (lost pattern group) of the normal mode, for example, "2, 4, 6" (blue), "1, 5, 9" (green), "3, 7, 7" (red) There is a stop pattern. For example, "2, 4, 6" (green), "1, 5, 9" (red), "3, 7, 7" (blue) are lost in the special mode lost pattern mode (lost pattern group). There is a stop pattern. ``○, 1, 1'', ``○, 2, 2'', ``○, 3, 3'', ``○, 4, 4'', ``○, 5 , 5” and “O, 6, 6” are the stop symbols. In addition, ◯ indicates an arbitrary pattern different from the two aligned patterns (coordinates) in the middle and right of the three decoration identification patterns (identification information) in the left and right.

It should be noted that the disconnection stop pattern of the confirmation mode (setting notification mode) has colors and shapes that are not used in the normal mode and the special mode (for example, gold and rainbow colors other than blue, green, and red) and shapes. You can separate them for ease of use.

In the normal mode, the selection rate (distribution rate) in the lottery for each lost stop symbol is set to the same value regardless of the setting (set value). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 47, the probabilities (expectations) of each setting are the same (100/6≈17%) when one losing stop symbol of the normal mode is selected. The probability in FIG. 47 is the degree of expectation of each set value that the player can guess when a specific losing and stopping symbol is displayed. Therefore, the normal mode is a mode in which the player cannot estimate the setting value, that is, the mode in which the setting value cannot be suggested or notified. In addition, in the example of FIG. 47, the selection rate of the losing stop symbols in the normal mode in one lottery is 100/3 (≈33.3)%.

In the special mode, the selection rate in the lottery for each lost stop symbol is determined to be different depending on the setting (set value). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 47, the probabilities (expectations) of each setting when one losing stop symbol of the special mode is selected are different (some settings may be the same). Therefore, the special mode is a mode in which the player can estimate the setting value, that is, a mode in which the setting value can be suggested.

In the fixed mode, the selection rate in the lottery for each lost stop symbol is set to 100% for only one predetermined setting (set value). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 47, when one lost stop symbol in the definite mode is selected, the probability (expected degree) of one predetermined setting becomes 100%, and the probability (expected degree) of another setting becomes 100%. degree) becomes 0%. Therefore, the definite mode is a mode in which the player can recognize the set value, that is, a mode in which the set value can be definitely notified.

It should be noted that the three decorative identification patterns in the special mode can suggest set values by having specific colors. For example, the off stop symbol "2, 4, 6" (blue) in the normal mode cannot suggest a set value. However, the lost stop symbol “2, 4, 6” (blue) of the normal mode and the lost stop symbol “2, 4, 6” (green) of the special mode, which has the same number part and is different only in color, have a specific color ( green) can suggest a setpoint. It should be noted that the three decoration identification patterns of the special mode may suggest the set value by having a specific shape.

FIG. 48 is a diagram showing another example of selecting a chance eye stop symbol mode (chance eye mode, lost symbol group) in step B2304. In the example of FIG. 48, the chance stop symbol mode is set by lottery with different selection rates (distribution rates) depending on whether the special figure variation display game related to the reservation of the prefetch target is a big hit or a loss. Therefore, in the example of FIG. 48 as well, in the example of FIG. 48, as a look-ahead effect, the chance eye stop symbol mode is set to correspond to the ready-to-win type of pre-reading object suspension. You can let us know your expectations. It should be noted that it can be known from the symbol type (B1802) whether the reservation of the prefetch target is a big hit or a loss.

As shown in FIG. 48(A), the degree of expectation of the big hit of the reservation of the prefetch target may be increased in the order of normal mode<special mode<fixed mode. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 48(B), the degree of expectation of the big hit of the reservation of the prefetch target may be increased in the order of fixed mode<special mode<normal mode. In the case of FIG. 48(B), the confirmation mode or the special mode is selected, and even if the player recognizes that the expectation of the pending jackpot of the prefetch target is low, the setting (set value) is confirmed by the confirmation mode. The player is not discouraged because the game is notified in a timely manner.

In addition, if the selection rate of the normal mode, the special mode, and the fixed mode in FIG. It is the same as setting the normal mode, the special mode, and the definite mode corresponding to the occurrence of SP1 reach, SP2 reach, and SP3 reach.

It should be noted that the number of jackpots from turning on the power of the gaming machine 10 and the start of the game, the number of consecutive jackpots from the start of the jackpot to returning to the normal game state (the number of consecutive wins), and the operating time of the gaming machine 10 increase. A configuration that increases the selection rate of the definite mode is also possible. Since the fixed mode is a privilege for the player, the operation of the gaming machine 10 can be increased by this configuration.

As described above, the chance stop symbol mode is associated with the expectation level of the reserved jackpot of the look-ahead object, and the chance stop symbol mode (especially the special mode, the confirmed mode) is drawn at a probability corresponding to the set value. can. As a result, the losing stop pattern is drawn with a probability (selection rate) according to the result of the special figure variation display game (big win or loss) related to the reservation of the prefetch target and the set value.

〔Screen transition〕
49A and 49B are screen transition diagrams showing the display screens of the display device 41 in chronological order regarding the second embodiment.

(A) of FIG. 49A is a display screen during execution of the decoration special figure variation display game. The variation (↓↓↓) of the decorative special pattern (large pattern) is being executed in the variable display area 610, and the variation (↓↓↓) of the decorative reduced pattern (small pattern) is being executed in the variable display area 615. In the special figure 1 reservation number display part 650 and the special figure 2 reservation number display part 660 in the upper right corner of the display screen of the display device 41, the number "2" indicating the special figure 1 reservation number and the special figure 2 reservation number are displayed respectively. number "0" is displayed.

The suspension display portion 630 (starting memory display portion) includes a first suspension display portion 630a that displays the first starting memory as a first suspension display (first starting memory display), and a second starting memory as a second suspension display (second starting memory display). 2 starting memory display). Two pending displays 633 are displayed as first pending displays in the first pending display portion 630a. At present, the pending display 633 is not displayed in the second pending display portion 630b. Also, a rectangular pending digestion area 640 is displayed in the bottom center of the display screen. A change pending display 633 a indicating a hold related to the special figure fluctuation display game being executed (a start memory that has become the execution right of this special figure fluctuation display game) is displayed in the reserve digestion area 640 .

After that, in (a), a hold (first start memory) occurs due to the winning of the start prize opening 36, and the hold display 633 (black) corresponding to the hold that has occurred changes from the normal mode to the mode ( color) has changed to a pending display. Then, a chance-first look-ahead effect (continuous notice effect) is set with the occurrence of a hold with a high expectation of a big hit as a look-ahead target hold (B1712, B1716). In addition, it increases to the number "3" indicating the special figure 1 reservation number in the special figure 1 reservation number display unit 650.

Then, in (c), the decorative special figure variation display game is finished, and the first chance look-ahead effect is executed with the display of the lost stop pattern "2, 4, 6" (blue) in the normal mode. . Here, all or part of the lost stop symbols may be blinked so as to make the player recognize that it is a chance look-ahead effect. In addition, when the decoration special figure fluctuation display game ends, the pending display 633a during fluctuation is erased. In the normal mode, the player cannot guess the settings (set values).

After that, in (d), the next decoration special figure variation display game is being executed. The pending display 633 moves to the right (hold shift), and the rightmost pending display 633 of the first pending display portion 630 a moves to the pending digestion area 640 . In addition, the number indicating the special figure 1 reservation number in the special figure 1 reservation number display unit 650 is reduced to "2".

Then, in (E), the decorative special figure fluctuation display game is over, and the second chance look-ahead effect is a special mode (setting suggestion mode) of the stop pattern "1, 5, 9" (red) Executed on display. Here, all or part of the losing and stopping symbols may be blinked so as to make the player recognize that it is a chance look-ahead effect. A setting (setting value) is suggested by the stop symbol of the special mode, and the player can estimate the setting (setting value) (according to FIG. 47, setting 4 is highly probable).

After that, in (F), the next decorative special figure variation display game is being executed. The pending display 633 moves to the right (hold shift), and the rightmost pending display 633 of the first pending display portion 630 a moves to the pending digestion area 640 . In addition, the number indicating the special figure 1 reservation number in the special figure 1 reservation number display unit 650 is reduced to "1".

Then, in (G) of FIG. 49B, the decorative special figure fluctuation display game is over, and the third chance look-ahead effect is the stop pattern "1, 6, 6" of the fixed mode (set notification mode). Executed on display. Here, all or part of the losing and stopping symbols may be blinked so as to make the player recognize that it is a chance look-ahead effect. The setting (set value) is definitely notified by the deviating stop symbol of the determined mode, and the player can recognize the setting (set value) (setting 6 is determined according to FIG. 47).

In addition, in the case of the confirmed mode, a dialogue 635 may be displayed as a character image. The line 635 is selected according to the setting (set value) determined by the deviating stop symbol of the determination mode. For example, when setting 6 (set value 6) is confirmed with the lost stop symbol "○, 6, 6" as in (G), "Congratulations!" , 1” and the setting 1 (setting value 1) is confirmed, “Unfortunate” may be displayed.

After that, in (h), the next decoration special figure fluctuation display game is being executed by holding the look-ahead target. The pending display 633 moves to the right (hold shift), and the prefetch target pending display 633 (black) at the right end of the first pending display portion 630 a moves to the pending digest area 640 . In addition, the number indicating the special figure 1 reservation number in the special figure 1 reservation number display unit 650 is reduced to "0".

After that, in (vii), the decoration special figure variation display game is finished, the suspended display during variation 633a is erased, and the jackpot stop symbol "5, 5, 5" is displayed. Then, in (J), a big win round starts as a special game state.

Regarding the above screen transition, even in the special mode of (e) in FIG. 49A, dialogue as a character image may be displayed. The lines may be selected according to the special aspect stop symbols. In addition, it is possible to suggest a setting by combining words and a special aspect stop symbol. For example, in the combination of the lost stop pattern "1, 5, 9" (red) and the line "Congratulations!" ” (red) and the line “Unfortunate” may be set to have a high probability of setting 1 (set value 1).

Further, with regard to the screen transition in FIG. 49, only when the lost stop pattern in the confirmed mode is displayed, the whole or part of the lost stop pattern may be flashed conspicuously. Furthermore, in FIG. 49, the chance stop symbol mode in the third chance look-ahead effect is different every time, but the chance stop symbol mode may be the same each time. Then, this same mode may be determined according to the degree of expectation of a big hit held by the prefetch target.

[Actions and effects of the second embodiment]
According to the second embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is a variable display game (decorative special symbol variable display game) that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information (decorative special symbols) based on establishment of a start condition (for example, winning a prize in a start winning slot). ) can be displayed on the display device 41, and a special game state advantageous to the player when the stop result mode of the variable display game is the special result mode (jackpot result mode). generate The setting change means (for example, the setting key switch 93 and the set value change switch 102) can change the setting (set value) regarding the game conditions. The starting memory means (for example, the game control device 100) can store a starting memory that is the right to execute the variable display game based on the establishment of the starting condition. Prior determination means (for example, game control device 100) determines execution information (for example, variation display game result, variation pattern, etc.) is determined before the variation display game based on the start memory is executed.

Further, according to the second embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300), when the stop result mode of the variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) does not become the special result mode (jackpot result mode), By setting the stop result mode to a specific stop result mode (for example, a special mode, a fixed mode), it is possible to execute a notice effect (chance look-ahead effect, chance look-ahead notice) based on the determination result of the advance determination means. Furthermore, the production control means (production control device 300) uses the specific stop result mode (for example, special mode, confirmation mode) to suggest or notify the setting (setting value) setting related effects (setting suggestion effect) It is viable.

Therefore, in the notice effect based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means, it is possible to suggest or notify the setting (set value), so that the player can set (set value) as well as guess whether it will be a big hit or not. can also be estimated, and it is possible to prevent the announcement effect from becoming monotonous. Therefore, the amusement of the game is improved. Furthermore, in the announcement effect, even when the degree of expectation for a big win is low, the player has more fun guessing the setting (set value), and the interest in the game is improved.

According to the second embodiment, the production control means (production control device 300) can execute a setting-related production by having a plurality of identification information (decorative special symbols) of a specific stop result mode have a specific color. . Therefore, the player also pays attention to the color of the identification information (decorative special symbol) of the stop result mode, and the interest in the game is improved.

According to the second embodiment, the production control means (production control device 300), a plurality of identification information (loss stop pattern) of a specific stop result mode (for example, special mode, definite mode), the specific stop result mode It is selected when executing the variable display game to be derived (FIGS. 43, 44, and 46). Therefore, a plurality of pieces of identification information (loss stop symbols) can be selected when the variable display game is executed, not at the time of the preliminary determination, thereby reducing the burden of processing (control) at the time of the preliminary determination.

[Third embodiment]
A third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 54 . Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first and second embodiments. In addition, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first embodiment and the second embodiment, and overlapping descriptions are omitted as appropriate. The third embodiment relates to the initial operation of the accessory (movable member) when the power is turned on.

[Back side of game machine]
First, with reference to FIG. 50, the configuration of the game control device 100 (main board) and the like arranged on the back side of the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 50 is a back view of the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment.

A game control device 100 (main board) for overall control of the game via a switch base 738 is arranged on the back surface of the game board 30 , and the game control device 100 is controlled via a control base 733 above the switch base 738 . A production control device 300 is provided for controlling the display device 41 and the like based on the production control command (production command) transmitted from. Behind the effect control device 300, a protective cover 737 covering the back surface of the effect control device 300 and the upper back surface of the game control device 100 is provided. When the game board 30 configured as described above is stored in the storage portion of the front frame 12, the protective cover 737 and the game control device 100 provided on the back surface of the game board 30 protrude behind the front frame 12. do.

A storage unit 750 is disposed on the upper back surface of the front frame 12 to store game balls supplied from a supply device (not shown) provided in the island facility, and to align and flow down the stored game balls. . A payout unit 790 for paying out game balls falling from the storage unit 750 to the upper tray 21 (see FIG. 1) is disposed on one inner side of the front frame 12 .

In addition, on the lower back surface of the front frame 12, a payout control device 200 that controls the operation of the payout unit 790 based on data transmitted from the game control device 100, and a game ball based on the rotation operation of the operation handle 24. A ball shooting device 742 that shoots, a connection terminal 743 that connects to a card unit (not shown), and a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices are provided.

In addition, on the lower part of the back surface of the game control device 100, a setting key switch 93 (key switch) and a setting value change switch 102 (setting value change button switch) of a setting change device 42 (setting change means) capable of changing settings related to game conditions are provided. , button switches) and a 7-segment type probability setting value display device 143 (display, LED lamp) are provided. As described above, the setting key switch 93, the set value change switch 102, and the probability set value display device 143 are provided inside the gaming machine 10, and cannot be operated (accessed) unless the front frame 12 is opened, for example. That is, general players cannot access and operate the setting change device 42 and cannot confirm the display of the probability set value display device 143 . In addition, since the setting key switch 93, the set value change switch 102, and the probability set value display device 143 are provided inside the game machine 10, they can There is no hidden (overlapping).

The probability set value display device 143 may be provided at a position where it is not hidden during the initial action of the internal accessories 44a and 44b and the external accessory 95a, and may be provided exclusively on the front surface of the game board 30, for example. In addition, when the probability setting value is displayed so as to be visible from the front of the game board 30, the display device (LED lamp) or the like of the batch display device 50 may be used as the probability setting value display device 143, and the display device 41 may be used as the probability set value display device 143 . Furthermore, even when the probability set value display device 143 is provided so as to be visible from the front of the game board 30, it is preferable that it is invisible to the player and visible only to the operator. For example, the display of the probability set value display device 143 may be made visible by the operator performing a specific operation on the effect button 25 . Also, the display of the set probability display device 143 may be made visible by the player using a special member (for example, a polarizing filter) or by receiving a specific signal from a hall computer (not shown). Similarly, the setting change device 42 is made accessible when the front frame 12 is opened. It may be made operable.

78A may be used as the probability set value display device 143, and the probability set value display device 143 may be used as the state display device. When using the 152 character ratio display unit 68, four 7-segment type (8-segment type including dot parts) displays 900 of the character ratio display unit 68 during setting change or setting confirmation Any one of them (for example, the leftmost or rightmost display 900) may display the set probability value. Note that the character product ratio is displayed in the character product ratio display section 68 except during setting change or setting confirmation. Therefore, the character product ratio display section 68 can be used for both the display of the character product ratio and the display of the set value.

Also, a cover member may be provided so as to cover the front surface of the setting key switch 93 . By providing the cover member in this manner, it is possible to prevent the setting key switch 93 from being operated by a person who does not have the setting key or a person who commits fraud, thereby enhancing the crime prevention effect. Furthermore, when a cover member is provided, a detection sensor may be provided to detect whether the cover member covers the setting key switch 93 or not. By inputting the detection signal from the detection sensor to the second input port 123 as shown in FIG. 3, the game control device 100 can determine whether or not the cover member covers the setting key switch 93. . For example, when the front frame 12 is closed and the cover member does not cover the front surface of the setting key switch 93, the game control device 100 notifies the error by the display device 41, speaker 19, LED, By performing from a lamp or the like, it is possible to take anticrime measures and countermeasures against fraud.

[Production control device according to the third embodiment]
Next, with reference to Drawing 51, composition of production control device 300 (sub board) concerning a 3rd embodiment is explained. FIG. 51 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control system of the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment.

In the production control device 300 of the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4).

The effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls the board decoration device 46, a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls the frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18, etc.), and a movable body control circuit. 334a is provided.

The movable body control circuit 334 a drives and controls the board effect device 44 provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40 ), and also drives and controls the frame effect device 95 provided on the glass frame 15 .

As shown in FIG. 52A, for example, the board effect device 44 includes internal accessories 44a and 44b (inner movable members) that cooperate with the effect display on the display device 41 to enhance the effect, and a motor (not shown).

FIG. 52A is a front view when the board effect device 44 of the game board 30 according to the third embodiment operates.

The internal accessory 44a of the board effect device 44 is housed in the back of the center case 40 so as not to be visually recognized by the player, and is positioned in front of the display device 41 by moving and covers the upper side of the display device 41. . On the internal accessory 44a, the characters "Geki-netsu" are drawn to indicate that the expectation of a big win is particularly high. Similarly, the internal accessory 44b of the board effect device 44 is positioned in front of the display device 41 and covers the lower left side of the display device 41 by moving. In addition, the internal accessory 44b is drawn with the character "♪" to indicate that the expectation of a big hit is high. A sound may be generated from a speaker along with the moving operation of the internal accessory 44b.

In addition, the effect control device 300, in the advance notice lottery of steps B2006 and B2009 of FIG. I can suggest. Then, the player will have more fun guessing the set value, and the interest in the game will be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 52B, for example, the frame effect device 95 includes an external accessory 95a (outer movable member) that cooperates with the effect display on the display device 41 to enhance the effect, a motor (not shown), and the like.

FIG. 52B is a front view when the frame effect device 95 of the glass frame 15 (open portion) according to the third embodiment operates.

The external accessory 95a of the frame effect device 95 is housed inside the glass frame 15 so as not to be visually recognized by the player, and when the frame effect device 95 is driven, it becomes a hemispherical member above the glass frame 15. protrude. A character 95b is drawn on the external accessory 95a to notify that the expectation of a big win is high. Note that the frame rendering device 95 may be provided not only on the glass frame 15 but also on the front frame 12 .

In addition, the effect control device 300 can suggest the set value by drawing the external accessory 95a with a selection rate (probability) corresponding to the set value and operating it in the advance notice lottery of steps B2006 and B2009 in FIG. . Then, the player will have more fun guessing the set value, and the interest in the game will be improved.

Then, the effect control device 300 executes movable body control processing to drive and control the board effect device 44 and the frame effect device 95 using the movable body control circuit 334a.

[Movable body control processing]
FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the procedure of movable body control processing according to the third embodiment.

Effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the power is turned on (B3001). In addition, it is good also as determining whether it is at the time of power failure recovery.

When the performance control device 300 determines that the power is not turned on (the result of B3001 is "N"), normal control processing is started according to the content of the performance set in the variable performance setting processing (FIG. 44). (B3003). On the other hand, when the effect control device 300 determines that the power is turned on (the result of B3001 is "Y"), it determines whether or not a command for changing the probability setting is received (B3002).

A command during probability setting change is determined to be received when the MODE section indicates a setting change system (result of B1325 is "Y") in the single-shot command processing (FIG. 39). be done. That is, the front frame 12 (body frame, body portion) is opened (the result of A1023 or A1027 in FIG. 5A is "Y"), and the setting key switch 93 of the setting change device 42 is turned on (A1024 or A1028 result is "Y"), a command during probability setting change is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 (A1041 in FIG. 5B). When the set value change switch 102 of the setting change device 42 is pressed while the probability setting is being changed, the set value regarding the game condition is changed. In addition, the information of the set value related to the changed game condition is displayed on the probability set value display device 143 .

Effect control device 300, when it is determined that it has received a command during probability setting change (result of B3002 is "Y"), determines whether it has received a command to end the probability setting change ( B3004).

It is determined that the probability setting change end command has been received when the MODE section indicates the setting change type by the probability setting change end command (result of B1325 is "Y") in the single-shot command processing (FIG. 39). be done. That is, when the probability setting value has been changed (the result of A2406 in FIG. 10 is "Y") and the setting key switch 93 is turned off (the result of A2416 is "Y"), the probability setting change end command is issued to the game. It is transmitted from the control device 100 to the effect control device 300 (A2421).

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, when it is determined that the command during the probability setting change is not received (the result of B3002 is "N"), that is, when the power is normally turned on, the body frame open error It is determined whether or not it is occurring (B3006). For example, when a state-on command indicating a body frame open error (front frame open error) is received as an error/illegal command (B1315), it can be determined that a body frame open error is occurring.

Effect control device 300, when it is determined that the command of probability setting change end is received (the result of B3004 is "Y"), that is, when the probability setting change is ended, the body frame open error is occurring. (B3006). On the other hand, when the effect control device 300 determines that the command for ending the probability setting change is not received (the result of B3004 is "N"), that is, when the probability setting is being changed, the internal accessory 44a, 44b only starts initial operation control processing (B3005).

In the initial operation control process (B3005) for the internal role products 44a and 44b, for example, the motors that move the internal role products 44a and 44b of the board effect device 44 are respectively driven to control the internal role products 44a and 44b. is moved forward of the display device 41, control is performed to move it to the initial position (initial operation control). Further, for example, after the initial operation control of the internal role product 44a is completed, the initial operation control of the internal role product 44b is performed. Thus, the initial operation control of the internal role product 44a and the initial operation control of the internal role product 44b are executed in order. Similarly, when another internal accessory other than the internal accessories 44a and 44b is attached, the initial operation control of each internal accessory is executed in order. The initial operation control of the internal role product 44a and the initial operation control of the internal role product 44b may be executed in parallel.

Production control device 300, when it is determined that the body frame open error is occurring (the result of B3006 is "Y"), that is, when the front frame 12 (body frame) is open, the internal accessories Only 44a and 44b start initial operation control processing (B3005). In this way, the effect control device 300, when the setting change device 42 is operated or the front frame 12 is opened, starts only the initial operation control processing of the internal roles 44a and 44b, It functions as a restricting means that restricts the initial movement of the object 95a so as not to execute it.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, when it is determined that the body frame open error is not occurring (the result of B3006 is "N"), that is, when the front frame 12 (body frame) is closed, external The regulation of the initial action of the role product 95a is released, and the initial action control processing of the internal role products 44a and 44b and the external role product 95a is started (B3007).

In the initial operation control processing (B3007) of the internal role products 44a, 44b and the external role product 95a, the internal role products 44a, 44b of the board effect device 44 perform initial operation control similar to the processing of B3005. In the external role 95a of the frame effect device 95, the motor for moving the external role 95a is driven to project the external role 95a from the upper side of the glass frame 15 (open portion). Control to operate is performed (initial operation control). Thus, the effect control device 300 functions as control means for controlling the actions of the internal roles 44a and 44b and the external role 95a. When another external role different from the external role 95a is further attached, the initial operation control of the external role 95a and the initial operation control of the other external role are executed in order.

In addition, in the initial action control process (B3007) for the internal role products 44a, 44b and the external role product 95a, the time required for the initial action control of the internal role products 44a, 44b, which have a large number of movable roles, is greater than that of the external role product 95a. is longer than the time required for the initial operation control of It should be noted that regardless of the number of movable roles, even if the internal roles 44a and 44b have a plurality of presentation modes and the actions are complicated, the time required for the initial motion control of the internal roles 44a and 44b is greater than that of the external role. It is longer than the time required for the initial motion control of the object 95a. In addition, between the center case 40 and the glass frame 15 (open part) (for example, a position between the internal accessories 44a, 44b and the external accessory 95a), for example, a movable opening that operates toward the center side of the game machine 10 In the case of providing a role object to move, it is desirable to perform initial operation control for the movable role object in the same way as for the external role object 95a. That is, when the front frame 12 (main body frame, main body) is open, the initial action of the movable accessory is regulated in the same manner as the initial action of the external accessory 95a and is not executed.

In addition, when the front frame 12 (body frame, body portion) is open, the initial action of the external role product 95a is regulated so that it is not executed. (Movable member) only the initial motion of the entire external role product 95a is regulated, that is, without executing the initial motion of the entire external role product 95a, the movable members of the external role product 95a other than the initial motion (second effect section, second movable member, It is possible to execute the initial mode such as the motion mode (for example, vibration or rocking) of the character 95b) and the light emission mode of the light emitting member (second effect section, second movable member) (for example, the eyes (LED) of the character 95b light up). may be That is, such a second effect section can switch the effect mode to the initial mode in the initial state before executing the predetermined action (normal action) of the second effect section. By doing so, even when the initial action of the first effect section is restricted and not executed, the external accessory 95a can be placed inside the opened front frame 12 (main body frame, main body portion). can be performed in advance.

[Timing chart of initial operation control process]
Next, with reference to Drawing 54A and Drawing 54B, timing of initial operation control processing of production control device 300 concerning a 3rd embodiment is explained. FIG. 54A is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of the initial operation control process according to the third embodiment, and FIG. 54B is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of the initial operation control process of the comparative example.

First, the timing of the initial operation control process according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 54A.

When the power is turned on at time T1, the probability setting value changing flag and the signal of the front frame open detection switch 64 (body frame open detection switch) are turned on, and the internal accessory 44a starts executing the initial operation. . In addition, before the power is turned on, the front frame 12 (body frame) is opened and the setting key switch 93 is turned on, but the game control device 100 and the like are not in operation. The value changing flag and the signal of the front frame open detection switch 64 (body frame open detection switch) are not turned on. Also, an initial operation control process for the internal accessory 44a is executed (B3005 in FIG. 53). Note that the initial action of the external accessory 95a is regulated and is not executed.

The probability setting value changing flag is turned on by being set (A1038) in the main processing (FIG. 5B), and the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is set in the probability setting value confirmation processing (FIG. 11). (A2505), turn on. Commands corresponding to these flags are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 (A1041 in FIG. 5B, A2508 in FIG. 11). In addition, when the signal of the front frame open detection switch 64 (body frame open detection switch) is turned on (A2202), a state ON command indicating a body frame open error (front frame open error) is transmitted to the effect control device 300 ( A2207, A2217).

When the operator finishes changing the probability set value at time T2 (A2414 and A2415 in FIG. 10), the probability set value changing flag is cleared and turned off, and the probability set value confirmation mode flag is set and turned on. (A2505 in FIG. 11). In the first embodiment, the probability setting value changing flag is turned on until the setting key switch 93 is turned off. It is assumed that the medium flag is turned off and the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is turned on. As in the first embodiment, the probability setting value checking mode flag may be omitted, and the probability setting value changing flag may be turned on until the setting key switch 93 is turned off.

When the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time T3, the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is cleared and turned off (A2510 in FIG. 11).

At time t1 after time T3, the initial action control process for the internal role product 44a is completed, and the initial action control process for the internal role product 44b is executed (B3005 in FIG. 53).

In this embodiment, the time required for the initial action (initial action time) of the internal role products 44a and 44b and the external role product 95a is the same, but may be different. For example, the initial action time of the internal role products 44a and 44b, which tend to have complicated action modes, may be longer than the initial action time of the external role product 95a. In addition, the effect control device 300 increases the speed of the initial movement of the internal character products 44a and 44b by increasing the motor output, thereby making the initial operation time of the internal character objects 44a and 44b shorter than the initial operation time of the external character object 95a. You may

By closing the front frame 12 (body frame) at time T4, the signal of the front frame open detection switch 64 (body frame open detection switch) is turned off, and a state off command (A2204 ) is transmitted to the effect control device 300 as an error/illegal command. Then, the regulation of the initial action of the external role product 95a is released, and the initial action control process of the external role product 95a is executed (B3007 in FIG. 53). Thus, in the initial operation control process of this embodiment, when the front frame 12 is open, the initial operation control process of the external accessory 95a is not executed.

At time t2 after time T4, the initial action control process of the internal accessory 44b ends. Thus, in the initial action control process of the present embodiment, the initial action control process of the internal role products 44a and 44b is started prior to the initial action control process of the external role product 95a, and the initial action control process of the external role product 95a is started. Terminate before processing.

After that, at time t3, the initial operation control process of the external accessory 95a is completed, so that the gaming machine 10 can be used for playing a game.

Next, the timing of the initial operation control process according to the comparative example of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 54B. In the comparative example, the probability setting value changing flag, the probability setting value confirmation mode flag, and the signal of the front frame open detection switch 64 are also set from time T1 to time T4 at the same timing as the initial operation control process of the third embodiment. turned on and off.

Here, the internal accessory 44a of the comparative example does not execute the initial operation control process even when the power is turned on at time T1, and the initial operation is performed by closing the front frame 12 (main body frame) at time T1. Control processing is executed. Therefore, the initial operation control processing of the internal role product 44a and the external role product 95a of the comparative example are started at the same timing (time T4).

After that, at time t3, when the initial operation control processing of the internal role product 44a and the external role product 95a is completed, the initial operation control processing of the internal role product 44b is executed. On the other hand, the time t3 is the time when the gaming machine 10 becomes ready for playing according to the initial operation control process according to the present embodiment as described above.

Then, at time t4, the initial action control process of the internal accessory 44b ends, so that the gaming machine 10 of the comparative example can also be played. As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the comparative example, the time at which the game becomes available is later than that of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.

Note that the internal accessory 44a, 44b of the present embodiment executes the initial operation control process when the power is turned on at time T1, but when the front frame 12 is closed at time T4, the external accessory 95a An internal accessory may be provided for executing the initial operation control process at the same timing as the . For example, the operation mode of movable members (internal accessories) that affect the game, such as the opening/closing door 39c of the big winning opening and the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37, may be changed according to the set value. Alternatively, after the set value is set, the initial operation control process may be executed in accordance with the operation mode of the set value. By executing the initial operation control process after the set values are set in this way, the movable members that affect the game (the opening and closing door 39c of the large winning prize opening, the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37, the V winning prize opening ( It is possible to confirm whether or not the movable member that opens and closes the predetermined area) normally operates according to the operation mode of the set value. In addition, the V winning opening (predetermined area) is a winning device that may be provided in the special variable winning device 39, and when a game ball enters the V winning opening, notification of V winning is performed and the jackpot ends. Later definite variable state (high probability state, specific game state, one of the predetermined game state) is determined. In addition, the initial operation control processing of the movable member that affects the game is executed not only when the front frame 12 is closed at time T4, but also when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time T3. You can do it. Furthermore, the initial motion control process for the movable member may be executed when the change of the probability setting at time T2 is completed.

Also, the command during probability setting change is to open the front frame 12 (body frame) (the result of A1023 or A1027 in FIG. 5A is "Y") and turn on the setting key switch 93 of the setting change device 42. By (the result of A1024 or A1028 is "Y"), it was decided to be transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 (A1041 in FIG. 5B), but the setting change device 42 regardless of the open state of the front frame 12 may be transmitted when the setting key switch 93 of is turned on. Furthermore, after the setting key switch 93 is turned on, a command indicating that the probability setting is being changed may be transmitted at the timing when the setting value change switch 102 is first pressed.

Furthermore, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on after the power is turned on, or when the front frame 12 is opened, the probability setting value changing flag is set (the probability setting changing command is sent). State) A setting variable state in which the probability setting value can be changed may be set, and furthermore, in this setting variable state, a probability setting value confirmation mode flag may be set so that the probability setting value can be confirmed. Then, when the probability set value confirmation mode flag is set, the actions of both the internal role products 44a and 44b and the external role product 95a may be regulated so that they are not executed, or they may be returned to their initial positions. . Note that, in the same way as when the probability setting changing command of the present embodiment is transmitted, when the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is set, the initial operation control processing of the internal accessories 44a and 44b is executed. On the other hand, the initial action of the external accessory 95a may be restricted so as not to be executed.

[Action and effect of the third embodiment]
A game machine 10 having an openable frame (for example, a glass frame 15 or a front frame 12 (main body frame)) on which a game board 30 having a game area 32 according to the third embodiment is arranged, has a predetermined opening inside the frame. and an outer movable member (external role 95a) that performs a predetermined action outside the frame, and changes settings related to the game when a predetermined condition is established. Possible setting change means (setting change device 42) and control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the operation of the inner movable member and the outer movable member are provided. The control means can execute the initial operation of the inner movable member and the outer movable member when the gaming machine 10 is powered on, and can change the settings when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. When it is in the state, the initial movement of the inner movable member can be executed without executing the initial movement of the outer movable member.

According to such a gaming machine 10, when the gaming machine 10 is powered on, the control means (the production control device 300) is in a state in which the settings can be changed (for example, the setting changing means is operated (when the setting key switch 93 is on) or when the frame is open), the initial operation of the outer movable member is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the outer movable member from contacting the operator or interfering with the frame when operating the setting change means or opening and closing the frame, and the initial operation of the movable member can be appropriately performed in the game machine. can run to

The gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment further includes a setting display device (probability setting value display device 143) capable of displaying setting values corresponding to game-related settings. The setting display device is provided at a position that is not hidden by the initial operation of the inner movable members (internal accessories 44a and 44b) and the outer movable member (external accessory 95a). According to such a game machine 10, it is possible to prevent the setting display device from being hidden by the initial operation of the inner movable member and the outer movable member during the probability setting change, thereby suppressing the interruption of the operator's operation. can.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the control means (effect control device 300) cancels the regulation on the initial operation of the outer movable member (external accessory 95a) when the state in which the setting can be changed ends. make it possible. According to the gaming machine 10, it is possible to prevent the outer movable member from contacting the operator or interfering with the frame when operating the setting changing means or opening and closing the frame.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the control means (rendering control device 300) takes a longer time than the time required for the initial action of the outer movable member (external accessory 95a). Initial actions of the role objects 44a, 44b) are executed. According to the game machine 10, the initial motion of the inner movable member, which takes a long time to control the initial motion, is started during the probability setting change, and the initial motion of the outer movable member, which takes a short time to control the initial motion, It is started by closing the frames (front frame 12, body frame) after the completion of the probability setting change. Therefore, compared to the case where the initial operations of the inner movable member and the outer movable member are started at the same time after the frame is closed, the initial operation of the inner movable member, which takes time, can be started in advance, so that the game can be started. can shorten the time to

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the control means (the performance control device 300) determines whether the setting changing means (the setting changing device 42) is operated even when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. Alternatively, when the frame (front frame 12, body frame) is open, it is provided with a regulation means (effect control device 300) that regulates the initial movement of the outer movable member (external accessory 95a). According to such a game machine 10, since the outer movable member does not move while the probability setting is being changed or when the frame is open, it is possible to suppress the outer movable member from contacting the operator or interfering with the frame. .

Also, the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment includes an opening portion (glass frame 15) attached to the body portion (front frame 12, body frame) so as to be openable and closable. The gaming machine 10 includes a first effect section (external role 95a, first movable member) that executes a predetermined action outside the open section, and setting change means (setting A change device 42) and a control means (a production control device 300) for controlling the operation of the first production unit. The first rendering section has a second rendering section (character 95b, second movable member) capable of switching rendering modes in an initial state before executing a predetermined action (normal action). When the game machine 10 is powered on, the control means can execute the initial mode of the second effect section and the initial operation of the first effect part, and change the settings when the game machine 10 is powered on. When it is in the state of being enabled, the initial operation of the first effect part is not executed, and the initial mode of the second effect part is made executable. According to the gaming machine 10, the second effect section (the character 95b, the second movable member), which is unlikely to contact the operator or interfere with the frame, is replaced with the first effect section (the external character 95a, the second movable member). 1 movable member) can be initialized in an initial mode prior to the initial operation.

[Fourth Embodiment]
A fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 67. FIG. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to third embodiments. The fourth embodiment relates to a setting suggestion effect that can suggest a setting value.

[Processing when setting value is received]
First, with reference to FIG. 55, the details of the setting value reception processing (B1324) in the above-described one-shot command processing (FIG. 39) will be described. FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the setting value reception processing according to the fourth embodiment.

Effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received setting value is a normal command (B4001). If the command is not a normal command (the result of B4001 is "N"), the set value reception processing is terminated. When the command is normal (the result of B4001 is "Y"), the set value is stored in the RAM or the like of the effect control device 300 (B4002). Then, the effect control device 300 draws lots for the light emission mode (color) of the predetermined light emitting unit according to the received setting value in order to perform the setting suggestion effect that can suggest the setting value by the predetermined light emitting unit (B4003). . The predetermined light emitting unit is, for example, the projecting effect unit 13 (see FIG. 1), and the light emission mode (color) of the predetermined light emitting unit serves as a setting determination element that allows the player to estimate the setting (set value). In addition, the predetermined light-emitting part (effect device) is not limited to the projecting effect unit 13, but the lighting member capable of emitting light (the frame decoration device 18, the decoration device 22, the board decoration device 46, the big prize opening LED 39d, etc.) and the display device 41 display screen can be used.

[Lottery table for initial light emission mode]
Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the selectivity of the initial light emission mode (initial color) of the setting suggestion effect that the effect control device 300 draws upon receiving the set value will be described. FIG. 56 is a table for determining the initial lighting mode (initial color determination) of the setting suggestion effect of the fourth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 56, the initial color of the setting suggestion effect is selected from, for example, white, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow. The selection rate and selectable types change.

First, the fact that the types of selectable initial colors change according to the received setting values will be described. When the received setting values are settings 1 to 3, the initial color of the setting suggestion effect is selected from white, blue, and green. On the other hand, if the received setting value is setting 4, green can also be selected as the initial color, if setting 5, both green and red can be selected, and if setting 6, all types can be selected. be possible. Therefore, if the initial color of the predetermined light-emitting portion of the gaming machine 10 is green, the player sets the setting to 4 or more; if it is red, the setting is 5 or more; 6 can be estimated.

Next, it will be described how the selection rate of the initial color selected by lottery changes according to the received set value.

When the received setting value is setting 1, the selection rate of white as the initial color is 80%, the selection rate of blue is 15%, and the selection rate of yellow is 5%. The selection rate of white as the initial color is set to 75% for setting 2, 70% for setting 3, and so on, so that the selection rate decreases as the received setting value increases. . In this embodiment, the white selection rate is set to decrease in increments of 5% each time the received setting value increases by one. may be set to be the same. In this way, the lower the set value, the higher the selection rate of white as the initial color. It is easy to infer that 10 is likely to be a low setting platform.

On the other hand, the selection rate of yellow as the initial color is 5% for setting 1, 10% for setting 2, and 15% for settings 3 to 6, and the received setting values are higher. It is set so that the selectivity increases as the In this embodiment, the selectivity of yellow is fixed at 15% for settings 3 to 6, but the selectivity may be set higher as the set value increases.

In addition, the selection rate of the initial colors (green, red) selectable in setting 4 or setting 5 and the initial colors (green, red, rainbow) selectable in setting 6 are each set to 5%. Therefore, the higher the set value is, the higher the probability that an initial color other than white is selected. It becomes easy to estimate that the gaming machine 10 is highly likely to be a high-setting platform.

Note that the selectivity of each initial color is not limited to the mode shown in FIG. 56, and may be changed as appropriate. For example, the rainbow selectivity in setting 6 is not limited to 5%, and may be 1% or 10%. In this case, the selectivity of other colors is appropriately adjusted so that the overall selectivity becomes 100% according to the change in the selectivity of the rainbow.

[Fanfare effect setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 57, details of the fanfare effect setting process (B2102) in the above-described jackpot command process (FIG. 45) will be described as a mode in which the lighting mode of the setting suggestion effect changes. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the procedure of fanfare effect setting processing according to the fourth embodiment.

Effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received fanfare command is a normal command (B4101). If it is not a normal command (the result of B4101 is "N"), the fanfare effect setting process is terminated. If the command is normal (the result of B4101 is "Y"), the number of big hits stored in the RAM or the like of the effect control device 300 is updated by +1 (B4102).

Then, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the number of big hits has reached a predetermined number (B4103). When the number of jackpot hits is a predetermined number (the result of B4103 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 draws a light emission mode (color) of a predetermined light emitting unit according to the received set value (B4104). , the fanfare display on the display device 41 and the fanfare sound from the speaker are set according to the set values (B4105). The predetermined number of times can be set for each specific multiple (eg, 3) such as 3 times, 6 times, 9 times, and so on. Further, the predetermined number of times may be a natural number, for example, it may be set every odd number of times (1 time, 3 times, etc.) or every integral number of times (2 times, 4 times, etc.), or a specific sequence (for example, Fibonacci sequence of 1 time, 2 times, 3 times, 5 times, 8 times, 13 times...).

On the other hand, when the number of big hits has not reached the predetermined number (the result of B4103 is "N"), the effect control device 300 sets the fanfare display and fanfare sound according to the set values (B4105). Here, the fanfare display and the fanfare sound may be set by lottery with a selection rate (probability) according to the set value. After that, when the process of B4105 ends, the effect control device 300 ends the fanfare effect setting process.

[Promotion lottery table for lighting mode]
Next, with reference to FIG. 58, regarding the selection rate of the light emission mode (promotion lottery color) by step-up lottery of setting suggestive effect determined by lottery (B4104) in the fanfare effect setting process at the start of the big win. explain. FIG. 58 is a table for determining the lighting mode (determining the promotion lottery color) by the promotion lottery of the setting suggestion effect of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 58(A) is a table for determining the promotion lottery color when the current color of the predetermined light emitting unit is white, and FIG. 58(B) is a table for determining the promotion lottery color when the current color is blue. is.

As shown in FIG. 58(A), promotion lottery colors for the setting suggestion effect when the current color of the predetermined light emitting unit is white are, for example, no promotion (continue white), blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow. It is selected from six types, and the selection rate and selectable types change according to the current setting values (settings 1 to 6).

First, it will be described that the types of promotion lottery colors that can be selected change according to the current set value. When the current set value is set 1 to 3, the promotion lottery color of the setting suggestion effect is selected from no promotion, blue, and yellow. On the other hand, if the current setting value is setting 4, green can also be selected as a promotion lottery color, if setting 5, both green and red can be selected, and if setting 6, all types can be selected. becomes selectable. Therefore, if the promotion lottery color of the predetermined light emitting unit of the gaming machine 10 is green, the player should set 4 or higher, if it is red, set 5 or higher, and if it is rainbow, set 4 or higher. 6 can be estimated.

Next, it will be described how the selection rate of promotion lottery colors to be selected by lottery changes according to the current set value.

When the current setting value is setting 1, the selection rate of no promotion (continuing white) is 80%, the selection rate of blue is 15%, and the selection rate of yellow is 5% as promotion lottery colors. Then, the selection rate of no promotion as the promotion lottery color is 75% in the case of setting 2, 70% in the case of setting 3, etc., and is set so that the selection rate decreases as the current setting value increases. be done. In this embodiment, each time the current set value increases by one, the selection rate without promotion is set to decrease in increments of 5%. ) may be set to be the same. In this way, the lower the setting value, the higher the selection rate of no promotion (continuation of white) as the promotion lottery color. By confirming that the game machine 10 is playing a game, it becomes easy to estimate that there is a high possibility that the game machine 10 is a low-setting machine.

On the other hand, the selection rate of yellow as the promotion lottery color is 5% for setting 1, 10% for setting 2, and 15% for settings 3 to 6, which are currently high. It is set so that the selectivity increases as the In this embodiment, the selectivity of yellow is fixed at 15% for settings 3 to 6, but the selectivity may be set higher as the set value increases.

In addition, the selection rate of promotion lottery colors (green, red) that can be selected in setting 4 or setting 5 and promotion lottery colors that can be selected in setting 6 (green, red, rainbow) is set to 5% each. . Therefore, the higher the set value, the higher the probability that a promotion lottery color other than no promotion (white continuation) is selected as the promotion lottery color. By confirming that the game machine 10 is currently playing, it is easy to estimate that there is a high possibility that the game machine 10 is a high-setting machine. In addition, it is possible to estimate that the gaming machine 10 being played is highly likely to be a high-setting machine by means of the promotion lottery, which motivates the player to continue playing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58B, the promotion lottery colors for the setting suggestion effect when the current color of the predetermined light emitting unit is blue are, for example, no promotion (continuous blue), yellow, green, red, and rainbow. , and the selection rate and selectable types change according to the current set values 1 to 6 (settings 1 to 6), as in the case where the current color is white.

First, it will be described that the types of promotion lottery colors that can be selected change according to the current set values. When the current setting value is setting 1 or setting 2, either no promotion or yellow is selected as the promotion lottery color of the setting suggestion effect. On the other hand, if the current setting value is setting 3, green can also be selected as the promotion lottery color, if setting 4 or setting 5, red can be selected along with green, and if setting 6, All types can be selected. Therefore, if the promotion lottery color of the predetermined light emitting unit of the gaming machine 10 is green, the player sets the setting to 3 or more, if it is red, the setting is 4 or more, and if it is rainbow, the setting is 3 or more. 6 can be estimated.

Next, it will be described how the selection rate of promotion lottery colors to be selected by lottery changes according to the current set value.

When the current setting value is setting 1, the selection rate of no promotion (continuous blue) is 95% and the selection rate of yellow is 5% as promotion lottery colors. Then, the selection rate of no promotion as the promotion lottery color is 80% for setting 2 and setting 3, 75% for setting 4, etc., and the selection rate decreases as the current setting value increases. is set to In addition, in this embodiment, whenever the present set value increases by one, the selection rate without promotion is set to the same value or decreased. In this way, the lower the setting value, the higher the selection rate of no promotion (continuous blue) as the promotion lottery color. By confirming that the game machine 10 is playing a game, it becomes easy to estimate that there is a high possibility that the game machine 10 is a low-setting machine.

On the other hand, the selection rate of yellow as the promotion lottery color is 5% for setting 1, 20% for setting 2, 15% for setting 3 or setting 4, and 15% for setting 5 or setting 6. is set to 20%. Here, the selection rate of yellow as the promotion lottery color is higher in the case of setting 2 (20%), which is a low setting, than in the case of setting 3 or setting 4 (15%). ing. However, the selection rate for promotion in the case of setting 3 is the sum of the selection rate for yellow (15%) and the selection rate for green (20%), which is the same as the selection rate for promotion in the case of setting 2. becomes. Furthermore, compared to the case of setting 2, in the case of setting 3, there is a possibility that the color will be promoted by two stages at once to green, and in the case of setting 4, it is possible that the color will be promoted by three stages and will be red. In the case of setting 5, there is a possibility that the promotion lottery color will be promoted to red at once in three stages, and in the case of setting 6, there is a possibility that it will be promoted to rainbow by four stages. Therefore, by confirming that the promotion lottery color of the predetermined light emitting unit has been promoted in multiple stages during the game, the player can easily presume that there is a high possibility that the gaming machine 10 during the game is a high-setting machine. Become.

In addition, the promotion lottery color (not shown) of the setting suggestion effect when the current color of the predetermined light emitting part is green or later is also the same as when the current color is blue. It is possible to determine whether the promotion lottery color changes to . According to such a mode, the player confirms that the promotion lottery color of the predetermined light emitting unit has been promoted to a higher rank (red or rainbow) during the game, so that the gaming machine 10 during the game is set to high. It becomes easy to estimate that there is a high possibility that it is the base of

In this embodiment, a case where a promotion lottery is performed in the lottery (B4104) in the fanfare effect setting process has been described, but a demotion lottery may be performed. By performing a demotion lottery, for example, if the current color of a given light-emitting portion is blue, it can be changed to white.

Further, in a case where a demotion lottery is performed, for example, after promotion to rainbow, the demotion lottery may not be performed. By preventing the demotion lottery from being performed after reaching the rainbow in this way, the player can continuously obtain a sense of accomplishment that the high setting (setting 6) has reached the setting suggestive performance, thereby improving the amusement of the game. can be made

Further, in the promotion lottery, multiple stages of promotion are possible, but in the demotion lottery, the colors may be demoted one stage at a time. In this way, in the demotion lottery, by avoiding the mode of demotion in multiple stages, it is possible to avoid the disappointment of the player due to the setting suggesting performance suddenly falling to the low setting, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, the selection rate of each promotion lottery color is not limited to the mode shown in FIG. For example, the rainbow selectivity in setting 6 is not limited to 5%, and may be 1% or 10%. Also, as the current color becomes a higher-ranked color, the selection rate of the higher-ranked color may be increased. Specifically, for example, in the case of setting 6, if the current color is green, the rainbow selection rate is set to 10%, and if the current color is red, the rainbow selection rate is set to 35%. It is possible to increase the selectivity of higher-order colors according to the hierarchy.

[Ending effect setting process]
It should be noted that the manner in which the light emitting mode of the setting suggestion effect in the above-described jackpot command process (FIG. 45) changes is not limited to the fanfare effect setting process (B2102) (see FIG. 57), but the ending effect setting as shown in FIG. It may be generated in the processing (B2111). FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the ending effect setting process according to the modification of the fourth embodiment.

Effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received ending command is a normal command (B4201). If it is not a normal command (the result of B4201 is "N"), the ending effect setting process is terminated. If the command is normal (the result of B4201 is "Y"), the number of big hits stored in the RAM or the like of the effect control device 300 is updated by +1 (B4202).

Then, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the number of big hits has reached a predetermined number (B4203). When the number of jackpot hits is a predetermined number (the result of B4203 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 draws a light emission mode (color) of a predetermined light emitting unit according to the received set value (B4204). , the ending display on the display device 41 and the ending sound from the speaker are set according to the set values (B4205). Here, the ending display and the ending sound may be set by lottery with a selection rate (probability) according to the set value. The predetermined number of times may be a natural number, and can be set for each specific multiple, odd number of times, or integer number of times, or set to form a specific number sequence.

On the other hand, when the number of big hits has not reached the predetermined number (the result of B4203 is "N"), the effect control device 300 sets the ending display and ending sound according to the set values (B4205). After that, when the process of B4205 ends, the effect control device 300 ends the ending effect setting process.

In addition, regarding the selection rate of the lighting mode (promotion lottery color) by the promotion lottery of the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery (B4204) in the ending effect setting process at the start of the big hit, the selection rate in the fanfare effect setting process described above with reference to FIG. It may be the same as the lottery (B4104).

[Processing when receiving the number of out balls]
Also, when the number of out balls is received, the lighting mode of the setting suggestion effect may be changed. FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the processing when receiving the number of out balls (B1320 in FIG. 39) according to the fourth embodiment.

Effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received out ball number command is a normal command (B4301). If the command is not a normal command (the result of B4301 is "N"), the process for receiving the number of out balls is terminated. When the command is normal (the result of B4301 is "Y"), the number of out balls is stored in the RAM or the like of the effect control device 300 (B4302). The number of out balls can be counted, for example, in the winning hole switch/state monitoring process (FIG. 8).

Then, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the number of out balls has reached a predetermined number (B4303). When the number of out balls is a predetermined number (the result of B4303 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 draws a light emission mode (color) of a predetermined light emitting unit according to the received setting value (B4304 ). The predetermined number may be a natural number, and can be set for each multiple of a specific number (every 1000 balls, ie, 1000, 2000, 3000, etc.), for example. The selection rate of the lighting mode (promotion lottery color) in the lottery (B4304) may be the same as the lottery (B4104) in the fanfare effect setting process described above with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, when the number of out balls does not reach the predetermined number (the result of B4303 is "N"), the effect control device 300 ends the processing when the number of out balls is received.

[RTC reading process]
Furthermore, the lighting mode of the setting suggesting effect may be changed during the RTC reading process (B0009) in the main process (FIG. 36). FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the procedure of RTC read processing (B0009) according to the fourth embodiment.

Effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received signal from RTC 338 is a normal signal (B4401). If the signal is not normal (the result of B4401 is "N"), the RTC reading process is terminated. When the signal is normal (the result of B4401 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 acquires information indicating the current time (B4402). Information indicating the current time is generated by a signal from the RTC 338 that serves as timekeeping means.

Then, the effect control device 300 calculates the elapsed time from the game start (or power-on) (B4403), and determines whether or not the elapsed time has reached a predetermined time (B4404). When the elapsed time has reached the predetermined time (the result of B4404 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 draws a light emission mode (color) of a predetermined light emitting unit according to the received setting value (B4405). . The predetermined time can be set, for example, every two hours (for example, 11:00, 13:00, 15:00...). The selection rate of the lighting mode (promotion lottery color) in the lottery (B4405) may be the same as the lottery (B4104) in the fanfare effect setting process described above with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, when the elapsed time has not reached the predetermined time (the result of B4404 is "N"), the effect control device 300 terminates the RTC reading process.

[Count information setting process]
Also, during the count information setting process (B1322) in the one-shot command process (FIG. 39), the lighting mode of the setting suggestion effect may be changed. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the procedure of count information setting processing according to the fourth embodiment.

Effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received count command (large winning opening count command) is a normal command (B4501). If the command is not normal (the result of B4501 is "N"), the count information setting process is terminated. If the command is normal (the result of B4501 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the jackpot operation is in progress (B4502). If the jackpot operation is not in progress (the result of B4502 is "N"), the count information setting process is terminated.

When the jackpot operation is in progress (the result of B4502 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 updates the count number by +1 (B4503). The number of winning balls in the big winning hole is added to the number of winning balls (B4504), and the display of the number of winning balls and the count display (display of the count number) are updated and set (B4505). Here, the number of counts and the number of obtained balls are the number of counts and the number of obtained balls during consecutive games from the start of the big win to the return to the normal game state. It may be the number of acquired balls, or the total number of counts and the number of acquired balls since the game machine 10 was powered on.

Then, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the number of winning balls has reached a predetermined number (B4506). When the number of winning balls is a predetermined number (the result of B4506 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 performs a promotion lottery for the lighting mode (color) of the big winning opening LED 39d according to the received set value. (B4507). The predetermined number may be a natural number, and can be set for each multiple of a specific number (every 5,000 balls, ie, 5,000, 10,000, 15,000, etc.), for example. Note that the selection rate of the lighting mode (promotion lottery color) by the promotion lottery (B4507) may be the same as the lottery (B4104) in the fanfare effect setting process described above with reference to FIG. Next, display of the number of balls to be played, count display, etc. are set according to the set values as will be described later with reference to FIGS. 63A, 63B, and 64 (B4508). Here, a lottery is drawn with a selection rate corresponding to a set value for display modes such as display of the number of balls to be played and count display.

On the other hand, when the number of acquired balls is not the predetermined number (the result of B4506 is "N"), the effect control device 300 ends the count information setting process.

In addition, in the count information setting process, when the jackpot operation is in progress (the result of B4502 is "Y"), the number of winning balls in the big winning opening is added to the number of winning balls (B4504), and the number of winning balls in the big winning opening LED 39d A promotion lottery for the light emission mode (color) is performed (B4507), but by adding the winning to the start winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 to the number of winning balls to the number of winning balls to the number of winning balls during the normal game state, A light-emitting portion (LED) provided in the opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 may emit light according to the set value.

Here, setting the update setting of the obtained ball number display and the count display according to the set value will be described with reference to FIGS. 63A and 63B. FIG. 63A is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the display device 41 when the jackpot is won in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 63B is a diagram showing another example. In the example of FIGS. 63A and 63B , when the number of obtained balls to be played reaches a predetermined number, the display mode of the number of obtained balls to be played, the count display, and the display of other information is selected by lottery according to the set value. display settings.

The display screen of the display device 41 during the jackpot round when the number of winning balls has not reached a predetermined number (for example, 5000) (the result of B4506 is "N") is as shown in FIG. 63A, for example.

In the upper left corner of the display screen, a round number display 676 for displaying the current jackpot round number is displayed, for example, with "1" R and numerals (Arabic numerals ("1, 2, 3...")). In addition, a right-handed instruction notification 691, which is a notification to instruct right-handed hitting, is displayed at the upper right corner and the lower left corner of the display screen. Furthermore, at the left end of the display screen, the jackpot stop pattern "7, 7, 7" (stop result, stop pattern) of the special variation display game immediately before the jackpot result mode (jackpot stop pattern, special result mode) is displayed, for example. "7" is displayed in numerical notation (Arabic numerals). At the lower right corner of the display screen, an effect point display 678 for displaying the effect point is displayed in numerical notation (Arabic numerals) such as "0030" pt. At the right middle corner of the display screen, a display of the number of winning balls 681 and a count display 682 are displayed in numerical notation (Arabic numerals) such as "4910" and "150", for example.

Next, when the number of winning balls is a predetermined number (for example, 5000) (the result of B4506 is "Y"), the display screen of the display device 41 during the jackpot round is as shown in FIG. 63B, for example.

Here, for example, as the setting value is lower, as shown in FIG. It becomes easy to be displayed in kanji ("1, 2, 3..."). In addition, the current number of winning balls display 681 ("5,000") and the count display 682 ("157") are displayed in kanji ("1, 2, 3 ..."). becomes easier.

FIG. 64 is for determining the display mode of the display of the number of winning balls displayed 681 and the count display 682 as setting suggestion effects and the display of other information (jackpot round number display 676, effect point display, etc.) in the fourth embodiment. is a diagram showing an example of a table of . FIG. 64(A) is a table showing that the selection rate (distribution rate) of Arabic numerals (numerical notation) or Chinese characters (kanji notation) changes depending on the setting value, and FIG. 10 is a table showing that the color selectivity changes depending on the color.

For example, in the case of setting 1, the selection rate of numerical notation is 45%, and the selection rate of kanji notation is 55%. On the other hand, in the case of setting 6, the selection rate of the numerical notation is as high as 75%, and the selection rate of the kanji notation is as low as 25%. Therefore, the player can estimate the set value by confirming whether the display on the display screen is in numerals or in kanji when the setting suggesting effect is being performed.

In addition, when the numbers are displayed, the display screen is the same as when the number of obtained balls is not the predetermined number as shown in FIG. 63A. In addition, when the number of winning balls is a predetermined number, the jackpot stop pattern 677 may be displayed in Chinese characters ("seven (or lacquer)") according to the set value, such as "Suggestion effect is generated!" may be displayed on the display screen to inform the player that the setting suggestion effect has occurred. Furthermore, the selection rate may be set to display in other notation formats (for example, Roman numerals (“I, II, III . . . ”)) in addition to numerical notation and kanji notation.

In addition, in determining the display mode of the setting suggestion effect, the selection rate of numbers, kanji, etc. is changed, and as shown in FIG. You may

For example, in the case of setting 1, the selectivity of black is 35% and the selectivity of blue is 45%. On the other hand, in the case of setting 6, the selectivity for black is as high as 70% and the selectivity for blue is as low as 20%. Therefore, the player can estimate the set value by confirming what color is displayed on the display screen when the setting suggestion effect is being performed.

When the set values are odd numbers (1, 3, 5), the red selectivity is 20%, and when the set values are even numbers (2, 4, 6), the red selectivity is 10%. Therefore, the player can estimate that the set value is an odd number or an even number by confirming whether the display on the display screen is red or not when the setting suggestion effect is being performed.

Thus, by determining the display mode of the display screen of the display device 41 during the big win round according to the set value and performing the setting suggestion effect, the player can estimate the set value from the display screen. It should be noted that the display mode of the display screen is not limited to numbers and colors, and may be performed by changing the size of characters, fonts, and the like. Further, a predetermined symbol, figure, or the like corresponding to the set value may be displayed on the display screen by the setting suggestion effect.

[Modified example of light emission mode change (e.g. promotion)]
The light emission mode (color) of the predetermined light emitting unit may be changed (promoted) from the initial light emission mode (initial color) during execution of the special figure variation display game. Regarding the relationship of the expectation level of the big hit in this case, if it is not a big hit (when the expectation level is low), the light emission mode (initial color) corresponding to the set value will remain unchanged, or the light emission corresponding to the set value A mode may be adopted in which the mode (initial color) is changed to a lighting mode corresponding to the expectation level of the presentation. In addition, after the end of the special figure variation display game, the predetermined light emitting unit may be returned from the light emitting mode corresponding to the degree of expectation to the light emitting mode (initial color) corresponding to the set value. Furthermore, when the big hit is not achieved (when the expectation is low), the light emission mode of the predetermined light emission unit is made easy to be promoted with a low set value so as to suppress the decline in the desire to play. A mode in which the ratio of selection of settings 1 to 6 in the table of the promotion lottery such as 58 is reversed (for example, a mode in which the ratio of selection of settings 1 to 3 and settings 4 to 6 is reversed), and the player may be of interest to

On the other hand, in the case of a big hit (when the degree of expectation is high), similarly, the lighting mode will be the lighting mode corresponding to the set value and will not change, or the lighting mode will change from the lighting mode corresponding to the set value to the lighting mode corresponding to the expectation of the performance. It is good also as the aspect which changes with. In addition, after the end of the special figure variation display game, the predetermined light emitting unit may be returned from the light emitting mode corresponding to the degree of expectation to the light emitting mode (initial color) corresponding to the set value. In this way, during the execution period (for example, during the execution of the special figure variation display game) in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed, the set value is set according to the degree of expectation that the result of the special figure variation display game will be a big hit (special result) It is possible to switch between a corresponding light emission mode (setting suggesting effect) and a light emission mode corresponding to the degree of expectation of the effect (expectation degree notification effect for notifying the degree of expectation).

Therefore, when the expectation of the big win is high, if the expectation of the big win is notified by changing the setting suggestion performance to the expectation report performance, the game can be livened up and the interest of the game is improved. Conversely, when the expectation level is low, if the expectation level notification effect is changed to the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to make the player have expectations, improve the interest in the game, and improve the operation of the gaming machine. There is

Furthermore, in the case of a big hit (when the degree of expectation is high), the light emission mode of the predetermined light emission part is made difficult to be promoted at a high set value so as to make it easier to pay attention to the performance on the display device 41. Specifically, is a mode in which the ratios of settings 1 to 6 selected in the promotion lottery table such as FIG. , the lighting mode of the predetermined light emitting unit at the high setting may be made uninteresting to the player. In this way, it is possible to make it difficult to raise the light emission mode of a predetermined light emission unit at a high set value. As a result, it is possible to arouse the player's expectations in a well-balanced manner without excessively arousing expectations between the performance with high expectations on the display device 41 and the light emission mode with low expectations of the predetermined light emitting part. Since the presentation on the display device 41 does not correspond to the light emission mode of the predetermined light emitting section, the presentation is unexpected and the entertainment can be improved.

In addition, in other cases (when the player gazes at the display device 41 at the time of notification of winning or at the start of a big win, etc.), the predetermined light-emitting portion is once set to the light-emitting mode based on the performance, and the player stops looking at the display device 41. By entering a state (situation), the light emission mode may be returned to the ratio based on the set value. Furthermore, even when the display device 41 is performing an effect that attracts attention, the light emission mode may be set to a ratio based on the set value regardless of the effect. In addition, the light emission mode (color) having a low degree of expectation may be set once, and then the light emission mode may be changed to the light emission mode based on the presentation.

[Hall/player setting mode processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 65, details of the hole/player setting mode process (B0011) in the above-described main process (FIG. 36) will be described. FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing the procedure of hole/player setting mode processing according to the fourth embodiment executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

Hall/player setting mode processing activates a hall setting mode in which a person in charge of a hall (game parlor) can make various settings of the gaming machine 10, or a player setting mode in which a player can make various settings of the gaming machine 10. can be made

Effect control device 300 first determines whether or not it is in the hole setting mode (B4601). It can be determined that the hole setting mode is in progress when a hole setting mode flag, which will be described later, is set. When the hole setting mode is in progress (the result of B4601 is "Y"), the processing of B4606-B4616 is performed, and the production button 25 (production button switch 25a, touch panel 25b) is pressed by the person in charge of the hall (game shop). Various settings and adjustments are made based on the operation.

If the effect control device 300 is not in the hall setting mode (the result of B4601 is "N"), it is determined whether or not it is in the player setting mode (B4602). When a player setting mode in-progress flag, which will be described later, is set, it can be determined that the player is in the player setting mode. If it is in the player setting mode (the result of B4602 is "Y"), the processing of B4620-B2425 is performed, and various settings and adjustments are made based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player.

When the effect control device 300 is not in the player setting mode (the result of B4602 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the hole setting mode start condition is established (B4603). For example, when the operation of the performance button 25 for entering the hall setting mode is detected as an operation signal in the performance button input process (B0010) while waiting for customers, it can be determined that the hole setting mode start condition is met. Note that "waiting for customers" means, for example, a state in which a video for waiting customers (customer waiting demo) is displayed on the display device 41 . If the hole setting mode start condition is not met (the result of B4603 is "N"), the process of B4617 is executed.

When the hole setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B4603 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 performs screen drawing for starting screen drawing (drawing of the hole setting screen) for the display device 41 in the hole setting mode. Start setting is performed (B4604). Then, the hole setting mode flag is set (B4605).

Next, the production control device 300 is based on the operation of the production button 25 by the person in charge of the hall, etc., the hall volume adjustment process (B4606) for adjusting the volume of the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b, the frame decoration device 18 and the board Hall LED adjustment processing (B4607) for adjusting the brightness (brightness) and emission color of the LEDs of the decoration device 46, liquid crystal brightness adjustment processing (B4608) for adjusting the brightness of the display unit (liquid crystal display, etc.) of the display device 41, saving Power saving setting processing (B4609) for setting power is executed. Next, the effect control device 300 executes a logo color setting process for setting the luminescent color of the logo accessory (B4610).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not there is a setting confirming operation input (B4611). When the operation signal by the setting confirmation operation of the production button 25 is detected in the production button input process (B0010), it can be determined that the setting confirmation operation input has been performed. If there is no setting confirmation operation input (the result of B4611 is "N"), the hole/player setting mode processing is terminated.

Then, when there is a setting confirmation operation input (the result of B4611 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the factory setting has been confirmed (B4612). When there is no operation of the effect button 25 other than the setting confirmation operation, it can be determined that the setting at the time of shipment from the factory has been confirmed. If the factory settings have not been determined (the result of B4612 is "N"), the process proceeds to B4614. If the factory shipment settings are determined (the result of B4612 is "Y"), the factory shipment settings are executed to perform various settings and adjustments (B4613). Factory settings are default settings stored in a memory such as the ROM 321 . Next, the hall setting data (or hall adjustment data) such as the volume and various luminances determined in B4606-B4610 and B4613 are written in the backup memory (eg, FeRAM 323) (B4614).

Next, the effect control device 300 performs screen drawing end setting for ending screen drawing for the display device 41 in the hole setting mode (B4615). Then, the hole setting mode flag is cleared (B4616).

Effect control device 300 determines whether or not the player setting mode starting condition is satisfied when the hole setting mode starting condition is not satisfied (the result of B4603 is "N") (B4617). When the operation of the effect button 25 for entering the player setting mode is detected as an operation signal in the effect button input process (B0010) during customer waiting, it can be determined that the player setting mode start condition is established. If the player setting mode start condition is not met (the result of B4617 is "N"), the hole/player setting mode processing is terminated.

When the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B4617 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 performs screen drawing start setting for starting screen drawing on the display device 41 in the player setting mode ( B4618). Then, the player setting mode flag is set (B4619).

Next, the effect control device 300, based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player, player volume adjustment processing (B4620) to adjust the volume of the upper speaker 10a and the lower speaker 10b, frame decoration device 18 and board decoration A player LED adjustment process (B4621) for adjusting the luminance (brightness) of the LED of the device 46 is executed.

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 executes effect customization processing for customizing (individual setting) the effect based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the like by the player (B4622). Then, it is determined whether or not there is a setting confirming operation input (B4623). If there is no setting confirmation operation input (the result of B4623 is "N"), the hole/player setting mode processing is terminated. When there is a setting confirmation operation input (result of B4623 is "Y"), screen drawing end setting is performed to end screen drawing on the display device 41 in the player setting mode (B4624). Then, the player setting mode flag is cleared (B4625). Note that player setting data (or player adjustment data) such as volume and brightness determined in B4620-B4622 are not written to the backup memory because they may disappear.

[Example of display screen in hall setting mode]
FIG. 66A is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the display device 41 in the hole setting mode in the fourth embodiment.

Effect control device 300 is that the hole setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B4603 is "Y"), starts the screen drawing in the hole setting mode (B4604), as shown in Figure 66A, the volume on the display screen A setting window 711, an emission color setting window 712, and a brightness setting window 713 are displayed. A volume setting window 711 is a display used for hall volume adjustment processing (B4606), and a brightness setting window 713 is a display used for hall LED adjustment processing (B4607) and liquid crystal brightness adjustment processing (B4608). The emission color setting window 712 is a display used in the hall LED adjustment process (B4607). This is a display for switching to . As described above, the operation of the volume setting window 711, the emission color setting window 712, and the brightness setting window 713 is performed based on the operation of the effect button 25 (including the operation of the touch panel 25b) by the person in charge of the hall or the like. .

By selecting one of the colors as the hole emission color in the emission color setting window 712, the hole emission color can be preferentially displayed on the predetermined light emitting portion. Therefore, for example, by setting the hole emission color to red or rainbow (specific emission color) that suggests high setting, it is possible to make it look like there are plenty of high setting platforms at events etc. can. In this way, the light emission color setting window 712 and the hall LED adjustment process serve as second setting means that cannot be set by the player and can only be set by the person in charge of the hall, etc. Function. It should be noted that, during the hole setting mode, display related to the game such as decorative special symbols (identification information), pending display portion 630, pending display 633, pending digestion area 640, special figure fluctuation pending display 643 may be hidden. . Since the hole setting mode is not performed during the game, by excluding unnecessary items, the display related to the hole setting mode can be made easier to see, and the processing load can be reduced. Incidentally, when the display related to the game is hidden, only the decorative reduced pattern (small pattern) 616 may be displayed.

In addition, the setting suggestion effect was made to display the hall emission color with priority over the one performed according to the lottery table, but it was made to be displayed with priority only while waiting for customers, and during the actual game can give priority to the setting suggestion effect performed according to the lottery table over the hall emission color. Therefore, the player can estimate in more detail the settings of the gaming machine 10 during the game by actually playing the game.

[Example of display screen in player setting mode]
FIG. 66B is a diagram showing another example of the display screen of the display device 41 in the player setting mode in the fourth embodiment.

When the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B4617 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 starts screen drawing in the player setting mode (B4618), and as shown in FIG. 66B, the display screen , a volume setting window 711 and a brightness setting window 713 as well as a light emission setting window 714 are displayed. The operation of the volume setting window 711, the brightness setting window 713, and the light emission setting window 714 is performed based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player (B4620, B4621). In the player setting mode, the volume setting window 711 is a display used for player volume adjustment processing (B4620), and the brightness setting window 713 and light emission setting window 714 are displays used for player LED adjustment processing (B4621). be.

A light emission setting window 714 allows selection of whether or not to emit light from a predetermined light emitting unit. For example, when the player selects no light emission, the predetermined light emitting unit does not emit light according to the setting suggestion effect. can. In this way, the light emission setting window 714 and the player's LED adjustment process function as first setting means that allows the player to set the light emission mode of the predetermined light emitting unit. During the game, the light emission mode (color) of the predetermined light emitting unit is controlled according to the set value as described above (FIGS. 55 to 62). Therefore, unlike the hole setting mode, in the player setting mode The emission color setting window 712 is not displayed.

In the player setting mode, only the presence or absence of light emission of the predetermined light emitting unit can be selected. It may be possible to set whether or not it is possible to display within a range, or it may be possible to set the effect mode (color) of a predetermined light emitting part of the effect device through the light emission color setting window 712 as in the hall setting mode. The production mode of the production device is a production mode performed by control (FIGS. 44, 55 to 62) depending on the set value of the production control device 300. These include the operation mode of the external accessory 95a, the presentation mode on the display screen of the display device 41, and the like. In addition, in the player setting mode, etc., it is possible to determine to what extent the effect mode of the effect device can be displayed by the player, or whether or not setting suggestion effect depending on the set value is being performed. It may be made verifiable.

In addition, the effect control device 300 may not perform the setting suggestion effect when fraud is detected by the magnet fraud monitoring process (A1315), the radio wave fraud monitoring process (A1316), or the like. You may reset the promotion lottery color etc. in , and display with a default color (for example, white).

[Customer waiting demo setting process]
Also, during the customer waiting demonstration setting process (B1308) in the single-shot command process (FIG. 39), it was set in the hall setting mode (luminous color setting window 712 and hall LED adjustment process) instead of the lighting mode of setting suggestion effect A predetermined light-emitting portion is caused to emit light in the hole emission color. FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing the procedure of customer waiting demonstration setting processing according to the fourth embodiment.

Effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received setting value is a normal command (B4701). If the command is not normal (the result of B4701 is "N"), the customer waiting demo setting process is terminated. If it is a normal command (the result of B4701 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 changes the light emission mode (hole light emission color) of the hall setting set in the hall setting mode to the light emission mode (color) of the predetermined light emitting unit. is set (B4702). Then, the customer waiting demonstration start setting is performed (B4703), and the customer waiting demonstration setting processing ends.

In this way, during the customer waiting (during the customer waiting demonstration), the lighting mode (hall lighting color) set in the hall setting mode is preferentially used instead of the lighting mode (color) of the setting suggestion effect. Therefore, by setting the light emission mode (hole light emission color) to a specific light emission mode (specific color = red, rainbow, etc.), it is possible to make it look like there are many high-setting stands lined up at events, etc. can. In addition, while waiting for a customer, the light emission mode (color) of the setting suggestion effect is not displayed in the predetermined light emitting unit, and the player tries to confirm the light emission mode (color) of the setting suggestion effect by playing the game. 10 could improve performance.

When the light emission mode (color) is set in the player setting mode, the light emission mode (color) set in the player setting mode is preferentially used during the customer waiting (during the customer waiting demonstration). A configuration is also possible.

In the above-described fourth embodiment, as the light emission mode of the effect device (predetermined light emitting unit), an example in which the color is mainly controlled depending on the set value has been shown. brightness), lighting, extinguishing, or blinking, and in the case of blinking, the blinking cycle. Moreover, if the effect device is a movable body, the operation mode of the effect device may be controlled depending on the set value, similarly to the light emission mode.

[Functions and effects of the fourth embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment includes an effect device (for example, a predetermined light emitting unit) capable of executing a predetermined effect, and effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect device. The gaming machine 10 includes setting change means (setting change device 42 (setting key switch 93 and setting value change switch 102)) capable of changing setting values according to game-related settings. The effect control means can execute a setting suggestion effect that can suggest the set value by changing the effect mode of the effect device according to the set value.

According to such a gaming machine 10, the player can estimate the setting of the gaming machine 10 only from the state of the gaming machine 10 before or during the game, and the setting value can be appropriately suggested. Since it can be executed, the amusement of the game can be improved. In addition, since the player can estimate the setting of the gaming machine 10 only from the gaming machine 10 in this way, a setting suggestion tag that implicitly suggests a setting value (for example, setting 4) is placed around the gaming machine 10 in hall sales. A shark card, a shrimp card suggesting the setting 5, and a monkfish card suggesting the setting 6) are not required, and the space around the game machine 10 can be secured widely to improve the appearance, and at the same time, the person in charge of the hall, etc. The burden can be reduced.

The effect control means (effect control device 300) of the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is a first setting means (light emission setting window 714, player LED adjustment processing), and a second setting means (light emission color setting window 712, hall LED adjustment processing) in which the player cannot set the setting related to the effect mode of the effect device. The effect control means can change the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect by the set value or the second setting means. According to the gaming machine 10 as described above, the person in charge of the hall or the like uses the second setting means or the like to set the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect in the effect device to suggest a high setting (for example, red By setting the hole emission color such as the color of the hall and the rainbow, the appearance of the game machine 10 can be made as desired, and it is possible to make it appear that high-setting machines are lined up abundantly at an event, etc. can be improved. In addition, since the player can set an effect mode that matches the player's taste, the interest of the player can be improved. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect mode that takes into account the needs of both the hall side and the player side.

The gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, in the execution period in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed, according to the degree of expectation that the result of the game (for example, the special figure fluctuation display game) will be a special result, the setting suggestion effect and the expectation It is possible to switch between the expectation degree notification effect that notifies the degree. Therefore, when the degree of expectation for the special result is high, if the setting suggestion performance is changed to the expectation degree notification performance and the expectation degree for the special result is notified, the game can be livened up and the interest of the game is improved. Conversely, when the expectation level is low, if the expectation level notification effect is changed to the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to make the player have expectations, improve the interest in the game, and improve the operation of the gaming machine. There is

[Fifth embodiment]
A fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 69B. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to fourth embodiments.

[Screen transition example when the starting memory of the pending digestion area changes]
FIG. 68 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order in the fifth embodiment. This is an example of transition. In addition, the lottery of the pending change of the special figure variable pending display 643 (digesting pending change) may be performed, for example, by the advance notice lottery (B2006 or B2009) of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 44).

(A) of FIG. 68 is a display screen of the display device 41 before the decoration special figure variation display game is started.

A plurality of variable display areas 610 (left area 610A, right area 610B, middle area 610C) are provided in the center of the display screen of the display device 41, and the first decoration pattern A is provided in the left area 610A and the right area 610B. The decoration first pattern B is enlarged, and the decoration first pattern C is enlarged and displayed in the middle area 610C, and the symbols "2, 4, 5" are stopped and displayed.

At the lower center of the display screen, a pending digestion area 640 (specific display area, variable pending display area) and a pending display area 630 are displayed as starting memory display areas. The pending digestion area 640 and the pending display portion 630 are preferentially displayed on the front (upper layer) than the variable display of the variable display area 610 . Setting of such preferential display may be executed, for example, in effect display editing processing (B0015).

In the pending digestion area 640, a special figure variation pending display 643 (start memory display, special figure digesting pending display) corresponding to the special figure variation display game being executed (digested) is displayed. In addition, in the pending digestion area 640, on the back (lower layer) of the special figure fluctuation pending display 643, the starting memory display background 640A as the pedestal of the special figure variable pending display 643 is displayed in a low image quality state. . In FIGS. 68 to 69B, rough hatching of the starting memory display background 640A indicates that the starting memory display background 640A is displayed in a low image quality state (first display mode).

Here, the state of low image quality (first display mode) is a state in which improvement of power saving performance and reduction of graphic processing load are prioritized over improvement of visibility for the player. The number should be low (for example, displayed with less than 921,600 pixels), and the brightness, contrast, gamma, saturation, etc. should be suppressed (for example, less than 50 in 100 steps, or if it can be adjusted from -100 to +100) less than ±0), low resolution (e.g., less than 720p (1280 x 720) resolution), low frame rate per second (fps) (e.g., less than 30fps) , or that a highly compressed image is displayed. For example, by performing low image quality processing on the image of the original high image quality starting memory display background 640A in the game machine 10 by the processing of the VDP 312 or the like, the display screen of the display device 41 is displayed instead of the image of high image quality. It becomes possible to display a low-quality starting memory display background 640A. Also, for example, both a low image quality image and a high image quality (or normal image quality) image of the starting memory display background 640A are stored in the image ROM 325, and the low image quality image and the high image quality image are replaced depending on the situation. , the starting memory display background 640A is displayed in low quality (or high quality).

A background object 640B that changes in conjunction with the starting memory display background 640A is arranged above the starting memory display background 640A. The background object 640B is displayed, for example, in a two-leaf display mode arranged at the left and right ends as shown in FIG. 68(a). The background object 640B is also displayed in a low quality state like the starting memory display background 640A. Also, the background object 640B is displayed in the same priority (same layer) as the starting memory display background 640A, that is, in an integrated manner. Note that the starting memory display background 640A and the background object 640B may be set to be displayed in step B2013 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 44), for example. Also, the background object 640B may be preferentially displayed in front (upper layer) of the starting memory display background 640A. In addition, conversely, the starting memory display background 640A may be preferentially displayed in front (upper layer) of the background object 640B.

In the pending display portion 630, up to four pending displays 633 (starting memory display, special figure pending display) corresponding to undigested starting memories are displayed. 3 are displayed in 630 . The pending display 633 is placed over a portion of the starting memory display background 640A and displayed in front of the starting memory display background 640A. In this way, the effect control device 300 displays the pending display 633 on the pending display portion 630, and functions as a starting memory display control means that executes control to display the special figure fluctuation pending display 643 on the pending digestion area 640. Production control device 300, the display setting of the pending display 633 and the special figure fluctuation pending display 643, for example, at the time of the holding shift, in step B2015 of the variable production setting process (FIG. 44) is executed, and at the time of the holding occurrence, a single-shot system command It may be executed in the special figure 1 reservation information setting process (B1310) or the special figure 2 reservation information setting process (B1312) of the process.

FIG. 68(b) shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the decoration special figure variation display game is being executed in response to the special figure variation pending display 643 . In a plurality of variable display areas 610 on the display screen, the decorative first patterns A to C are displayed in a normal variable manner. In the following figures, when the decorative first patterns A to C are variably displayed in the normal variable mode, the variably displayed first decorative patterns A to C are indicated by "↓".

FIG. 68(C) is a display screen of the display device 41 when a hold change occurs due to establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, hold change during digestion, pre-reading notice, etc.) during execution of the special figure variation display game. Here, the suspension display 643 during special figure fluctuation is suspended and changed, but the suspension display 633 may be suspended and changed as a pre-reading notice effect. In the case of a hold change during digestion, for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (C), the hold display 643 during a special figure fluctuation suggests that the degree of expectation is high from the normal round display mode by changing the hold It becomes a star-shaped display mode.

In addition, the display of the starting memory display background 640A is switched from the low image quality state to the high image quality state at the same time as the pending change. In FIGS. 68 to 69B, fine hatching of the starting memory display background 640A indicates that the starting memory display background 640A is displayed in a high image quality state. Background object 640B is also displayed in a high image quality state (second display mode) in the same manner as starting memory display background 640A. The background object 640B changes from the normal two-leaf display to a flower-like display that suggests a high degree of expectation. In addition, the change in the image quality and display mode of the starting memory display background 640A and the background object 640B is performed at the same timing as the change in the hold change (change in digestion hold) of the special figure fluctuation hold display 643 drawn as a notice. For example, the display may be set in step B2013 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 44).

Here, the state of high image quality (second display mode) is a state in which improvement of visibility for the player is prioritized over improvement of power saving performance and reduction of graphic processing load. High number (for example, display with 921,600 pixels or more), intensity of brightness, contrast, gamma, saturation, etc. ±0 or more), high resolution (e.g. 720p (1280 x 720) or higher resolution), high frame rate (fps) per second (e.g. 30fps or higher) Alternatively, an uncompressed image or an image with a low compression ratio is displayed.

(E) of FIG. 68 shows the display of the display device 41 when the special figure variation display game being executed is finished and the stop result (stop symbol) in the variation display area 610 becomes a losing result mode (loose stop symbol). is the screen. "3, 7, 2" are stop-displayed in the decoration first patterns A to C of the variable display area 610 as stop patterns. In addition, the special figure fluctuation pending display 643 is digested and hidden, and the starting memory display background 640A and the background object 640B are switched from a high image quality state to a low image quality state and displayed. The background object 640B returns from the flower-like display mode to the foliage-like display mode. The display settings of the starting memory display background 640A and the background object 640B at the end of the special figure fluctuation display game are, for example, as part of the stop setting (B1331) of the single-shot system command processing, based on the symbol type (loss symbol or jackpot symbol) can be executed. After that, the oldest starting memory of the pending display 633 moves to the special figure fluctuation pending display 643, and the next special figure fluctuation display game is started. In addition, the timing at which the starting memory display background 640A and the background object 640B are switched from a high image quality state to a low image quality state is not limited to when the special figure fluctuation pending display 643 is digested and becomes hidden, and a predetermined effect or when the decoration first symbols A to C are stopped and displayed, or when the next special figure variation display game is started.

(O) of FIG. 68 is a display when the special figure variation display game being executed is finished and the stop result (stop symbol) in the variation display area 610 becomes a big hit result mode (big hit stop symbol, special result mode). 4 is a display screen of the device 41. FIG. "3, 3, 3" as the jackpot stop pattern is stop-displayed in the decoration first patterns A to C of the variable display area 610, and the characters "big hit!!" . In addition, the special figure fluctuation pending display 643 is digested and hidden, but the starting memory display background 640A and the background object 640B are maintained in a high image quality state. The flower-like display mode of the background object 640B is also maintained as it is. After that, a big win round game is started, and a big win round effect is executed.

In addition, switching the starting memory display background 640A and the background object 640B from low image quality to high image quality is limited to when the special figure fluctuation pending display 643 changes to a star-shaped display mode ((c) in FIG. 68) However, at the stage before that, that is, when starting the special figure fluctuation display game (immediately after (a) in FIG. 68) or immediately before the change in digestion pending occurs ((i) in FIG. 68) You can switch. In addition, in the case of a gradual pending change or during a continuous effect (during a continuous advance notice effect or during a pseudo continuous effect), the image quality of the starting memory display background 640A may be switched step by step. Also, for example, when the special figure fluctuation pending display 643 or the pending display 633 is displayed in a bright color such as white, the color of the starting memory display background 640A is switched to a darker color such as black, and the special figure is changing You may make it easy to distinguish from the pending|holding display 643 and the pending|holding display 633. FIG. Furthermore, when the start memory is stored and a new hold display 633 is generated, for example, when the hold display reaches the upper limit of 4 and overflows, or when a game ball wins the general winning hole 35 etc. The display background 640A may be switched to high image quality to make it easier for the player to visually recognize it. In addition, when the decoration 1st patterns A to C are stopped or temporarily stopped at a specific pattern (such as when a pending change pattern that suggests or confirms a pending change or a chance eye stops) due to the execution of the decorative special figure fluctuation display game Alternatively, the starting memory display background 640A may be switched to high image quality.

In addition, the first display mode is not limited to a mode in which the starting memory display background 640A and the background object 640B are displayed with low image quality, but a mode in which the starting memory display background 640A and the background object 640B are slightly visible but inconspicuous. can be displayed with For example, as an inconspicuous mode, another image may be displayed in front of the starting memory display background 640A and the background object 640B (front, upper layer) so as to cover the starting memory display background 640A and the background object 640B. can. In this case, the other images include, for example, an image or a mosaic image that is the same as the starting memory display background 640A and the background object 640B but is lightened, and the starting memory display background 640A and the background in the back (back, lower layer). A transparent image or the like that allows the object 640B to be visually recognized can be used. The second display mode is not limited to the mode in which the starting memory display background 640A and the background object 640B are displayed with high image quality, and the other image displayed in front of the starting memory display background 640A and the background object 640B is hidden. It may be displayed in any form.

[Screen transition example when a predetermined effect occurs in the effect display area]
Next, with reference to FIG. 69A, an example of screen transition when the effect display area 641 is displayed together with the pending consumption area 640 will be described. FIG. 69A is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order in the fifth embodiment. be. 69A and 69B below, description overlapping with FIG. 68 will be omitted as appropriate.

(ka) in FIG. 69A is a display screen of the display device 41 before the decoration special figure variation display game is started.

In the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of variable display areas 610 display the decorative first symbols A to C as symbols "2, 4, 5", and a reserved digest area 640 displays the special symbol variation being executed. A suspension display 643 during special figure fluctuation corresponding to the display game is displayed. In addition, in the pending digestion area 640, on the back (lower layer) of the special figure fluctuation pending display 643, the pedestal 640C of the special figure variable pending display 643 and the low image quality start memory display background 640A are displayed. be. Pedestal 640C is preferentially displayed in front (upper layer) of starting memory display background 640A. The starting memory display background 640A has narrower upper and left areas than the starting memory display background 640A of FIG.

Furthermore, at the lower left corner of the display screen of the display device 41, an effect display area 641 capable of displaying an effect related to the special figure variation display game is displayed, and in the effect display area 641, a walking girl whose display mode can be changed according to the effect is displayed. A character 641A is displayed. The effect display area 641 and the character 641A are displayed in a low quality state. In FIGS. 69A and 69B, the fact that the line representing the character 641A is thin indicates that the character 641A is displayed in a low image quality state. The effect display area 641 is displayed preferentially to the front (upper layer) than the variable display area 610 , similarly to the pending digestion area 640 and the pending display portion 630 . For example, the effect display area 641 is displayed on the same layer as the pending digestion area 640 and the pending display portion 630, and has the same display priority. Also, the character 641A is preferentially displayed in front of the effect display area 641 (upper layer). Note that the character 641A and the effect display area 641 may be displayed in the same priority order (same layer), that is, in an integrated manner. In addition, the character 641A may be preferentially displayed in front of the pending digestion area 640 and the pending display portion 630 (upper layers), and conversely, the pending digestion area 640 and the pending display portion 630 may be preferentially displayed in front of the character 641A. may be displayed as In this manner, the display priority order can be changed as appropriate.

FIG. 69A (ki) is the display screen of the display device 41 when the decoration special figure variation display game is being executed in response to the special figure variation pending display 643 . In the plurality of variable display areas 610, the decorative first symbols A to C are variable-displayed ("↓") in a normal variable mode.

Here, the low image quality character 641A may be displayed as a character different from the one shown in FIG. 69A (a different character from the high image quality character 641B described later). Also, the low image quality character 641A may be displayed in a manner different from that shown in (K) of FIG. 69A. For example, another aspect of the low-quality character 641A may be a lying aspect in contrast to the standing aspect of FIG. 69A, or a walking and moving aspect of FIG. 69A. It may be in a stationary mode. In addition, the character 641A is in a standing still state before the decoration special figure fluctuation display game is started (Fig. 69A (or)), and after the decoration special figure fluctuation display game is started (Fig. 69A (Ki)) may be in a mode of walking and moving.

In FIG. 69A (H), the character 641A in the effect display area 641 during the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game changes to the character 641B due to the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the change in hold during digestion, the occurrence of a pre-reading notice, the notice effect, etc.) It is a display screen of the display device 41 when changed. Character 641B is a girl who is happy to eat a rice ball that suggests high expectations, and is displayed with high image quality. In addition, in FIGS. 69A and 69B, the fact that the line representing the character 641B is thick indicates that the character 641B is displayed with high image quality. In addition, the starting memory display background 640A, the pedestal 640C, the pending digestion area 640, and the performance display area 641 are also displayed in a high quality state. Further, the predetermined conditions are, specifically, when the character 641A (641B) partially enters the starting memory display background 640A and acts on the special figure fluctuation pending display 643 or the holding display, or when the starting memory display background 640A It is a case of executing a holding change effect that waits until the timing of being displayed near and acting on the holding display 643 during special figure fluctuation and the holding display 633. The timing for switching to the high-quality character 641B when a predetermined condition is met can be when the character 641A moves toward the starting memory display background 640A or when it is displayed near the starting memory display background 640A. can. In addition, when the character 641A acts on the special figure fluctuation pending display 643 or the pending display, it may be switched to the high-quality character 641B, and when the character 641A moves toward the starting memory display background 640A or the starting memory display background You may switch to the high-definition character 641B at the time of the next special figure fluctuation display game start, etc. when displayed near 640A.

Here, the high image quality character 641B may be displayed as a character different from that shown in (c) of FIG. 69A (another character different from the low image quality character 641A described later). Also, the high-quality character 641B may be displayed in a manner different from that shown in (c) of FIG. 69A. For example, another aspect of the high-definition character 641B may be one in which the walking speed (moving speed) is increased from (ki) in FIG. 69A. It should be noted that the low image quality character 641A may be kept stationary in FIG. 69A (ki), and the high image quality character 641B may walk and move in FIG. 69A (c).

FIG. 69A (ke) shows the display of the display device 41 when the special figure variation display game being executed is finished and the stop symbol in the variation display area 610 is removed and becomes a stop symbol ("3, 7, 2"). is the screen. While the special figure fluctuation pending display 643 is digested and hidden, the starting memory display background 640A, the pedestal 640C, and the effect display area 641 are displayed in a low image quality state. Also, the character 641B returns to the normal character 641A and is displayed in a low image quality state. After that, the next special figure variation display game is started by storing the starting memory.

FIG. 69(ko) shows the display of the display device 41 when the special figure variation display game being executed ends and the stop symbol in the variation display area 610 becomes the big hit stop symbol ("3, 3, 3"). is the screen. Below the variable display area 610, the characters "big win!!" are displayed. The special figure fluctuation pending display 643 is digested and hidden, but the starting memory display background 640A, the pedestal 640C, and the effect display area 641 are maintained in a high image quality state. Also, the effect display of the girl who is happy to eat the rice ball of the character 641B is maintained as it is. After that, a big win round game is started, and a big win round effect is executed.

[Another screen transition example when a predetermined effect occurs in the effect display area]
Next, with reference to FIG. 69B, another screen transition example when the effect display area 641 is displayed together with the pending consumption area 640 will be described. FIG. 69B is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order in the fifth embodiment. is another example of screen transition.

(K') in FIG. 69B is the display screen of the display device 41 during the special figure fluctuation display game when a predetermined effect (for example, advance notice effect, etc.) occurs in the effect display area 641 from (Ki) in FIG. 69A. be. Due to the occurrence of a predetermined effect, the character 641A in the effect display area 641 changes to a character 641B suggesting that the degree of expectation is high. The character 641B and the effect display area 641 are displayed with high image quality. On the other hand, the starting memory display background 640A and pedestal 640C of the pending digestion area 640 are maintained in a lower quality state. After that, when the stop symbol in the variable display area 610 becomes a lost stop symbol (for example, "3, 7, 2"), proceed to (ke) in FIG. ), proceed to (ko) in FIG. 69A. Incidentally, when a predetermined effect is generated in the effect display area 641, the effect display area 641 may be preferentially displayed in front (upper layer) than the reserved digest area 640. FIG. By doing so, for example, the effect display area 641 can be enlarged and displayed in the foreground to emphasize the effect of the character 641B. In addition, the advance notice effect is performed when the decoration first patterns A to C of the variable display area 610 are ready, or when the player responds to the button operation promotion display (operation promotion image) displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. This can occur when the effect button 25 is operated.

(K'') in FIG. 69B is a display during a special figure fluctuation display game when a predetermined effect (for example, a change in suspension during digestion, a pre-reading notice, etc.) occurs in the reservation digestion area 640 from (Ki) in FIG. 69A 4 is a display screen of the device 41. FIG. Due to the occurrence of a predetermined effect, the special figure fluctuation pending display 643 changes to a star-like display mode suggesting that the degree of expectation is high. Then, the pedestal 640C, the special figure fluctuation pending display 643 and the starting memory display background 640A are switched from the low image quality state to the high image quality state. On the other hand, the character 641A in the effect display area 641 continues to be displayed, and the display of the effect display area 641 and the character 641A is maintained in a state of low image quality. In addition, in correspondence with changing the special figure fluctuation pending display 643 to a star-shaped display mode, the shape of the pedestal 640C is, for example, a crescent shape. It may change into a certain shape. After that, if the stop symbol in the variable display area 610 becomes a lost stop symbol (for example, "372"), proceed to (ke) in FIG. 69A; Proceed to (this) of.

Incidentally, when a predetermined effect is generated in the pending digestion area 640, the pending digestion area 640 may be preferentially displayed in front (upper layer) than the effect display area 641. FIG. By doing so, for example, the pending digestion area 640 can be enlarged and displayed in the foreground, and the change in the display mode of the special figure fluctuation pending display 643 and the pending display 633 can be emphasized.

Also, when a predetermined effect occurs, for example, when the pedestal 640c changes to the same color as the color changed in the effect corresponding to the pending change, the pedestal 640c also has a high image quality similar to the special figure fluctuation pending display 643. However, the degree of high image quality may be lower than the special figure fluctuation pending display 643 (lower image quality than the special figure fluctuation pending display 643). Thus, even if the image quality of the pedestal 640c is relatively reduced from the image quality of the special figure fluctuation pending display 643, the player can easily gaze at the special figure fluctuation pending display 643, which is the main part of the production, so that the game It is possible to reduce the processing load while maintaining the interest of the user.

On the other hand, when a predetermined effect occurs, for example, when the pedestal 640c changes to the same color as the color changed in the effect corresponding to the pending change, the degree of high image quality of the pedestal 640c is displayed from the special figure fluctuation pending display 643. It may also be made higher (higher image quality than special figure fluctuation pending display 643). Unexpectedness is generated by deliberately displaying the special figure fluctuation pending display 643 with relatively low image quality on the high image quality pedestal 640c, and the special figure fluctuation pending display 643 is rather conspicuous, and the interest of the game is increased. can be improved.

Further, when the special figure fluctuation pending display 643 becomes high image quality, the pedestal 640c may maintain low image quality. The pedestal 640c only needs to have a function indicating that the decoration of the special figure fluctuation pending display 643 and the special figure fluctuation pending display 643 is pending during digestion, and the function is maintained even if it is displayed with low image quality. It is for

[Functions and Effects of the Fifth Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment performs a variable display game (special variable display game) based on a plurality of identification information (identification pattern, special decoration pattern, first decoration pattern A to C) based on the establishment of the starting condition. A display device 41 capable of displaying is provided, and a special game state advantageous to the player can be generated when the result of the variable display game is a special result (big win result mode, big win stop pattern, special result mode). The game machine 10 includes start memory means (game control device 100) capable of storing a start memory that is the right to execute the variable display game based on the establishment of the start condition, and display of the variable display game on the display device 41 with priority over the variable display game. A starting memory display control means (production control device 300) capable of executing control to display the starting memory display (special figure fluctuation pending display 643, pending display 633) corresponding to the starting memory in the starting memory display area. Prepare. The starting memory display control means displays the starting memory display background 640A in the first display mode (for example, low image quality) on the back of the starting memory display so as to overlap the starting memory display in the starting memory display area. Based on this, the starting memory display background 640A can be switched to a second display mode (for example, high image quality) different from the first display mode.

According to the gaming machine 10, the starting memory display background 640A can be displayed in the second display mode (for example, high image quality) when a predetermined condition is satisfied, such as when the display mode of the starting memory display changes. In this case, the starting memory display background 640A can be displayed in the first display mode (for example, low image quality). Therefore, for example, if there is no pedestal 640c, there is a problem that the special figure fluctuation pending display 643 may appear mixed with the decoration first symbols A to C, etc., but it is necessary to make the player visually recognize the starting memory display. It is possible to improve the power saving performance of the game machine 10 and reduce the processing load of graphics etc. when there is relatively little need for the player to see it (when the expectation is low, etc.). can. Therefore, it is possible to improve the visibility for the player, improve the power saving performance of the game machine 10, and reduce the processing load. be able to. Further, for example, when there is relatively little need for the player to visually recognize the starting memory display, the identification information (decorative first patterns A to C) of the variable display area 610 to be relatively conspicuous is set more than the starting memory display. Since the identification information is displayed with high image quality, the identification information can be easily recognized by the player. In addition, by displaying the starting memory display background 640A with low image quality in other cases, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that there is important information in the starting memory display area, and to prevent the image of the display screen on the liquid crystal display. can be suppressed from sticking.

The gaming machine 10 includes an effect control means ( Effect control device 300) is further provided. The effect control means can display the effect in the first display mode (for example, low image quality) in the effect display area 641, and switch the effect to the second display mode (for example, high image quality) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. According to such a gaming machine 10, for example, there is a problem that the effect display area 641 may appear mixed with the decoration first symbols A to C, etc. Not only the pending display 633), but also the effect display area 641 can be displayed so that the player can easily see it when a predetermined condition is established, and the same effects as those described above can be achieved.

The gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment displays an effect game (decorative special figure variable display game) corresponding to the variable display game (variable display game on the collective display device 50) on the display device 41 based on the establishment of the starting condition. Executable production game means (production control device 300), a specific display area (production display area 641) displayed with priority over the production game (decorative special figure variation display game) in the display device 41, and the specific display Display control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing display control of specific characters (characters 641A and 641B) displayed in the area is provided. The display control means (rendering control device 300) displays the specific display area in the first display mode (for example, low image quality) in the normal state, displays the specific character in the first rendering mode (for example, low image quality), and satisfies predetermined conditions. Based on the establishment, the specific display area can be switched to a second display mode (for example, high image quality) different from the first display mode, and the specific character can be switched to a second presentation mode (for example, high image quality).

Therefore, when there is relatively little need for the player to visually recognize the specific display area (effect display area 641) is displayed in the first display mode (for example, low image quality), and the specific character is displayed in the first display mode (for example, low image quality). ) to improve the power saving performance of the game machine 10 and reduce the processing load of the display control means (the effect control device 300) such as graphics. Conversely, when it is necessary for the player to visually recognize (when a predetermined condition is satisfied), the specific display area is switched to a second display mode (for example, high image quality) different from the first display mode (for example, low image quality). , the specific character is switched from the first display mode (for example, low image quality) to the second effect mode (for example, high image quality), and the player is allowed to visually recognize the specific display area (effect display area 641) and the specific characters (characters 641A and 641B). It can be done easily.

[Sixth Embodiment]
A sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 to 88. FIG. This embodiment relates to the driver 150 (here, the LED driver 153) of the status display device 152 and its initial setting. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to fifth embodiments.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing according to the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 70, the timer interrupt processing of the sixth embodiment is similar to that of the first embodiment (FIG. 6), but the LED driver 153 (FIG. 71) is initialized after the state display edit output processing (A1318). The feature is that an LED driver initial setting process (A15001) for setting is added. After initial setting of the LED driver 153, LED data transmission processing (A16001) for setting the output mode of the LED driver 153, that is, the display mode of the status display device 152 is performed. In this embodiment, the configuration of the LED driver 153 will be described, and then the initial setting process and the LED data transmission process of the LED driver 153 will be described.

The order of the LED driver initialization process (A15001) and the LED data transmission process (A16001) may be changed. In this case, the LED driver initialization process (A15001) initializes the LED driver 153 for the LED data transmission process (A16001) in the next timer interrupt process.

[LED driver]
FIG. 71 is a diagram showing the configuration of an LED driver 153 according to the sixth embodiment. The LED driver 153 of this embodiment is the same as the driver 150 (FIG. 3) of the first embodiment. Also, the collective driver 153a, the role ratio driver 153b, and the ball payout rate/discharged ball number driver 153c, which will be described later, are the same as the LED driver 153. FIG.

The LED driver 153 displays digits 900 (900-3 (digit 3), 900-2 (digit 2), 900-1 (digit 1), 900- 0 (digit 0)) is energized to light up. A digit indicator 900 that constitutes the status display device 152 includes a 7-segment type (or 8-segment type) or a combination of 8 point-like LED lamps. The LED driver 153 may be either anode common or cathode common.

When the LED driver 153 is the role ratio driver 153b or the ball output rate/number of discharged balls driver 153c, the LED driver 153 in the previous stage (the first stage collective driver 153a or the second stage A 16-bit command is transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 via the role ratio driver 153b). When the LED driver 153 is the collective driver 153a, a 16-bit command is transmitted directly from the game microcomputer 111 without going through the LED driver 153 in the previous stage.

The LED driver 153 includes a 16-bit shift register 163, a 16-bit latch circuit 164, a latch selector 165, four 8-bit latches (latch circuits: for digit 0, digit 1, digit 2, and digit 3) 167a-167d, and a control unit 173. , an oscillator 174 , a 4-to-1 data selector 183 , a character generator (decoder) 185 , a 2-to-1 data selector 187 , a segment driver 193 and a digit driver 195 . The control unit 173 includes a number-of-digits setting unit 175 , a duty setting unit 176 , a data selection unit 177 and a standby mode setting unit 178 . The oscillation unit 174 generates and transmits a signal used in the control unit 173 (in particular, the number-of-digits setting unit 175 and the duty setting unit 176). An 8-bit latch functions as a data register. Furthermore, the LED driver 153 may include an emission color control section that controls the emission color of the LEDs (or segments).

A 16-bit command is input from the data input terminal to the 16-bit shift register 163 of the LED driver 153, and can be directly output to another LED driver 153 from the data output terminal. The data in the 16-bit shift register 163 is held (set) in the 16-bit latch circuit 164 at the timing (latch timing) when the 16-bit latch circuit 164 receives a latch signal (load signal) from the gaming microcomputer 111. ).

The upper 8 bits of the command held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164 are sent to the latch selector 165 , number-of-digits setting section 175 , duty setting section 176 , data selection section 177 and standby mode setting section 178 . Of the commands held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164, the lower 8 bits (data portion) are sent to 8-bit latches 167a-167d. In addition, lower 8-bit data (required bits (for example, 4 bits) may also be sent) to number-of-digits setting section 175 , duty setting section 176 , data selection section 177 , and standby mode setting section 178 .

When the upper 8 bits (address part) indicate the address of the number-of-digits setting unit 175 (for example, 21H (hexadecimal notation)), the number-of-digits setting unit 175 stores the control data (initial setting data), the lower 8 bits (only necessary bits are acceptable) are taken in, and the corresponding number of digits (for example, X0H to X3H (hexadecimal representation, X is arbitrary)) is set (initial setting). The set number of digits is the number (number of digits) of the displays 900 driven by the LED driver 153, and is 4 in this embodiment.

When the upper 8 bits indicate the address of the duty setting section 176 (for example, 20H (in hexadecimal notation)), the duty setting section 176 selects the control data (initial setting data) held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164, The lower 8 bits (only necessary bits are acceptable) are taken in, and the corresponding duty ratio (eg, X0H to XFH (hexadecimal representation, X is arbitrary)) is set (initialized). Note that the duty ratio indicating the brightness (luminescence intensity) of the segment (LED) of the display 900 corresponds to the output time width of the source driver. As for the source driver, the digit driver 195 corresponds to the anode common, and the segment driver 193 corresponds to the cathode common.

When the upper 8 bits indicate the address of the data selector 177 (for example, 27H (hexadecimal notation)), the data selector 177 selects the lower 8 bits (necessary bits) are taken in, and use/non-use of the decoded data by the character generator 185 is set. The address of the data selection unit 177 and the number-of-digits setting unit 175 may be set to the same address, and the data selection unit 177 may set the use/non-use of decoded data and the number-of-digits setting of the number-of-digits setting unit 175 at the same time ( The data selection section 177 and the number-of-digits setting section 175 are distinguished by the lower 8 bits).

That is, the data selection unit 177 selects whether the data in the 8-bit latch is decoded by the character generator 185 and used as decoded data, or whether the data in the 8-bit latch is used as it is as non-decode data. When decoded, the data in the 8-bit latch is regarded as a character code and decoded into character lighting pattern data. When the data in the 8-bit latch is used as it is as non-decode data, the data selection unit 177 sends a data selection signal indicating selection of non-decode data to the 2-to-1 data selector 187 . Thus, the data selection unit 177 can set whether or not to use the decoding function based on commands (including instructions and control data) from the game control device 100 (game microcomputer 111).

When the upper 8 bits indicate the address of the standby mode setting unit 178 or the command for the standby mode setting unit 178 (eg, 41H, 1XH, 0XH (hexadecimal expression: X is arbitrary), etc.), the standby mode setting unit 178 Of the control data held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164, the lower 8 bits (only necessary bits are acceptable) are fetched. For example, the standby mode setting unit 178 transmits a standby signal to turn off the segment driving unit 193 or the digit driving unit 195 to switch the LED driver 153 to the standby mode (in the case of 41H). 193 and digit driver 195 are forcibly turned off to turn off the display 900 of all digits (in the case of 0XH (BLANK data)), and the segment driver 193 and digit driver 195 of the LED driver 153 are driven dynamically. (in the case of 1XH). Note that in standby mode, each setting is not cleared and the previous setting is retained. In addition, in normal operation, after driving the segment driver 193 and the digit driver 195 once, the data in the 8-bit latch is immediately reflected in the display of the display 900 just by storing the data in the 8-bit latch. be.

The latch selector 165 transfers the latch signal to the 8-bit latch 167a when the upper 8 bits indicate the address of the 8-bit latch 167a (for example, 22H (in hexadecimal notation)). As a result, the 8-bit latch 167a latches (holds) and takes in (sets) the lower 8-bit (data part) lighting pattern data or character code. Similarly, when the high-order 8 bits indicate any address (eg, 23H, 24H, 25H (hexadecimal representation)) of the 8-bit latches 167b-167d, the latch selector 165 selects the 8-bit latches 167b-167d corresponding to the address. 167d. As a result, the 8-bit latches 167b to 167d can latch and fetch the low-order 8-bit (data part) lighting pattern data or character code addressed to themselves.

In addition, the latch signal (load signal) from the game microcomputer 111 is input to the latch selector 165, and the latch selector 165 transfers the latch signal to any one of the 8-bit latches 167a-167d, Select any one of latches 167a-167d. The 8-bit latches 167a-167d can then hold the display data for the display 900 of digit 0, digit 1, digit 2, and digit 3 destined for them, respectively.

The 4-to-1 data selector 183 sequentially selects the data of the 8-bit latches 167a to 167d corresponding to the digit line of each digit selected by the digit driver 195 in order to realize a dynamic drive system (dynamic lighting system). do. The 4-to-1 data selector 183 outputs the data of any one of the selected 8-bit latches 167 a to 167 d to the character generator 185 and the 2-to-1 data selector 187 . Digit line selection is performed by outputting an on/off drive signal to the digit line. In the case of anode common, an on voltage is applied to the digit line, and in the case of cathode common, a current draw voltage (off voltage) is applied to the digit line. ) is applied. Information indicating which digit line is selected by the digit driver 195 may be transmitted to the 4-to-1 data selector 183 .

For example, when the digit driver 195 outputs a drive signal to select the digit line of digit 0, the data in the 8-bit latch 167a is selected. Similarly, when the digit driver 195 outputs drive signals to select the digit lines of digit 1, digit 2, and digit 3, the data in the 8-bit latches 167b, 167c, and 167d are selected, respectively.

Character generator 185 decodes the data sent from 4:1 data selector 183 . When the data sent from the 4-to-1 data selector 183 is a character code, the character generator 185 converts the character code into lighting pattern data of the character indicated by the character code by decoding processing. Convert to

FIG. 72 is a diagram illustrating character codes and corresponding character lighting patterns. In FIG. 72, X is arbitrary (0 or 1), and the character code "X10...B" corresponds to lighting pattern data for lighting the decimal point (Dp). Various character codes can be defined to correspond to characters, but the character generator 185 is a logic circuit that defines the correspondence relationship between character codes (input) and characters (output) (character lighting pattern data). etc. For example, the character code "X0011010B" corresponds to the character "-", and lighting pattern data ((a, b, c, d, e, f, g, Dp) = (0 , 0,0,0,0,0,1,0)) (for example, "00000010B"). Since the batch driver 153a uses non-decoded data, it uses the lighting pattern data (for example, "00000010B") sent from the gaming microcomputer 111 as it is when lighting (turning on) only the segment g. .

Returning to the description with reference to FIG. If the LED driver 153 is the role ratio driver 153b or the ball output rate/number of discharged balls driver 153c, the character code transmitted from the game microcomputer 111 is held in the 8-bit latches 167a to 167d. 185 outputs the lighting pattern data of the character indicated by the character code. However, if the LED driver 153 is the batch driver 153a, the appropriate lighting pattern data transmitted from the game microcomputer 111 is already held in the 8-bit latches 167a-167d. The character generator 185 only converts appropriate lighting pattern data into inappropriate lighting pattern data by decoding. If the appropriate lighting pattern data coincidentally matches any of the character codes, the character generator 185 of the batch driver 153a may output the lighting pattern data of the character.

The 2:1 data selector 187 directly outputs the decoded data (decoded data) output from the character generator 185 and the 4:1 data selector 183 in response to the data selection signal from the data selection unit 177 . Any one of the non-decoded data is selected and output to the segment driver 193 . The non-decoded data is data output from the 4:1 data selector 183 without going through the character generator 185, and is the 8-bit data itself of the 8-bit latches 167a-167d. The 2-to-1 data selector 187 outputs non-decode data when a data selection signal indicating selection of non-decode data is input, and outputs decode data when no data selection signal is input.

If the LED driver 153 is the batch driver 153a, the 2-to-1 data selector 187 receives a data selection signal indicating the selection of non-decoded data, and an appropriate lighting pattern always held in the 8-bit latches 167a to 167d. Data will be output to the segment driver 193 . On the other hand, if the LED driver 153 is the role ratio driver 153b or the ball payout rate/number of discharged balls driver 153c, the 2:1 data selector 187 does not receive the data selection signal, and the character is always lit. The pattern data (decode data) is output to the segment driving section 193 .

The segment driver 193 outputs the lighting pattern data (decoded data or non-decoded data) from the 2-to-1 data selector 187 to the indicator 900 of the digit corresponding to the digit line selected by the digit driver 195 ( dynamic drive system). The lighting pattern data is light emission ON/OFF data for the eight LEDs (segments a to g, Dp or eight dotted LEDs) of the indicator 900 of the selected digit (that is, the selected digit line). In the case of the anode common, the segment drive unit 193 applies a current drawing voltage (off voltage) to the segment line as a drive voltage to turn on the LED (light emission state). In the case of cathode common, the LED is turned on (light emitting state) by applying an on voltage to the segment line as a driving voltage.

The eight LEDs of the display 900 are the segments ag and Dp in the display 900 of the 7-segment type (8-segment type including the dots). On the other hand, in the case of FIG. 34(A), the eight LEDs of the indicator 900 are a set of eight point-like LED lamps (D3-D7, D8, D10, D18) or eight point-like LED lamps. can be a set (D9, D11-D16, D17) of

Digit driver 195 outputs a drive signal to select a digit line for each digit. The digit driver 195 applies an ON voltage to the digit line in the case of anode common, and applies a current drawing voltage (OFF voltage) to the digit line in the case of cathode common as the drive signal.

The resistor connection terminal 197 (R-EXT terminal) connects one external resistor between this terminal and the ground (GND), and a constant current circuit composed of the segment driving section 193 and the segment driving section 193 performs segmentation. The current value flowing through the line can be set. This makes it possible to supply a common current value to all LEDs.

Furthermore, a light emission color control section (not shown) of the LED driver 153 controls the light emission color of the LED (or segment). In the main processing and timer interrupt processing, the emission color control unit receives a command (control data) relating to the color of the LED and sends a command signal to the segment drive unit 193 to control the emission color of the LED. can be done. The segment driving section 193 drives by applying a driving voltage to the segment lines of the color corresponding to the command signal from the emission color control section. A segment line is provided for each color LED (or segment) of the display device 900 .

As described above, the driver 150 of the first embodiment was initialized in the main process. At this time, initial setting is performed for the number-of-digits setting unit 175 and the duty setting unit 176 (furthermore, the data selection unit 177 and the standby mode setting unit 178) of the driver 150 (LED driver 153). On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, at least one of the number-of-digits setting unit 175 and the duty setting unit 176 is initialized even in timer interrupt processing. As a result, even if the setting value of the LED driver 153 (driving means) becomes an undefined value due to noise or the like after the main processing, the timer interrupt processing sets the correct setting value and then outputs the driving data (LED command). This makes it possible to avoid turning off the status display device 152 due to noise or the like. Also, if the number-of-digits setting unit 175 and the duty setting unit 176 (and the data selection unit 177 and the standby mode setting unit 178) are initialized in timer interrupt processing, the initialization (A1016) in the main processing should be omitted. can be done. In the sixth embodiment, a case where initial setting is performed for the number-of-digits setting unit 175 and the duty setting unit 176 will be described as an example.

[Initial setting command transmission timing chart]
FIG. 73 is a diagram showing the relationship between the initial setting command transmitted to the LED driver and latches according to the sixth embodiment. In FIG. 73, the initial setting command is shown with the address portion (8 bits) omitted. The game microcomputer 111 outputs an initial setting command (digit) including initial setting data (8 bits) for the number of digits setting unit 175 ((digit) is the initial setting value of the number of digits) (16 bits) (FIG. 74), The initial setting command (Du) (16 bits) (FIG. 74) containing the initial setting data (Du) ((Du) is the initial set value of the duty ratio) (8 bits) for the duty setting unit 176 is sequentially transmitted.

The game microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal each time an initialization command (16 bits) is transmitted. The game microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal when transmitting the final bit of the initial setting command. As a result, the initial setting command (digit) (FIG. 74) is held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164 of the LED driver 153, and the initial setting data (digit) is stored in the digit number setting section 175 by the initial setting command (digit). be done. Then, the next latch signal causes the 16-bit latch circuit 164 to hold the next initial setting command (Du) (FIG. 74), and the initial setting data (Du) is stored in the duty setting section 176 by the initial setting command (Du). be done. In FIG. 73, the initial setting command for the digit number setting section 175 is transmitted before the initial setting command for the duty setting section 176, but the order may be reversed.

[LED driver initial setting process]
The LED driver initial setting process (A15001 in FIG. 70) according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing a procedure of LED driver initial setting processing according to the sixth embodiment. In this embodiment, an example will be described in which the LED driver 153 is the role ratio driver 153b, and the character code (8 bits) stored in the role ratio driver 153b is the role ratio display data.

The game microcomputer 111 first generates an initial setting command (digit) related to the number of digits used in the number of digits setting unit 175 (A15002), writes the initial setting command (digit) into the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit, and clocks the clock. It is transmitted together with the signal (A15003). Next, the game microcomputer 111 generates an initial setting command (Du) relating to the duty ratio of the duty setting section 176 (A15004), and transmits the initial setting command (Du) in the same manner as described above (A15005).

[LED command transmission timing chart]
FIG. 75 is a diagram showing the relationship between LED commands and latches transmitted to the LED driver according to the sixth embodiment. In FIG. 75, the LED command is shown by omitting the address part (8 bits). The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal each time an LED command (16 bits) is transmitted. The game microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal when transmitting the last bit of the LED command.

The 16-bit latch circuit 164 of the LED driver 153 holds the first LED command (digit 0) by the first latch signal, and the LED command (digit 0) outputs the character ratio display data (digit 0) to the 8-bit latch 167a. ) is stored. Similarly, the 16-bit latch circuit 164 holds the second LED command (digit 1) by the second latch signal, and the LED command (digit 1) stores the character ratio display data (digit 1) in the 8-bit latch 167b. 1) is stored. The 16-bit latch circuit 164 holds the third LED command (digit 2) by the third latch signal, and the character ratio display data (digit 2) is stored in the 8-bit latch 167c by the LED command (digit 2). remembered. In the 16-bit latch circuit 164, the fourth LED command (digit 3) is held by the fourth latch signal, and the character ratio display data (digit 3) is stored in the 8-bit latch 167d by the LED command (digit 3). remembered.

[LED data transmission processing]
LED driver transmission processing according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing procedures of LED data transmission processing according to the sixth embodiment. The game microcomputer 111 first generates an LED command (digit 0) (16 bits) containing the character ratio display data (digit 0) to be stored in the 8-bit latch 167a (A16003), and generates the LED command (digit 0 ) is written in the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit and transmitted together with the clock signal (A16005).

The game microcomputer 111 generates an LED command (digit 1) containing the character product ratio display data (digit 1) to be stored in the 8-bit latch 167b (A16009), and transmits the LED command (digit 1) in the same manner as described above. (A16011). The game microcomputer 111 generates an LED command (digit 2) containing the character product ratio display data (digit 2) to be stored in the 8-bit latch 167c (A16015), and transmits the LED command (digit 2) (A16017 ). The game microcomputer 111 generates an LED command (digit 3) containing the character product ratio display data (digit 3) to be stored in the 8-bit latch 167d (A16021), and transmits the LED command (digit 3) (A16023 ). In FIG. 76, the LED commands (character product ratio display data=character code) are transmitted in the order of digit 0, digit 1, digit 2, and digit 3, but the transmission order can be set arbitrarily.

[Cascade Connection of LED Drivers According to First Modification]
FIG. 77 shows the details of the cascade connection of the LED drivers 153 (the role ratio driver 153b and the payout rate/number of balls discharged driver 153c) according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment. In the cascade connection, the role ratio driver 153b constitutes the first stage, and the ball payout ratio/number of discharged balls driver 153c constitutes the second stage. The serial data (initial setting command, LED command) transmitted from the game microcomputer 111 is first transmitted to the role ratio driver 153b, and then transmitted as it is from the role ratio driver 153b to the payout ratio/number of discharged balls driver 153c. be. That is, serial data such as initial setting data, lighting pattern data, and character code (character code) transmitted from the game microcomputer 111 are sequentially transmitted to the role ratio driver 153b and the ball payout ratio/number of discharged balls driver 153c. be done. Therefore, the gaming microcomputer 111 can serially transmit the initial setting data, the lighting pattern data, and the character code using one serial communication circuit. The game microcomputer 111 transmits a clock signal and a latch signal (load signal) in parallel to the role ratio driver 153b and the payout rate/number of discharged balls driver 153c.

[Status display device]
FIG. 78A is a diagram showing the details of the character product ratio display section 68 that displays the character product ratio. The character object ratio display section 68 in the state display device 152 is formed by arranging four 7-segment type (8-segment type including the dot portions) displays 900 in the horizontal direction. , digit 2, and digit 3 are shown. The role product ratio display unit 68 can switch between display of all role product ratios (for example, "y50.8") and display of continuous role product ratios (for example, "r58.4"). Digit 3 (fourth digit from the right) is the letter "y" indicating the total role ratio (generally used role ratio), or the letter "r" indicating the continuous role ratio. may be displayed.

The role ratio driver 153b (FIG. 77) converts the character code (character code) received from the gaming microcomputer 111 into lighting pattern data of the character indicated by the character code, and based on the lighting pattern data. Lighting of the indicator 900 of each digit (digit 3, digit 2, digit 1, digit 0) of the character product ratio display section 68 is controlled. This character code (character product ratio display data) corresponds to each digit of the character product ratio (A1318 in FIGS. 6 and 70) calculated by the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 . The role ratio driver 153b has a character generator 185 (decoder) that generates the lighting pattern data of the character indicated by the character code from the character code by decoding, and can set the use/non-use of decoded data by the character generator 185. is set to use the decoded data. That is, the role ratio driver 153b can set whether or not to use a decoding function for generating lighting data for the role product ratio display section 68 from the character code.

FIG. 78B is a diagram showing the details of the discharged ball number display portion 66 that displays the discharged ball number and the ball output rate display portion 67 that displays the ball output rate. The discharged ball number display section 66 and the ball output rate display section 67 in the state display device 152 are formed by arranging four 7-segment type (8-segment type including the dot portions) displays 900 in the horizontal direction. A display 900 indicating the digit 0 and a display 900 indicating the digit 1 correspond to the discharged ball number display section 66 from the right. Corresponds to part 67 . Conversely, a display 900 indicating the digit 0 and a display 900 indicating the digit 1 correspond to the payout rate display portion 67 from the right, and a display 900 indicating the digit 2 and a display 900 indicating the digit 3 are discharged from the right. It may correspond to the pitch display section 66 . The discharged ball number display portion 66 and the ball output rate display portion 67 can be displayed at the same time.

The driver 153c (Fig. 77) for ball output rate/number of discharged balls receives the character code (character code) received from the game microcomputer 111 via the role ratio driver 153b, and lights the character indicated by the character code. After conversion into pattern data, the lighting of the indicator 900 of each digit of the discharged ball number display section 66 and the ball output rate display section 67 is controlled based on the lighting pattern data. The ball-out ratio/ball-out driver 153c decodes the character code into the lighting pattern data of the character indicated by the character code (ball-out display data or ball-out ratio display data). ) and the use/non-use of the decoded data by the character generator 185 can be set, the decoded data is set to be used. That is, the ball-out ratio/number-of-discharged-balls driver 153c can set whether or not to use a decoding function for generating lighting data for the number-of-balls-out display portion 66 and the number-of-balls-out display portion 67 from the character code.

[Transmission timing chart of initial setting command according to the first modification]
FIG. 79 is a timing chart showing initial setting commands sent to the role ratio driver and the ball payout ratio/number of discharged balls driver according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment. In FIG. 79, the initial setting command is shown with the address portion (8 bits) omitted. The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs initial setting data (8 bits) for the number of digits setting section 175 of the payout ratio/number of discharged balls driver 153c, and initial setting data (8 bits) for the number of digits setting section 175 of the winning ratio driver 153b. bits) are included in the initial setting command (32 bits) in order, and the initial setting data (8 bits) for the duty setting section 176 of the driver 153c for the payout ratio/number of discharged balls, and the data for the role ratio driver 153b. The initial setting data (8 bits) for the duty setting section 176 is included in the initial setting command (32 bits) and transmitted.

The game microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal each time an initialization command (32 bits) is transmitted. The game microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal when transmitting the final bit of the initial setting command. As a result, the initial setting data (digit) c is stored in the digit number setting section 175 of the driver 153c for the payout rate/number of discharged balls. At the same time, the initial setting data (digit) b is stored in the digit number setting section 175 of the role ratio driver 153b by the latch signal.

Then, the initial setting data (du)c is stored in the duty setting section 176 of the driver 153c for the payout ratio/number of discharged balls by the next latch signal. At the same time, the initial setting data (du)b is stored in the duty setting section 176 of the role ratio driver 153b by the latch signal.

[Initial setting processing of the driver for the ball output rate/the number of discharged balls and the driver for the role ratio]
The LED driver initial setting process (A15001 in FIG. 70) according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing the procedure of initial setting processing for the role ratio driver and the ball payout rate/number of discharged balls driver according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment.

First, the gaming microcomputer 111 outputs an initial setting command (digit) c including initial setting data (digit) c (8 bits) relating to the number of digits used in the number of digits setting section 175 of the payout rate/number of discharged balls driver 153c. (16 bits) (A15006), and an initial setting command (digit) b ( 16 bits) is generated (A15007), and the initial setting commands (digits) c and b (32 bits) concatenated in order of the initial setting command (digit) c and the initial setting command (digit) b are sent to the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit. , and transmitted together with the clock signal (A15009).

Next, the gaming microcomputer 111 issues an initial setting command (Du)c (16 bits) including initial setting data (Du)c relating to the duty ratio of the duty setting section 176 of the ball output/number of discharged balls driver 153c. (A15011), and generates an initial setting command (Du)b (16 bits) containing initial setting data (Du)b relating to the duty ratio of the duty setting unit 176 of the role ratio driver 153b (A15012), and generates an initial setting command (Du)b (16 bits) Initial setting commands (Du)c and b (32 bits), which are concatenated in order of setting command (Du)c and initial setting command (Du)b, are transmitted in the same manner as described above (A15014).

[LED command transmission timing chart according to the first modification]
FIG. 81 is a timing chart showing LED commands sent to the role ratio driver and the ball payout rate/number of discharged balls driver according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment. Here, the character code stored in the role ratio driver 153b is the role product ratio display data (digit 0-digit 3), and the character code stored in the ball output rate/number of balls discharged driver 153c is the This is the number of balls display data (digit 0, digit 1) or the pitching percentage display data (digit 2, digit 3). In FIG. 81, the LED command is shown with the address part (8 bits) omitted.

The game microcomputer 111 stores the number of discharged balls display data (digit 0) c (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167a of the payout rate/number of discharged balls driver 153c, and the 8-bit latch 167a of the winning ratio driver 153b. Generate and transmit LED commands (32 bits) in the order of stored character ratio display data (digit 0) b (8 bits), and then output ball rate/number of discharged balls driver 153c. The number of discharged ball display data (digit 1) c (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the role ratio driver 153b and the role ratio display data (digit 1) b stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the role ratio driver 153b are stored in this order. It is generated and transmitted in the form included in the LED command (32 bits).

Here, the gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal each time it transmits an LED command (32 bits). The game microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal when transmitting the last bit of the LED command. As a result, the number of discharged balls display data (digit 0) c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167a of the driver 153c for the number of discharged balls/number of discharged balls. At the same time, the latch signal causes the role ratio display data (digit 0) b to be stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the role ratio driver 153b.

Then, by the next latch signal, the number of discharged balls display data (digit 1) c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the driver 153c for the payout ratio/number of discharged balls. At the same time, the role ratio display data (digit 1) b is stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the role ratio driver 153b.

Although not shown in FIG. 81, after that, the gaming microcomputer 111 stores the payout ratio display data (digit 2) c (8 bits) in the 8-bit latch 167c of the payout ratio/number of discharged balls ), then the role ratio display data (digit 2)b stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the role ratio driver 153b are generated and transmitted in a command (32 bits) in this order. Pitching rate display data (digit 3) c (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the rate/ball number driver 153c, and the role ratio display data ( A command (32 bits) is generated in the order of digit 3)b and transmitted.

Therefore, the next latch signal causes the payout ratio display data (digit 2) c to be stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the payout ratio/number of discharged balls driver 153c. At the same time, the latch signal causes the role ratio display data (digit 2) b to be stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the role ratio driver 153b.

Further, the next latch signal causes the 8-bit latch 167d of the driver 153c for the payout rate/number of discharged balls to store the payout rate display data (digit 3) c. At the same time, according to the LED command (digit 3)b, the role ratio display data (digit 3)b is stored in the 8-bit latch 167d of the role ratio driver 153b.

[LED data transmission processing according to the first modification]
LED driver transmission processing according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing procedures of LED data transmission processing according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment.

The gaming microcomputer 111 first outputs an LED command (digit 0) c (8 bits) containing the number of discharged balls display data (digit 0) c ( 16 bits) (A16002), and generate an LED command (digit 0)b containing the punctuation ratio display data (digit 0)b to be stored in the 8-bit latch 176a of the role ratio driver 153b (A16003), LED command (digit 0) c and LED command (digit 0) b (32 bits) concatenated in this order are written in the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit and transmitted together with the clock signal ( A16006).

The gaming microcomputer 111 generates an LED command (digit 1) c containing the number of discharged balls display data (digit 1) c to be stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the driver 153c for the payout ratio/number of discharged balls (A16008). , LED command (digit 1) b including role product ratio display data (digit 1) b to be stored in 8-bit latch 176b of role ratio driver 153b (A16009), LED command (digit 1) c, LED The LED commands (digit 1) c and b concatenated in the order of the command (digit 1) b are transmitted in the same manner as described above (A16012).

The game microcomputer 111 generates an LED command (digit 2) c containing the payout rate display data (digit 2) c to be stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the payout rate/number of discharged balls driver 153c (A16014). , generates an LED command (digit 2) b containing role product ratio display data (digit 2) b to be stored in the 8-bit latch 176c of the role ratio driver 153b (A16015), LED command (digit 2) c, LED The LED commands (digit 2) c and b linked in the order of the command (digit 2) b are transmitted in the same manner as described above (A16018).

The gaming microcomputer 111 generates an LED command (digit 3) c containing the payout rate display data (digit 3) c to be stored in the 8-bit latch 167d of the payout rate/number of discharged balls driver 153c (A16020). , generates an LED command (digit 3) b containing the role product ratio display data (digit 3) b to be stored in the 8-bit latch 176d of the role ratio driver 153b (A16021), LED command (digit 3) c, LED The LED commands (digit 3) c and b linked in the order of the command (digit 3) b are transmitted in the same manner as described above (A16024).

[Game control device according to the second modification]
FIG. 83 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a game control system of a game machine according to the second modification of the sixth embodiment. The game control device 100 of the sixth embodiment is similar to the game control device 100 of the first embodiment, but the state display device 152 attached to the game control device 100 is incorporated into the collective display device 50. It has become. In addition, in the game control device 100 of the present embodiment, a collective driver 153a, a role ratio driver 153b, and a ball payout rate/number of discharged balls driver 153c are cascade-connected in that order by data signal lines. is connected to a batch driver 153a.

[Cascade Connection of LED Drivers According to Second Modification]
FIG. 84 is a diagram showing details of cascade connection of LED drivers according to the second modification of the sixth embodiment. In the cascade connection, the collective driver 153a constitutes the first stage, the role ratio driver 153b constitutes the second stage, and the ball payout rate/discharged ball number driver 153c constitutes the third stage. The serial data (initial setting command, LED command) transmitted from the game microcomputer 111 is transmitted to the collective driver 153a, and is transmitted as it is from the collective driver 153a to the role ratio driver 153b. Then, the serial data sent to the role ratio driver 153b is sent as it is from the role ratio driver 153b to the payout rate/number of discharged balls driver 153c. That is, serial data such as initial setting data, lighting pattern data, character code (character code) transmitted from the game microcomputer 111 are sequentially applied to the batch driver 153a, the role ratio driver 153b, the ball output rate/the number of discharged balls. is transmitted to the driver 153c. Therefore, the gaming microcomputer 111 can serially transmit the initial setting data, the lighting pattern data, and the character code using one serial communication circuit. The game microcomputer 111 transmits a clock signal and a latch signal (load signal) in parallel to the batch driver 153a, the role ratio driver 153b, and the ball payout ratio/number of discharged balls driver 153c.

The collective driver 153a controls the lighting of the collective display section (not shown) according to the lighting pattern data received from the gaming microcomputer 111. FIG. The collective driver 153a has a 7-segment type (8-segment type including a point) indicator 900 (LED lamp), the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (D1) as a digit 0 indicator 900, the second The special figure fluctuation display unit 52 (D2) is controlled as the display device 900 of the digit 1 (see FIG. 2B, etc.).

The collective driver 153a is originally intended to control the 4-digit 7-segment type (8-segment type including the dots) display 900 itself. The round display section 60 and the eight dotted LED lamps (D3-D7, D8, D10, D18) of the first game state display section 57 are regarded as the segments (ag, Dp) of the digit 2 display device 900. (See FIG. 2B, etc.). In addition, the collective driver 153a has a reserved storage display unit (special figure 1 reserved display unit 54, special figure 2 reserved display unit 55, general figure reserved display unit 56), a second game state display unit 58, and a third game state. Eight dotted LED lamps (D9, D11-D16, D17) of the display unit 59 are regarded as segments (ag, Dp) of the display 900 of the digit 3 and controlled (see FIG. 2B, etc.).

In this embodiment, the collective driver 153a is actually the same kind of LED driver 153 (same IC) as the role ratio driver 153b and the ball payout rate/number of discharged balls driver 153c. 153a is set so as not to use decoded data by the character generator 185 (non-use setting) even if the character generator 185 is provided.

[Transmission timing chart of initial setting command according to second modification]
FIG. 85 is a timing chart showing initial setting commands sent to the collective driver, the role ratio driver, and the ball payout rate/number of balls discharged driver according to the second modification of the sixth embodiment. In FIG. 85, the initial setting command is shown with the address portion (8 bits) omitted.

The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs initial setting data (8 bits) for the number of digits setting section 175 of the payout ratio/number of discharged balls driver 153c, and initial setting data (8 bits) for the number of digits setting section 175 of the winning ratio driver 153b. bit), initial setting data (8 bits) for the number of digits setting unit 175 of the batch driver 153a are transmitted in the form of being included in the command (48 bits) in this order, and the duty setting of the driver 153c for the payout ratio/number of discharged balls is transmitted. initial setting data (digit) c (8 bits) for the unit 176, initial setting data (digit) b (8 bits) for the duty setting unit 176 of the role ratio driver 153b, and duty setting unit 176 of the batch driver 153a initial setting data (digit) a (8 bits) is included in the command (48 bits) and transmitted.

The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal each time it transmits an initial setting command (48 bits). The game microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal when transmitting the final bit of the initial setting command. As a result, the initial setting data (digit) c is stored in the digit number setting section 175 of the driver 153c for the payout rate/number of discharged balls. At the same time, the initial setting data (digit) b is stored in the digit number setting section 175 of the role ratio driver 153b by the latch signal. At the same time, the initial set data (digit) a is stored in the digit number setting section 175 of the batch driver 153a by the latch signal.

Then, the initial setting data (du)c is stored in the duty setting section 176 of the driver 153c for the payout ratio/number of discharged balls by the next latch signal. At the same time, the initial setting data (du)b is stored in the duty setting section 176 of the role ratio driver 153b by the latch signal. At the same time, the initial setting data (du)a is stored in the duty setting section 176 of the batch driver 153a by the latch signal.

[Initial setting processing of the ball output rate/ball count driver, the role ratio driver, and the batch driver]
LED driver initialization processing according to the second modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a flow chart showing the procedure of initial setting processing for the collective driver, the role ratio driver, and the ball payout rate/number of balls discharged driver according to the second modification of the sixth embodiment.

First, the gaming microcomputer 111 outputs an initial setting command (digit) c including initial setting data (digit) c (8 bits) relating to the number of digits used in the number of digits setting section 175 of the payout rate/number of discharged balls driver 153c. (16 bits) (A15006), and an initial setting command (digit) b ( 16 bits) (A15007), and an initial setting command (digit) a (16 bits) including initial setting data (digit) a (8 bits) relating to the number of digits used in the number of digits setting unit 175 of the batch driver 153a ) is generated (A15008), and initial setting command (digit) c, b, and a (48 bits) are concatenated in order of initial setting command (digit) c, initial setting command (digit) b, and initial setting command (digit) a. ) is written in the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit and transmitted together with the clock signal (A15010).

Next, the gaming microcomputer 111 issues an initial setting command (Du)c (16 bits) including initial setting data (Du)c relating to the duty ratio of the duty setting section 176 of the ball output/number of discharged balls driver 153c. generate (A15011), generate an initial setting command (Du)b (16 bits) including initial setting data (Du)b relating to the duty ratio of the duty setting unit 176 of the role ratio driver 153b (A15012), and collectively An initial setting command (Du)a (16 bits) including initial setting data (Du)a relating to the duty ratio of the duty setting unit 176 of the driver 153a is generated (A15013), and an initial setting command (Du)c, initial An initial setting command (Du) c, b, a (48 bits) concatenated in the order of setting command (Du) b and initial setting command (Du) a is transmitted in the same manner as described above (A15015).

[LED command transmission timing chart according to the second modification]
FIG. 87 is a timing chart showing LED commands sent to the collective driver, the role ratio driver, and the ball payout rate/number of balls discharged driver according to the second modification of the sixth embodiment. Here, the character code stored in the role ratio driver 153b is the role product ratio display data (digit 0-digit 3), and the character code stored in the ball output rate/number of balls discharged driver 153c is the This is the number of balls display data (digit 0, digit 1) or the pitching percentage display data (digit 2, digit 3). Further, lighting pattern data (digit 0-digit 3) (hereinafter referred to as "lighting data") is stored in the batch driver 153a. In FIG. 87, the LED command is shown with the address part (8 bits) omitted.

The game microcomputer 111 stores the character code (digit 0) c (8 bits) in the 8-bit latch 167a of the payout rate/number of discharged balls driver 153c, and the character stored in the 8-bit latch 167a of the winning ratio driver 153b. The code (digit 0) b (8 bits) and the lighting data (digit 0) a (8 bits) to be stored in the 8-bit latch 167a of the batch driver 153a are processed in this order as the LED command (digit 0) c, b, a ( 48 bits), and then the character code (digit 1) c (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the driver 153c for the payout ratio/number of discharged balls, and for role ratio The character code (digit 1) b (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the driver 153b and the lighting data (digit 1) a (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the batch driver 153a are read in this order. It is generated and transmitted in the form included in the command (digit 1) c, b, a (48 bits).

Here, the game microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal each time it transmits an LED command (48 bits). The game microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal when transmitting the last bit of the LED command. As a result, the number of discharged balls display data (digit 0) c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167a of the driver 153c for the number of discharged balls/number of discharged balls. At the same time, the latch signal causes the role ratio display data (digit 0) b to be stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the role ratio driver 153b. At the same time, the latch signal causes the lighting data (digit 0) a to be stored in the 8-bit latch 167a of the batch driver 153a.

Then, by the next latch signal, the number of discharged balls display data (digit 1) c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the driver 153c for the payout ratio/number of discharged balls. At the same time, the latch signal causes the role ratio display data (digit 1) b to be stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the role ratio driver 153b. At the same time, the latch signal causes the lighting data (digit 1) a to be stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the batch driver 153a.

Although not shown in FIG. 87, after that, the gaming microcomputer 111 stores the character code (digit 2) c (8 bits) in the 8-bit latch 167c of the driver 153c for payout ratio/number of discharged balls, The character code (digit 2) b (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the comparison driver 153b and the lighting data (digit 2) a (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the batch driver 153a are stored in this order. is included in the LED command (digit 2) c, b, a (48 bits) and transmitted, and then the character code to be stored in the 8-bit latch 167d of the driver 153c for the payout rate/number of balls discharged (digit 3) c (8 bits), character code (digit 3) b (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167d of the role ratio driver 153b, lighting data stored in the 8-bit latch 167d of the batch driver 153a ( The LED command (digit 3) c, b, a (48 bits) is generated and transmitted in the order of digit 3 a (8 bits).

Therefore, the next latch signal causes the payout rate display data (digit 2) c to be stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the payout rate/number of discharged balls driver 153c. At the same time, the role ratio display data (digit 2) b is stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the role ratio driver 153b. At the same time, the latch signal causes the lighting data (digit 2) a to be stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the batch driver 153a.

Further, the next latch signal causes the payout rate display data (digit 3) c to be stored in the 8-bit latch 167d of the payout rate/number of discharged balls driver 153c. At the same time, the latch signal causes the role ratio display data (digit 3) b to be stored in the 8-bit latch 167d of the role ratio driver 153b. At the same time, the lighting data (digit 3) a is stored in the 8-bit latch 167d of the batch driver 153a by the latch signal.

[LED data transmission processing according to the second modification]
LED driver transmission processing according to the second modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing procedures of LED data transmission processing according to the second modification of the sixth embodiment.

The game microcomputer 111 first outputs an LED command (digit 0) c ( 16 bits) is generated (A16002), and an LED command (digit 0)b containing the character ratio display data (digit 0)b to be stored in the 8-bit latch 176a of the role ratio driver 153b is generated (A16003), An LED command (digit 0) a including the lighting code (digit 0) a (display data of special figure 1 LED) to be stored in the 8-bit latch 176a of the batch driver 153a is generated (A16004). LED command (digit 0) c, LED command (digit 0) b, and LED command (digit 0) a (48 bits) connected in this order are sent to a serial communication circuit. , and transmitted together with the clock signal (A16007).

The game microcomputer 111 outputs an LED command (digit 1) c (16 bit) (A16008), and generate an LED command (digit 1) b containing the character ratio display data (digit 1) b to be stored in the 8-bit latch 176b of the role ratio driver 153b (A16009), collectively LED command (digit 1) a including lighting code (digit 1) a (display data of special figure 2 LED) to be stored in 8-bit latch 176b of driver 153a is generated (A16010). LED command (digit 1) c, LED command (digit 1) b, and LED command (digit 1) a (48 bits) are connected in the order of LED command (digit 1) c, b, a (48 bits) Send (A16013).

The game microcomputer 111 outputs an LED command (digit 2) c (16 bit) is generated (A16014), and an LED command (digit 2) b containing the character ratio display data (digit 2) b to be stored in the 8-bit latch 176c of the role ratio driver 153b is generated (A16015), and collectively An LED command (digit 2) a including a lighting code (digit 2) a (display data for normal/round/first game state) to be stored in the 8-bit latch 176c of the driver 153a is generated (A16016). LED command (digit 2) c, LED command (digit 2) b, and LED command (digit 2) a (48 bits) are connected in this order. Send (A16019).

The game microcomputer 111 outputs an LED command (digit 3) c (16 bit) (A16020), and generate an LED command (digit 3) b containing the character ratio display data (digit 3) b to be stored in the 8-bit latch 176d of the role ratio driver 153b (A16021), and collectively An LED command (digit 3) a containing a lighting code (digit 3) a (display data for the pending/second and third game states) to be stored in the 8-bit latch 176d of the driver 153a is generated (A16022). LED command (digit 3) c, LED command (digit 3) b, and LED command (digit 3) a (48 bits) are connected in the order described above. Send (A16025).

[Functions and effects of the sixth embodiment]
According to the sixth embodiment, the game machine 10 includes a game control program storage means (ROM 111b) for storing a game control program (invariant information (program) for game control), a game control program (for game control Arithmetic processing means (game microcomputer 111) that performs predetermined arithmetic processing according to immutable information (program)), and a light emitting unit based on driving data (LED command) output by the arithmetic processing means (game microcomputer 111) A driving means (LED driver 153) for driving (character product ratio display unit 68) is provided. The drive means (LED driver 153) is provided with a setting section (digit number setting section 175, duty setting section 176) for setting the light emission mode in the light emitting section (character product ratio display section 68), and the game control program Main processing (A1001 ~) for controlling the progress of, and interrupt processing (A1301 ~) that is executed by interrupting the main processing (A1001 ~) every predetermined time, and arithmetic processing means (game microcomputer 111) In the interrupt processing (A1301), the driving means (LED driver 153) provides initial setting data for initializing the setting units (digit number setting unit 175, duty setting unit 176) (at least one of the plurality of setting units). (A15001), the driving data (LED command) is transmitted to the driving means (LED driver 153).

As a result, even if the set value of the LED driver 153 (driving means) becomes an indefinite value due to noise or the like after the main processing, the interrupt processing can restore the LED driver 153 to normal, and the correct set value can be obtained. It is possible to output the driving data (LED command) after setting the state display device 152 (and the collective display device 50), and it is possible to avoid turning off the state display device 152 (and the collective display device 50) due to noise or the like.

In the interrupt processing (A1301), after the driving data (LED command) is transmitted to the driving means (LED driver 153), at least one of the plurality of setting units (number-of-digits setting unit 175, duty setting unit 176) A configuration is also possible in which initial setting data for initializing the LEDs is transmitted to the driving means (LED driver 153). In this case, in order to transmit drive data in the next interrupt process, initial setting data is transmitted to the drive means in the current interrupt process to initialize the setting unit.

That is, in the interrupt processing (A1301), if the initial setting data is transmitted to the driving means together with the driving data, regardless of the transmission order of the driving data and the initial setting data, the status display device 152 (and the batch display device) 50) can be prevented from being turned off due to noise or the like.

Further, according to the sixth embodiment, the arithmetic processing means (game microcomputer 111) can transmit initial setting data to the driving means (LED driver 153) even in the main process (A1001-). As a result, it is possible to prevent the state display device 152 from being turned off even before the interrupt processing is started.

Further, according to the sixth embodiment, the setting unit (number-of-digits setting unit 175, duty setting unit 176) sets the number of light-emitting elements (displays 900) to emit light in the light-emitting unit (character object ratio display unit 68). It includes a digit number setting section 175 and a duty setting section 176 for setting the duty ratio in the light emitting element (display device 900).

As a result, even if the setting value of the LED driver 153 (driving means) becomes an indefinite value due to noise or the like, the correct setting value (the number of light emitting elements and their duty ratio (light emission intensity, brightness)) can be set. It becomes possible to output driving data (LED command), and it is possible to avoid turning off the status display device 152 (and the collective display device 50) due to noise or the like.

Further, according to the sixth embodiment, the light emitting unit is the character ratio display unit 68 that displays the character ratio. As a result, it is possible to reliably display the character product ratio display section 68 according to the game control program even after the main processing.

[Seventh Embodiment]
A seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 89 to 93. FIG. The seventh embodiment has the same configuration as the first embodiment, but differs from the first embodiment in the procedure for changing the test-firing test signal (test signal) to be transmitted to the test-firing test apparatus and the probability set value (set value). are different. Note that the test-firing test device is an external device that exists outside the gaming machine 10 .

The device configuration in which this embodiment is performed is similar to that shown in FIG. , setting change device 42 (setting key switch 93, set value change switch 102), input port 123, data bus 140, buffer 133, sixth output port 141. FIG. Also, the game control device 100 is provided with a setting change device 42 (setting key switch 93, setting value change switch 102) and a probability setting value display device 143 (display section). As described in the first embodiment, the buffer 133 is provided with output ports (corresponding to the test signal output ports 1 to 6 used in the output processing in FIG. 7).

The input port 123 , the buffer 133 (second output section), and the sixth output port 141 (first output section) are connected to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . A setting key switch 93 and a set value change switch 102 are connected to the input port 123 . A relay board 70 is connected to the buffer 133 . A probability setting value display device 143 is connected to the sixth output port 141 .

Dedicated addresses are assigned to the buffer 133 (second output section) (test signal output port) and the sixth output port 141 (first output section). Information can be output to any one of buffer 133 (test signal output port) and sixth output port 141 .

The probability setting value display device 143 has, for example, a 7-segment type (8-segment type including a dot display unit) indicator (LED lamp) similar to the state display device 152 shown in FIG. It is composed of a driver that converts into lighting pattern data (probability set value display data) representing a lighting pattern. Also, the test-firing test device can be provided with a display and a driver similar to the probability setting value display device 143 .

The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs information in the probability setting value area (probability setting value display data corresponding to the definite value of the probability setting value) or information in the working probability setting value area (temporary probability setting value) to the sixth output port 141 . Probability setting value display data corresponding to the value) is output. On the other hand, the game microcomputer 111 outputs the information of the probability setting value area to the buffer 133 (test signal output port), but does not output the information of the working probability setting value area.

As a result, the probability setting value display device 143 displays the definite value and the provisional value of the probability setting value. Also, if the test-firing test apparatus has a display device similar to the probability set value display device 143, only the definite value of the probability set value is displayed on the test-firing test apparatus.

[Probability setting value change processing of the seventh embodiment]
FIG. 89 is a flow chart showing the procedure of probability setting value change processing according to the seventh embodiment. The probability setting value change processing according to the seventh embodiment is similar to that of the first embodiment (FIG. 10), but step A20002 is added between steps A2413 and A2414, and step A20003 is added between steps A2420 and A2421. is added.

In step A2002, the game microcomputer 111 outputs the lighting pattern data (probability setting value display data) corresponding to the same determined probability setting value as that output to the probability setting value display device 143 as a test signal. Save to data area. For example, the lighting pattern data and the test signal output data are the same "10111110B" ((a, b, c, d, e, f, g, Dp)=(1, 0, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 0)) (see the sixth embodiment for lighting pattern data). As a result, the test-firing test apparatus can collect data of the definite value of the probability setting value as the test-firing test signal, and can display the definite value of the probability setting value when the test-firing test apparatus is equipped with a display.

At step A20003, the gaming microcomputer 111 saves the test-firing test signal once erased at step A2418 in the test signal output data area again. As a result, even after the process of changing the probability setting value (main process), the test-firing test device can collect data of the final probability setting value as a test-firing test signal. The fixed value of the probability setting value can be displayed.

[Display example of the probability setting value in the probability setting display device and the test firing test device]
FIG. 90 shows the lighting pattern data transmitted to the probability setting value display device 143 and the test firing test signal transmitted to the test firing test device at the time of setting change in the seventh embodiment, in the 7-segment type (including the dot display section). 8 is a schematic diagram when displayed on an 8-segment display. FIG. Here, a case of changing the probability set value from 1 to 6 will be described as an example.

In this embodiment, regardless of whether the setting key switch 93 is turned on or off, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting values saved in the probability setting value area are saved as the test-firing test signal in the test-firing test display data area. It's becoming The test-firing test apparatus can always collect data of the definite value of the probability setting value as the test-firing test signal, and can always display the definite value of the probability setting value when the test-firing test apparatus is equipped with a display.

In the initial state, the probability setting value display device 143 is turned off, and the probability setting value "1" is displayed on the display of the test firing test device by the lighting pattern data (probability setting value display data) as the test firing test signal. there is

Next, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on, the setting becomes variable, and the game microcomputer 111 loads the value of the probability setting value area and stores it in the working probability setting value area as initial data when changing the probability setting value. Save (A1040). At this stage, step A2401 (=Y)→step A2406 (=N)→step A2407 (=N)→step A2411 (=N) in FIG. 89 is repeated. At this time, as shown in FIG. 90 (display by the output processing according to FIG. 7), the probability setting value display device 143 displays "1" (provisional value) as the lighting pattern data. The display on the display remains "1" (determined value before change).

Next, when the set value change switch 102 is pressed, step A2407 (=Y) is reached in FIG. 89, so steps A2408 to A2410 are executed. At this time, as shown in FIG. 90, "2" (provisional value) is displayed on the probability set value display device 143 after a predetermined lighting blank period (extinguishing period). remains "1" (fixed value before change).

If the set value change switch 102 is further depressed, steps A2408 to A2410 in FIG. 89 are repeated. At this time, as shown in FIG. 90, every time the set value change switch 102 is pressed, the display of the probability set value display device 143 changes from "3" to "4" to "5" to "6" (all provisional values). However, the display on the display of the test firing test device remains "1" (fixed value before change).

Then, when there is an input from the touch switch (step A2411 (=Y)), steps A2412, A2413, and A20002 are executed, and the probability setting value "6" ( definite value) is overwritten. At this time, as shown in FIG. 90, the display of the probability setting value display device 143 changes from "6" (provisional value) to "6" (determined value), and the display of the test firing test device displays "1" (provisional value). value) to "6" (determined value).

Further, step A2418 is executed by executing step A2406 (=Y) and step A2416 (=Y), and probability setting value display data (probability setting value display data) saved in the test signal output data area and probability setting value display data area The set value "6") is temporarily erased, but is restored by steps A2420 and A20003. In this case, the display of the probability set value display device 143 and the display of the test firing test device maintains "6" (determined value).

Finally, by turning off the setting key switch 93, as shown in FIG. 89, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value "6" is saved in the probability setting value display data area in step A2420. A20003 saves the test-firing test signal (lighting pattern data) corresponding to the probability setting value "6" in the test signal output data area. When the setting key switch 93 is turned off, the probability setting value display permission flag is not set. The probability set value display data is not displayed on the value display device 143 (step A1613 (=N)). On the other hand, the test signal output data continues to be transmitted to the test fire test equipment (A1621, A1622, A1624). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 90, the probability setting value display device 143 is turned off, and the display of the probability setting value "6" is maintained on the display of the test firing test apparatus.

[First Modification of Seventh Embodiment]
FIG. 91 shows the lighting pattern data transmitted to the probability setting value display device 143 and the test firing test signal transmitted to the test firing test device at the time of setting change in the first modified example of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of a display on an 8-segment display including a display unit.

The probability setting value display device 143 and the display of the test firing test device can display 7-segment lighting pattern data (a, b, c, d, e, f, g) and dot data (Dp) (additional information). (see FIG. 71). The dot display part attached to the 7-segment segment lights up when the dot data (Dp) is "1" and goes out when it is "0", for example.

As described above, in the output processing (step A1621, step A1622 (=Y), step A1623, step A1624) shown in FIG. On the other hand, by steps A1621 and A1622 (=N), when there is no setting key switch ON information, the test-firing test signal is output as it is.

In this embodiment, when the setting key switch 93 is in the ON state, a setting key switch ON signal is input to the gaming microcomputer 111 . Here, the setting key switch ON signal can be expressed as "1", for example. On the other hand, when the setting key switch 93 is in the OFF state, it can be considered that the setting key switch OFF signal (the state in which there is no setting key switch ON signal) is input to the gaming microcomputer 111 . At this time, the setting key switch off signal can be expressed as "0", for example.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the test firing test signal is set as lighting pattern data, the setting key switch ON information is set as dot data (1), the setting key switch OFF information is set as dot data (0), and the lighting pattern data and dot data (Dp = 0 or 1) is output to the test firing test equipment. As a result, the final probability setting value is displayed on the test-firing test apparatus based on the lighting pattern data. Also, the on/off state of the setting key switch 93, that is, whether or not the setting is being changed can be grasped from the lighting/lighting-out of the dot display portion according to the presence or absence of the dot data (1). In the present embodiment, dot data (1) indicates that the dot display is lit, indicating that the setting is being changed, and dot data (0) indicates that the dot display is off, indicating that the setting has been changed. can do.

In this embodiment, the game microcomputer 111 stores data (a, b, c, d, e, f, g, Dp) including lighting pattern data (determined value of probability setting value) and dot data in the buffer 133 ( It is configured to output to the test-firing test apparatus via the test signal output port) and the relay board 70 (FIG. 3). As a result, the test-firing test apparatus can grasp whether or not the setting is being changed as well as the final value of the current probability setting value.

As shown in FIG. 91, in the first modification, the display of the test firing test apparatus always displays the fixed probability setting value. Even while the probability setting value (provisional value) is being switched from "1" to "6", the probability setting value and dot lighting are maintained. Then, when the new setting value is determined, the display device of the test-firing test apparatus displays the determined value of the updated probability setting value, and when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, the dot is extinguished. It is the same as FIG. 90 except for the lighting and extinguishing of dots.

[Second Modification of Seventh Embodiment]
FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the procedure of probability set value change processing according to the second modification of the seventh embodiment. In the second modification, the dot data (Dp=0 or 1) indicating that the setting is being changed is also displayed on the probability setting value display device 143, and the operator who performs the setting change can determine whether the setting is being changed. can be judged visually.

92, step A20001 is added between step A2406 and step A2407, step A2409 is changed to step A2409a, step A2413 is changed to step A2413a, and step A2420 is changed to step A2420a. has been changed to

At step A2406 (=N), at least the setting key switch 93 is turned on. Therefore, in step A20001, the game microcomputer 111 saves the probability setting value display data and the dot data (Dp=1) corresponding to the working probability setting value in the probability setting value display data area. As a result, the probability setting value (provisional value) before the setting value change switch is input can be displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 while the dot display section is illuminated.

At step A2409a, the game microcomputer 111 saves the probability setting value display data and the dot data (Dp=1) corresponding to the working probability setting value in the probability setting value display data area. As a result, the probability setting value (temporary value) changed by the input of the setting value change switch can be displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 while the dot display section is lit.

At step A2413a, the game microcomputer 111 saves the probability setting value display data and the dot data (Dp=0) corresponding to the working probability setting value in the probability setting value display data area. As a result, the probability setting value (determined value) after the setting value change switch is input can be displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 while turning off the dot display section.

At step A2420a, the game microcomputer 111 saves the probability setting value display data and the dot data (Dp=0) corresponding to the working probability setting value in the probability setting value display data area. As a result, the dot display section can be kept turned off. Since the probability setting value display permission flag is not set when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, until the probability setting value display permission flag is set in the subsequent setting change or setting confirmation (A2405, A2502), The probability setting value display device 143 does not display the probability setting value display data (step A1613 (=N)). On the other hand, the test signal output data continues to be transmitted to the test fire test equipment (A1621, A1622, A1624).

FIG. 93 shows the lighting pattern data transmitted to the probability setting value display device 143 and the test firing test signal transmitted to the test firing test device at the time of setting change in the second modified example of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of a display on an 8-segment display including a display unit.

In the initial state, the probability setting value display device 143 is turned off, and the probability setting value "1" is displayed as the test firing test signal (lighting pattern data) on the display of the test firing test device. The information displayed on the display of the test-firing test apparatus is the same as that of the first modified example, so the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on, the probability setting value display data and dot data (1) corresponding to the working probability setting value are saved in the probability setting value display data area (step A20001). As a result, as shown in FIG. 93 (display by the output processing according to FIG. 7), the probability setting value display device 143 displays "1" (provisional value) as the lighting pattern data, and the dot display portion lights up. .

Next, when the set value change switch 102 is pressed, the determination result of step A2407 in FIG. 92 becomes "Y", so steps A2408 to A2410 are executed. At this time, as shown in FIG. 93, "2" (provisional value) is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 after a predetermined lighting blank period (extinguishing period), and the dot display portion lights up.

As the set value change switch 102 is further depressed, steps A2408, A2409a, and A2410 in FIG. 92 are repeated. At this time, as shown in FIG. 93, every time the set value change switch 102 is pressed, the display of the probability set value display device 143 changes from "3" to "4" to "5" to "6" (all provisional values). , and the dot display section also lights up in conjunction with the display of the probability set value.

When the touch switch is input (step A2411 (=Y)), steps A2412, A2413a, and A20002 are executed, and the probability setting value "6" (determined value) is displayed in the probability setting value display data area. Probability setting value display data is overwritten. At this time, as shown in FIG. 93, the display of the probability set value display device 143 lights "6" (provisional value), and from the state where the dot display section lights up, "6" (fixed value) lights up and the dot The display unit is turned off. This allows the operator to visually recognize that the probability setting value has been updated from "1" to "6".

Finally, by turning off the setting key switch 93, as shown in FIG. 92, probability setting value display data and dot data (Dp=0) corresponding to the probability setting value (determined value) are set in step A2420a. Saved in the value display data area. Since the probability setting value display permission flag is not set when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, until the probability setting value display permission flag is set in the subsequent setting change or setting confirmation (A2405, A2502), The probability setting value display device 143 does not display the probability setting value display data (step A1613 (=N)). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 93, the set probability display device 143 is turned off. In addition, in FIG. 93, lighting of the dot display portion of the display of the test-firing test apparatus can be omitted.

[Functions and effects of the seventh embodiment]
As described above, the game machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment includes game control means (the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game that variably displays the identification information based on the establishment of the starting condition. In addition, when the stop result of the variable display game becomes a special result, a special game state advantageous to the player is generated. The gaming machine 10 includes setting change means (setting change device 42) capable of changing set values in accordance with game-related settings, a display section (probability set value display device 143) capable of displaying the set values, and a A first output section (sixth output port 141) for outputting lighting pattern data (probability set value display data) and a second output section (buffer 133, test signal output port) different from the first output section are provided. Prepare. The game control means (game microcomputer 111) generates lighting pattern data (probability setting value display data) based on the setting value, and the display unit (probability setting value display device 143), and the lighting pattern data can be output to an external device (test firing test device) via the second output unit (buffer 133, test signal output port) as a test signal (test firing test signal) of the game machine. and

Therefore, by using the same data as the lighting pattern for the test signal (test-firing test signal) output to the external device (test-firing test device), it is possible to ensure that the test signal is unprocessed correct information, and the display of the gaming machine 10 Even when the setting value is not displayed in the section (probability setting value display device 143), the probability setting value can be notified to an external device provided outside the gaming machine 10. FIG. In addition, when unsettled setting information during setting change is output to the first output section (sixth output port 141) and not output to the second output section (buffer 133, test signal output port), unsettled setting information is output. Setting information can be prevented from being output to the outside, and confusion due to unnecessary information can be prevented.

In this embodiment, the display unit (probability setting value display device 143) displays a setting value related to the lighting pattern data (probability setting value display data) and additional information (dot data (Dp=0 or 1)) different from the setting value. can be displayed, and the setting change means (setting change device 42) includes a switch (setting key switch 93) for shifting to a setting variable state in which the setting value can be changed, and the game control means is such that the switch is In the ON state, additional information (dot data (Dp=1)) is generated, and the additional information can be output to an external device (test-firing test device) together with the test signal.

Therefore, the fixed value of the setting value is displayed on the external device (test firing test device) based on the lighting pattern data. Also, the external device can grasp the ON/OFF state of the switch (setting key switch 93), that is, whether or not the setting is being changed, based on the presence or absence of additional information (dot data (Dp=1)). In this embodiment, for example, in the external device (test firing test device), it is possible to grasp that the dot display unit is lit by the dot data (Dp = 1) as additional information and that the setting is being changed, and the dot data ( Dp=0), it is possible to grasp that the dot display portion is turned off and the setting change is completed.

In this embodiment, the display unit (probability setting value display device 143) displays a setting value related to the lighting pattern data (probability setting value display data) and additional information (dot data (Dp=0 or 1)) different from the setting value. can be displayed, and the setting change means (setting change device 42) includes a switch (setting key switch 93) for shifting to a setting variable state in which the setting value can be changed, and the game control means (game microcomputer 111) generates additional information (dot data (Dp=1)) when the switch is in the ON state, and outputs the additional information together with the lighting pattern data to the display section (probability set value display device 143).

Therefore, by displaying the additional information (dot data (Dp=0 or 1)) on the display section (depending on whether the dot display section is illuminated), the operator who performs the setting change can determine whether the setting change is in progress or has been completed. can be determined visually.

[Eighth Embodiment]
FIG. 94A is a block diagram showing a configuration example (Part 1) of a game control system according to the eighth embodiment. The game control system according to the eighth embodiment is the same as that of the first embodiment, but is simplified to the minimum necessary configuration for explaining the effects of the invention. In this embodiment, the game machine 10 includes at least a game control device 100 (game control means) and a power supply device 400 (power supply means). The power supply device 400 is supplied with an external rated voltage (eg AC 24V from a game island), generates a predetermined power supply voltage (eg DC 32V, DC 12V, DC 5V) and outputs it to the game control device 100 .

The game control device 100 is provided with a probability set value display device 143A (probability set value display device 143) and a driver 143a. The probability setting value display device 143A is driven by receiving power (for example, DC 5V) from the normal power supply section 410 constituting the power supply device 400, and is connected to the sixth output port 141 via the driver 143a. The driver 143a converts the probability set value information output by the gaming microcomputer 111 into lighting pattern data and outputs the lighting pattern data. The probability setting value display device 143A can display the probability setting value according to the lighting pattern data input from the driver 143a.

A probability setting value display device 143B is attached to the power supply device 400 . The probability set value display device 143B is driven by receiving power (for example, DC5V) from the normal power supply unit 410 without passing through the game control device 100, and is connected to the sixth output port 141 via the driver 143a. there is Therefore, the probability setting value display device 143B can also display the probability setting value based on the lighting pattern data input from the driver 143a. By arranging the probability set value display device 143B in the power supply device 400 in this way, it is possible to easily confirm the probability set value. Further, since the probability set value display device 143B is driven by receiving power (for example, DC 5V) from the normal power supply unit 410 without going through the game control device 100, power is supplied from the game control device 100 to the probability set value display device 143B. Since the wiring for performing the above can be omitted, the cost can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 94A (broken line), in this embodiment, the set value change switch 102 can also be attached to the power supply device 400 . As described above, the set value change switch 102 can also be used as a RAM clear switch. Therefore, with such a configuration, it is possible to improve work efficiency when changing settings using the set value change switch 102 or clearing the RAM.

The display of the probability set values in the probability set value display device 143A and the probability set value display device 143B and the control of lighting/lighting out of the dot display section are the same as those in the seventh embodiment, so the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 94B is a block diagram showing a configuration example (Part 2) of the game control system according to the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 94B, in the eighth embodiment, a DC/DC converter 143b (voltage conversion means) is attached to the game control device 100, and the output voltage is supplied to the probability set value display device 143A and the probability set value display device 143B. It is also preferable to

The arrangement of FIG. 94B is, for example, when the normal power supply unit 410 does not generate the drive voltage (for example, DC 5V) for the probability set value display device 143A and the probability set value display device 143B, or even if the drive voltage is generated, due to insufficient capacity. This arrangement is suitable when the probability setting value display device 143A and the probability setting value display device 143B cannot be driven. At this time, the output voltage (for example, DC 12V) of the normal power supply unit 410 is input to the input side of the DC/DC converter 143b, and the output side (for example, DC 5V) is connected to the probability setting value display device 143A and the probability setting value display device 143B. be.

Here, in wiring 143c for outputting the lighting pattern data from the driver 143a to the probability setting value display device 143B, and wiring 143d for supplying the driving voltage from the DC/DC converter 143b to the probability setting value display device 143B, the game control device 100 and A harness is formed by a part that straddles the power supply device 400, and a connector that connects to the harness is formed by parts arranged in the game control device 100 and the power supply device 400, and the two connectors are connected by the harness. may be configured. As a result, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of disconnection of either one of the wiring 143c and the wiring 143d, and prevent the probability setting value display device 143B from malfunctioning.

[Actions and Effects of the Eighth Embodiment]
As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment includes a game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game that variably displays identification information based on establishment of the starting condition. To generate a special game state advantageous to a player when a game stop result is a special result. The game machine 10 includes a power supply means (power supply device 400) that generates a predetermined power supply voltage from the rated voltage supplied from the outside of the game machine and supplies it to the game control means, and a set value that can be changed according to settings related to the game. and setting change means (setting change device 42). The game control means (game control device 100) generates lighting pattern data (probability set value display data) related to the probability set value. The power supply means (power supply device 400) includes a display section (probability setting value display device 143B) that displays the probability setting value based on the lighting pattern data (probability setting value display data).

Therefore, by arranging the display unit (probability setting value display device 143B) in the power supply means (power supply device 400), it is possible to easily confirm the setting value, and increase the chances of confirming the setting value. .

In the present embodiment, the display unit (probability set value display device 143B), the power source voltage (driving voltage) of a predetermined voltage value from the power source means (power source device 400) without passing through the game control means (game control device 100) supplied. As a result, the wiring for supplying power from the game control means to the display section can be omitted, so that the cost can be reduced.

In this embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) converts the voltage supplied from the power supply means (power supply device 400) and supplies the voltage conversion means (DC /DC converter 143b).

Therefore, when the power supply means (power supply device 400) does not generate the drive voltage (for example, DC 5V) for the display section (probability setting value display device 143B), or even if the drive voltage is generated, the capacity is insufficient to drive the display section. If not, the voltage conversion means (DC/DC converter 143b) can reliably supply the power supply voltage to the probability setting value display device 143B.

In this embodiment, the display unit (probability setting value display device 143B) can display the setting value related to the lighting pattern data and additional information (dot data (Dp=0 or 1)) different from the setting value. The means (setting change device 42) includes a switch (setting key switch 93) for shifting to a setting variable state in which the setting value can be changed, and the game control means (game control device 100) is a switch (setting key When the switch 93) is on, it generates additional information (dot data (Dp=1)) and outputs the additional information (dot data (Dp=1)) to the display unit together with the lighting pattern data.

Therefore, by displaying the additional information (dot data (Dp=0 or 1)) on the display section (depending on whether the dot display section is illuminated), the operator who performs the setting change can determine whether the setting change is in progress or has been completed. can be determined visually from the display contents of the display section arranged in the power source means (power source device 400).

[Ninth Embodiment]
A ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 100. FIG. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to eighth embodiments. The ninth embodiment relates to external information output when changing settings.

[Timing chart of external information output when setting is changed]
First, with reference to FIG. 95, the timing of external information output at the time of setting change according to the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 95 is a timing chart showing an example of external information output timing when setting is changed according to the ninth embodiment.

After the gaming machine 10 is turned off at time u1, the setting key switch 93 (setting key) of the setting change device 42 (setting change means) is turned on (first mode) at time u2, and then at time u3. , the gaming machine 10 is turned on.

When the game machine 10 is turned on at time u3, the game control device 100 sets the probability set value changing flag since the setting key switch 93 is turned on (A1038), and displays the probability set value. The permission flag is set (A2405), and the set value is displayed on the probability set value display device 143 (setting display device) which was in the off state (set value display, A1615).

In this embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the character ratio display section 68 (FIG. 78) of the state display device 152 that displays the character ratio is used as the probability set value display device 143. FIG. That is, during setting change or setting confirmation, any one of the four 7-segment type (8-segment type including dot parts) display devices 900 of the character ratio display unit 68 (FIG. 78) has a probability Display the setting value. Note that the character product ratio is displayed in the character product ratio display section 68 except during setting change or setting confirmation. Therefore, the character product ratio display section 68 is used for both the display of the character product ratio and the display of the setting value. In addition, it is not limited to using the character object ratio display unit 68 of the state display device 152 as the probability setting value display device 143, and the content related to external information output described in the ninth embodiment It may be applied to the case where the probability set value display device 143 is provided independently of the state display device 152 in the eighth embodiment).

Then, the state of the gaming machine shifts from the game mode to the setting change mode (variable setting state) by setting the probability set value changing flag. The game mode indicates a state of the gaming machine other than a setting change mode (setting variable state) and a setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state, setting value confirmation mode) described later.

Further, when the game machine 10 is powered on at time u3, the game control device 100 executes the external information editing process (A1317, FIGS. 33A and 33B) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 6). Then, as described above in the description of the external information editing process, the game control device 100 sets the initial value of the security signal control timer (A1037), and transmits the security signal because the setting change mode (setting variable state) is entered. External information (predetermined signal) is output to the external device (external information output ON, A1611). An external device (various external devices) is a device provided outside the game machine 10, such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (hall computer). In this embodiment, a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec) is set as the initial value of the security signal control timer when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by turning on the setting key switch 93 (A1037). The predetermined time set as the initial value of the security signal control timer may be an extremely long time (24 hours, etc.) as shown in the external information output in FIG. 95, for example. In this way, the game control device 100 can output a predetermined signal as external information including information about setting to an external device (for example, information indicating that a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode to be described later) has been entered in a security signal. It functions as external signal output means.

When the setting value change switch 102 (setting switch, setting value change button) of the setting change device 42 (setting change means) is operated (depressed) by the operator, setting 1 is changed to setting 2 at time u4, and setting 2 is changed at time u5. Then, setting 2 changes to setting 3, and setting 3 changes to setting 4 at time u6. In this way, the set value (setting) is changed by +1 each time the set value change switch 102 is operated, and after setting 6, it is changed to setting 1 by operating the set value change switch 102 . Specifically, each time the set value change switch 102 is operated, set value 1→set value 2→set value 3→set value 4→set value 5→set value 6→set value 1→set value 2→・The set value (setting) is changed as follows.

After that, the touch switch signal of the operation handle 24 is turned on at time u7, so that the probability setting value changed flag is set (A2414), indicating that the probability setting value has been changed (the result of A2406 is "Y", setting confirmed). . At that time, in this embodiment, in order to output as external information (predetermined signal) including information that the setting has been determined in the setting change mode in the security signal, the game control device 100 outputs the predetermined signal turn off once. That is, even when an extremely long predetermined time is set to the initial value of the security signal control timer at time u3, the output of the predetermined signal (external information output) is temporarily interrupted.

Then, when the output of a predetermined signal (external information output) is interrupted at time u8, the game control device 100 outputs a new predetermined signal (external information output) for a predetermined time (predetermined pulse width, For example, 256 msec), by turning on the security signal, the information that the setting has been confirmed in the setting change mode is included in the security signal, and then the output of the new predetermined signal is turned off. After that, the game control device 100 terminates the interruption of the external information output and turns on the external information output again. The discontinuation time is the time (predetermined pulse width, for example, 256 msec) for turning on the output of a new predetermined signal during the discontinuation, and the time before the time for turning on the output of the new predetermined signal. is set to a time (for example, 768 msec) that is the sum of the time (for example, 256 msec) for turning off the external information output and the time (for example, 256 msec) for later turning off the output of the new predetermined signal.

After that, at time u9, the setting key switch 93 (setting key) is turned off (second mode), and the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (A2417). The timer is forcibly cleared irrespective of whether or not the predetermined time has elapsed, the external information output is turned off, the gaming machine state changes from the setting change mode to the game mode, and the setting change ends. In addition, by clearing the RAM area to be cleared to 0 (A2417), the probability setting value display permission flag is also cleared, and the probability setting value display device 143 (in this embodiment, the state display device 152 (also used by the character product ratio display unit 68), the character product ratio is displayed (character product ratio display). The state display device 152, which is also used as the probability set value display device 143, displays information related to the ball payout rate, the number of discharged balls, and the base value (ball payout rate in the normal game state) instead of displaying information about the role ratio. Information may be displayed (ball output rate display, number of discharged balls display, base value display).

[Modified example of external information output timing chart when setting is changed]
Next, with reference to FIG. 96, a modification of the timing of outputting a predetermined signal (external information output) at the time of setting change in FIG. 95 will be described. FIG. 96 is a timing chart showing a modified example of external information output timing when setting is changed according to the ninth embodiment. 96, only the external information output timing of FIG. 95 will be extracted and explained.

First, FIG. 96(a) is a timing chart showing the timing of the output of a predetermined signal (external information output) when the settings in FIG. 95 are changed.

As described above, at time u3, when the gaming machine 10 is powered on with the setting key switch 93 (setting key) turned on, the game control device 100 outputs external information (security signal). turn on.

Then, when the setting is confirmed at time u7 (setting confirmation), the game control device 100 temporarily interrupts the external information output, and includes the information that the setting has been confirmed in the setting change mode in the security signal at time u8. After the external information output is turned on for a predetermined time (predetermined pulse width, eg, 256 msec) to output information (predetermined signal), the external information output is turned off.

After that, after the interruption time (for example, 768 msec) from the time u7, the game control device 100 turns on the external information output again, and then the setting key switch 93 (setting key) is turned off at time u9. The external information output is turned off, and the game machine state is shifted from the setting change mode to the game mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 96(b), a first modified example of the timing of outputting a predetermined signal (external information output) at the time of setting change will be described.

At time u3, when the game machine 10 is powered on with the setting key switch 93 turned on, the game control device 100 turns on external information output, as in FIG. 96(a).

Then, the game control device 100 turns off the external information output along with the setting confirmation at the time u7.

After that, at time u8, the game control device 100 outputs external information for a predetermined time (predetermined pulse width, for example 256 msec), then the external information output is turned off. Thereafter, the external information output is kept off, and the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time u9. As described above, in the first modified example, the output of external information is terminated rather than temporarily interrupted when the setting is established at time t7, and then the output of external information is turned on for a predetermined time at time t8.

Next, with reference to FIG. 96(c), a second modified example of the timing of outputting a predetermined signal (external information output) at the time of setting change will be described.

When the gaming machine 10 is turned on at time u3 with the setting key switch 93 turned on, in the second modification, the external information output is kept off.

Then, when the setting is confirmed at time u7, the game control device 100 turns on the external information output for a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec). Thereafter, the external information output is maintained off again, and the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time u9. As described above, in the second modified example, the external information output is turned on for a predetermined time when the setting is confirmed at time t7, and the off state is maintained except when the setting is confirmed.

Furthermore, with reference to FIG. 96(d), a third modification of the external information output timing at the time of setting change will be described.

At time u3, when the game machine 10 is powered on with the setting key switch 93 turned on, the game control device 100 outputs external information as in FIGS. 96(a) and (b). turn on.

After that, when the setting is confirmed at time u7, the game control device 100 turns off the external information output. Thus, in the third modification, the ON state of the external information output is maintained from the time t3 when the power is turned on until the time t7 when the setting is confirmed, and after the setting is confirmed, the external information output is turned OFF.

[Timing chart for outputting external information when checking settings]
Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the timing of outputting a predetermined signal (external information output) at the time of setting confirmation according to the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 97 is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of external information output when settings are finalized according to the ninth embodiment.

After the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off at time u10, the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on at time u11. Then, the probability set value display device 143 (also used as the character product ratio display unit 68 of the state display device 152) is in the game mode when the game machine 10 is powered on at time u11. Display the character ratio (character ratio display).

Thereafter, at time u12, when the setting key switch 93 (setting key) is turned on while the game machine 10 is powered on, the game control device 100 sets the probability setting value confirmation mode flag (A2505). , the probability setting value display permission flag is set (A2506), and the setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 (setting display device) on which the character ratio was displayed (setting value display, A1615).

Then, the state of the gaming machine shifts from the game mode to the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) by setting the probability setting value confirmation mode flag.

Also, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on at time u12, the game control device 100 executes the external information editing process (A1317, FIGS. 33A and 33B) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 6). Since the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) is set as described above in the explanation of the external information editing process, the initial value of the security signal control timer is set (A2507), and the external information including the security signal (predetermined signal) to the external device (external information output ON, A1611). In this embodiment, a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec) is set as the initial value of the security signal control timer when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by turning on the setting key switch 93 (A2507). The predetermined time set as the initial value of the security signal control timer may be an extremely long time (24 hours, etc.) as shown in the external information output in FIG. 97, for example.

After that, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time u13, the probability setting value confirmation mode flag and the security signal control timer are forcibly cleared regardless of whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed (A2510). The external information output is turned off, the game machine state changes from the setting confirmation mode to the game mode, and the setting confirmation ends. At the same time, the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (A2511), and the character ratio is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 (setting display device) where the setting value was displayed (character ratio display ). It should be noted that, in addition to the character product ratio display, the ball output rate display, the number of discharged balls display, and the base value display may also be used.

[Modified example of timing chart for outputting external information when checking settings]
Next, with reference to FIG. 98, a modification of the timing of outputting a predetermined signal (external information output) at the time of setting confirmation in FIG. 97 will be described. FIG. 98 is a timing chart showing a modified example of external information output timing during setting confirmation according to the ninth embodiment. 98, only the external information output timing of FIG. 97 will be extracted and explained.

First, FIG. 98(a) is a timing chart showing the timing of external information output when the settings in FIG. 97 are finalized.

As described above, after the power is turned on at time u11, when the setting key switch 93 (setting key) is turned on at time u12, the game control device 100 turns on the external information output (security signal). .

Then, when the setting key switch 93 (setting key) is turned off at time u13, the game control device 100 turns off the external information output, and shifts the gaming machine state from the setting confirmation mode to the game mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 98(b), a modification of the external information output timing at the time of setting confirmation will be described.

After the power is turned on at time u11, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on at time u12, the game control device 100 includes information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has been entered in the security signal and transmits external information (predetermined signal ), the external information output is turned off after turning on the external information output for a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec). After that, the external information output is kept off, and when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time u13, the game control device includes in the security signal information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has ended and the game mode has been entered. After the external information output is turned on again for a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec) in order to output as external information (predetermined signal), the external information output is turned off. Thus, in the modified example of the timing of the external information output at the time of setting confirmation, the external information output is turned on for a predetermined time when the setting key switch 93 is turned on or off, and the setting key switch 93 is turned on or off. The external information output is kept off except when it is turned off.

[Timing chart for outputting external information when changing settings in the modified example]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100, the timing of outputting a predetermined signal (external information output) when changing settings according to the modification of the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 99 is a timing chart showing an example of external information output timing when settings are changed according to the modification of the ninth embodiment. 99 and 100, descriptions overlapping those of FIG. 95 will be omitted as appropriate.

In this modified example, a RAM initialization switch is independently provided in addition to the set value change switch 102 . When the power is turned on (power is restored), if the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch are turned on, the setting change mode (setting variable state) is entered. Specifically, after turning on the setting key switch 93, turning on the power of the game machine 10 while turning on (pressing down) the RAM initialization switch shifts to the setting change mode (setting variable state).

After the gaming machine 10 is turned off at time w1, the setting key switch 93 (setting key) is turned on at time w2. Then, at time w3, the RWM clear switch is pressed, and while the pressed state is maintained, the game machine 10 is powered on at time w4, whereby the probability setting value changing flag is set (A1038), and the ninth It shifts to the setting change mode according to the modification of the embodiment. When shifting to the setting change mode according to the modification of the ninth embodiment, the setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 (setting display device) which was in the off state (setting value display, A1615). Thereafter, the RWM clear switch is released at time w5, and the set value (setting) is changed each time the set value change switch 102 (setting switch) is operated at times w6, w7, and w8.

When the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time w9, the probability set value changed flag is set (A2414), indicating that the probability set value has been changed (result of A2406 is "Y", setting confirmed). Thus, in this modification, the setting is confirmed by turning off the setting key switch 93 instead of the touch switch signal of the operating handle 24 .

At time w9, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, the RAM area to be cleared is also cleared to 0 (A2417). Therefore, the security signal control timer is cleared together with the probability set value changing flag, the external information output is turned off, the gaming machine state changes from the setting change mode to the game mode, and the setting change ends. By clearing the RAM area to be cleared to 0 (A2417), the probability setting value display permission flag is also cleared, and the character ratio is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 (setting display device) where the setting value was displayed. It is done (character ratio display).

After that, at time w10, the game control device 100 outputs external information for a predetermined time (predetermined pulse width, for example 256 msec), then the external information output is turned off. As described above, according to the timing of the external information output at the time of setting change according to the present modification, after the external information output is terminated when the setting is confirmed at time w9, the external information output is turned on for a predetermined time at time w10.

Next, FIG. 100 shows another example in which the timing of the output of the predetermined signal (external information output) is changed when the setting is changed according to the modification of the ninth embodiment. 100, only the external information output timing of FIG. 99 will be extracted and explained.

FIG. 100(a) is a timing chart showing the timing of the output of a predetermined signal (external information output) when the settings in FIG. 99 are changed.

As described above, when the game machine 10 is powered on while the RWM clear switch is pressed while the setting key switch 93 (setting key) is turned on at time w4, the game control device 100 receives the external information. Turn on the output.

Then, when the setting is confirmed by turning off the setting key switch 93 at time w9 (setting confirmation), the game control device 100 turns off the external information output (security signal).

After that, at time w10, the game control device 100 outputs external information for a predetermined time (predetermined pulse width, for example 256 msec), then the external information output is turned off. After that, the external information output is kept off.

Next, with reference to FIG. 100(b), a first modification will be described in which the timing of outputting a predetermined signal (external information output) at the time of setting change according to the modification is changed.

At time w4, when the gaming machine 10 is turned on while the RWM clear switch is pressed while the setting key switch 93 is turned on, in the first modified example, the external information output is turned off. maintained.

Then, when the setting is confirmed by turning off the setting key switch 93 at time w9, the game control device 100 turns on the external information output for a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec). After that, the external information output is kept off again. Thus, in the first modified example, the external information output is turned on for a predetermined time when the setting at time w9 is finalized, and is kept off except when the setting is finalized.

Furthermore, with reference to FIG. 100(c), a second modification will be described in which the timing of outputting a predetermined signal (external information output) when changing settings according to the modification is changed.

At time w4, when the game machine 10 is powered on while the RWM clear switch is being pressed while the setting key switch 93 is on, the game control device 100, as in FIG. Turn on information output.

After that, when the setting is confirmed by turning off the setting key switch 93 at time w9, the game control device 100 turns off the external information output. Thus, in the second modification, the ON state of the external information output is maintained from the time w4 when the power is turned on until the time w9 when the setting is confirmed, and after the setting is confirmed, the external information output is turned OFF.

[Functions and effects of the ninth embodiment]
In the gaming machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, the display result of the variable display game (special symbol variable display game) that variably displays the identification information (identification pattern, special decorative pattern, first decorative pattern A to C) is a special result ( It is possible to generate a special game state in which a game value is given to a player when a jackpot result mode, a jackpot stop symbol, a special result mode). The gaming machine 10 includes setting changing means (setting changing device 42) capable of changing settings (setting values, probability setting values) relating to gaming conditions, and an external device provided outside the gaming machine 10 (for example, an information collection terminal or a game player). An external signal output means (game control device 100) capable of outputting a predetermined signal as external information to the hall management device (hall computer) is provided. The setting change means includes a setting transition means (setting key switch 93, setting key) capable of shifting to a setting variable state (setting change mode) in which the setting can be changed by turning on the first mode (on). The external signal output means outputs a predetermined signal (external signal output (for example, security signal output)) in response to the transition to the variable setting state by the setting transition means.

According to such a gaming machine 10, when shifting to the setting variable state (setting change mode), the external signal output means (game control device 100) sends information about setting to the external device (for example, when shifting to the setting change mode (information indicating the fact) is output as external information (predetermined signal), so that the game hall manager can be notified through the external device. As a result, when the game machine 10 shifts to the setting change mode at a timing unintended by the game hall manager (for example, fraud or mechanical trouble), the manager can quickly notice the shift.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, the setting change means (the setting change device 42) is operated when the setting change state (setting change mode) is in progress. It has operation means (setting value change switch 102, setting switch, setting value change button). External signal output means (game control device 100), after changing the setting (setting value, probability setting value) by the change operation means, setting transition means (setting key switch 93, setting key) to the second mode (off) A predetermined signal is output (external signal output) in response to this. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 10, when the settings are changed, the gaming hall manager can be notified through the external device. You can quickly notice the changes.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, the external signal output means (game control device 100) is shifted to the variable setting state (setting change mode) by the setting transition means (setting key switch 93, setting key). start outputting a predetermined signal (external signal output) in response to , and end outputting a predetermined signal (external signal output) in response to the second mode (OFF) of the setting transition means do. According to such a gaming machine 10, while in the variable setting state, the output of the predetermined signal (external signal output) is kept on, and it is possible to continue notifying the gaming parlor manager through the external device. Therefore, the game hall manager can quickly notice that the game machine 10 has shifted to the variable setting state at an unintended timing. In addition, when a game hall manager intentionally changes settings, an external device can be used to keep a history (log) of how long the work time involved in the setting change is, making work time more efficient. It can be used as statistical information for planning.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, the external signal output means (game control device 100) corresponds to the second mode (OFF) of the setting transition means (setting key switch 93, setting key). Then, after completing the output of a predetermined signal (external signal output), a signal with a predetermined pulse width (for example, 256 msec) is output. According to such a game machine 10, the external signal output is output with a predetermined pulse width not only while the setting variable state is set, but also when the setting transition means is set to the second mode and the setting is confirmed. Therefore, after the game machine 10 shifts to the variable setting state at an unintended timing, the game hall manager can quickly notice that the setting has been fixed.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, the first mode (on) is set by a condition (for example, after power-on) different from the condition for shifting to the setting variable state (setting change mode). is provided. The external signal output means (game control device 100) outputs a predetermined signal (external signal output) while shifting to the setting confirmation state by the setting confirmation means. According to such a game machine 10, not only when the state changes to the setting change state but also when the state changes to the setting confirmation state, it is possible to notify the game hall manager through the external device. , it is possible to quickly notice that Yuki 10 has shifted to the setting confirmation state at an unintended timing. The setting key switch 93 (setting key) is designed to function both as setting transition means and as setting confirming means. good too.

[Tenth embodiment]
A tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 to 103. FIG. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to ninth embodiments. The tenth embodiment relates to the display mode of probability setting values.

[Display of collective display device]
Figure 101, stop design number (A4004, A4013, A4016, A7510) and the lighting pattern of the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 of the batch display device 50 corresponding to the stop design number, the lighting pattern of the probability setting value, It is a figure which illustrates. The lighting pattern corresponds to the stop symbol patterns (A4006, A4014, A4017).

First, FIG. 101(a) shows the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (7 segment type (or 8 segment 34A, etc.) is a diagram illustrating a lighting pattern of the LED lamp D1 (FIG. 34A, etc.).

In the special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game), the game control device 100 variably displays the identification information (special symbol, special figure) on the special figure 1 display unit 51, and then stops the predetermined result mode. indicate. As the predetermined result mode after the identification information is displayed in a variable manner, for example, the lighting pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number (0 to 50) of the predetermined result mode is selected from the lighting patterns shown in FIG. 101(a).

Next, FIG. 101(b) is a diagram illustrating lighting patterns of probability set values.

When the setting key switch 93 (setting key) is turned on to change the setting value (setting change mode, setting variable mode), the identification information shown in FIG. The lighting pattern indicating the later predetermined result mode is switched to the lighting pattern of the probability set value in FIG. 101(b).

Display of each display unit of the collective display device 50 during the probability setting change (during the setting variable state in which the setting can be changed) according to the present embodiment, that is, each light emitting unit (LED lamps D1 to D18 ) can be performed in the same manner as in the first embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 34A and 35 . Specifically, in the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51, based on the probability setting value display data (A2409) corresponding to the probability setting value for work and the probability setting value display data (A2413) corresponding to the probability setting value , working probability setting values and numbers 1 to 6 indicating probability setting values are lit or blinked (A1603-A1608 of the output process).

In this way, while the probability setting is being changed, the first special figure variation display section 51 displays a different display from when the variation is stopped (display different from normal), thereby making the gaming machine 10 unable to play (for example, a variation display game). It can be clearly shown on the front of the game machine 10 that it is. It should be noted that in the stop display (lighting pattern of FIG. 101 (a)) at the time of fluctuation stop of the first special figure fluctuation display section 51, the numbers 1 to 6 indicating the probability setting value shall not be used. As a result, it is possible to easily distinguish between the display mode of the probability set value and the display mode related to the game such as the result mode of the special figure 1 variable display game.

Next, FIG. 101(c) is a diagram illustrating another lighting pattern of probability set values. In the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51, as shown in FIG. 101 (c), the decimal point (dot display unit Dp) is lit and the numbers 1 to 6 indicating the probability setting value for work and the probability setting value are lit. It may be displayed or blinked. In this way, when the numbers 1 to 6 indicating the working probability setting value and the probability setting value are lit or blinked, the decimal point (Dp) is lit so that the game machine 10 can set the probability. The front of the game machine 10 can indicate that it is being changed.

In addition, the stop pattern number shown in FIG. And the lighting pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number may be displayed as a predetermined result mode after the identification information is variably displayed in the special figure 2 variable display game. Moreover, the probability setting value shown in FIG.101(b), (c) may be displayed on the 2nd special figure fluctuation|variation display part 52 by lighting display or blinking display. Here, even in the stop display (lighting pattern of FIG. 101 (a)) at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52, as well as the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51, the number 1 to 6 shall not be used.

Furthermore, every time the set value change switch 102 (setting switch, set value change button) is pressed and the probability set value is changed, the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 and the second special figure fluctuation display of the collective display device 50 The probability setting values may be switched alternately and displayed on the unit 52 . In this way, by alternately switching and displaying the probability setting value in the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 and the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52, the probability setting value is changed by pressing the setting value change switch 102 It is possible to make it easier to recognize what has been done.

Also, the lighting pattern of the probability set value is displayed to be different from the lighting pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number illustrated in FIG. A lighting pattern different from the lighting pattern corresponding to the symbol number may be displayed. In other words, there is a possibility that the lighting pattern of the probability setting value overlaps with the lighting pattern of the big win symbol, but the probability of displaying the lighting pattern of the big winning symbol is low and it is rarely displayed. In addition, when the player wins a big win, it is considered that the player continues playing until the special game state ends, so the probability that the lighting pattern of the big win symbol is displayed when the setting is changed is extremely small. Therefore, even if the lighting pattern different from the lighting pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number of the lost symbol is displayed as the probability setting value, the fact that the gaming machine 10 is changing the probability setting can be recognized at the front of the gaming machine 10. can suggest.

In addition, during the probability setting change, while the probability setting value is displayed on the first special figure fluctuation display section 51 and the second special figure fluctuation display section 52 of the collective display device 50, the first special figure fluctuation display section 51 And all the light emitting units (LED lamps D3-D18) of the collective display device 50 other than the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52 may be displayed blinking. In this way, all the light-emitting units of the collective display device 50 other than the first special figure variation display unit 51 and the second special figure variation display unit 52 are flashed in a manner different from usual, so that the gaming machine 10 The front of the gaming machine 10 can indicate that the probability setting is being changed.

[Display of status display device]
FIG. 102 is a diagram showing the details of the status display device 152 that displays information about the payout rate. The status display device 152 is formed by arranging four 7-segment type (8-segment type including dots) indicators 900 side by side, showing digit 0, digit 1, digit 2, and digit 3 from the right. It is a 4-digit, 7-segment display. The status display device 152 displays the total ball output rate from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present (for example, "bL.35" shown in FIG. 102), and It is possible to switch between and display the ball hitting rate (for example, "b6.36"). Incidentally, the state display device 152 may display not only the pitching rate but also the base value and the character ratio. In addition, in this embodiment, the state display device 152 is also used as the probability setting value display device 143, and can display the probability setting value.

Next, FIG. 103 is a diagram showing the details of the state display device 152 that displays numbers indicating probability setting values.

FIG. 103(a) is an example of the state display device 152 in which a number (for example, 3) indicating the set probability value is displayed in the digit 3 at the left end. Digit 3 is a digit in which a letter other than a number (for example, "b") is displayed in the pitching percentage display shown in FIG. Therefore, by displaying the set probability value in the digit 3, the set probability value does not overlap with other displays other than the set probability value, that is, the display related to the game (for example, the display of the batting average). Also, unlike the display of the pitching rate shown in FIG. 102, the digits other than the digit 3 displaying the set probability value are turned off. As a result, it is possible to easily distinguish between the display mode of the set probability value and other display modes such as the display of the batting average.

FIG. 103(b) is an example of the state display device 152 in which a number (for example, 3) indicating the set probability value is displayed in the second digit. As in FIG. 103(a), the digits other than the digit 2 displaying the set probability value are turned off. Therefore, according to such a display mode, it is possible to easily recognize that the probability setting value is displayed.

FIG. 103(c) shows an example of the state display device 152 in which a number (for example, 3) indicating the probability setting value is displayed in the first digit, and FIG. 103(d) shows a state in which the number indicating the probability setting value is displayed in the 0th digit. It is an example of the display device 152 . Digits other than the digit 1 or the digit 0 displaying the probability set value are turned off. Therefore, according to these display modes, it is possible to obtain the same effect as the example shown in FIG. can.

FIG. 103(e) is an example of the state display device 152 in which a number (for example, 3) indicating the set probability value is displayed on all of the digits 0 to 3. FIG. In this way, since the same numbers indicating the set probability values are arranged in all the digits of the state display device 152, the display mode becomes different from the display related to other games. It is possible to easily distinguish between display modes related to other games such as display.

When the probability setting value displayed on the state display device 152 is the working probability setting value during the probability setting change (setting change mode), it is displayed blinking. is preferably illuminated.

Further, when displaying the working probability set value (probability set value) in the setting change mode, each time the set value change switch 102 (setting switch, set value change button) is pressed to change the probability set value, The digits of the set probability values displayed on the status display device 152 may be shifted one by one. Specifically, for example, when the probability set value is displayed as 3 in the 3rd digit, the set value change switch 102 is pressed to display the probability set value as 4 in the 2nd digit, and the set value change switch 102 is displayed as 4. By pressing again, the probability setting value can be displayed as 5 in the first digit. Also, when the set value change switch 102 is pressed at the 0th digit, the probability set value can be displayed at the 3rd digit. Note that the manner in which the digits of the probability setting values displayed on the state display device 152 are shifted one by one is not limited to the manner in which the digits are shifted from left to right, and may be shifted from right to left.

[Modification of the tenth embodiment]
In addition, in the tenth embodiment, the display device (collective display device 50 or state display device 152) also functions as the probability set value display device 143, and displays related to the game (for example, as a display result after changing the identification information) It was possible to display a predetermined result mode, ball output rate, base value, role ratio) and set values (probability set values) relating to game conditions. However, the display device (collective display device 50 and state display device 152) is not limited to the mode in which the display device (collective display device 50 and state display device 152) is also used as the probability setting value display device 143. Similar to the first embodiment, the display device (collective display device 50 and state display device 152) A set probability display device 143 may be provided on the gaming machine 10 as a second display device that is independent from the display device 152 (first display device). Further, when displaying on one display device, the display on the other display device may be turned off. Specifically, for example, when the probability setting value is displayed on the second display device (probability setting value display device 143), the first display device (collective display device 50, state display device 152) is displayed regarding the game. Can be hidden.

[Functions and effects of the tenth embodiment]
In the gaming machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment, the display result of a variable display game (special symbol variable display game) that variably displays identification information (identification pattern, special decorative pattern, first decorative pattern A to C) is a special result ( A control means (game control device 100) capable of generating a special game state for giving a game value to a player when a jackpot result mode, a jackpot stop symbol, a special result mode, is provided. The gaming machine 10 has a display device (collective display device 50, state display device 152) and setting change means (setting change device 42) capable of changing a set value (probability set value) relating to game conditions. The control means displays the setting values on the display device in a manner different from the display relating to the game in response to the changeable state of the setting values (setting change mode, variable setting state) by the setting change means. .

According to the gaming machine 10 as described above, the probability setting value is different from the display related to the game such as the predetermined result mode after the identification information is variably displayed in the variable display game, the ball throwing rate, the base, and the character ratio. is displayed on the display device (collective display device 50, status display device 152). Therefore, it is possible to easily distinguish between the display mode of the set probability value and the display regarding the game.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment, the control means (game control device 100) displays a variable display game (a special figure variable display game) as a display related to the game (for example, a predetermined result mode after variable display of the identification information). is displayed on the display device (collective display device 50), and the setting value (probability setting value) is changed (setting change mode, setting variable state) by the setting change means (setting change device 42). In response to this, the display of the display device is switched from the display regarding the game to the setting value. According to such a gaming machine 10, when the setting value is switched to the changeable state, the setting value is displayed on the display device in a manner different from the display related to the game. The state in which a game (for example, a variable display game) cannot be played can be clearly indicated on the front of the gaming machine 10 .

In addition, the display mode of the display device (collective display device 50 or state display device 152) is not limited only during the probability setting change, but also during the probability setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation state). It can be a display mode different from the display related to.

The gaming machine 10 according to the modified example of the tenth embodiment displays a game-related display (for example, a predetermined result mode as a display result after the identification information is variably displayed, a ball-out rate, a base value, and a character ratio). possible first display device (collective display device 50, state display device 152), setting change means (setting change device 42) capable of changing set values (probability set values) related to game conditions, and setting values capable of being displayed and a second display device (probability setting value display device 143). The control means (game control device 100) changes the setting value in a manner different from the display related to the game in response to the changeable state of the setting value (setting change mode, variable setting state) by the setting change means. is displayed on the second display device. According to such a gaming machine 10, since the display regarding the game and the display regarding the game condition are displayed on different display devices, the display regarding the game and the display regarding the game condition can be easily distinguished. .

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the modification of the tenth embodiment, the control means (game control device 100) controls the display related to the game (for example, a predetermined result mode as a display result after the identification information is variably displayed, an output Pitch rate, base value, character ratio) is displayed on the first display device (collective display device 50, state display device 152), and the setting value (probability setting value) can be changed by the setting change means (setting change device 42). state (setting change mode, setting variable state), the display related to the game on the first display device is hidden, and the set value is displayed on the second display device (probability set value display device 143). do. According to such a gaming machine 10, when the setting value is displayed on the second display device, the display related to the game on the first display device is hidden, so that the gaming machine 10 can play a game (for example, a variable display game). ) can be easily identified.

[Eleventh embodiment]
An eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 108. FIG. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to tenth embodiments. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to tenth embodiments, and overlapping descriptions are omitted as appropriate. The eleventh embodiment relates to a small hit or the like.

[Big hit probability and small hit probability]
Figures 104A and 104B show the big hit probability and small hit probability of the special figure variation display game determined as a result of the big hit determination process (Fig. 22) and the small hit determination process (Fig. 23) for each setting (each set value). It is a table which illustrates against.

In addition, in this embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, a small hit occurs as a result of the special figure 2 variation display game, and does not occur as a result of the special figure 1 variation display game (small hit in the special figure 1 variation display game The hit probability is 0 at each setting). In the first embodiment, a small hit occurs only as a result of the special figure 1 variation display game (in the special figure 2 variation display game, the small hit probability is 0 at each setting).

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 104C and 104D, the big-hit flag 1 setting process and the big-hit flag 2 setting process have their control contents changed from those of the first embodiment. That is, in the jackpot flag 1 setting process (FIG. 104C) of the present embodiment, the "jackpot flag 2" and the "special figure 2" are changed from the jackpot flag 2 setting process (FIG. 21) of the first embodiment to the "jackpot flag 1". and "special figure 1", and steps A17001-A17006 in FIG. 104C correspond to steps A3701-A3706 in FIG. In addition, in the jackpot flag 2 setting process (FIG. 104D) of the present embodiment, "jackpot flag 1" and "special figure 1" are changed from the jackpot flag 1 setting process (FIG. 20) of the first embodiment to "jackpot flag 2". and "special figure 2", and steps A18001-A18010 in FIG. 104D correspond to steps A3601-A3610 in FIG.

In the table of pattern I in FIG. 104A, the small hit probability, which is the probability of occurrence of a small hit, increases in the order of setting 1<setting 2<setting 3<setting 4<setting 5<setting 6. Also, the jackpot probability, which is the probability of a jackpot occurring, also increases in the order of setting 1<setting 2<setting 3<setting 4<setting 5<setting 6. That is, as the set value increases, the big win probability and the small win probability increase, the big win state (first special game state) and the small win state (second special game state) are likely to occur, and the special variable winning device 39 The number of balls acquired by winning a prize in (the big winning slot) is increased, which is advantageous to the player.

In setting 1 of pattern I, the small hit probability of the special figure 2 variation display game is 0 (0%) and no small hit occurs. However, at setting 6, the small hit probability of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is close to about 1 (100%). For this reason, in the setting 6 of pattern I, in the general electricity support state (time saving state, probability variable state) where the execution frequency of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game increases, a small hit occurs almost every time the special figure 2 fluctuation display game It will be in a state called "small hit RUSH" (small hit rush). In setting 6, the sum of the big hit probability and the small hit probability at the time of high probability is 100%, so either the big hit or the small hit occurs in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game at the time of high probability (missing not).

In addition, in the general electric support state, the execution frequency of the special figure 2 variable display game is increased by increasing the frequency of occurrence of the easy winning state of the normal variable winning device 37 or extending the occurrence time of the easy winning state. . In addition, since the normal pattern starting gate 34 is located on the right side of the game area 32, in the normal electric support state, the right hitting is more advantageous and the player should hit the right.

In the settings 4 and 5 of pattern I, the small hit probability is 1/4 and 1/2, respectively, and in the general electric support state (time saving state, probability variable state), "1/4 small hit RUSH" "1/2 It will be in a state called "small hit RUSH". With "1/4 small hit RUSH" and "1/2 small hit RUSH", the number of acquired balls about 1/4 and 1/2 of "small hit RUSH" can be obtained.

In setting 2 of pattern I, the small hit probability is about the same as the hit probability of a general normal pattern variation display game, and the number of balls acquired by the small hit is almost non-existent. In setting 3 of pattern I, the probability of a small win is about the same as the probability of a big win at the time of high probability, and the number of balls acquired by the small win exists to the extent that the player can be aware of it.

In this embodiment, regardless of the setting value, the ratio of the jackpot probability at the time of high probability to the jackpot probability at the time of low probability is a constant value (here, 10 times), and the probability can be easily controlled. There is

In the table of pattern II in FIG. 104A, contrary to pattern I, the small hit probability increases in the order of setting 6<setting 5<setting 4<setting 3<setting 2<setting 1. Like pattern I, the jackpot probability of pattern II increases in the order of setting 1<setting 2<setting 3<setting 4<setting 5<setting 6. That is, in pattern II, as the set value increases, the probability of a big win increases but the probability of a small win decreases, and the difference in the number of winning balls due to the setting (set difference) is smaller than in pattern I, resulting in better balance.

In the table of pattern III in FIG. 104A, the small hit probability increases in the order of setting 4<setting 5<setting 6<setting 1<setting 2<setting 3. Like pattern I, the jackpot probability of pattern III increases in the order of setting 1<setting 2<setting 3<setting 4<setting 5<setting 6. In Pattern III as well, the difference in the number of balls obtained by setting (setting difference) is smaller than in Pattern I, and the balance is improved.

In the table of pattern IV in FIG. 104A, the small hit probability increases in the order of setting 3<setting 2<setting 1<setting 6<setting 5<setting 4. FIG. Like pattern I, the jackpot probability of pattern IV increases in the order of setting 1<setting 2<setting 3<setting 4<setting 5<setting 6. FIG. In pattern IV as well, the difference in the number of balls obtained by setting (setting difference) is smaller than in pattern I, and the balance is improved.

In the table of pattern V in FIG. 104A, the small hit probability increases in the order of setting 6<setting 5<setting 4<setting 3<setting 2<setting 1. The jackpot probability of pattern V is the same for setting 1 and setting 4, the same for setting 2 and setting 5, and the same for setting 3 and setting 6. In pattern V, it becomes difficult to estimate the setting (set value) from the probability of a big hit. Therefore, the player tries to estimate the set value from the occurrence of the small win, and pays attention to the occurrence of the small win.

In the table of pattern VI in FIG. 104A, the small hit probability is 0% at settings 1, 2, 4 and 5, and is close to 100% at settings 3 and 6. In settings 3 and 6, the sum of the big hit probability and the small hit probability at the time of high probability is 100%, so either the big hit or the small hit occurs in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game at the time of high probability. (no deviation). The jackpot probability of pattern VI is the same for setting 1 and setting 4, the same for setting 2 and setting 5, and the same for setting 3 and setting 6. Pattern VI makes it easy to estimate specific settings (settings 3 and 6) from the big-hit probability and the small-hit probability.

As another pattern, the jackpot probability at low probability of setting 1 to 3 is set to the probability of normal specifications (for example, a predetermined range around probability 1/200), and the jackpot probability at low probability of setting 4 to 6 is so-called. A pattern with a probability near the sweet digispec (for example, a predetermined range around the probability of 1/99) is also conceivable. In such a pattern, it is possible to apparently provide two types of models by changing settings (set values).

As described above, the gaming machine 10 can be said to have different game characteristics (game characteristics) and specifications (specifications) for each setting, eliminating the need to develop gaming machines with multiple specifications, thereby reducing development costs. leads to That is, it is possible to substantially provide the player with gaming machines with a plurality of specifications simply by changing the set values with the setting change device 42 (the setting key switch 93 and the set value change switch 102). For example, a setting with a small hit probability of 0% and a setting with a small hit probability of approximately 100% are completely different specs because there is a big difference in game performance regarding whether or not a small hit occurs. Furthermore, since the big win probability and the small win probability change according to the setting (set value), the player enjoys estimating the setting (set value) from the big win probability and the small win probability, and the interest in the game is improved. .

[Little hit open mode]
FIG. 105 shows an example of the opening mode (small winning open mode, small winning opening pattern) of the special variable winning device 39 in the small winning state (second special game state). In the example of FIG. 105, the special variable winning device 39 (that is, the big winning opening) is opened four times for one small win, and the opening time is 200 ms and the waiting time is 1500 ms. It should be noted that a small hit opening mode in which the special variable winning device 39 (that is, the big winning opening) is opened only once is also possible.

The game control device 100 sets the small hit opening mode to be the same regardless of the setting (set value). Therefore, the control of the small hit state becomes simple. However, it becomes difficult to estimate the setting (set value) from the small win open mode itself, and the player estimates the setting from the small win probability.

[Probability per normal pattern]
Figure 106 shows, in the eleventh embodiment, the hit probability of the normal pattern variation display game determined as a result of the normal pattern normal processing (Fig. 32) (low probability and high probability) for each setting (each set value). It is a table which illustrates against.

In the table of pattern I in FIG. 106, the normal pattern per probability, which is the probability of normal pattern per occurrence, is set 1 < setting 2 < setting 3 < setting 4 < setting 5 < at both low probability and high probability. Increase in the order of setting 6. That is, as the set value increases, the probability of hitting a normal pattern increases and the probability of hitting a normal pattern increases, and the number of balls acquired by winning the normal variable winning device 37 and the execution frequency of the special figure 2 variable display game increase. , to the player's advantage. In this case, as in pattern I of FIG. Increasing it synergistically benefits the player. In addition, since the normal pattern per probability changes according to the setting (set value), the player has the pleasure of estimating the setting (set value) from the normal pattern per probability, and the interest in the game is improved.

In the table of pattern II in FIG. 106, the normal pattern per probability, which is the probability that the normal pattern occurs, is set 1 < setting 2 < It increases in the order of setting 3<setting 4<setting 5<setting 6. That is, at one of the low probability and the high probability, as the set value increases, the probability of hitting the normal pattern increases and the probability of hitting the normal pattern increases, and the number of balls acquired by winning the prize to the normal variable winning device 37 and the special figure The execution frequency of the two-variation display game increases, which is advantageous to the player.

[Display screen while waiting for customers]
FIGS. 107A and 107B are diagrams illustrating the display screen (customer waiting screen) of the display device 41 during customer waiting (customer waiting state). The effect control device 300 displays an image corresponding to the setting (set value) on the display device 41 while waiting for a customer in which the effect related to the variable display game is not displayed.

In order to do so, the effect control device 300 displays an image according to the set value on the display device 41 before the animation of the customer waiting demonstration starts in the customer waiting demonstration setting process (B1308), for example. When the moving image of the customer waiting demonstration is repeatedly displayed, an image corresponding to the set value is displayed on the display device 41 after the moving image of the customer waiting demonstration ends and before the next start.

For example, in the table of pattern I in FIG. 104A, a small hit does not occur in setting 1, and in the normal electric support state when hitting to the right, the normal variable winning device 37 (second It is better to win the game ball aiming at the start winning opening). For this reason, in setting 1, as shown in FIG. 107A, a first character image 501 indicating game characteristics (how to play the game) is displayed on the display screen while waiting for customers (“Aim for the electric power!” when hitting right). ) is displayed. The first character image 501 clearly shows a prize winning opening to be awarded when hitting right.

Then, in the table of pattern I in FIG. 104A, since a small hit RUSH can be generated in the setting 6, in the general electric support state at the time of right hitting, the special fluctuation prize is higher than the normal fluctuation prize device 37 (second start prize opening) It is better to win the game ball aiming at the device 39 (large winning opening). For this reason, in setting 6, a second character image 502 (“small win RUSH!!” when hitting right) is displayed on the display screen while waiting for a customer, as shown in FIG. 107(B). . The second character image 502 implicitly indicates a prize winning opening that should be awarded when hitting to the right. Also, in settings 4 and 5 of pattern I, a character image (“1/4 small hit RUSH!!” and “1/2 small win RUSH!!”) is displayed on the display screen while waiting for customers. may be

107A and 107B, simultaneously with the first character image 501 or the second character image 502, an image 503 indicating that the player hits to the right in the general electricity support state is displayed on the display screen (customer waiting screen). Is displayed.

As in the case of pattern I, in the tables of patterns II, III, IV, V, and VI in FIGS. At 5, a small hit does not occur, and a first character image 501 ("Aim for the electric power!!" when hitting to the right) is displayed as shown in FIG. 107(A). Also, in the tables of patterns II, III, IV, V, and VI in FIGS. 104A and B, setting 1, setting 3, setting 4, setting 1, setting 3, and 6, respectively, because it is possible to generate a small hit RUSH , as shown in FIG. 107B, a second character image 502 ("small win RUSH!!" when hitting right) is displayed.

In this manner, while waiting for a customer (customer waiting state), an image corresponding to the setting (set value) can be displayed on the display device 41 to show the player the game characteristics of the setting. The game characteristics shown by the image serve as a guideline for the player to select a gaming machine.

In addition, on the display screen (customer waiting screen) of the display device 41 while customers are waiting, it is also possible to display an image introducing the effects and an image of the game flow on the display device 41 in accordance with the settings (set values). .

[Display according to display settings]
FIG. 108A sets the light emitting mode of the first special figure variation display unit 51 and/or the second special figure variation display unit 52 (light emitting unit) used for executing the special figure variation display game in the collective display device 50. An example of changing according to (set value) is shown.

For example, as shown in FIG. 108A (I), the game control device 100, during non-execution of the special figure variation display game (here, during customer waiting), the first special figure variation display unit 51 and / or the second special The display mode (light emission mode) of the lost symbol displayed in the figure variation display section 52 may be changed between setting 1 and setting 6. FIG.

For example, as shown in FIG. 108A (II), the game control device 100 displays the first special figure variation display unit 51 and/or the second special figure during non-execution of the special figure variation display game (here, during customer waiting). The figure variation display section 52 may blink, and the blinking period may be changed between setting 1 and setting 6, and the light emission mode may be changed according to the setting. The blinking period is, for example, 256 ms at setting 1 and 128 ms at setting 6. FIG. In addition, the first special figure variation display section 51 and/or the second special figure variation display section 52 are displayed blinking as the variation display of the special figure variation display game, but the blinking cycle may be changed according to the setting. .

Also, while the special figure variation display game is not being executed (during customer waiting), not only the first special figure variation display unit 51 and/or the second special figure variation display unit 52, but also other display units of the collective display device 50 A configuration is also possible in which the light emission modes of 53 to 60 are changed according to settings (set values).

108B is a diagram showing an external device connected to the external information terminal 71. FIG. As external devices, an external display device 864 (display device) and a game arcade internal management device 866 (hall computer) are provided. The game control device 100 may change the display mode of the external display device 864 provided outside the game machine 10 according to the set value.

The game control device 100 outputs a control command according to the setting value to the external display device 864 via the external information terminal 71 at a predetermined timing, and controls the display mode of the external display device 864 according to the setting value.

For example, the external display device 864 (display device) is a patrol lamp 864a capable of emitting light, and an information display device 864d capable of displaying moving and still images. The patrol lamp 864a emits light (rotating light emission) when a control command is received. When receiving a control command, the information display 864d can display data such as the number of games (display of the number of revolutions), and can also display a moving image or still image corresponding to the control command on the display unit 868 .

When the control command includes the setting value information of the gaming machine 10, the patrol lamp 864a can emit light in a light emission mode (emission color, etc.) according to the setting value, and the information display device 864d can emit light according to the setting value. Moving images and still images can be displayed on the display portion 868 .

As described above, the light emission mode of the first special figure variation display section 51 and/or the second special figure variation display section 52 (light emitting section), and the display mode of the external display device 864 (display device) provided outside Based on this, the player can infer settings (set values).

[Actions and effects of the eleventh embodiment]
According to the eleventh embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is provided with a game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game that variably displays identification information based on establishment of a starting condition, and the stop result of the variable display game is To generate a special game state advantageous to a player when a special result is obtained. The variable winning device (special variable winning device 39) can be changed from a closed state in which a game ball cannot win a prize to an open state in which a game ball can win a prize in a special game state. The setting change means (setting change device 42) can change the setting values regarding the game conditions (conditions for the player to play the game). The game control means generates a first special game state (jackpot state) when the stop result of the variable display game is the first special result, and when the stop result of the variable display game is the second special result, A second special game state (minor winning state) in which the game value obtainable by the player is less than that of the first special game state is generated. The game control means sets the probability that the stop result of the variable display game will be the second special result (minor win) according to the set value, and sets the opening mode (opening pattern) of the variable winning device in the second special game state. , set the same regardless of the set value.

Therefore, since the probability that the stop result of the variable display game will be the second special result (minor win) can be set according to the set value, the playability of the gaming machine 10 can be changed according to the set value. Furthermore, since the opening mode (opening pattern) of the variable winning device in the second special game state can be set to be the same regardless of the set value, the control of the variable winning device in the second special game state is simplified.

According to the eleventh embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is provided with effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of displaying effects related to the variable display game on the display device. The effect control means displays an image corresponding to the set value on the display device in a customer waiting state in which the effect related to the variable display game is not displayed. Therefore, in the customer waiting state, the player can easily select a gaming machine in the game arcade (game parlor) by showing the game characteristics of the current set values to the player.

According to the eleventh embodiment, in the gaming machine 10, the game control means (game control device 100) includes a light emitting unit (special figure 1 display device 51 or special figure 2 display device 52) can be changed according to the setting value. Therefore, the player can estimate the setting (setting value) based on the light emission mode of the light emitting unit (special figure 1 indicator 51 or special figure 2 indicator 52) used for executing the variable display game.

According to the eleventh embodiment, in the gaming machine 10, the game control means can set the display mode of the display device (the patrol lamp 864a, the information display device 864d) provided outside the gaming machine 10 according to the set value. . Therefore, the player can estimate the setting (set value) based on the display mode of the display device provided outside.

[Twelfth Embodiment]
The twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 to 118. FIG. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to eleventh embodiments. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to eleventh embodiments, and overlapping descriptions are omitted as appropriate.

In the twelfth embodiment, when the parts identification information (first identification information) of the detachable parts (parts, members) 510 and the model identification information (second identification information) corresponding to the model of the gaming machine 10 do not match, , a mismatch is signaled as an error.

[Game machine parts]
FIG. 109 shows how the detachable part 510 is attached to the gaming machine 10 . Parts 510 are assigned electrically readable part identification information. For example, the part 510 may be a plate-shaped member on which model information (model logo, etc.) of the gaming machine 10 to be attached is displayed, or a movable accessory that constitutes the frame effect device or the board effect device 44. A decorative member having an LED of the frame decoration device 18 or the board decoration device 46 may be used. The parts 510 can be attached to the gaming machine 10 in the gaming arcade for reasons such as obstruction during delivery to the gaming arcade (game parlor), and there is a possibility that an inexperienced attendant may attach the wrong model.

As shown in FIG. 109(A), for example, when the part 510A for the model A is attached to the model A of the gaming machine 10, no problem occurs. However, for example, as shown in FIG. 109B, a problem occurs when the parts 510B for the model B are attached to the model A of the gaming machine 10. 41 to report an error.

FIG. 110 is a schematic configuration diagram schematically showing a configuration example of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment. The game control device 100 transmits a model designation command indicating the model (type) of the game machine 10 to the effect control device 300 when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on (A1035, A1045). The effect control device 300 selects and sets model identification information corresponding to the received model designation command (B1301) from a reference table (FIG. 118 described later). Moreover, the production control device 300 compares the parts identification information read from the parts 510 with the set model identification information. Furthermore, when the parts identification information (first identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information) are inconsistent, the effect control device 300 reports that they are inconsistent as an error.

The part 510 has an identification substrate 513 that holds part identification information. In the identification board 513, part identification information is set by one or more wirings 519 (electric wires) to which a predetermined voltage is applied. Although the wiring 519 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage via a pull-up resistor in FIG. 109, the pull-up resistor may not be provided. In addition, the power supply (voltage) to the parts 510 is supplied from the production control device 300 or the power supply device 400, for example, when the parts 510 are attached.

In FIG. 110 , a plurality of wirings 519 (a plurality of electric wires) are connected to predetermined terminals among a plurality of (eight) terminals (ports) in the parallel-serial conversion section 516 . In this manner, a predetermined terminal to which a predetermined voltage is input is set to a bit of value "1", and a terminal to which a predetermined voltage is not input (the wiring 519 is not connected) is set to a bit of value "0", for example, "01111100". can be transmitted through the parallel-to-serial converter 516.

That is, the identification board 513 is assigned parts identification information as parallel data by a plurality of wirings 519 . And the parallel-serial conversion part 516 converts the input parts identification information (parallel data) into serial data, and transmits it to the production control apparatus 300 by serial communication ( ^I2C here).

FIG. 111 shows another example of the identification board 513 . In FIG. 111, the part identification information is set by DIP switch 521 . Each of the plurality of wirings 519 is set to a predetermined voltage or a ground voltage by the DIP switch 521, and each bit of the part identification information (“1” or "0") information is input. In the example of FIG. 111, the terminal connected to the wiring 519 for which the DIP switch 521 is turned on becomes the ground voltage (bit of value "0") and is connected to the wiring 519 for which the DIP switch 521 is turned off. The terminal that receives the signal will have a predetermined voltage (a bit with a value of "1").

[Parallel-serial converter]
FIG. 112 shows the configuration of the parallel-serial conversion unit 516 when the parallel-serial conversion unit 516 is a normal parallel-serial conversion IC.

The parallel-serial conversion unit 516 has a configuration of a normal parallel-serial conversion IC including a plurality of D-type flip-flops 516a (D-FF). The parallel-to-serial converter 516 converts parallel data (for example, “01111100”) as part identification information input from terminals 0 to 7 (ports 0 to 7) into serial data for serial communication (here, I ² C communication) to the effect control device 300 via the connection line SDA (data line). The effect control device 300 has a master IC 300a in I ² C communication, and inputs clock signals for a plurality of D-type flip-flops 516a to the parallel-to-serial converter 516 via a connection line SCL (timing signal line).

A plurality of D-type flip-flops 516a (D-FF) constitute a shift register in which each bit data of parallel data moves from right to left in synchronization with a clock signal. The bit data of each D-type flip-flop 516a at a certain clock timing moves to the adjacent D-type flip-flop 516a at the next clock timing. Each bit data of the parallel data is taken into a plurality of D-type flip-flops 516a at a certain clock timing, and sequentially output as serial data from the leftmost D-type flip-flop 516a. That is, the output of serial data is completed in 8 clocks after the parallel data is fetched.

[First Modification of Identification Substrate]
FIG. 113 shows a first modification of the identification substrate 513 of the part 510. FIG. In the first modification, the parallel-to-serial converter 516 of the identification board 513 is not an ordinary parallel-to-serial conversion IC, but an input I ² CI/O expander 815 (slave IC). The I ² CI/O expander 815 for input inputs the parts identification information input from ports 0 to 7 to the master IC 300a of the effect control device 300 as data.

The I ² CI/O expander 815 (slave IC) has a transistor 830 connected to the connection line SDA, a filter 831 connected to the connection line SDA, a driver 832 connected to the connection line SDA, and a connection line SCL. A filter 833 , a bus controller 834 , and a reset signal generation circuit 839 are provided. In addition, a bus monitor WDT (watchdog timer) 840 for determining whether connection line SDA is occupied by another I ² CI/O expander 815, and the I ² CI/O expander 815 itself are connected. A self-occupancy WDT 841 is provided for determining whether line SDA is occupied.

The connection line SDA is a connection line for exchanging data signals between the master IC 300a of the effect control device 300 and the I ² CI/O expander 815 (slave IC), and functions as a data line. The connection line SCL is a connection line for inputting and outputting a clock signal used for data communication on the connection line SDA, and functions as a timing signal line.

The filter 831 is connected to the connection line SDA, removes noise from data (response signal, address data, etc.) input from the connection line SDA, and outputs the noise-removed data to the bus controller 834 .

The driver 832 applies to the transistor 830 a voltage that enables the transistor 830 to operate when data (here, part identification information, etc.) is output from the connection line SDA to the master IC 300a.

A field effect transistor (FET) is used for the transistor 830 in order to suppress power consumption. , and the source is grounded.

When the driver 832 outputs data (part identification information, etc.) to the master IC 300a from the connection line SDA, the transistor 830 is operable to the gate of the transistor 830 so as to pass a current between the drain and the source of the transistor 830. Apply a voltage of The driver 832 outputs data from the connection line SDA by repeatedly changing the voltage of the connection line SDA from HIGH to LOW.

The filter 833 is connected to the connection line SCL, removes noise from data input from the connection line SCL, and outputs the noise-removed data to the bus controller 834 .

A unique address is set to the I ² CI/O expander 815 by the address setting terminals A 0 to A 3 provided in the I ² CI/O expander 815 and input to the bus controller 834 . Furthermore, an address for resetting the I ² CI/O expander 815 is also preset.

A unique address (8 bits) of the I ² CI/O expander 815 is composed of a fixed address portion consisting of the upper 3 bits and a variable address portion consisting of the lower 5 bits. The fixed address portion is preset with a predetermined value (eg, “110”) and cannot be changed by the I ² CI/O expander 815 .

The variable address section has a 4-bit I ² CI/O expander address corresponding to the pattern set to the terminals A0 to A3 of the I ² CI/O expander 815, and whether the data is a read request or a write request. 1-bit R/W identification data indicating whether the In the I ² CI/O expander 815 for input, "1" is normally registered in the R/W identification data in response to the read request.

The bus controller 834 determines whether or not the address of the data input from the connection line SDA matches the unique address set in the I ² CI/O expander 815. If they match, the connection line Data (part identification information) is output from the SDA to the master IC 300a. A plurality of wirings 519 are connected to predetermined ports (five here) among eight ports 0 to 7 (terminals 0 to 7) in the I ² CI/O expander 815 to apply a predetermined voltage. is applied. Therefore, the bus controller 834 receives 8-bit parts identification information (eg, "01111100") as parallel data via eight ports 0-7. A predetermined port to which a predetermined voltage is input corresponds to a bit of value "1", and the other terminals (to which the wiring 519 is not connected) correspond to bits of value "0".

The bus controller 834 also determines whether or not the address of the data input from the connection line SDA matches the reset address set in the I ² CI/O expander 815, and if they match, The data is fetched as initialization instruction data (initialization command RES) to initialize the I ² CI/O expander 815 .

After the number of times the signal level of the connection line SCL has changed from LOW to HIGH reaches eight times and the bus controller 834 outputs the 8th bit data (part identification information), the signal level of the connection line SCL changes from HIGH to HIGH. When changed to LOW, the master IC 300a outputs a reply signal to the bus controller 834 from the connection line SDA. Further, when it is confirmed that the signal level of the connection line SCL changes from LOW to HIGH, and the signal level of the connection line SCL changes from HIGH to LOW again, the connection line SDA is opened. That is, the master IC 300a outputs the response signal at the timing when the signal level of the connection line SCL changes from LOW to HIGH nine times.

The reset signal generation circuit 839 is connected to a Vcc terminal connected to a connection line Vcc that supplies power to the I ² CI/O expander 815 and a RESET terminal that receives a reset signal from the outside.

The reset signal generation circuit 839 generates a reset signal when the I ² CI/O expander 815 is powered on and the voltage rises to a predetermined value. become

Therefore, when the harness is pulled out, the connection line Vcc for supplying power for the logic is temporarily disconnected, and when the harness is reinserted, the power supply is restored and the reset signal generation circuit 839 outputs the reset signal. Become. A harness is a bundle of a connection line Vcc, a connection line SDA, a connection line SCL, a ground line GND, and the like for supplying logic power.

Bus monitor WDT 840 is used to detect when another I ² CI/O expander 815 occupies connection line SDA. The bus monitoring WDT 840 is connected to the reset signal generating circuit 839, and when a predetermined time elapses after the connection ^line SDA is occupied, the bus monitoring WDT 840 operates its own reset signal generating circuit 839, thereby Initialize pandas 815.

Self-occupancy WDT 841 is used to detect the occupation of connection line SDA by itself (I ² CI/O expander 815). When the self-occupied WDT 841 operates continuously for a certain period of time, the self-occupied WDT 841 causes the reset signal generation circuit 839 to generate a reset signal to initialize the I ² CI/O expander 815 .

[Second Modification of Identification Substrate]
FIG. 114 shows a second modification of the identification board 513 of the part 510. FIG. In the second modification, the parallel-to-serial converter 516 of the identification board 513 is not an ordinary parallel-to-serial conversion IC, but an I ² CI/O expander 815 (slave IC) for output. Also, in the second modified example, the parts 510 are equipped with a rendering device and can perform rendering. The effect device is, for example, a decoration device such as an LED (light emitting part), but may be a movable accessory.

The I ² CI/O expander 815 for output is based on the effect control data received from the master IC 300a of the effect control device 300, and the output state of the effect device (here, LED, light emitting unit) provided in the part 510 ( Here, the light emitting state) is controlled via ports 0 to 15 on the output side. In addition, the I ² CI/O expander 815 uses the unique address (8 bits) of the I ² CI/O expander 815 as parts identification information and inputs it to the master IC 300 a of the effect control device 300 .

The output I ² CI/O expander 815 includes an input I ² CI/O expander 815 ( FIG. 113 ), an output setting register 835 , an output controller 836 , and an output side of the I ² CI/O expander 815 . A driver 837 connected to each of ports 0 to 15 (terminals 0 to 15) of and transistors 838A to 838P connected to each of ports 0 to 15 are added. Therefore, the description of the same configuration as the input I ² CI/O expander 815 (FIG. 113) will be omitted as appropriate.

The filter 831 is connected to the connection line SDA, removes noise from the data input from the connection line SDA (here, effect control data, reply signal, etc.), and outputs the noise-removed data to the bus controller 834.

The driver 832 applies to the transistor 830 a voltage that enables the transistor 830 to operate when data (here, part identification information, response signal, etc.) is output from the connection line SDA to the master IC 300a.

When the driver 832 outputs data (parts identification information, response signal, etc.) from the connection line SDA, the transistor 830 is operable to the gate of the transistor 830 in order to pass a current between the drain and the source of the transistor 830. Apply a voltage of The driver 832 outputs data from the connection line SDA by repeatedly changing the voltage of the connection line SDA from HIGH to LOW.

The bus controller 834 determines whether or not the address of the data input from the connection line SDA matches the unique address set in the I ² CI/O expander 815. If they match, the connection line Data (part identification information, reply signal, etc.) is output from the SDA to the master IC 300a. The part identification information output to the master IC 300a is the unique address (8 bits) of the I ² CI/O expander 815 as described above. It should be noted that it is not always necessary to output the parts identification information from the bus controller 834 to the master IC 300a, and upon receiving a response signal from the bus controller 834, the effect control device 300 recognizes the address of the transmitted data as the parts identification information. It may be configured to

In addition, after the number of times the signal level of the connection line SCL has changed from LOW to HIGH has reached eight times and the bus controller 834 has taken in the effect control data of the 8th bit from the connection line SDA, the signal level of the connection line SCL has changed to When it changes from HIGH to LOW, it outputs a response signal from the connection line SDA to the master IC 300a. Further, when it is confirmed that the signal level of the connection line SCL changes from LOW to HIGH, and the signal level of the connection line SCL changes from HIGH to LOW again, the connection line SDA is opened. That is, the bus controller 834 outputs the response signal at the timing when the signal level of the connection line SCL changes from LOW to HIGH nine times.

The operation mode of the I ² CI/O expander 815 and the output states of ports 0 to 15 are set in the output setting register 835 . When the bus controller 834 fetches the initialization instruction data from the connection line SDA and the I ² CI/O expander 815 is initialized, the output setting register 835 allows current to flow through all ports 0 to 15. is set to the initial state so that

Based on the data set in the output setting register 835, the output controller 836 causes a current to flow through the effect device (here, LED, light emitting unit) connected to each port 0 to 15 via the port driver 837 ( Output of lighting data) actually controls the output state (light emitting state in this case) of the effect device. This output state is updated to the content designated by the performance control data when the bus controller 834 takes in the performance control data from the connection line SDA.

That is, based on the effect control data received from the master IC 300a, it is set in the output setting register 835, and when the stop condition is received, the output state of each port 0 to 15 is updated and reflected in the effect device.

Driver 837 applies a voltage to transistors 838A to 838P connected to the port through which the current flows so that the transistors 838A to 838P can operate.

The transistors 838A-838P have their gates connected to the driver 837, their drains connected to port terminals connected to connection lines to which a voltage is applied to operate the rendering device, and their sources grounded.

If the voltage applied to the gates of the transistors 838A to 838P is equal to or higher than a predetermined value for operating the transistor 838, the predetermined voltage applied to the gates from the drive power source is grounded via the drain of the transistor 838. The output state of the effect device (LED in this case) connected to the port terminal can be controlled by the current flowing through the port terminal.

[Third Modification of Identification Board]
FIG. 115 shows a third modification of the identification board 513 of the part 510. FIG. In the third modification, the parallel-to-serial conversion unit 516 of the identification board 513 does not exist, and the predetermined voltage from the plurality of wirings 519 is 8-bit parts identification information (for example, "01111100"), and the effect control device 300 has an input Direct input to port 300b (ports 0-7). The parts identification information input to the input port 300b is taken into the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 via the data bus 340. FIG. Note that a predetermined terminal to which a predetermined voltage is input corresponds to a bit of value "1", and the other terminals (to which the wiring 519 is not connected) correspond to bits of value "0".

Then, when the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the production control device 300 does not match the parts identification information (first identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information), it informs that the mismatch is an error. Execute the processing to be performed.

[Main processing (production control device)]
FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the procedure of main processing (main program) according to the twelfth embodiment. The main process is executed by the effect control device 300 (main control microcomputer 311) when the game machine 10 is powered on (restored).

The main processing of the twelfth embodiment is obtained by adding parts matching processing (B5000) to the main processing of FIG. 36, and the other processing is the same as that of FIG. omitted.

In the parts matching process, the parts identification information read from the parts 510 is compared with the model identification information corresponding to the model designation command (B1301), and the parts identification information (first identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information) are compared. information) is inconsistent, warn by an error notification. In this embodiment, the parts matching process (B5000) is executed after the received command check process (B0014).

The parts collation process (B5000) is first executed when the gaming machine 10 is powered on, and then repeatedly executed by a loop process from steps B0008 to B0021.

[Parts verification process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 117, the details of the parts matching process (B5000) in the main process (FIG. 116) will be described. FIG. 117 is a flow chart showing the procedure of parts matching processing executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

Effect control device 300, first, if the collation time timer (clock means) is not 0 -1 update (B5001). The collation time timer determines the collation timing or the collation time interval for reading the part identification information and collating (comparing) it with the model identification information. Then, it is determined whether or not the collation time timer is 0 (B5002). If the collation time timer is not 0 (the result of B5002 is "N"), it is not the collation timing, so the parts collation processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the collation time timer is 0 (the result of B5002 is "Y"), since it is the collation timing, the effect control device 300 reads the parts identification information from the parts 510 (B5003). Then, the parts identification information (first identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information) are compared (verified) (B5004). The model identification information is set as information indicating the type (model) of the gaming machine in the model setting process (B1302) when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, based on the model designation command.

Effect control device 300 stores the reference table of FIG. 118 in memory (for example, program ROM 321). In the reference table of FIG. 118, model specification commands and model identification information are associated with each other. In this way, the effect control device 300 holds model identification information (second identification information) corresponding to the model of the game machine.

Next, the production control device 300 determines whether or not the parts identification information and the model identification information match (B5005). If the parts identification information and the model identification information do not match (the result of B5005 is "N"), an error notification is issued to notify that the parts identification information and the model identification information do not match (B5006). That is, it is notified that the part 510 is attached to the wrong model that does not fit (correspond) to the part 510 . The effect control device 300 may execute error notification (warning) by generating sounds from the speakers 19 a and 19 b or displaying characters on the display device 41 . Moreover, here, the effect control device 300 may refer to the reference table of FIG. A correct model is a model that has the same model identification information as the part identification information of the part 510 .

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 sets the initial value of the collation time timer (B5007), and ends the parts collation processing. Therefore, the part identification information and the model identification information are compared (verified) periodically every time the time corresponding to the initial value of the verification time timer elapses, starting with the power-on. The initial value of the matching time timer is, for example, a time corresponding to several minutes, but is not limited to this.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, when the parts identification information and the model identification information match (the result of B5005 is "Y"), since the parts 510 are attached to the correct model that fits (corresponds to) the parts 510, The initial value of the collation time timer is set without notifying the error (B5007), and the part collation processing is terminated.

For example, when the part 510B for the model B is attached to the model A of the game machine 10 (FIG. 109B), the parts identification information (for example, "01111100") and the part identification information (for example, "01111101") do not match, and error notification is performed. Along with the error notification, the correct model (model B) that matches the part 510B may be reported. On the other hand, for example, when the part 510A for the model A is attached to the model A of the gaming machine 10 (FIG. 109A), the model identification information (for example, "01111100") and the part identification information (for example, "01111100") ) match and no error reporting is performed.

In addition, as a modification, the effect control device 300 does not store the reference table of FIG. You can Also in this case, the effect control device 300 compares the parts identification information read from the parts 510 and the held model identification information, and compares the parts identification information (first identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information). ) do not match, the mismatch is reported as an error.

[Actions and Effects of the Twelfth Embodiment]
According to the twelfth embodiment, in the gaming machine 10, a game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a game (for example, a variable display game that variably displays identification information based on establishment of a starting condition), and A performance control means (a performance control device 300) capable of executing a performance to be performed is provided. The gaming machine 10 includes detachable parts (parts 510) to which electrically readable first identification information (parts identification information) is assigned. The effect control means holds the second identification information (model identification information) corresponding to the model of the game machine 10, reads the first identification information of the parts, compares it with the second identification information, and outputs the first identification information (parts identification information) and the second identification information (model identification information) do not match, the mismatch is notified.

Therefore, even when the wrong part (part 510) is attached, it can be appropriately notified. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operation of the game machine 10 that has a part (the part 510) attached incorrectly in the game hall (game shop).

According to the twelfth embodiment, in the game machine 10, the effect control means reads the first identification information of the part (parts 510) at least when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on, compares it with the second identification information, If the first identification information and the second identification information do not match, the mismatch is notified. Therefore, even if a wrong part (part 510) is attached, it can be notified when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the operation of the gaming machine 10 in which the component (the part 510) is incorrectly installed in the gaming arcade (game parlor) at an early stage.

According to the twelfth embodiment, in the gaming machine 10, the presentation control means receives information about the model of the gaming machine 10 from the gaming control means when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, and responds to the model of the gaming machine 10. The second identification information (model identification information) is selected from the table (reference table), and the first identification information of the part (part 510) is compared with the selected second identification information. Therefore, when the wrong parts (parts 510) are attached to various models of the gaming machine 10, this can be notified. Also, the correct model to which the wrong part should be attached can be notified.

According to the twelfth embodiment, in the game machine 10, the first identification information (part identification information) in the part (part 510) can be set by one or more wires pulled up to a predetermined voltage, so that it is easy to A first identification can be set.

According to the twelfth embodiment, in the gaming machine 10, the first identification information can be set by the DIP switch in the part (part 510), so the first identification information can be set easily.

[Thirteenth embodiment]
The thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 to 134. FIG. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to twelfth embodiments. The thirteenth embodiment relates to the fixed display period of the set probability value. Note that the fixed display period is a period for displaying the fixed value of the probability set value.

[Game control device according to the thirteenth embodiment]
First, with reference to FIG. 119, the timing of external information output at the time of setting change according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 119 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the game control system of the game machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment. The game control device 100 of the thirteenth embodiment is similar to the game control device 100 of the first embodiment and the sixth embodiment, but the probability setting value display device 143 attached to the game control device 100 is a state display It is built into the device 152 . That is, the state display device 152 also functions as the probability setting value display device 143 of the first embodiment and the sixth embodiment. In addition, a RAM initialization switch 112 (RAM clear switch) is attached to the game control device 100 of the thirteenth embodiment separately from the set value change switch 102 (set value change button).

[Transitional state at power-on]
FIG. 120 is a diagram for explaining transition states when power is turned on (power is restored) of the gaming machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment. Depending on the ON/OFF states of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 when the power is turned on, there are four states (modes) as shown in FIG.

First, when the power is turned on, if the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are turned on, after the RAM is cleared, a setting variable state (setting change state, setting change state, setting change state) in which the probability setting value can be changed is set. mode) (A1036-A1041 in FIG. 5A). In the RAM clear here, the clear processing of step A1036 is executed, and the clear area #2 is specified as the RAM area to be cleared by the RAM clear start address 2 set in A1021 of FIG. 5C. In the thirteenth embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, it is determined in steps A1024 and A1028 of FIG. 5A whether both the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are on. Also, unlike the first embodiment, in step A1025 of FIG. 5A, it is determined whether or not the RAM initialization switch 112, not the set value change switch 102, is on.

Next, when the power is turned on, if the setting key switch 93 is turned on but the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned off, the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which probability setting values can be confirmed is entered. The transition to the setting confirmation state can be executed in steps A2504-A2508 of the probability setting value confirmation processing (FIG. 11) during timer interrupt processing after normal power restoration (A1031-A1035).

Also, when the power is turned on, if the setting key switch 93 is off but the RAM initialization switch 112 is on, the RAM initialization processing (RAM clear processing) of steps A1042 to A1045 is executed, and FIG. 5C 2, the clear area #2 is designated as the RAM area to be cleared by the RAM clear top address 2, and the RAM is cleared. In the RAM clear, the clear area #3 may be designated as the RAM area to be cleared by the RAM clear start address 3. FIG.

If the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off when the power is turned on, the power is simply restored.

[Probability setting value change processing]
Next, details of the probability set value change processing (A1308) in the timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 121 is a flow chart showing the procedure of probability setting value change processing according to the thirteenth embodiment.

In the probability setting value changing process of the thirteenth embodiment, the processing positions of steps A2412, A2414 and A2415 are changed and the processes of steps A2411 and A2413 are deleted from the probability setting value changing process of FIG. , and other processes are the same as those in FIG.

In the processing of step A2416, when the setting key switch 93 is in the OFF state (the result of A2416 is "Y"), the game control device 100 loads the value in the working probability setting value area and saves it in the probability setting value area. (A2412). By turning off the setting key switch 93, the set value is determined, and the values 0 to 5 corresponding to the determined probability set value are stored in the probability set value area.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets a probability setting value changed flag indicating that the probability setting value has been changed (A2414), and issues a probability setting value change command indicating that the probability setting value has been changed. It transmits to production control device 300 (production control board) (A2415). Thereafter, steps A2417-A2421 are executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment, the process returns to the main process (FIG. 5B), and the process proceeds to step A1049. Here, by saving the probability set value display data corresponding to the probability set value in the probability set value display area in step A2420, the determined probability set value is displayed on the state display device 152 in which the probability set value display device 143 is incorporated. can be displayed in The probability setting value display data is transmitted to the driver 150 (153 in FIG. 71) of the state display device 152 functioning as the probability setting value display device 143 in the sixth embodiment. You can run it like you would.

[Processing when setting value is received]
Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the details of the setting value reception processing (B1324) in the one-shot command processing will be described. FIG. 122 is a flow chart showing the procedure of setting value reception processing according to the thirteenth embodiment.

Effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received command is a normal command (B5201). If the received command is not a normal command (the result of B5201 is "N"), the setting value reception processing is terminated.

Effect control device 300, when the received command is a normal command (result of B5201 is "Y"), RTC338 (or timer for time) to acquire information indicating the current date and time (current time) (B5202 ), and determines whether or not the received command is a set value information command at the end of setting change (B5203). The setting value information command at the time of setting change end is a setting value information command transmitted from the game control device 100 together with the probability setting change end command at step A2421 of the probability setting value change processing. If the received command is not the setting value information command at the end of setting change (the result of B5203 is "N"), the setting value reception processing is ended.

Effect control device 300, if the received command is the setting value information command at the end of the setting change (the result of B5203 is "Y"), the setting value and the current date and time (current time) are associated with each other and stored in the memory. (B5204), and the setting value reception processing is terminated. The memory here is the FeRAM 323 that can hold the memory contents even if power is not supplied.

If the received command is not the setting value information command at the end of the setting change, that is, if it is the setting value information command (A1035) at the time of restoration from power failure or the setting value information command (A1045) at the time of RAM initialization ( If the result of B5203 is "N"), the setting value (probability setting value) may be stored in the RAM 322 without being associated with the current date and time.

[Segment LED editing process]
Next, details of the segment LED editing process (A1314) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the procedure of segment LED editing processing according to the thirteenth embodiment. In the segment LED editing process, the special figure 1 reservation indicator 54, the special figure 2 reservation indicator 55, the general figure reservation indicator 56, the first game state display section 57, the second game state display provided in the collective display device 50 58, the third game state display unit 59, and the round display unit 60. Although not shown in FIG. 123, in the segment LED editing process, the special figure 1 indicator 51, the special figure 2 indicator 52, and the variation display unit 53 for the general figure variation display game other than the variation display game are controlled to emit light. When to do, the special figure 1 indicator 51, the special figure 2 indicator 52, the emission control of the variable display unit 53 (extinguishing control, lighting control, flashing control) is executed in the same manner as the emission control of the holding indicator 54-56 You can In addition, in the variable display game, the special figure 1 indicator 51, the special figure 2 indicator 52, and the control to light up (blink) the variation display section 53 are executed in the symbol variation control process (FIG. 29).

The game control device 100 first updates the flashing control timer by +1 (A9201), and determines whether or not it is the output ON timing (A9202). When the specific bit of the blink control timer is 1, it is determined that it is the output-on timing. In this embodiment, the specific bit is bit 5, so a blinking period of 128 ms can be created (see FIG. 2B).

Game control device 100, if it is the output on timing (result of A9202 is "Y"), sets the normal figure holding number display table 1 (A9203), if it is not the output on timing (result of A9202 is "N") , Set the normal pattern reservation number display table 2 (A9204), acquire the display data corresponding to the normal pattern reservation number, and save it in the segment area of the general pattern reservation display 56 (lamps D15, D16) (A9205). If the number of reservations is 0 to 2, the display data will be the same in both the normal diagram reservation number display tables 1 and 2, so the normal diagram reservation indicator 56 does not blink, but if the number of reservations is 3 to 4, the normal Since the display data of the figure holding number display table 1 and the display data of the normal figure holding number display table 2 are different, the normal figure holding indicator 56 blinks (see FIG. 2B).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is the output ON timing (A9206). If it is output on timing (result of A9206 is "Y"), set special figure 1 reservation number display table 1 (A9207), if not output on timing (result of A9206 is "N"), special figure 1 reservation Set the number display table 2 (A9208), acquire the display data corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number and save it in the segment area of the special figure 1 reservation display 54 (lamps D11, D12) (A9209).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is the output ON timing (A9210). If it is output on timing (result of A9210 is "Y"), set special figure 2 hold number display table 1 (A9211), if not output on timing (result of A9210 is "N"), special figure 2 hold Set the number display table 2 (A9212), acquire the display data corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number and save it in the segment area of the special figure 2 reservation indicator 55 (lamps D13, D14) (A9213).

After that, the game control device 100 sets a round display LED display table (A9214) that defines the display mode of the round display unit 60 (lamps D3 to D7), and acquires display data corresponding to the round display LED output pointer. and save it in the segment area of the round display section 60 (A9215).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the game state display table 1 that defines the display modes of the second game state display portion 58 (lamp D9), the third game state display portion 59 (lamp D17), and the like ( A9216). Furthermore, the display data corresponding to the game state display number is acquired and saved in the segment area of each game state display portion (A9217).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the game state display table 2 that defines the display mode of the first game state display section 57 (lamp D8) (A9218). Furthermore, the display data corresponding to the game state display number 2 is acquired and saved in the segment area of the first game state display section 57 (A9219). After that, the segment LED editing process is terminated.

[Timing chart of confirmation display period of probability set value when setting is changed]
Next, with reference to FIG. 124, the timing of the fixed display period of the probability set value at the time of setting change (setting change mode, setting variable state) will be described. FIG. 124 is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability set value when the setting is changed according to the thirteenth embodiment.

After the setting key switch 93 (setting key) is turned on at time x1, when the gaming machine 10 is powered on with the RAM initialization switch 112 turned on at time x2, the state of the gaming machine 10 ( gaming machine state) is changed to the setting change mode (variable setting state), and an undetermined probability set value (undetermined value) is displayed on the state display device 152 (probability set value display (undetermined value)). In the probability set value display (undetermined value) of the status display device 152, the undetermined probability set value is blinking. Further, in response to the setting change mode being set at time x2, the display device 41 displays a display in a predetermined display mode that indicates that the setting is being changed. The collective display device 50 (first display device), the lamp display device 80 (fourth pattern), and the decoration device are maintained in the off state. The decoration device includes the frame decoration device 18 such as the decoration devices 18a and 18b, the board decoration device 46 such as the upper effect unit 40c, and a decoration light emitting part (LED). Further, the decoration device may be in a dimmed state instead of being in a non-lighted state, or may be in a state in which only the light-emitting portions of colors other than a specific color are extinguished.

When the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time x3, the gaming machine state becomes a playable state in which a game can be played, and the confirmed probability setting value (definite value) is displayed on the state display device 152 (second display device). (probability set value display (determined value)). In the probability set value display (determined value) of the state display device 152, the determined probability set value is lit. When the gaming machine state is the playable state, it is impossible to change or confirm the setting values. In addition, corresponding to the game ready state at time x3, the identification information of the design is displayed on the special figure 1 indicator 51 and / or the special figure 2 indicator 52 of the collective display device 50 (this particular feature (shown in the figure), and a customer waiting demonstration is displayed on the display device 41 . In addition, the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 of the collective display device 50 (lamps D3-D18) are also displayed blinking, and the customer waiting display may be executed. The lamp display device 80 and decoration device are normally displayed. It should be noted that when the set probability value is determined at time x3, it is also possible to notify by sound or voice that the set probability value has been determined.

A time x4 is a time when a predetermined time (predetermined period, eg, 2 to 3 seconds) has passed from the time x3. At time x4, the status display device 152 (second display device) ends the probability set value display and starts all blinking display, and repeats all off display and all on display of all segments at predetermined time intervals. . All blinking display of the status display device 152 is executed using the blinking control timer used in the segment LED editing process of FIG. They may be synchronized with the same flashing period.

Note that the time x4 is not limited to when a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 3 seconds) has passed since the time x3, but also when the front frame 12 (body frame) is closed or when a touch switch signal of the operation handle 24 is detected. good. In this way, when the setting change state is switched to the playable state in which the setting value cannot be changed, the setting value confirmed by the state display device 152 can be confirmed for a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 3 seconds). The determined setting value can be seen without entering the setting confirmation mode again later, and the working efficiency of the game parlor manager can be improved.

Time x5 is time when a predetermined time (predetermined period, for example, 0.5 sec) has passed from time x4. At time x5, the state display device 152 ends the all blinking display and starts the performance display (character material ratio display), and the character material ratio is displayed. It should be noted that the state display device 152 may display information on the payout rate, the number of ejected balls, and the base value (payout rate in the normal game state) instead of displaying the information on the role product ratio. rate display, discharge ball number display, base value display). Note that, as described above, the accessory ratio and the ball output rate (including the base value) are derived based on the number of prize balls obtained by winning prizes, and serve as performance information indicating the performance of the gaming machine. The status display device 152 can execute performance display that displays performance information.

It should be noted that the probability set value display (undetermined value) from time x2 is blinking, and the probability set value display (determined value) of the state display device 152 from time x3 is lit. The display may be switched such that the probability set value display (undetermined value) is lit and the probability set value display (determined value) is blinking.

[Example of display screen of display device when setting is changed]
FIG. 125 is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the display device 41 (third display device) when changing settings (setting change mode, variable setting state) according to the thirteenth embodiment. In FIG. 125, along with the display screen of the display device 41, the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c of the decoration device are also shown above the display screen.

As shown in FIG. 125 (sa), the effect control device 300, by receiving the command during the probability setting change (A1041), during setting change display indicating that the setting is being changed on the display screen of the display device 41 721 is displayed. Further, as described above, the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c are turned off during the setting change. In addition, the production control device 300 may notify that the setting is being changed by sound or voice together with the setting change display 721 .

In FIG. 125(H), a customer waiting demo screen 722 is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 in response to the fact that the game becomes playable after the setting change. When the game becomes possible, the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c are normally displayed, and part of the upper effect unit 40c lights up or blinks in time with the customer waiting demonstration as shown in black in FIG. . As described above, the lamp display device 80 has lamp display units 1 and 2 (LEDs) that perform variable display (blinking) as the fourth symbol (fourth special symbol), and the starting memory number of each special symbol variable display game. Since it is composed of a lamp display unit 3-6 (LED) for notification, it is normally turned off (turned off display), but part of it may be turned on or blinked according to the customer waiting demonstration.

FIG. 125 (su) is the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202) or the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3206), the customer waiting demo is finished and the special figure fluctuation display game (variation display game) is started Display when 4 is a display screen of the device 41. FIG. The customer waiting demo screen 722 shown in FIG. 125(H) is hidden, and the decorative first patterns A to C are variably displayed in the variable display areas 610 (left area 610A, right area 610B, middle area 610C). . In addition, the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c are in an effect mode in which a part lights up or blinks according to the special figure fluctuation display game. In the pending digestion area 640, a special figure variation pending display 643 (start memory display, special figure digesting pending display) corresponding to the special figure variation display game being executed (digested) is displayed. The pending display portion 630 displays the pending first start memory and second start memory. For example, when the special figure variation display game is started after the customer waiting demo, the pending display section 630 will be in a state where there is no pending first start memory or second start memory as shown in FIG. .

[Modified example of the timing chart of the fixed display period of the probability set value at the time of setting change]
Next, with reference to FIG. 126, a modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability set value at the time of setting change (setting change mode, setting variable state) will be described. FIG. 126 is a timing chart showing a modification of the timing of the confirmation display period of the probability set value when changing the setting according to the thirteenth embodiment. 126, 127, 129, and 130, explanations overlapping those of FIG. 124 will be omitted as appropriate.

As described above, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time x3 and the gaming machine state is switched from the setting change mode to the playable state, the state display device 152 starts blinking.

Then, at time x4' after a predetermined time (predetermined period, for example, 0.5 sec) has elapsed from time x3, the status display device 152 switches the display from full blinking to probability set value display (determined value). After switching the display to the probability set value display, the state display device 152 starts performance display (character ratio display and ball output rate display) at time x5′ after a predetermined time (predetermined period, for example, 2 to 3 seconds) has elapsed. to display the character ratio. In this way, the setting key switch 93 is turned off, and in response to the change from the setting change mode to the game-enabled state, the state display device 152 is all blinked to indicate that the setting has been established. can be made clear to the person Further, after that, the setting value determined by the probability setting value display is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 3 seconds), so that the game parlor manager can confirm the determined setting value as it is, thereby improving work efficiency. can be done.

As in FIG. 124, after the probability set value is displayed, the performance display may be started after performing all flashing for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 sec) at time x5'.

[Second Modified Example of Timing Chart of Confirmation Display Period of Probability Setting Values when Settings are Changed]
Next, with reference to FIG. 127, a second modified example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability set value at the time of setting change (setting change mode, setting variable state) will be described. FIG. 127 is a timing chart showing a second modification of the timing of the confirmation display period of the probability set value when the setting is changed according to the thirteenth embodiment.

As described above, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time x3 and the gaming machine state is switched from the setting change mode to the playable state, the state display device 152 starts displaying the probability set values.

Then, at time x4 when a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 3 seconds) has elapsed from time x3, the state display device 152 switches the display from the probability set value display to the notification display. The notification display is, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 128, a display that notifies that the setting has been finalized. After switching the display to the notification display, the state display device 152 starts the performance display (character product ratio display or ball-out percentage display) at time x5 after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 sec) has passed, and displays the character product ratio. indicate.

At the time x3, before displaying the probability set value (determined value) on the state display device 152, all flashing or notification display may be performed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 sec). Further, at time x3, if the notification display is performed before the probability setting value display (determined value) is performed on the state display device 152, from time x4 to time x5 after the probability setting value display (determined value) All blinking may be performed instead of performing notification display.

[Display mode when the setting of the status display device is changed]
FIG. 128 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when changing settings of the status display device 152 according to the second modification of the thirteenth embodiment.

First, FIG. 128(a) shows the display mode of the state display device 152 when the power is turned off until time x2 in FIG. including 8 segments) are all turned off.

FIG. 128(b) shows a display mode of the state display device 152 when the probability setting value display (undetermined value, determined value) is displayed from the time x2 to the time x4. Digit 3 displays the current probability set value (for example, "6"), and seven segments other than digit 3 (digit 2, digit 1, digit 0) are turned off. Note that the current probability setting value (for example, "6") displayed in the leftmost digit 3 of the state display device 152 blinks in the probability setting value display (undetermined value) from time x2 to time x3. The probability set value display (determined value) from x3 to time x4 is lit.

FIG. 128(c) shows the display mode of the status display device 152 when the information display is performed from the time x4 to the time x5. Upper and lower bars are displayed in digits 0 to 3 of the status display device 152 to indicate that the probability set value has been determined. Note that the notification display displayed in the digits 0 to 3 of the status display device 152 is not limited to the display by the upper and lower bars, and may be displayed in a display mode different from the probability setting value and performance display.

FIG. 128(d) shows a display mode of the state display device 152 whose performance is displayed after time x5. As shown in FIG. 128(d), the status display device 152 displays the ball output rate (for example, "b1.35") for the most recent predetermined number (for example, 10,000 shots) of discharged balls as a performance display. . It should be noted that the state display device 152 may display the overall ball payout rate (for example, "bL.35" shown in FIG. 102) from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present, the base value, and the character ratio. The display may be switched and displayed at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 to 3 seconds).

[Third Modified Example of Timing Chart of Confirmation Display Period of Probability Setting Values when Settings are Changed]
Next, with reference to FIG. 129, a third modified example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting change (setting change mode, setting variable state) will be described. FIG. 129 is a timing chart showing a third modified example of the timing of the confirmation display period of the probability set value at the time of setting change according to the thirteenth embodiment.

As described above, after the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time x3, when the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202) or special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3206) is performed at time x4'', collective display In the special figure 1 display device 51 or the special figure 2 display device 52 of the device 50, this special figure display (display of identification information) starts fluctuating display from the design that was stopped and displayed, and the special figure fluctuation display game (fluctuation display game) is started. At the same time, on the display screen of the display device 41, the customer waiting demonstration is finished, and the decoration special figure variable display game (variable display game) is started. In response to the start of the special figure variation display game on the collective display device 50 (first display device) and the display device 41 (third display device), the special figure variation display game (variation display game) and the display of the number of reservations are started, and the display corresponding to the effect of the special figure fluctuation display game is performed on the decorative device.

Then, at time x5'' after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 sec) has passed from time x4'', the status display device 152 ends all flashing and starts performance display (character ratio display and ball payout rate display). do. In this way, all blinking and performance display are started in response to the start of the special figure variation display game without waiting for the passage of the predetermined time, so that the information about the game can be displayed early. .

In addition, the state display device 152 performs the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202) or the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3206), that is, the winning of the game ball to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 or the start winning opening 36 Not limited to the mode of starting all blinking when there is, when there is a game ball winning in the general winning opening 35 or when the game ball passes through the normal figure start gate 34, all blinking may be started . Further, like the example in FIG. 124 described above, when the front frame 12 (body frame) is closed or when the touch switch signal of the operation handle 24 is detected, all blinking may be started.

[Fourth Modification of Timing Chart of Confirmation Display Period of Probability Setting Values when Settings are Changed]
Next, with reference to FIG. 130, a fourth modified example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability set value at the time of setting change (setting change mode, setting variable state) will be described. FIG. 130A is a timing chart showing a fourth modification of the timing of the confirmation display period of the probability set value when the setting is changed according to the thirteenth embodiment.

When the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on at time x2, the gaming machine state changes to the setting change mode, and the collective display device 50, the lamp display device 80 and the decoration device of the fourth modification all start blinking. At that time, the blinking cycle of the collective display device 50 is controlled by the segment LED editing process of FIG. synchronizing the blinking timing of each device. The game control device 100 may send a command to the performance control device 300 to synchronize the blinking timing between the lamp display device 80 and decoration device controlled by the performance control device 300 and the collective display device 50 . Further, when the state display device 152 blinks to display the probability setting value, the blinking of the state display device 152 is controlled using the blinking control timer used in the segment LED editing process, and the batch display device 50 The blinking timing and the blinking timing of the status display device 152 may be synchronized.

Incidentally, all blinking display of the collective display device 50, as shown in FIG. , 52 (LED lamps D1 and D2). In addition, the LED lamps (for example, LED lamps D3-D18) other than the display units 51, 52 (D1, D2) for the special figure variation display game may be used to perform all blinking display of the collective display device 50.

Then, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time x3, the game machine state changes from the setting change mode to the playable state, and the batch display device 50, the lamp display device 80 and the decoration device all stop blinking. At the time x3, the identification information of the losing pattern is stopped and displayed on the collective display device 50 (this special display), and the lamp display device 80 and the decoration device are normally displayed. Further, the determined probability set value (determined value) is displayed on the state display device 152 (probability set value display), and the display of setting change on the display screen of the display device 41 ends, and the customer waiting demonstration is started.

Subsequently, when a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 3 seconds) elapses from time x3 to time x5''', the state display device 152 ends the probability setting value display (determined value) and displays performance (character ratio display (or ball output rate display). As described above, in the state display device 152 according to the fourth modification, after the probability setting value display (determined value) is finished, all blinking is omitted and the performance display (character ratio display and ball output rate display) is immediately displayed. Therefore, the game hall manager can quickly check the ball payout rate and the like after the setting change. By the time x5''', the special figure variation display game (variation display game) is started on the collective display device 50 and the display device 41, and the special figure variation display game (variation display game) by the fourth symbol is started on the lamp display device 80. Variation display game) and pending number display are performed, and the decoration device performs display corresponding to the effect of the special figure variation display game (effect corresponding display).

[Timing chart of the confirmation display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting confirmation]
Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the timing of the confirmation display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation state) will be described. FIG. 131 is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of the confirmation display period of the probability set value at the time of setting confirmation according to the thirteenth embodiment.

After the setting key switch 93 (setting key) is turned on at time x11, when the gaming machine 10 is powered on with the RAM initialization switch 112 turned off at time x12, the state of the gaming machine 10 ( gaming machine state) is changed to the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state), and the confirmed probability setting value (confirmed value) is displayed on the state display device 152 (probability setting value display). Then, a stop symbol is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 (stop symbol display) as shown in FIG. 132 to be described later. When the game machine state is in the setting confirmation mode, the collective display device 50, the lamp display device 80 and the decoration device are in a full lighting state in which all the segments and LEDs are all lit (partial lighting state can be). In addition, the collective display device 50 may display the stop pattern of the identification information of the last special figure variation display game in the setting confirmation mode. Also, when shifting to the setting confirmation mode, the stop pattern displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 becomes the stop pattern of the identification information of the previous special figure variation display game.

When the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time x13, the state of the gaming machine changes from the setting confirmation mode to the playable state, and the state display device 152 displays the performance display (character ratio display and ball output rate display). be. In addition, in response to the gaming machine state being changed to a playable state at time x13, the symbol (identification information) displayed immediately before (at the time of power shutdown) is displayed as a special symbol on the collective display device 50 ( This special figure display (previous display pattern)). Then, the customer waiting demonstration is started on the display screen of the display device 41, and the lamp display device 80 and the decoration device are normally displayed. In this way, when the setting confirmation state is switched to the playable state, the performance information can be immediately displayed as the performance display on the state display device 152 (second display device). can be improved.

Although the performance display is immediately displayed on the status display device 152 at the time x13, as shown in the timing chart at the time of setting change shown in FIG. 5 sec) All blinking may be performed. In this way, by displaying on the state display device 152 a display (all blinking display) different from the probability setting value and the performance display between the setting confirmation mode and the playable state, the game hall manager can It becomes easier to grasp that the game has been switched to the playable state.

[Example of display screen of display device when setting is changed]
FIG. 132 is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the display device 41 (third display device) during setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation state) according to the thirteenth embodiment. In FIG. 132, along with the display screen of the display device 41, the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c of the decoration device are also shown above the display screen. 132 and 134, descriptions overlapping those of FIG. 125 will be omitted as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 132 (se), the effect control device 300 receives the command during probability setting confirmation (A2508, B1327), and lights up the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c of the decoration device. In this way, the lamp display device 80 and the decoration device have different lighting modes during setting confirmation than during setting change (FIG. 125). In addition, the production control device 300 may perform notification (with sound or the like) that indicates that the settings are being checked together with all lighting of the lamp display device 80 and the upper production unit 40c. On the other hand, on the display screen of the display device 41, the stop pattern (stop result) of the identification information of the previous special figure variation display game is displayed, and the display mode is such that it is difficult to know that the setting is being confirmed.

In FIG. 132(1), a customer waiting demo screen 722 is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 in response to the fact that the game is ready for play after the setting confirmation. When the game is ready to play, the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c are normally displayed.

Figure 132 (ta) is, by special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (A3202) or special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (A3206), when the customer waiting demonstration is finished and the special figure fluctuation display game (variation display game) is started 4 is a display screen of a display device 41. FIG. As in FIG. 125 (su), the customer waiting demo screen 722 is hidden, and the decoration first symbols A to C are variably displayed in the variable display area 620, and the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c are changed to special figures. It becomes an effect mode of lighting or blinking according to the display game.

[Modified example of the timing chart of the confirmation display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting confirmation]
Next, with reference to FIG. 133, a modification of the timing of the confirmation display period of the probability set value at the time of setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation state) will be described. FIG. 133 is a timing chart showing a modification of the timing of the confirmation display period of the probability set value at the time of setting confirmation according to the thirteenth embodiment. In addition, in the following description of FIG. 133, description overlapping with FIG. 131 will be omitted as appropriate.

As described above, when the gaming machine 10 is powered on with the RAM initialization switch 112 turned off at time x12, the gaming machine state is switched to the setting confirmation mode. In the setting confirmation mode of this modified example, the display screen of the display device 41 displays a list of setting confirmation indications 723 showing the setting history of the probability setting values so far, for example, as will be described later with reference to FIG. , the display mode shows that the settings are being checked (setting checking display (setting history display)). In addition, the determined set value is displayed on the status display device 152 (probability set value display (determined value)), and the lamp display device 80 and the decoration device all start blinking. The collective display device 50 is maintained in the off state. The setting confirmation display is not limited to the setting history display, and may be any display mode that indicates that the setting confirmation is in progress. In addition to the setting confirmation display, the setting confirmation may be notified by sound or voice.

After that, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at the time x13, the gaming machine state changes from the setting confirmation mode to the game ready state, and the display screen of the display device 41 ends the setting confirmation display (setting history display). Start the customer waiting demo. At time x13, the state of the gaming machine is changed to the playable state, the performance display (character ratio display and ball-out percentage display) is displayed on the state display device 152, and the immediately preceding ( The pattern (identification information) displayed at the time of power shutdown) is displayed as a special figure (this special figure display (previous display pattern)). Also, the lamp display device 80 and the decoration device are normally displayed.

[Example of display screen of display device when setting is changed]
FIG. 134 is a diagram showing a modification of the display screen of the display device 41 during setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation state) according to the thirteenth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 134 (se'), the effect control device 300 receives the command during probability setting confirmation (A2508, B1327), and displays a setting confirmation display 723 on the display screen of the display device 41. The setting confirmation display 723 is a display that allows a list of the setting history of the probability setting values so far. For example, as shown in FIG. be. As described in FIG. 122, the effect control device 300 receives the setting value information command at the end of the setting change (the result of B5203 is "Y"), the setting value and the setting change date and time when the setting value is confirmed. (Date and time of end of setting change) are associated with each other and stored in the FeRAM 323 (B5204). Therefore, the production control device 300 displays a list of the setting history of the probability setting values in the display 723 during setting confirmation by reading out the setting values and the setting change date/time from the FeRAM 323 . The lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c of the decoration device are all blinking during the setting confirmation mode.

In FIG. 134(a'), in response to the fact that the game is ready to play after confirming the settings, a customer waiting demo screen 722 is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41, and the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c are displayed normally. displayed.

Fig. 134 (ta') shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the customer waiting demo is finished and the special figure fluctuation display game (variation display game) is started in the same way as Fig. 125 (su) and Fig. 132 (ta). is. On the display screen of the display device 41, the customer waiting demo screen 722 is hidden, and the first patterns A to C are variably displayed in the variable display area 620, and the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c are displayed in the special figure variable display game. It becomes a production mode in which it lights up or blinks according to the time.

In addition, a display screen capable of displaying an effect related to the special figure variation display game may be provided in the movable roles such as the internal roles 44a and 44b (see FIG. 52A). When a display screen is provided for the movable accessory, a setting confirmation display 723 is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41, and a display indicating that the setting is being checked using the display screen of the movable accessory. It can be performed. Also, the display screen of the movable accessory may be in a state different from the playable state, such as a single color display (for example, white display) in the setting confirmation mode. Further, the display screen of the display device 41 may be displayed in a single color (for example, white display), and the setting history may be displayed by performing the setting confirmation display 723 on the display screen of the movable role. By adopting such a mode, even if the display screen of the display device 41 does not show that the settings are being checked as shown in FIG. can be easily understood. In addition, not only in the setting confirmation mode but also in the setting change mode, the display screen of the movable accessory may be displayed in a manner different from that in the playable state.

[Action and effect of the thirteenth embodiment]
In the gaming machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, the display result of a variable display game (special figure variable display game) that variably displays identification information (identification pattern, special figure) is a special result (jackpot result mode, jackpot stop pattern, A control means (game control device 100) capable of generating a special game state for giving a game value to a player when a special result mode is reached is provided. The gaming machine 10 is provided in a game area 32, and includes a winning area (a general winning opening 35, a start winning opening 36, a normal variable winning apparatus 37, a special variable winning apparatus 39) in which game balls can win, and a game When the ball wins in the winning area, a payout control means (payout control device 200) capable of paying out the number of prize balls determined for each winning area, and a first display device (collective display) capable of displaying display related to the game device 50), setting change means (setting changing device 42, RAM initialization switch 112) capable of changing setting values (setting values, probability setting values) relating to game conditions, setting values, and prize balls obtained by winning. A second display device (status display device) capable of displaying performance information derived based on the number (ratio of role items, ball output rate for the most recent predetermined number of discharged balls, overall ball output rate, base value) 152) and The control means changes the display of the first display device to a predetermined display mode (e.g., extinguished display) in response to the setting change state (setting change mode, setting variable state) in which the setting value can be changed by the setting change means. , all blinking display), and in response to the change from the setting change state to a game-enabled state in which the setting value cannot be changed by the setting change means, the fixed setting value is displayed on the second display device for a predetermined period (predetermined time, For example, it can be displayed for 2 to 3 seconds).

According to the gaming machine 10 as described above, when the setting change state is switched to the game-enabled state in which the setting value cannot be changed, the setting value confirmed on the second display device can be confirmed for a predetermined period (predetermined time). The work efficiency of the field manager can be improved.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, the control means (game control device 100) responds to the change from the setting change state (setting change mode, setting variable state) to the game enabled state, and the second The set value determined on the display device (status display device 152) is a signal related to the game (for example, a detection signal when a game ball that has entered the normal variable winning device 37, the starting winning port 36 or the general winning port 35 is detected, a normal The display is continued until a signal indicating that a game ball has passed through the starting gate 34, a signal of the front frame open detection switch 64, a touch switch signal of the operating handle 24) is detected. According to the gaming machine 10, the performance information is displayed when the game-related signal is detected, so the gaming parlor manager can check the performance information immediately after changing the settings.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, the display result of the variable display game (special figure variable display game) that variably displays the identification information (identification pattern, special figure) is a special result (jackpot result mode, jackpot stop pattern, A control means (game control device 100) capable of generating a special game state for giving a game value to a player when a special result mode is reached is provided. The gaming machine 10 is provided in a game area 32, and includes a winning area (a general winning opening 35, a start winning opening 36, a normal variable winning apparatus 37, a special variable winning apparatus 39) in which game balls can win, and a game When the ball wins in the winning area, a payout control means (payout control device 200) capable of paying out the number of prize balls determined for each winning area, and a first display device (collective display) capable of displaying display related to the game device 50), setting confirmation means (setting key switch 92, RAM initialization switch 112) capable of confirming setting values (setting values, probability setting values) related to game conditions, setting values, and prize balls obtained by winning. A second display device (status display device) capable of displaying performance information derived based on the number (ratio of role items, ball output rate for the most recent predetermined number of discharged balls, overall ball output rate, base value) 152) and The control means changes the display of the first display device to a predetermined display mode (for example, full lighting display, previous The display of the stop pattern of the identification information of the special figure fluctuation display game), and the performance information on the second display device in response to being changed from the setting confirmation state to the playable state in which the setting value cannot be confirmed by the setting confirmation means. can be displayed.

According to the gaming machine 10 as described above, when the setting confirmation state is switched to the playable state in which the setting value cannot be confirmed, the performance information can be immediately displayed on the second display device. Work efficiency can be improved.

Further, the gaming machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment includes setting change means (setting change means) capable of changing setting values (setting values, probability setting values) when the setting change state (setting change mode, setting variable state) is entered. Device 42 further comprises a RAM initialization switch 112). The control means (game control device 100) displays (probability set value display) when the display of the first display device (collective display device 50) is changed to the setting change state in response to the setting confirmation state. , or in a mode different from the display related to the game (for example, full lighting display). According to the gaming machine 10, the display mode of the first display device is different between the setting confirmation state and the setting change state, so that the game hall manager can easily switch between the setting confirmation state and the setting change state. It can be distinguished to improve work efficiency.

Further, the gaming machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment includes a third display device (display device 41) capable of displaying an effect related to a variable display game (special figure variable display game), and display of the effect on the third display device. is provided with production control means (production control device 300) capable of controlling The effect control means displays the history of setting changes on the third display device in response to being set in the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode). According to the gaming machine 10 as described above, even when the first display device (collective display device 50) is not in a display mode indicating that the setting confirmation state is displayed, the game hall manager can make the setting from the third display device. It can be seen that it is in the confirmation state, and the setting history can be confirmed.

The control means (game control device 100) changes the display mode of the first display device (collective display device 50) to the immediately preceding variation display game (special figure variation) in response to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode). Display game) display results (stop symbols, identification information) are displayed. According to the gaming machine 10, the display mode of the first display device is different between the setting confirmation state and the setting change state, so that the game hall manager can easily switch between the setting confirmation state and the setting change state. It can be distinguished to improve work efficiency. In addition, since it is not necessary to cause the first display device to perform a dedicated display mode in the setting confirmation state, it is possible to reduce the processing load and data amount accordingly.

The control means (game control device 100) displays the performance information (role product ratio, latest The ball output rate for a predetermined number of discharged balls, the overall ball output rate, and the base value) are immediately displayed. According to such a game machine 10, the game parlor manager can immediately check the performance information by switching from the setting confirmation state to the game ready state, so that the work efficiency can be improved.

The control means (game control device 100) changes the display of the second display device (status display device 152) to the setting confirmation state in response to the change from the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) to the playable state. Display of time (probability set value display) or display of performance information (ratio of role, ball output rate for the most recent predetermined number of discharged balls, overall ball output rate, base value) The performance information is displayed on the second display device after the display on the display device is changed to a different mode. According to the gaming machine 10 as described above, a display different from these displays is displayed on the second display device immediately after the gaming machine 10 enters the playable state. It makes it easier to grasp things with certainty.

[14th embodiment]
FIG. 135 is a schematic diagram showing a display mode of probability setting values in the gaming machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment. This embodiment is a modification of the display during and after changing the probability setting value according to the thirteenth embodiment. Therefore, the operation for changing the probability setting value and the operation for confirming the probability setting value in this embodiment are the same as those in the thirteenth embodiment.

In this embodiment, the status display device 152 digit (0) (display 900-0), digit (1) (display 900-1), digit (2) (display 900-2), digit (3) (Display 900-3) is used (see FIG. 71) to display probability setting values before setting change (during setting confirmation), during setting change, and after setting change, as will be described later.

In this embodiment, the RAM initialization switch 112 (memory erasing means) and the setting key switch 93 (switch, setting changing means) shown in FIG. , the setting variable state is entered (see FIG. 120). At this time, the game microcomputer 111 constituting the game control device 100 corresponds to the working probability setting value (temporary value 0 to 5) stored in the working probability setting value area of the RAM 111c. Character code (including dot data (Dp=1)) is extracted. Then, the game microcomputer 111 generates the first display data including the character code and the address of the 8-bit latch 167a (for example, 22H (hexadecimal representation)) and stores it in the probability setting value display data area ( 121, A2409). As a result, a command including the first display data (including dot data (Dp=1)) is sent to the driver 150 (153) of the status display device 152. FIG. The transmission of the status display device 152 to the driver 150 (153) can be executed in the same manner as the transmission of the character product ratio display data in the LED data transmission process (A16001 in FIG. 70).

Next, when a signal is input from the set value change switch 102 by pressing the set value change switch 102 (setting change means), the game microcomputer 111 updates the value of the working probability set value area (0 to 5). (Fig. 121, A2408), the character code (including dot data (Dp = 1)) corresponding to the updated work probability setting value information is extracted, and the updated character code and the address of the 8-bit latch 167a are converted into is generated and stored in the probability set value display data area (FIG. 121, A2409). As a result, a command including the updated first display data (including dot data (Dp=1)) is sent to the driver 150 of the status display device 152 .

Then, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off (second state), the game microcomputer 111 changes the information of the working probability setting value stored in the working probability setting value area to the changed probability setting value ( 121, A2412). Then, the game microcomputer 111 stores a character code (including dot data (Dp=0)) corresponding to the probability setting value after setting change stored in the probability setting value area, and an address (for example, 22H) of the 8-bit latch 167a. (Hexadecimal representation)) is generated and stored in the probability setting value display data area (FIG. 121, A2409). As a result, a command including the second display data (including dot data (Dp=0)) is sent to the driver 150 of the status display device 152 .

Alternatively, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, the game microcomputer 111 outputs a character code (including dot data (Dp=0)) corresponding to the work probability setting value information stored in the work probability setting value area. ) and the address of the 8-bit latch 167a and stored in the probability setting value display data area, the second display data (including dot data (Dp=0)) is generated. can also be sent to the driver 150 of the status display device 152 .

FIG. 135 describes the case of changing the probability set value from 1 to 6. In FIG. As shown in FIG. 135, when the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are turned on and the power is turned on, the game microcomputer 111 outputs the address of the 8-bit latch 167a and the character code (for example, X1000001B: "1"). and including dot data (Dp=1)) to the driver 150 of the status display device 152 . As a result, "1" is displayed in (digit 0) of the status display device 152 as the value being changed, and the dot lights up.

Next, when the set value change switch 102 is pushed down, the information of the probability set values (working probability set values) input from the set value change switch 102 is changed to "2", "3", . . . "6". ”, and the first display data is updated each time and transmitted to (digit 0) of the status display device 152 . Therefore, in (digit 0) of the status display device 152, "2", "3", . .

When the setting key switch 93 is turned off (second state), the game microcomputer 111 outputs the address of the 8-bit latch 167a and the character code (for example, , X0000110B: represents “6” and includes dot data (Dp=0)), and transmits the second display data to the driver 150 of the status display device 152 . Therefore, in (digit 0) of the status display device 152, "6" is displayed as the probability setting value after setting change, while the dot is turned off. The display of "6" is maintained, for example, until the game ball wins in the starting prize winning port 36 or the like.

In this way, depending on the presence or absence of dot data (Dp=1) (additional information), the displayed probability setting value is a value during setting change (provisional value) or a value after setting change (determined value). can be easily identified.

Here, the probability setting value and/or the dot during setting change related to the first display data can be displayed blinking. When blinking the dot, for example, the gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a character code (including dot data (Dp=1)) corresponding to the address of the 8-bit latch 167a and the information of the working probability setting value. First display data ( Dp=0) and alternately overwrite the probability setting value display data area, so that the first display data (Dp=1) and the first display data (Dp=0) are alternately transmitted at predetermined time intervals. do it.

Also, in the case of blinking the probability setting value and dot during setting change, for example, the game microcomputer 111 outputs the address of the 8-bit latch 167a and the character code (dot data (Dp = 1)), the address of the 8-bit latch 167a, and the character code "X0010000B" for non-lighting. and are alternately transmitted at predetermined time intervals in the same manner as described above. As a result, the 8-bit latch 167a is alternately overwritten with the first display data (setting value display lighting) and the first display data (non-lighting).

In addition, when the probability setting value is blinked, the lighting of the dot may be omitted. first display data including character code (including dot data (Dp=0)); first display data including address of 8-bit latch 167a; , are alternately transmitted at predetermined time intervals in the same manner as described above.

Note that the present embodiment is characterized in that the first display data and the second display data have different display modes. Therefore, in addition to the presence/absence of dots and the presence/absence of blinking of the set probability value, the intensity of the lighting light may be made different between the first display data and the second display data. Further, when the light-emitting member (LED) of the status display device 152 has a plurality of different emission colors, the first display data and the second display data may be configured to emit light in different colors. .

[Functions and effects of the fourteenth embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game that variably displays identification information based on establishment of a start condition, and the stop result of the variable display game is a special result. If so, a special game state advantageous to the player is generated. The gaming machine 10 includes setting change means (setting change device 42) capable of changing a set value (probability set value) according to game settings, and displays information on the set value by causing a light emitting member (such as an LED) to emit light. a possible display (status display device 152). The setting change means (setting change device 42) includes a switch (setting key switch 93) for shifting to a setting variable state in which the setting value (probability setting value) can be changed, and the switch (setting key switch 93) is , a first state (ON state) that allows transition to the variable setting state, and a second state (OFF state) that terminates the variable setting state. The game control means (game control device 100) generates display data based on the set value (probability set value) and the state of the switch (setting key switch 93) and displays it on the display unit (state display device 152). . The display data includes the first display data (probability set value during setting change) generated when the switch (setting key switch 93) is in the first state, and the switch (setting key switch 93) in the second state. and second display data (probability setting values after setting change) that are generated in the case of .

With the above configuration, it is possible to easily identify whether the displayed set value (probability set value) is determined or undetermined.

Further, the display unit (status display device 152) can display a setting value (probability setting value) and additional information (Dp=1) different from the setting value (probability setting value), and the first display data is , and additional information (Dp=1).

This makes it possible to easily identify whether the set value (probability set value) is fixed or unfixed by the presence or absence of display of additional information (lighting of dots).

Further, the additional information (dot data) is characterized by blinking display. Thereby, the distinguishability of the probability set value during the setting change can be enhanced by blinking the dot.

Further, the set value (probability set value) related to the first display data is characterized by blinking. As a result, it is possible to enhance the identifiability of the probability set value during the setting change by blinking the probability set value.

[First Modification of Fourteenth Embodiment]
FIG. 136 is a schematic diagram showing a first modification of the display mode of the set probability value in the gaming machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment. In the first modification, when displaying the first display data and when displaying the second display data, (digit 1), (digit 2), and (digit 3) of the status display device 152 are also lit. .

That is, the game microcomputer 111 generates the third display data (for example, "P--") indicating that the probability setting value displayed by the first display data is being changed, and sets the probability. The first display data and the third display data are transmitted to the driver 150 of the status display device 152 by storing them in the value display data area (or other display data area).

Further, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates fourth display data (for example, "C--") indicating that the probability set value displayed by the second display data is after setting change, and sets the probability. The second display data and the fourth display data are transmitted to the driver 150 of the status display device 152 by storing them in the value display data area (or other display data area).

The third display data and fourth display data are stored in an area of the ROM 111 b or RAM 111 c that is not initialized by the RAM initialization switch 112 .

The third display data consists of the third display data (digit 1) transmitted to the status display device 152 (digit 1) (display device 900-1) and the status display device 152 (digit 2) (display The third display data (digit 2) transmitted to the device 900-2) and the third display data (digit 3) transmitted to the status display device 152 (digit 3) (display device 900-3) ) and including.

The third display data (digit 1) includes the address of the 8-bit latch 167b (eg, 23H (hexadecimal representation)) and the character code (eg, "X0011010B" (-)).

The third display data (digit 2) includes the address of the 8-bit latch 167c (eg, 24H (hexadecimal notation)) and the character code (eg, "X0011010B" (-)).

The third display data (digit 3) includes the address of the 8-bit latch 167d (eg 25H (hexadecimal representation)) and the character code (eg "X0010100B" (P)).

The fourth display data are the fourth display data (digit 1) transmitted toward (digit 1) of the status display device 152, and the fourth display data (digit 1) transmitted toward (digit 2) of the status display device 152. Data (digit 2) and fourth display data (digit 3) to be sent to status display device 152 (digit 3).

The fourth display data (digit 1) includes the address of the 8-bit latch 167b (eg, 23H (hexadecimal representation)) and the character code (eg, "X0011010B" (-)).

The fourth display data (digit 2) includes the address of the 8-bit latch 167c (eg 24H (hexadecimal notation)) and the character code (eg "X0011010B" (-)).

The fourth display data (digit 3) includes the address of the 8-bit latch 167d (eg 25H (hexadecimal representation)) and the character code (eg "X0001100B" (C)).

As shown in FIG. 136, when the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are turned on and the game machine 10 is powered on, the first display data (probability set value during setting change) is displayed as the state display in the same manner as described above. is displayed in (digit 0) of the device 152, the third display data (digit 1) (-) is displayed in (digit 1) of the status display device 152, and the third display data (digit 2) (- ) is displayed on the status display device 152 (digit 2), and the third display data (digit 3) (P) is displayed on the status display device 152 (digit 3).

Although the dots are lit in FIG. 136, the presence of the third display data makes it possible to identify that the probability setting value displayed in (digit 0) of the status display device 152 is being changed. , the lighting of the dots may be omitted.

As the set value change switch 102 is pushed down, the probability set value (work probability set value) information transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 is updated to "2", "3", . . . "6". Each time, the first display data is updated and displayed in (digit 0) of the status display device 152, but the display of (digit 1), (digit 2) and (digit 3) on the status display device 152 does not change. .

When the setting key switch 93 is turned off, the second display data (digit 0) of the status display device 152 is displayed in the same manner as described above, and the fourth display data (digit 1) (-) indicates the status. is displayed in (digit 1) of device 152, the fourth display data (digit 2) (-) is displayed in (digit 2) of status display device 152, and the fourth display data (digit 3) (C) is It is displayed in (digit 3) of the status display device 152 .

In this way, different characters are displayed depending on whether the setting is being changed (P--) or after the setting has been changed (C--). can be easily identified.

[Actions and effects of the first modification of the fourteenth embodiment]
In the first modification, the display unit (status display device 152) can display a plurality of digits (digit 3, digit 2, digit 1, digit 0). The display data suggests that the setting value (probability setting value) displayed by the first display data is being changed, and the display unit (status display device 152) is different from the first display data. Contains third display data (P--) to be displayed in the digits. As a result, it can be easily identified that the displayed probability setting value is being changed.

In addition, the game control means (game control device 100) transmits the second display data toward the digit (digit 0) where the first display data is displayed, and the display data is transmitted according to the second display data. A fourth display data that indicates that the displayed set value (probability set value) is the one after setting change and is displayed in a different digit from the second display data in the display section (status display device 152). Contains data (C--). As a result, it can be easily identified that the displayed probability setting value is the one after the setting change. Further, since the second display data is displayed in the same digit as the first display data, the change from setting change to after setting change can be identified without changing the viewpoint.

[Second Modification of Fourteenth Embodiment]
FIG. 137 shows a second modification of the display mode of the probability set value in the gaming machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment, which is the display mode of the probability set value at the time of setting change and the display mode of the probability set value at the time of setting confirmation. and are schematic diagrams for comparison.

In the second modification, the RAM initialization switch 112 shown in FIG. 119 and the like is turned off, the setting key switch 93 is turned on, and the power is turned on to enter the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) (see FIG. 120). ). At this time, generation of the first display data and the second display data is prohibited. However, it is possible to easily identify whether the displayed probability set value is being changed or is being checked.

The game microcomputer 111 extracts the character code (including dot data (Dp=0)) corresponding to the probability setting value information stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c. Then, the game microcomputer 111 stores the fifth display data including the character code and the address (for example, 22H (hexadecimal notation)) of the 8-bit latch 167a in the probability setting value display data area. 5 Send a command containing the display data to the driver 150 of the status display device 152 .

When the setting key switch 93 is turned off, for example, the display of the fifth display data is completed, or the display of the fifth display data is maintained until a game ball wins in the starting winning hole 36 or the like. .

As shown in FIG. 137A, the fifth display data is displayed at (digit 0) of the status display device 152 in the same manner as the first display data (display during setting change), but dot data ( 1), the dot does not light up. At this time, even if the set value change switch 102 is pressed, the contents displayed on the status display device 152 do not change.

In addition, the game microcomputer 111 suggests that the probability set value displayed on the state display device 152 by the fifth display data is in the process of setting confirmation (before shifting to the variable setting state). A sixth display data can be generated and sent to the driver 150 of the status display device 152 . The sixth display data is stored, for example, in the ROM 111b or the RAM 111c in an area not initialized by the RAM initialization switch 112, and is stored in the state display device 152 (digit 1), (digit 2) in the same manner as the fourth display data. ), (digit 3). As a result, as shown in FIG. 137(B), the sixth display data can be displayed in the same manner as the fourth display data (C--), but may be displayed differently from the fourth display data. It is possible.

Alternatively, the game microcomputer 111 extracts a character code (including dot data (Dp=0)) corresponding to the probability setting value information stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c. Then, the game microcomputer 111 generates the fifth display data including the character code and the address (for example, 25H (hexadecimal notation)) of the 8-bit latch 167d (or the 8-bit latch 167b, 8-bit latch 167c). Store in the set value display data area. As a result, a command including the fifth display data is sent to the driver 150 of the status display device 152 . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 137(C), the digit (digit 0) displaying the probability setting value during setting change and the digit (digit 3, or digit 1, It is also possible that the digits 2) are different from each other.

[Actions and effects of the second modification of the fourteenth embodiment]
In the second modification, the game control means (game control device 100) includes storage means (RAM111c) in which information of the setting value (probability setting value) before shifting to the setting variable state is stored, and storage means (RAM111c ), memory erasing means (RAM initialization switch 112) for erasing information different from the information of the set value (probability set value). The game control means (game control device 100) enters the first state when the game machine 10 is powered on with the switch (setting key switch 93) in the first state and the memory erasing means (RAM initialization switch 112) in the ON state. 1 display data is generated (setting change mode), the switch (setting key switch 93) is in the first state, and the memory erasing means (RAM initialization switch 112) is turned off, and the game machine 10 is powered on. to prohibit the generation of the first display data and the second display data (setting confirmation mode). The display data is generated on the condition that the generation of the first display data and the second display data is prohibited, and based on the set value (probability set value) information before shifting to the variable setting state. It is characterized by including generated fifth display data.

As a result, the probability set value is displayed in a state in which setting change of the probability set value is prohibited, so that an error of accidentally changing the probability set value by touching the set value change switch 102 can be avoided.

Further, the display unit (state display device 152) is capable of displaying multiple digits, and the game control means (game control device 100) displays the fifth display data on a digit different from the first display data. Thereby, it is possible to easily identify whether the setting is being changed or the setting is being checked, depending on the difference in the display position.

The display unit (status display device 152) can display multiple digits, and the game control means (game control device 100) displays the fifth display data in the same digit as the first display data. The display data suggests that the setting value (probability setting value) displayed by the fifth display data is the one before transitioning to the setting variable state, and the display unit (state display device 152) indicates that the fifth The display data includes sixth display data (C--) displayed in different digits. As a result, it can be easily determined that the displayed probability setting value is being checked.

[Third Modification of Fourteenth Embodiment]
FIG. 138 is a schematic diagram showing a third modification of the display mode of the set probability value in the gaming machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment. In the third modification, during the setting change, the set probability value (provisional value) during the setting change and the set probability value (determined value) before the setting change (before shifting to the variable setting state) are displayed at the same time. After the setting change, the probability set value (determined value) after the setting change and the probability set value (determined value) before the setting change are displayed at the same time.

In this embodiment, the setting variable state is entered by turning on the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 shown in FIG. At this time, the game microcomputer 111 simultaneously generates the first lighting data (same as the first display data) and the second lighting data (same as the fifth display data) shown in FIG. 137(C). . By turning off the setting key switch 93, the game microcomputer 111 generates fourth lighting data (same as the second display data).

In addition, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates first lighting data (digit 0) and second lighting data (digit 3), generates third lighting data, and transmits the data to the driver 150 of the status display device 152. can be used, but it is also possible to omit it.

In the third modified example, instead of the second lighting data (digit 3), the second lighting data (digit 0) is generated, and this data is generated at a different timing (alternating) from the first lighting data (digit 0). ) is displayed on the state display device 152, and only the state display device 152 (digit 0) (other digits may be used) alternately displays the probability setting value during setting change and the probability setting value before setting change. You may do so. Here, the switching cycle between the probability setting value during setting change and the probability setting value before setting change is set to a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 seconds), and the probability setting value during setting change is displayed for a period of time (for example, 1 second). ) and the display time (for example, 1 second) of the probability setting value before the setting change are set to be the same. Further, the display time of one of the probability setting value and the probability setting value before setting change may be lengthened, and the display time of the other may be shortened. Furthermore, it is preferable that the first lighting data include dot data (Dp=1) in order to easily distinguish between the probability setting value during setting change and the probability setting value before setting change.

In the setting change, the third lighting data is the probability that the probability setting value is displayed by the fourth lighting data (first lighting data) from the probability setting value before the setting change that is displayed by the second lighting data. It suggests changing to the set value, and includes third lighting data (digit 1) (middle digit) and third lighting data (digit 2) (middle digit).

The third lighting data (digit 1) includes the address of the 8-bit latch 167b (eg, 23H (hexadecimal notation)) and the character code (eg, "X0011010B" (-)).

The third lighting data (digit 2) includes the address of the 8-bit latch 167c (eg, 24H (hexadecimal representation)) and the character code (eg, "X0011010B" (-)).

As the character code for the third lighting data (digit 1, digit 2), it is also preferable to use "X0011110B" ("T" rotated 90 degrees to the right, imitating a leftward arrow). is.

As shown in FIG. 138, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 turned on, the first lighting data (probability set value during setting change) is displayed on the status display device 152 ( digit 0) and the dot lights up. The third lighting data (digit 1) (-) is displayed in (digit 1) of the status display device 152, and the third lighting data (digit 2) (-) is displayed in (digit 2) of the status display device 152. , and the second lighting data (probability setting value before setting change) is displayed in (digit 3) of the status display device 152 .

As the set value change switch 102 is pushed down, the probability set value information input from the set value change switch 102 is updated to "2", "3", . The data is updated and transmitted to (digit 0) of the status display device 152, but the display of (digit 1), (digit 2) and (digit 3) of the status display device 152 does not change.

Then, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, the fourth lighting data (probability setting value after setting change) is displayed in (digit 0) of the status display device 152 and the dot is extinguished in the same manner as described above. Further, the display of the third lighting data (digit 1), the third lighting data (digit 2), and the second lighting data (digit 3) (probability set value before setting change) is maintained. This display is maintained, for example, until a game ball wins in the start winning hole 36 or the like.

In this way, the probability setting value before the setting change and the probability setting value during (and after) the setting change are displayed at the same time.

[Action and effect of the third modification of the fourteenth embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the third modification includes game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game that variably displays the identification information based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the stop result of the variable display game is a special display. When the result is obtained, a special game state advantageous to the player is generated. The gaming machine 10 includes a setting change means (setting change device 42) capable of changing a setting value (probability setting value) according to settings related to a game, and a setting value (probability setting value) by causing a light-emitting member (such as an LED) to emit light. ), and a display unit (state display device 152) capable of displaying information regarding the The setting change means (setting change device 42) includes a switch (setting key switch 93) for shifting to a setting variable state in which the setting value (probability setting value) can be changed, and the switch (setting key switch 93) is , a first state that allows transition to the variable configuration state, and a second state that terminates the variable configuration state. The game control means (game control device 100) includes a storage means (RAM 111c) in which information of the setting value (probability setting value) before shifting to the setting variable state is stored, and the setting value (probability setting value), And data for lighting can be generated based on the state of the switch (setting key switch 93) and transmitted to the display section (state display device 152). The display unit (status display device 152) can display a plurality of digits, and each digit can be displayed by lighting data. The lighting data includes the first lighting data (probability set value during setting change) generated when the switch (setting key switch 93) is in the first state, and the switch (setting key switch 93) in the first state. is generated based on the set value (probability set value) before transitioning to the setting variable state, and the second lighting data (before the setting change) is displayed in a different digit from the first lighting data. probability setting value), and

As a result, the setting value (probability setting value) during the setting change and the setting value (probability setting value) before the setting change are simultaneously displayed on the display unit (state display device 152), so that the setting value (probability setting value) before the setting change is displayed. The set value (probability set value) can be reliably changed after grasping the set value.

In the third modified example, the display unit (state display device 152) has an intermediate digit ( digit 1, digit 2), and the lighting data includes the third lighting data (--) displayed in the middle digit. Therefore, during the setting change, the probability set value displayed by the second lighting data is set to the probability set value displayed by the fourth lighting data (or the first lighting data) by the third lighting data. You can suggest changes.

In the third modification, the lighting data includes fourth lighting data generated when the switch (setting key switch 93) is in the second state, and the fourth lighting data is the first lighting data. is displayed in the same digit (digit 0) as As a result, the probability set value during setting change and the probability set value after setting change can be visually recognized without changing the viewpoint.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 according to the third modification includes game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game that variably displays the identification information based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the stop result of the variable display game. is a special result, a special game state advantageous to the player is generated. The gaming machine 10 includes a setting change means (setting change device 42) capable of changing a setting value (probability setting value) according to settings related to a game, and a setting value (probability setting value) by causing a light-emitting member (such as an LED) to emit light. ), and a display unit (state display device 152) capable of displaying information regarding the The setting change means (setting change device 42) includes a switch (setting key switch 93) for shifting to a setting variable state in which the setting value (probability setting value) can be changed, and the switch (setting key switch 93) is , a first state that allows transition to the variable configuration state, and a second state that terminates the variable configuration state. The game control means (game control device 100) includes a storage means (RAM 111c) in which information of the setting value (probability setting value) before shifting to the setting variable state is stored, and the setting value (probability setting value), And data for lighting can be generated based on the state of the switch (setting key switch 93) and transmitted to the display section (state display device 152). The display unit (status display device 152) can display data for lighting. The lighting data includes the first lighting data (probability set value during setting change) generated when the switch (setting key switch 93) is in the first state, and the switch (setting key switch 93) in the first state. is generated based on the set value (probability set value) before transition to the setting variable state, and is displayed at a timing different from that of the first lighting data (the second lighting data before the setting change). probability setting value), and

As a result, the setting value (probability setting value) during setting change and the setting value (probability setting value) before setting change are alternately displayed on the display unit (status display device 152), so that the setting value before setting change ( The setting value (probability setting value) can be reliably changed after grasping the probability setting value.

[Fourth Modification of Fourteenth Embodiment]
FIG. 139 is a schematic diagram showing a fourth modification of the display mode of the probability setting values in the gaming machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment. The fourth modification shows the display mode after the setting change shown in FIG. 138. In FIG. 139, the probability setting value (fixed value) will be updated.

In the fourth modification, the fourth lighting data is initially the address of the 8-bit latch 167a and the character code (for example, "X0000110B ' (6)), and is generated by

After a predetermined time has elapsed since the setting key switch 93 was turned off, the game microcomputer 111 generates fourth lighting data from the address of the 8-bit latch 167b (digit 1) and the character code, and displays the probability set value. Store (overwrite) in the data area, further generate lighting data for non-lighting by using the address of the 8-bit latch 167a and the character code "X0010000B" for non-lighting, and store it in the probability setting value display data area. Store (overwrite).

As a result, the second lighting data (digit 3) (probability setting value before setting change), the third lighting data (digit 2), and the fourth lighting data (digit 1) (probability setting value after setting change) , lighting data (digit 0) for non-lighting is sent to the driver 150 of the status display device 152 . Therefore, the 8-bit latch 167b is overwritten with the character code associated with the probability setting value (6) after the setting change, and the 8-bit latch 167a is overwritten with the character code associated with non-lighting.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 139(A), the display of (digit 3) and (digit 2) of the status display device 152 is maintained, while (digit 1) of the status display device 152 shows the probability after the setting change. The set value (6) is displayed, and the (digit 0) of the status display device 152 is extinguished.

After a predetermined period of time, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates fourth lighting data from the address of the 8-bit latch 167c (digit 2) and the character code, stores (overwrites) it in the probability set value display data area, and further , the address of the 8-bit latch 167b and the character code for non-lighting are generated, and stored (overwritten) in the probability set value display data area. As a result, the second lighting data (digit 3) (probability setting value before setting change), the fourth lighting data (digit 2) (probability setting value after setting change), the non-lighting lighting data (digit 1) ), lighting data (digit 0) for non-lighting is transmitted to the driver 150 of the status display device 152 . Therefore, the 8-bit latch 167c is overwritten with a character code related to the probability set value after the setting change, and the 8-bit latch 167b is overwritten with a character code representing non-lighting.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 139(B), while the display of (digit 3) on the status display device 152 is maintained, the probability setting value (6) after the setting change is displayed on the status display device 152 (digit 2). is displayed, and (digit 0) and (digit 1) of the status display device 152 are extinguished.

Further, after a predetermined period of time, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates fourth lighting data from the address of the 8-bit latch 167d (digit 3) and the character code, stores (overwrites) it in the probability set value display data area, Furthermore, lighting data for non-lighting is generated from the address of the 8-bit latch 167c and the character code for non-lighting, and is stored (overwritten) in the probability set value display data area. As a result, the fourth lighting data (digit 3), non-lighting lighting data (digit 2), non-lighting lighting data (digit 1), and non-lighting lighting data (digit 0) are displayed on the status display device 152. is sent to the driver 150 of the Then, the 8-bit latch 167d is overwritten with the character code associated with the probability set value after the setting change, and the 8-bit latch 167c is overwritten with the character code associated with non-lighting.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 139(C), the probability setting value (6) after the setting change is displayed in (digit 3) of the state display device 152, and (digit 0) and (digit 1), (2nd digit) are extinguished.

In the fourth modification, when the display of FIG. 139(C) is displayed, the working probability setting value stored in the probability setting value display data area is stored in the probability setting value area as the probability setting value after setting change. (Overwrite. Alternatively, even at the stage before the display of FIG. 139(C), for example, by winning a game ball in the starting winning hole 36, etc., the working probability setting value stored in the probability setting value display data area is set. It is stored (overwritten) in the probability setting value area as the probability setting value after change.

[Actions and effects of the fourth modification of the fourteenth embodiment]
In the fourth modification, the lighting data includes fourth lighting data generated when the switch (setting key switch 93) is in the second state, and the game control means (game control device 100) controls the 4 Move the lighting data in the order of the digit (digit 0) displaying the first lighting data, the middle digit (digit 1), the middle digit (digit 2), and the digit (digit 3) displaying the second lighting data. It is transmitted to the display section (status display device 152) so as to do so.

Accordingly, it is possible to visually understand that the setting change updates (overwrites) the probability setting value from the probability setting value before the setting change to the probability setting value after the setting change.

[Fifth Modification of Fourteenth Embodiment]
FIG. 140 is a schematic diagram showing a fifth modification of the display mode of the set probability value in the gaming machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment. Similar to the fourth modification, the fifth modification represents the display mode after the setting change shown in FIG. 138. In FIG. The display indicates that the set value (determined value) has been updated.

In the fifth modified example, the game microcomputer 111 generates fifth lighting data (AFt) indicating that the probability setting value displayed by the fourth lighting data is the probability setting value after setting change.

The fifth lighting data includes fifth lighting data (digit 3), fifth lighting data (digit 2), and fifth lighting data (digit 1). It is stored in an area that is not initialized by the initialization switch 112 .

The fifth lighting data (digit 3) includes, for example, the address of the 8-bit latch 167d and the character code (“X0001010B” (A)).

The fifth lighting data (digit 2) includes, for example, the address of the 8-bit latch 167c and the character code (“X0001111B” (F)).

The fifth lighting data (digit 1) includes, for example, the address of the 8-bit latch 167b and the character code (“X0011100B” (t)). Note that unlike FIG. 72, the character code "X0011100B" corresponds to the character "t".

When the setting key switch 93 is turned off (second state), the gaming microcomputer 111 sets the address of the 8-bit latch 167a and the character code (for example, "X0000001B" (1)) generates the sixth lighting data representing the probability setting value before the setting change.

In addition, the game microcomputer 111 uses (digit 3), (digit 2), and (digit 1) of the state display device 152 to determine that the probability setting value displayed by the sixth lighting data is the value before the setting change. The seventh lighting data (bEf) suggesting that is generated.

The seventh lighting data includes seventh lighting data (digit 3), seventh lighting data (digit 2), and seventh lighting data (digit 1). It is stored in an area that is not initialized by the initialization switch 112 .

The seventh lighting data (digit 3) includes, for example, the address of the 8-bit latch 167d and the character code (“X0001011B” (b)).

The seventh lighting data (digit 2) includes, for example, the address of the 8-bit latch 167c and the character code (“X0001110B” (E)).

The seventh lighting data (digit 1) includes, for example, the address of the 8-bit latch 167b and the character code (“X0001111B” (F)).

After turning off the setting key switch 93 (second state), the game microcomputer 111 inputs the address of the 8-bit latch 167a (digit 0) and the character corresponding to the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area. The sixth lighting data (digit 0) is generated by a code (for example, "X0000110B" (1)) and stored (overwritten) in the probability setting value display data area, and the address of the 8-bit latch 167b (digit 1) and the character The seventh lighting data (digit 1) is generated by a code (for example, "X0001111B" (F)) and stored (overwritten) in the probability setting value display data area (other display data areas may be used).

In addition, the game microcomputer 111 generates the seventh lighting data (digit 2) from the address of the 8-bit latch 167c (digit 2) and the character code (for example, "X0001110B" (E)) to generate probability set value display data. Store (overwrite) in an area (other display data areas may be used), and use the address of the 8-bit latch 167d (digit 3) and the character code (for example, "X0001011B" (b)) to store (overwrite) the seventh lighting data (digit 3). is generated and stored (overwritten) in the probability setting value display data area (other display data areas may be used). As a result, the sixth lighting data (digit 0) and the seventh lighting data (digit 1, digit 2, digit 3) are transmitted to the driver 150 of the status display device 152 .

As a result, the 8-bit latch 167a is overwritten with the character code "X0000001B" (1) associated with the sixth lighting data (digit 0), and the 8-bit latch 167b is overwritten with the character code "X0000001B" (1) associated with the seventh lighting data (digit 1). The character code "X0001111B" (F) is overwritten, the 8-bit latch 167c is overwritten with the character code "X0001110B" (E) for the seventh lighting data (digit 2), and the 8-bit latch 167d is overwritten with the seventh lighting. The character code "X0001011B" (b) associated with the data (digit 3) is overwritten.

Therefore, after the setting key switch 93 is turned off (second state), "bEF1" (Before 1) is displayed on the state display device 152 as shown in FIG. is "1". Further, in the fifth modification, it may be configured to display "1bEF" (1Before).

After that, the game microcomputer 111 uses the address of the 8-bit latch 167a (digit 0) and the character code (for example, "X0000110B" (6)) related to the working probability setting value stored in the working probability setting value area. 4 The lighting data (digit 0) is generated and stored (overwritten) in the probability setting value display data area, and the address of the 8-bit latch 167b (digit 1) and the character code ("X0011100B" (t)) are used to generate the fifth data. Lighting data (digit 1) is generated and stored (overwritten) in the probability setting value display data area (other display data areas may be used).

In addition, the game microcomputer 111 generates the fifth lighting data (digit 2) from the address of the 8-bit latch 167c (digit 2) and the character code (for example, "X0001111B" (F)) to generate probability set value display data. Store (overwrite) in an area (other display data area may be used), and use the address of the 8-bit latch 167d (digit 3) and the character code (for example, "X0001010B" (A)) to set the fifth lighting data (digit 3). is generated and stored (overwritten) in the probability setting value display data area (other display data areas may be used).

As a result, the fourth lighting data (digit 0) and the fifth lighting data (digit 1, digit 2, digit 3) are sent to the driver 150 of the status display device 152 . The 8-bit latch 167a is overwritten with the character code "X0000110B" (6) associated with the fourth lighting data (digit 0), and the 8-bit latch 167b is overwritten with the character code "X0000110B" (6) associated with the fifth lighting data (digit 1). The code ("X0011100B" (t)) is overwritten, the 8-bit latch 167c is overwritten with the character code "X00011111B" (F) relating to the fifth lighting data, and the 8-bit latch 167d is overwritten with the fifth lighting data. The character code "X0001010B" (A) is overwritten.

As a result, after FIG. 140(A), as shown in FIG. 140(B), "AFt6" (After6) is displayed on the state display device 152, and the probability setting value after the setting change is "6". can recognize that Further, in the fifth modification, it may be configured to display "6AFt" (6After). In particular, by displaying the probability setting value before the setting change and the probability setting value after the setting change in the same digit (digits other than digit 0 may be used), the probability setting value before the setting change and the probability setting value after the setting change can be displayed. Setting values can be easily identified.

In the fifth modification, when the display of FIG. 140B is displayed, the working probability setting value stored in the probability setting value display data area is stored in the probability setting value area as the probability setting value after setting change. (Overwrite. Alternatively, even at the stage before the display of FIG. 140(B), for example, by winning a game ball in the start winning opening 36 or the like, the working probability setting value stored in the probability setting value display data area is set. It is stored (overwritten) in the probability setting value area as the probability setting value after change.

[Functions and Effects of the Fifth Modification of the Fourteenth Embodiment]
In the fifth modified example, the lighting data indicates that the set value (probability set value) displayed by the fourth lighting data is the one after the setting change, and is in a different digit from the fourth lighting data. It includes the fifth lighting data (AFt) to be displayed. Further, the lighting data is the sixth lighting data generated based on the set value (probability set value) before the switch (setting key switch 93) shifts to the variable setting state when the switch (setting key switch 93) is in the second state. including. Further, the lighting data suggests that the set value (probability set value) displayed by the sixth lighting data is the one before the transition to the setting variable state (before the setting is changed), and the sixth lighting data It contains the seventh lighting data (bEF) displayed in a digit different from the . Game control means (game control device 100), when the switch (setting key switch 93) is in the second state, the sixth lighting data (probability setting value before setting change) and the seventh lighting data (bEF) is output, and after a lapse of a predetermined time, the fourth lighting data (probability set value after setting change) and the fifth lighting data (AFt) are output.

As a result, the probability setting value before the setting change and the probability setting value after the setting change are displayed with a time difference along with a display suggesting them, so the probability setting value before the setting change and the probability setting value after the setting change can be easily determined. can be identified.

Further, the fourth lighting data and the sixth lighting data are characterized by being displayed in the same digit (digit 0). Accordingly, the probability setting value before setting change and the probability setting value after setting change can be easily identified without moving the line of sight.

[15th embodiment]
The fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 to 151. FIG. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to fourteenth embodiments. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to fourteenth embodiments, and overlapping descriptions are omitted as appropriate. The fifteenth embodiment relates to the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game.

[Variation pattern setting process]
With reference to Figure 141, the details of the variation pattern setting process (A3406, A3506) in the above-described special figure 1 variation start process (Figure 18) and special figure 2 variation start process (Figure 19) will be described. FIG. 141 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the variation pattern setting process according to the fifteenth embodiment executed by the game control device 100. FIG.

First, the game control device 100 sets a variation group table (distribution table, variation pattern group) based on the information (here, variation pattern group number) drawn and determined at the end of the jackpot by the jackpot end processing described later. (A4301). Specifically, the corresponding variation group table is set according to the variation pattern group number. The variation pattern group number functions as a parameter (index value, intermediate value) that is associated with the variation group table and defines the variation group table. In addition to the variation pattern group number, the variation group table is based on the current gaming state (probability variation state, normal state, etc.), and the result of the special figure variation display game to be started (loss, small hit, big hit). is set.

Then, a random number is loaded from the target fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (for reserved number 1) and prepared (A4302). Then, 2-byte allocation processing is executed (A4303), the address of the variation selection table (variation pattern selection table) obtained as a result of allocation is obtained, and the variation selection table is prepared (A4304).

Next, the game control device 100 loads a random number from the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for reserved number 1) and prepares (A4305). Then, the allocation process is executed (A4306), the variation number obtained as a result of the allocation is acquired, and saved in the variation number area (A4307).

[2-byte distribution processing]
Next, the details of the 2-byte allocation process (A4303) in the variation pattern setting process will be described. FIG. 142A is a flow chart showing the procedure of 2-byte allocation processing. The 2-byte allocation process is a process for selecting a variation selection table for the special figure variation display game from the variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

The game control device 100 first checks whether the head data of the selection table (variation group table prepared in A4301) is a code without sorting (that is, "0") (A4401). Here, the variation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one variation selection table, but the variation group table defines only the variation selection table whose variation pattern is "no reach" (for example, , and a part of the fluctuation group table when the result is a loss), since there is no need for sorting, a sorting value "0", that is, a code for no sorting is defined at the top.

Then, if the head data of the selection table (fluctuation group table) is a code without sorting (the result of A4402 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the address of the data corresponding to the sorting result. (A4407) to end the 2-byte allocation process. On the other hand, if the top data in the selection table (variation group table) is not a code without sorting (the result of A4402 is "N"), one sorting value specified first in the selection table (variation group table) is used. Acquire (A4403).

Subsequently, a new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value obtained in step A4403 from the random value prepared in step A4302 (value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) (A4404), and the calculated new random value is smaller than "0" (A4405). If the new random number is not smaller than "0" (the result of A4405 is "N"), the address of the next distribution value is updated (A4406), and then the process proceeds to step A4403. The following processing is performed. That is, the distribution value specified next in the selection table (fluctuation group table) is acquired (A4403), and then a new random value is obtained by subtracting the distribution value from the random value determined in the previous step A4405. is calculated (A4404), and it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4405).

The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A4405 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4405 is "Y"). As a result, any one variation selection table (variation pattern selection table) is selected from at least one variation selection table defined in the selection tables (variation group tables). Then, if it is determined in step A4405 that the new random number is smaller than "0" (the result of A4405 is "Y"), the data address corresponding to the sorted result is updated (A4407), and 2 bytes End the sorting process.

[Distribution process]
Next, the details of the sorting process (A4306) in the variation pattern setting process will be described. FIG. 142B is a flowchart showing the procedure of sorting processing. The distribution process is a process for selecting the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the variation selection table (variation pattern selection table) based on the variation pattern random number 2.

The game control device 100 first checks whether the data at the top of the target selection table (variation selection table prepared in step A4304) is a code without sorting (that is, "0") (A4501). Here, the variation selection table stores a predetermined allocation value in association with at least one variation pattern (variation number). A code without sorting is specified at the top.

Then, if the head data of the target selection table (fluctuation selection table) is a code without sorting (the result of A4502 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the address of the data corresponding to the sorting result. (A4507), and the sorting process ends. On the other hand, if the data at the top of the target selection table (variation selection table) is not a code without sorting (the result of A4502 is "N"), the first specified in the target selection table (variation selection table) A distribution value is acquired (A4503).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 calculates a new random number value by subtracting the sorting value acquired in step A4503 from the random number value (variation pattern random number 2 value) prepared in step A4305 (A4504). It is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4505). If the new random number is not smaller than "0" (the result of A4505 is "N"), the address of the next sorting value is updated (A4506), and then the process proceeds to step A4503. The following processing is performed.

That is, the distribution value specified next in the target selection table (fluctuation selection table) is acquired (A4503), and then a new distribution value is subtracted from the random number determined in the previous step A4505. A random number value is calculated (A4504), and it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4505). The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A4505 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4505 is "Y"). As a result, any one variation pattern (variation number) is selected from at least one variation pattern (variation number) defined in the target selection table (variation selection table).

Then, when the game control device 100 determines in step A4505 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4505 is "Y"), it updates the address of the data corresponding to the sorted result. (A4507), the sorting process ends.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 143, the details of the fluctuation start information setting process (A3407, A3507) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (FIG. 18) and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (FIG. 19) described above will be described. FIG. 143 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the variation start information setting process according to the fifteenth embodiment executed by the game control device 100. FIG.

The game control device 100 first clears the random number storage area for the target variation pattern random numbers 1 and 2 (A4601). Next, a variable time value table is set (A4602), and a variable time value corresponding to the variable number is obtained (A4603).

Then, the game control device 100 saves the variable time value in the special figure game processing timer area (A4604). Thereafter, a variation command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variation number is prepared as an effect command (A4605), and effect command setting processing is performed (A4606). Next, the special figure reservation number corresponding to the fluctuation pattern discrimination flag is updated by -1 (A4607), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the fluctuation pattern discrimination flag is set (A4608). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (A4609), the free area after the shift is cleared (A4610), and the fluctuation start information setting process ends.

Information about the start of the special figure variation display game is set by the above processing. That is, the game control device 100 serves as determination means for determining various random numbers stored in the start storage means (game control device 100). Also, the game control device 100 serves as variation pattern determination means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information in the start memory.

Then, the information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games is later transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 receives the information on the start of the special figure fluctuation display game, and responds to the determined fluctuation pattern. Set the detailed production contents in the decoration special figure fluctuation display game. Information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games includes a decoration special figure reservation number command including information on the number of starting memories (number of reservations), a decoration special figure command including information on the stop pattern, and a variation of the special figure fluctuation display game A variation command containing information about a pattern and a stop information command containing information about extension of stop time are mentioned, and a command is transmitted to production control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command earlier than the variation command, the processing in the production control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Jackpot end processing]
Details of the jackpot end processing (A2614) in the above-described special game processing (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot ending process according to the fifteenth embodiment executed by the game control device 100. FIG.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the probability variation determination data is high probability data (A6201). In addition, in this embodiment, in step A4008 of the special figure 1 stop design setting process (Fig. 25) and step A4108 of the special figure 2 stop design setting process (Fig. 26), the probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to the stop design number is set. shall be The probability variation determination data becomes high probability data when the stop pattern number of the probability variable big hit becomes the variable probability state after the end of the big win, and becomes low probability data when it is the stop pattern number of the normal big win which becomes the time saving state after the end of the big win. .

If the game control device 100 is not high probability data (the result of A6201 is "N"), it executes the jackpot end setting process 1 (A6202), and if it is high probability data (the result of A6201 is "Y") , Big hit end setting processing 2 is executed (A6203).

In the jackpot end setting process 1, in order to set the time saving state (low probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game) after the jackpot end, the general figure high probability flag is saved in the general figure game mode flag area, and the special figure game mode flag Save the special figure low probability & time saving flag in the area. In addition, in the jackpot end setting process 1, the initial value of the time reduction variation frequency is saved in the time reduction variation frequency area.

In the jackpot end setting process 2, in order to set the probability variable state (high probability state of the special pattern variation display game) after the jackpot end, the general pattern high probability flag is saved in the general pattern game mode flag area, and the special pattern game mode flag Save the special figure high probability & time saving flag in the area.

In addition, in the present embodiment, after the end of the jackpot, the general electric support (time saving) occurs (see FIG. 146), so the latent probability variable state without the general electric support is not generated in the jackpot end setting process 2. However, in the case of generating a latent probability variable state, in the jackpot end setting process 2, the general pattern low probability flag is saved in the general pattern game mode flag area, and the special pattern high probability & no time reduction in the special pattern game mode flag area save flags.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the effect mode information address table (A6204), and acquires the address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information set in the stop symbol setting process (particularly A4009 and A4109) at the start of variation. Then (A6205), the effect mode number (number of effect mode) of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state (jackpot state) is acquired and saved (A6206).

Next, the game control device 100 acquires and saves the number of rotations remaining in the effect mode (initial value) set after the end of the special game state (A6207), and the effect mode set after the end of the special game state. Next mode transition information is acquired and saved (A6208).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a probability information command corresponding to the newly set production mode number (A6209), saves the prepared probability information command in the power failure restoration transmission command area as a production command ( A6210), effect command setting processing is executed (A6211).

Here, the probability information command includes the probability state after the end of the special game state (jackpot state), the presence or absence of time saving (general electric support), and the information of the production mode. As the probability information command, there are a plurality of commands including "high probability/time saving", "low probability/time saving", and "high probability/no time saving", and information of production mode.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares an effect rotation number command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation number as an effect command (A6212), and executes an effect command setting process (A6213). Then, a time reduction variation count command corresponding to the time reduction variation count is prepared as an effect command (A6214), and effect command setting processing is executed (A6215).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is a reduction in working hours (general electric support) after the end of the jackpot (A6216). If there is time saving (common electricity support) (the result of A6216 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A6219. If there is no time saving (public electric support) (the result of A6216 is "N"), prepare the left-handed instruction notification command as an effect command (A6217), execute the effect command setting process (A6218), and go to the process of step A6219 Transition.

Next, the game control device 100 sets "0" as the processing number relating to the special figure normal processing (A6219), and saves the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (A6220).

After that, the game control device 100 saves signals related to the end of the jackpot (for example, turn off the jackpot 1 signal, turn off the jackpot 3 signal, turn off the jackpot 4 signal) in the external information output data area (A6221). Signals related to the end (for example, condition device operating signal OFF, character continuous operating device operating signal OFF, special symbol 1 win signal OFF, special symbol 2 win signal OFF) are saved in the test signal output data area. (A6222).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 clears the information in the time reduction determination flag area (A6223), clears the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the big hit (A6224), and clears the information in the production mode transition information area. Clear the information (A6225). Then, the information in the special game mode flag saving area is cleared (A6226), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A6227).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the specific game state is entered after the jackpot ends (A6228). In this embodiment, the specific game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), but may include a time saving state or a normal electric support state. In addition, in the jackpot end setting processes 1 and 2, as the specific game state after the jackpot state ends, a time saving state (with general electricity support) or a variable state (with general electricity support) is set (see FIG. 146). When the big win is a variable probability big win, the state is changed to a variable probability state after the state of the big win is ended, and when the big win is a normal big win, it is changed to a time-saving state.

The game control device 100 normally sets the variation pattern group number (variation group table number) corresponding to the variation pattern group when the specific game state is not reached after the end of the jackpot (the result of A6228 is "N") (A6229). . In the normal setting, the variation distribution information is derived based on the production mode information, the stop pattern pattern, etc., the address of the variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information is obtained, and the variation group table number is set (described later 163 and 164).

The game control device 100 draws and sets the variation pattern group number corresponding to the variation pattern group (variation group table) according to the setting value when the specific game state is entered after the end of the jackpot (the result of A6228 is "Y"). (A6230). The variation pattern group number is a parameter that defines the variation pattern group. Here, the numbers (variation pattern group numbers) of the variation group tables A to E are set by lottery with the selection rate corresponding to the set value as defined in the selection rate table (see FIG. 147). It should be noted that the processing of step A6230 may be shifted to in consideration of conditions other than the specific game state after the end of the special game state.

In this way, in the case of a specific game state (the result of A6228 is "Y"), setting the variable group table number in a different manner (mode) from the normal setting is due to the general electric support of the specific game state, " This corresponds to the occurrence of a "small hit RUSH" (small hit rush). Therefore, when the latent probability variable state without general electric support occurs after the end of the jackpot state, the latent probability variable state may not be included in the specific game state in the determination of step A6228. In addition, as shown in FIG. 145 (described later), in the present embodiment, a small hit occurs only in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, and a small hit occurs with a high probability every time the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. Small hit RUSH” occurs. Also, if a small hit occurs only in the special figure 1 variation display game instead of the special figure 2 variation display game as in the first embodiment, when the normal game state is entered after the big win state ends, the normal setting and the It is also possible to configure the variable group table numbers to be set by different methods (modes).

In each variation group table A to E, a distribution value (ratio of distributing variation patterns) of the variation selection table (variation pattern selection table) is defined (see FIG. 148). Therefore, the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game executed in the specific game state after the end of the special game state is determined by lottery according to the set value. Therefore, apart from the jackpot probability, it is possible to flexibly adjust the increasing speed of the number of game balls acquired by the player through a variable pattern (that is, a variable time value) drawn according to the set value. The increasing speed of the number of acquired balls (ball output speed) is the number of acquired game balls that the player can acquire per unit time.

After that, the game control device 100 ends the jackpot ending process.

[Big hit probability and small hit probability]
Figure 145 illustrates the big hit probability and the small hit probability of the special figure variation display game determined as a result of the big hit determination process (Fig. 22) and the small hit determination process (Fig. 23) for each setting (each set value) It is a table that

In addition, in this embodiment, as in the eleventh embodiment, a small hit occurs as a result of the special figure 2 variation display game, and does not occur as a result of the special figure 1 variation display game (small hit in the special figure 1 variation display game The hit probability is 0 at each setting). The big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process are also the same as in the eleventh embodiment (FIGS. 104C and 104D).

In the fifteenth embodiment, the jackpot probability, which is the probability that a jackpot will occur, increases in the order of setting 1<setting 2<setting 3<setting 4<setting 5<setting 6. FIG. Therefore, the expected value of the number of winning balls (total number of balls and winning balls) obtained by the big hit per unit time increases in the order of setting 1<setting 2<setting 3<setting 4<setting 5<setting 6, Increases the speed at which the number of acquired balls increases.

On the other hand, in the fifteenth embodiment, the small-hit probability, which is the probability of occurrence of a small-hit, is constant regardless of the set value. Further, as shown in the small hit determination process (FIG. 23), there is no distinction between the low probability state and the high probability state in the small hit probability. In addition, it is also possible to provide a slight setting difference in the small-hit probability and change the small-hit probability slightly according to the set value. The probability of a small hit is set higher than normal (about the probability of a big hit). 60%) will generate a "small hit RUSH" (small hit rush).

[Example of special jackpot pattern distribution]
FIG. 146 is a table exemplifying the jackpot pattern distribution (jackpot breakdown) of the special figure variation display game for each setting.

In the fifteenth embodiment, the distribution rate of the jackpot pattern numbers (jackpot types, patterns 1 to 5) is constant regardless of the set value, and the probability variable entry rate is also constant regardless of the set value. In addition, the special figure 2 variation display game is more likely to generate a big hit of 16R than the special figure 1 variation display game, which is advantageous for the player.

[Selection rate of fluctuation group table]
FIG. 147 is a selection rate table (distribution table) that defines the selection rate (percentage, distribution rate) of the numbers (variation pattern group numbers) of the variation group tables A to E selected by lottery in step A6230. As described above, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern group number is selected according to the set value when the special game state is entered after the big hit is completed (A6230 in FIG. 141). In this way, a variation group table (distribution table) that defines the ratio of distributing the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game executed after the special game state is drawn with a probability (selection rate) according to the set value. .

Regarding the variation patterns of the variation group tables A to E, the expected value of variation time decreases in the order of A>B>C>D>E. That is, the average variation time (average variation time) of the special figure variation display game decreases in the order of A>B>C>D>E for the selected variation group tables A to E. The average change time is the longest when the change group table A is selected and the shortest when the change group table E is selected.

Thus, the average variation time (expected value of variation time) of the special figure variation display game to be executed differs for each selected variation group table (distribution table). In the selection rate table of FIG. 147, the lower the set value, the easier it is for the variation group table E with the smaller expected value of the variation time to be selected, and the variation group table B with the relatively large expected value of the variation time is selected. become difficult to be Therefore, the lower the setting, the smaller the average variation time (expected value of variation time) of the special figure variation display game during operation of the gaming machine 10 .

In this way, the lower the setting value, the lower the average fluctuation time (expected value of fluctuation time) of the special figure fluctuation display game, so even if the small hit probability is constant, during the specific game state (here, the probability change The expected value of the number of winning balls (total number of balls and prize balls) obtained by "small hit RUSH" in unit time of state) is set 6 < setting 5 < setting 4 < setting 3 < setting 2 < setting 1 It increases in order, and the rate of increase in the number of acquired balls becomes higher as the setting is lower. In addition, the lower the setting, the shorter the average fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game during the specific game state, so the hold is digested faster, and the increase speed of the number of acquired balls obtained by "small hit RUSH". increases, even if the hold reaches the upper limit and the normal variable winning device 37 (second start winning opening) wins, the number of shot balls that do not start the special figure variable display game will decrease. In this way, the lower the setting of the small win, the more advantageous the player. Therefore, the higher the setting of the big win, the more advantageous the player becomes. be.

[Example of variation group table and variation selection table]
FIGS. 148 and 149 illustrate fluctuation group tables A to E and fluctuation selection tables for non-reach systems that can be selected from the fluctuation group tables. In addition, FIG. 148 is an example in which the special figure variation display game is lost in the probability variation state, and FIG. 149 is an example in which the special figure variation display game is a small hit in the probability variation state. 148 and 149, in step A4301 of the variation pattern setting process, in addition to the variation pattern group number, the current game state and the special figure variation display game to be started It is set based on the results of (loss, small hit, big hit).

In FIGS. 148A to 148E, each variation group table A to E constitutes a variation pattern group consisting of variation patterns of no reach system, normal reach system, and SP1 reach system. As a result of the 2-byte allocation processing (A4303) by the set fluctuation group tables A to E, fluctuation selection tables (variation pattern selection tables) of no reach system, normal reach system, and SP1 reach system are selected at a predetermined ratio. Furthermore, as a result of the sorting process (A4306) using the selected variation selection table, variation numbers (variation pattern numbers) are selected at a predetermined rate. In addition, in FIG. 148, in order to simplify the explanation, an example in which one variation number is selected at a rate of 100% by the variation selection table is shown for the reachless system, but as shown in FIG. 148A (another example) Alternatively, a plurality of variation numbers may be selected in a predetermined ratio by the variation selection table.

As shown in FIG. 148A-E, the expected value of the fluctuation time when the fluctuation selection table for each of the no-reach system, normal reach system, and SP1 reach system is selected is increased in the order of no reach system < normal reach system < SP1 reach system is set to For example, the expected value of the fluctuation time may be set to 7 seconds for the non-reach system, 15 seconds for the normal reach system, and 30 seconds for the SP1 reach system.

The ratio of selection of the non-reach variation selection table increases in the order of variation group table A < variation group table B < variation group table C ≤ variation group table D, E (D ', E '), normal reach system or The rate of selection of the SP1 reach type variation selection table decreases in the order of variation group table A > variation group table B > variation group table C > variation group table D, E (D', E'). Furthermore, the expected value (average value) of the fluctuation time when the fluctuation selection table of the same reach system (no reach system, normal reach system, or SP1 reach system) is selected is, fluctuation group table A > fluctuation group The table B>variation group table C>variation group table D (including D')>variation group table E (including E') is set so as to decrease in this order. Therefore, the expected value (average value) of the fluctuation time decreases in the order of fluctuation group table A> fluctuation group table B> fluctuation group table C> fluctuation group table D> fluctuation group table E, and a special figure fluctuation display game becomes a short fluctuation.

It should be noted that the variation group tables D and E and the variation selection table accompanying them are the variation pattern group when the number of executions of the special figure variation display game after the end of the jackpot state exceeds a predetermined number of times n (here, 100 times). By switching the numbers (parameters), the variation group tables D' and E' and the variation selection tables associated therewith are switched. That is, these are switched according to the number of executions of the special figure variation display game after the end of the big hit state. In addition, for example, when the variation pattern group numbers corresponding to the variation group tables D' and E' are set to numbers 6 and 7, and the number of executions of the special figure variation display game exceeds a predetermined number of times n (here, 100 times) , change the variation pattern group numbers from numbers 4 and 5 to numbers 6 and 7. In addition, in the fluctuation group table E', the expected value of the fluctuation time is much shorter than in the fluctuation group table D'.

In this way, the expected value of the fluctuation time is normal length (for example, the same as the fluctuation group table C) when the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game after the end of the big hit is 1 to n times (here, 100 times). However, if the number of executions of the special figure variation display game after the end of the big hit is n+1 times (here, 101 times) or more, the expected value of the variation time becomes short. Therefore, when the special game state (big hit state) does not easily occur (so-called addictive state) continues exceeding a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times), the increasing speed of the number of obtained balls is increased to provide a privilege to the player. can be given, and the amusement of the game is improved. In addition, in the specific gaming state (probability variable state, time saving state, general electric support state) where the influence of the variable time on the increasing speed of the number of acquired balls is large, the number of executions of the special figure variable display game after the big hit is a predetermined number (here 100 times), the expected value of the fluctuation time can be shortened, and the increase speed of the number of acquired balls can be remarkably improved.

In this way, when a specific game state (probability variable state here) in which the special game state is more likely to occur after the special game state than in the normal state occurs, the execution of the special figure variation display game executed after the special game state. By changing the parameter (variation pattern group number) corresponding to the variation group table (distribution table) according to the number of times, the variation group table (distribution table) is switched. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to estimate the set value from the variation pattern.

The expected value (average value) of the variation time when the same reach system variation selection table is selected is the variation group table A (7.0 seconds) only for the non-reach variation selection table shown in FIG. > Fluctuation group table B (5.0 seconds) > Fluctuation group table C (3.0 seconds) > Fluctuation group table D (3.0 seconds to 2.0 seconds) > Fluctuation group table E (3.0 seconds to 0 0.5 seconds), so that there is no change in the normal reach system or the SP1 reach system.

FIG. 149 is similar to FIG. 148, but when the special figure variation display game is a small hit in the probability variation state, the variation selection tables that can be selected from the variation group tables A to E are only the no reach system and the normal reach system. It has become. In addition, the fluctuation time value of the fluctuation of the reachless system defined in the fluctuation selection table of the reachless system is different from that in FIG. In addition, although the fluctuation time value of the fluctuation of the reachless system is shorter in FIG. 149 than in FIG. 148, it may be longer. Since the small hit probability in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is higher than the probability of losing, if the fluctuation time value when the small hit occurs is shorter than the case of losing, the speed of pending digestion in "small hit RUSH" As it speeds up, the speed at which the number of balls acquired increases.

In addition, in the probability variation state, when the special figure variation display game becomes a small hit or when it is not, the contents of the variation group tables A to E and the variation selection table may be the same to reduce the data capacity of the table.

[Modification of 15th Embodiment]
A modification of the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 150 and 151. FIG. This modification relates to lottery and setting of the variation group table (variation pattern group).

With reference to FIG. 150, the jackpot end processing (A2614) in the special game processing (FIG. 12) according to the modification will be described. FIG. 150 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the jackpot ending process according to the modification of the fifteenth embodiment. It should be noted that the same step numbers are attached to the same processing as in FIG. 144, and the description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the time reduction determination data is time reduction operation data (A7201). In addition, in step A4008 of the special figure 1 stop design setting process (FIG. 25) and step A4108 of the special figure 2 stop design setting process (FIG. 26), the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop design number is set. When there is a general electric support after the end of the big win, the time reduction determination data becomes the time reduction operation data, and when there is no general electric support after the end of the big win, the time reduction judgment data is not the time reduction operation data.

First, if the game control device 100 is not the time saving operation data (the result of A7201 is "N"), it executes the jackpot end setting process 3 (A7202), and if it is the time saving operation data (the result of A7201 is "Y" ) executes jackpot end setting processing 4 (A7203).

In the jackpot end setting process 3, in order to make the latent probability variable state after the jackpot ends, save the general pattern low probability flag in the general pattern game mode flag area, and the special pattern high probability & no time saving flag in the special pattern game mode flag area save the In addition, in the jackpot end setting process 3, the initial value of the high probability fluctuation frequency is saved in the high probability fluctuation frequency region. In addition, in this modification, since it is the structure which the electric power support always occurs after the end of the big win, the big win end setting process 3 is not executed and the latent probability variable state does not occur. However, it is not limited to this, and a configuration is also possible in which a latent probability variable state is generated after the end of a big hit.

In the jackpot end setting process 4, in order to set the probability variable state (not the latent probability variable state) after the jackpot ends, the general pattern high probability flag is saved in the general pattern game mode flag area, and the special pattern high probability flag is stored in the special pattern game mode flag area. Save the probability & time saving flag. In addition, in the jackpot end setting process 4, the initial value of the number of high-probability fluctuations is saved in the high-probability fluctuation number area.

In addition, after step A6213, the game control device 100 prepares a high-probability variation count command corresponding to the high-probability variation count as an effect command (A7214), and executes effect command setting processing (A6215).

Then, when the game control device 100 becomes a specific game state (probability variable state here) after the end of the big hit (the result of A6228 is "Y"), the variation pattern group number (and thus the variation group table) is changed according to the set value. It is set corresponding to the jackpot pattern drawn with a certain probability (A7230). In addition, in this modification, it is configured to be in a specific game state (here, variable probability state) after the end of the big hit.

In this way, the jackpot pattern (jackpot stop pattern) is a parameter (index value, mediation value) associated with the fluctuation group table in order to define the fluctuation group table (distribution table). In step A4004 of the 1 stop symbol setting process (FIG. 25) and step A4104 of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (FIG. 26), lottery is made according to the setting value as the big hit stop symbol number.

FIG. 151 is a jackpot symbol table that exemplifies the jackpot symbol distribution (jackpot breakdown) of the special symbol variation display game for each setting in the modified example of the fifteenth embodiment. As in FIG. 27, this jackpot symbol table defines jackpot symbols A to E (each corresponding to a jackpot stop symbol number) indicating the types of jackpots and their allocation ratios (selection rates). In this embodiment, all types of jackpots are variable probability jackpots, and the gaming machine 10 is an ST machine with a predetermined number of times (for example, 300 times) of high-probability fluctuations.

Numbers (fluctuation pattern group numbers) of the fluctuation group tables A to E are set corresponding to the jackpot patterns A to E drawn (distributed) based on the distribution rate (selection rate) of the jackpot pattern table, respectively. (A7230).

Regarding the variation patterns of the variation group tables A to E, the expected value of variation time decreases in the order of A>B>C>D>E. In the jackpot symbol table of FIG. 151, the lower the setting, the easier it is for the variation group table E with the smaller expected value of the variation time to be selected, and the less likely the variation group table B with the relatively large expected value for the variation time is selected ( 147). Therefore, the lower the setting, the smaller the average variation time (expected value of variation time) of the special figure variation display game during operation of the gaming machine 10 .

[Functions and effects of the fifteenth embodiment]
The game machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment includes control means (game control device 100, effect control device) capable of executing a variable display game that variably displays identification information based on establishment of a start condition (for example, winning a prize in a start winning opening). 300), and generates a special game state (jackpot state) advantageous to the player when the stop result of the variable display game is a special result. The gaming machine 10 includes setting change means (for example, the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102) capable of changing setting values according to game settings. The control means determines the variation pattern of the variation display game to be executed after the special game state (for example, big win) by lottery according to the set value.

Therefore, apart from the occurrence probability of the special game state (big hit probability), the rate of increase in the number of game balls acquired by the player can be flexibly increased through a variation pattern (that is, variation time value) drawn according to the set value. can be adjusted to In particular, after the special game state, the specific game state (probability variable state, time saving state, general electric support state) usually occurs, so the fluctuation pattern (that is, the fluctuation time value) has a great influence on the increase speed of the number of acquired balls. .

According to the fifteenth embodiment, the control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) includes a distribution table (for example, a variable group A parameter (for example, a variation pattern group number or a big hit pattern) associated with a table) is determined by lottery with a probability corresponding to a set value.

Therefore, a distribution table can be selected by randomly selecting a parameter associated with the distribution table with a probability corresponding to a set value, and fluctuation patterns can be distributed according to the distribution table. Therefore, the variation pattern can be suitably selected according to the set value. Moreover, if the rate (selection rate) of distributing the variation pattern is made different for each distribution table, the variation pattern can be more suitably selected according to the set value.

According to the fifteenth embodiment, the expected value of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern distributed by the distribution table differs for each distribution table. Therefore, by making it easier to draw a distribution table with a short expected value of fluctuation time for a set value with a low probability of a big hit, the increase speed of the number of acquired balls is increased, and the set difference ( (difference due to set value) can be reduced. Conversely, by facilitating the lottery of a distribution table with a short expected value of fluctuation time for a setting value with a high probability of a big hit, the increasing speed of the number of obtained balls is increased, and the setting difference with respect to the increasing speed of the number of obtained balls. (difference due to set value) can be increased.

According to the fifteenth embodiment, according to the number of executions of the variation display game executed after the special game state, the parameters corresponding to the distribution table (for example, the variation pattern group number) are changed so as to switch the distribution table. . Therefore, by switching to a sorting table with a short or long expected value of variation time according to the number of executions of the variation display game after the special game state, the player can estimate the set value from the variation pattern more than when switching is not performed. become difficult to do.

Further, for example, when the number of executions of the variable display game after the special game state exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 100 times), the special game state ( When a state in which a jackpot state does not easily occur (so-called addictive state) continues for more than a predetermined number of times, the increasing speed of the number of acquired balls can be increased to give a privilege to the player, thereby improving the amusement of the game. .

According to the fifteenth embodiment, the control means generates the first special game state (jackpot state) when the stop result of the variable display game is the first special result, and the stop result of the variable display game is the second special game state. When the result is obtained, a second special game state (minor win state) is generated in which the game value that the player can obtain is less than that of the first special game state. The control means determines the variation pattern of the variation display game to be executed after the first special game state by lottery according to the set value. Control means, when a predetermined condition is established (for example, in the case of probability variable jackpot), after the first special game state, the second special game state (small hit state) is likely to occur game state (for example, in the specific game state It is possible to generate a small hit RUSH). Therefore, if the variation pattern of the variation display game to be executed after the first special game state (big hit state) is drawn so as to be shortened according to the set value, the second special game state (small win state) is likely to occur. The speed of pending digestion in a state (for example, a small win RUSH in a specific game state) is increased, the increasing speed of the number of obtained balls by the second special game state (small win state) is increased, and the interest of the game is improved.

According to the fifteenth embodiment, the control means draws a parameter associated with the distribution table defining the rate of distributing the variation pattern of the variation display game executed after the special game state, with a probability corresponding to the set value. . The control means determines by lottery the variation pattern of the variable display game to be executed after the special game state, based on the distribution table corresponding to the parameter selected by lottery. After the special game state (jackpot state), when a specific game state (probability variable state, time saving state, general electric support state) in which the special game state is more likely to occur than the normal state occurs, after the special game state A parameter (for example, variation pattern group number) corresponding to the distribution table is changed so as to switch the distribution table according to the number of times the variation display game is executed. Therefore, for example, by switching to a sorting table with a short expected value of the variation time according to the number of executions of the variation display game, the variation time has a greater influence on the increase speed of the number of acquired balls than in the normal game state. In this state, the speed at which the number of acquired balls increases can be greatly improved.

[16th embodiment]
The sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 to 166. FIG. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to fifteenth embodiments. In addition, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to fifteenth embodiments, and overlapping descriptions are omitted as appropriate.

The sixteenth embodiment relates to changing an effect pattern (effect mode) according to the set value (setting) described above. In particular, in the sixteenth embodiment, even when the probability of big wins is the same among a plurality of set values, the appearance rate (appearance mode) of a predetermined performance is made different for each set value among the plurality of set values. As will be described later, the predetermined effects include a normal notice, a ready-to-win effect, a look-ahead effect, a special number notification effect among lucky number notification effects, a character effect, a background effect, and the like. The appearance rate of the effect may be the probability of the effect appearing per special figure fluctuation display game (appearance probability), or the appearance of the effect per unit time (for example, 10 minutes, 1 hour, 1 day). The number of times (appearance speed) may be used.

[Game board]
FIG. 152 is a front view of the game board 30 according to the sixteenth embodiment. The game board 30 according to the sixteenth embodiment is obtained by adding a lucky number display device 82 to the game board 30 (FIG. 2A) of the first embodiment. A lucky number display device 82 is controlled by a performance control device 300, and performs a lucky number reporting performance to report a number (lucky number, here 1 to 9) selected by lottery when a big win occurs. The lucky number display device 82 may be controlled by the performance control device 300 so as to continuously notify the number (lucky number) selected when a big win occurs until the next big win occurs.

Also, in the lucky number display device 82, when a special number notification effect (special notification effect) for notifying a specific number (for example, 3, 7) among the lucky numbers (1 to 9) appears, the game hall (game A player is given a privilege from a staff member or administrator of the store. Benefits include the right not to exchange acquired game balls for prizes for each big win, points that can be used at game arcades, and the like. As a result, the player will pay attention to the numbers (display contents) on the lucky number display device 82, and the interest in the game will be improved.

In FIG. 152, the position of the lucky number display device 82 is on the lower right side of the game board 30 and below the special variable winning device 39, but it is not limited to this. As shown in FIG. 152, if the lucky number display device 82 is provided adjacent to (facing) the special variable winning device 39, the special variable winning device 39 is opened by the light emission of the lucky number display device 82 and the big win. The player can continuously or simultaneously relate to and visually recognize that, and the amusement of the game is improved. Also, as shown in FIG. 152, if the lucky number display device 82 is provided adjacent to (facing) the first special figure variation display portion 51 or the second special figure variation display portion 52 of the collective display device 50, the first The special figure variation display game on the special figure variation display part 51 or the second special figure variation display part 52 and the light emission of the lucky number display device 82 can be visually recognized continuously or simultaneously, and the interest in the game is improved.

In this embodiment, the lucky number display device 82 includes LED lamps corresponding to the numbers 1 to 9 as light emitting units, and lights or blinks the LED lamps corresponding to the numbers selected from the numbers 1 to 9. Then, the selected number is notified to the player. For example, when the number 3 is selected, the LED lamp of the number 3 of the lucky number display device 82 emits light.

In this embodiment, the light-emitting part is an LED lamp that illuminates the numbers written on the surface cover and expressed as a form from the back by the light of the light-emitting member (LED), and as shown in FIG. ) is provided. However, the lucky number display device 82 may be one seven-segment lamp or one liquid crystal display device (display device 41 may also be used) that lights or flashes the selected number.

[Jackpot probability and production pattern]
FIG. 153 is a table exemplifying the jackpot probability and effect pattern for each setting (each setting value). The big win probability, which is the probability of a big win occurring in the special figure variation display game, is the same for settings 1, 2, and 3, and is the same for settings 4, 5, and 6. The jackpot probabilities of settings 4, 5 and 6 are higher than the jackpot probabilities of settings 1, 2 and 3. Even when the jackpot probability is the same among a plurality of set values (1, 2, 3 or 4, 5, 6), the production control device 300 creates a production pattern for each set value among the plurality of set values. make different. In the present embodiment, the effect pattern is the appearance mode (appearance rate, etc.) of a predetermined effect (normal notice, ready-to-win effect, look-ahead effect, special number notification effect, character effect, background effect, etc.).

In settings 1, 2 and 3 of the same big hit probability, the setting 1 is the performance pattern 1, the setting 2 is the performance pattern 2, and the setting 3 is the performance pattern 3, which are different for each set value. In the settings 4, 5 and 6 of the same big hit probability, the setting 4 is the performance pattern 1, the setting 5 is the performance pattern 2, and the setting 6 is the performance pattern 3, and the performance pattern is different for each set value.

FIGS. 154A and 154B show another example of the big hit probability and effect pattern according to the set value. In FIG. 154(A), in settings 1 and 2 of the same big hit probability, setting 1 is effect pattern 1, setting 2 is effect pattern 2, and effect patterns differ for each set value. In settings 3 and 4 of the same jackpot probability, setting 3 is effect pattern 1, setting 4 is effect pattern 2, and effect patterns differ for each set value. In settings 5 and 6 of the same jackpot probability, setting 5 is effect pattern 1, setting 6 is effect pattern 2, and effect patterns differ for each set value. In FIG. 154 (B), in settings 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 of the same jackpot probability, setting 1 is effect pattern 1, setting 2 is effect pattern 2, and setting 3 is effect pattern 3. There is effect pattern 4 at setting 4, effect pattern 5 at setting 5, effect pattern 6 at setting 6, and the effect pattern differs for each set value.

As described above, even if the jackpot probability is the same among a plurality of set values and there is no difference in the number of winning balls (set difference) caused by the set values, the player can still see the difference in the effect pattern due to the set values ( You can expect a difference in performance), and you can choose a game machine that has many occurrences of a predetermined performance. In addition, the operation of the game machines in the game hall is improved.

Further, for example, in production pattern 1, as predetermined effects, the appearance rate (selection rate) of a character effect by character A (for example, Bodhidharma) and a background effect (for example, New Year) that matches character A is set to 100%, and character B ( For example, the appearance rate (selection rate) of the character presentation by the character A and the background presentation (for example, Christmas) that is suitable for the character B is set to 0%. It is possible to set the appearance rate of the background effect to be 0%, and the appearance rate of the character effect by the character B and the background effect that matches the character B to 100%. In this way, the atmosphere of the presentation of the game machine can be changed extremely depending on the setting value, and the impression as if it were a different game machine can be given. can be apparently increased.

Note that the character presentation may be a presentation of displaying the character on the display device 41, a presentation of including the character in the decoration identification pattern, a presentation of moving a movable accessory modeled after the character, or the like. The background effect is a effect of displaying a background on the display device 41 .

[Variation effect setting process]
Details of the variable effect setting process (B1905 in FIG. 43) according to the sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 155 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the variable effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG. It should be noted that the same step numbers are attached to the same processing as in FIG. 44, and the description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

To simplify the explanation, in steps B2002a and B2004a of FIG. 155 corresponding to steps B2002 and B2004 of FIG. 44, the first half advance notice distribution group address table is set without depending on the set values. Therefore, the lottery (selection rate, notice appearance rate) of the notice that appears during the first half fluctuation does not depend on the set value.

In step B2007a, the effect control device 300 sets the second half advance notice distribution group address table corresponding to the number of effect points, the model code, the special figure type, the effect mode, and the symbol type. In order to simplify the explanation, unlike step B2007 in FIG. 44, the second half advance notice distribution group address table does not depend on the set value. Next, the address of the second half advance notice distribution group table corresponding to the ACT portion of the variation command is acquired (B2008).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 changes the address acquired in step B2008 to execute a second half advance notice distribution group table change process capable of changing the second half notice distribution group table (B2008a). Note that changing the second half advance notice distribution group table is synonymous with changing the address of the second half advance notice distribution group table. Then, based on the changed second half advance notice distribution group table (which may not be changed in some cases), a lottery for the second half advance notice, which is a notice that appears during the second half fluctuation (during reach), is performed (B2009).

Moreover, after step B2018, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the decoration special figure variation display game started by the variation command (variation command) received this time is a big hit (B2019). Whether or not it is a big hit can be known from the symbol type (B1802). When the decoration special figure variation display game is not a big hit (the result of B2019 is "N"), the variation effect setting process is terminated.

When the decorative special figure variation display game is a big hit (the result of B2019 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 sets a lucky number distribution table according to the set value and the previous lucky number (B2020), Based on the set lucky number apportionment table (see FIG. 161), a lucky number is selected from numerical values 1 to 9 (B2021). The previous lucky number is the lucky number selected at the previous jackpot. After that, notification setting is performed to notify the lucky number selected by lottery on the lucky number display device 82 (B2022). It should be noted that the setting values included in the setting value information command are stored in a storage unit such as a RAM in the setting value reception processing (B1324).

As a result, the lucky number notification effect is executed. Here, as a notification setting, the LED lamps for each number of the lucky number display device 82 are cyclically lit during execution of the decorative special figure variable display game (or if it is one 7-segment lamp, the lucky number Lucky numbers from 1 to 9 are cyclically displayed on the display device 82), and the lucky number display device 82 may be set to notify the selected lucky number immediately before the end of the decorative special figure variation display game.

It should be noted that the processing of steps B2019-B2022 can be configured to be executed when the symbol stop command is normally received (when the result of B1329 in FIG. 39 is "Y" and the result of B1330 is "Y"). be. In this configuration, the selected lucky number is notified to the lucky number display device 82 when the decoration identification pattern is stopped.

It is also possible to configure the processing of steps B2019-B2022 to be executed in the fanfare effect setting processing (B2102). In this configuration, the selected lucky number is reported to the lucky number display device 82 as part of the fanfare effect.

Furthermore, the processing of steps B2019-B2022 may be configured to be executed in the stop symbol setting processing (B2012). In this configuration, the display device 41 is used as the lucky number display device 82, and the winning stop pattern of the decorative special figure variation display game becomes the number of the selected lucky number. That is, corresponding to each of the lucky numbers 1 to 9, the jackpot stop symbols are "1, 1, 1", "2, 2, 2", . . . "9, 9, 9". Conversely, the number of the jackpot stop symbol of the decorative special figure variation display game is used as the lucky number.

[Latter half advance notice distribution group table change processing]
Details of the second half advance notice distribution group table change process (B2008a in FIG. 155) according to the sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 156A corresponds to FIG. 153 and is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second half advance notice apportionment group table change process executed by the effect control device 300. FIG. FIG. 156B corresponds to FIG. 154(A) and is another example of a flow chart showing the procedure of the second half advance notice apportionment group table change process executed by the effect control device 300. FIG.

In Drawing 156A, production control device 300 first performs branch processing according to a set value (B5201).

When the setting value is 1 or 4, the effect control device 300 does nothing and ends the second half advance notice distribution group table change processing, and the second half notice distribution group table set by the address in step B2008 is not changed. .

FIG. 157(A) exemplifies a normal second half advance notice distribution group table without change. In addition, the lower the table is, in the order of button operation system announcement, role object movement announcement, role object light emission announcement, and group announcement, the latter half announcement (appears during reach) gives the player a more lively impression and arouses expectations. notice).

Effect control device 300, when the set value is 2 or 5, determines whether the time measured by the time measuring means (RTC 338 or timer for time) is within a predetermined period (B5202). The predetermined period may be a period regularly set every hour (for example, 5 minutes every hour), or a specific period of the day (for example, the period from 2:00 pm to 2:30 pm). It's okay. If the time is not within the predetermined period (the result of B5202 is "N"), nothing is done and the second half advance notice apportionment group table change processing is terminated. If the time is within the predetermined period (the result of B5202 is "Y"), the second half advance notice distribution group table referred to later in step B2009 is changed (address change) (B5203), and the second half advance notice distribution is performed. End group table change processing.

FIG. 157B exemplifies the second half advance notice distribution group table when the set value is 2 or 5 and is changed. In addition, in FIG. 157(B), selection of lively second half notice (prediction appearing during reach) on the lower side of the table than in the normal case of FIG. 157(A) (when the set value is 1 or 4) The rate (percentage) increases. Also, the unannounced selection rate is lower than in the normal case. Therefore, when the set value is 2 or 5, the advance notice during reach within a predetermined period of time makes the player have high expectations and does not make the player bored.

If the setting value is 3 or 6, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not it is currently waiting for a customer (ie, when receiving a variable command) (B5204). If the customer waiting demonstration command is received and the customer waiting demonstration is being executed on the display device 41, it can be determined that the customer is waiting. If it is not waiting for a customer (the result of B5204 is "N"), it does nothing and ends the second half advance notice allocation group table change processing. If the customer is waiting (the result of B5204 is "Y"), the second half advance notice distribution group table referred to later in step B2009 is changed (address change) (B5205), and the second half advance notice distribution group table is changed. End the modification process.

FIG. 157C exemplifies the second half advance notice distribution group table when the set value is 3 or 6 and is changed. In addition, in FIG. 157(C), compared to the normal case (when the set value is 1 or 4) in FIG. Also, the selection rate of the lively second half announcement (announcement that appears during reach) on the bottom of the table will further increase. Also, the unannounced selection rate is further reduced. Therefore, when the set value is 3 or 6, the announcement during the first ready-to-win event immediately after the end of customer waiting is lively and gives the player great expectations, so that the player tends to continue the game after that. Become stronger.

In this way, the production pattern as the appearance mode of the notice (predetermined production) that appears during the second half fluctuation is the production pattern 1 with the set value of 1 or 4, and the set value of 2 or 5, corresponding to FIG. Effect pattern 2 becomes effect pattern 3 when the set value is 3 or 6. - 特許庁

FIG. 156B is another example of a flowchart showing the procedure of the second half advance notice distribution group table change process. In FIG. 156B, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. 156A.

In Drawing 156B, production control device 300 first performs branch processing according to a set value (B5201).

When the setting values are 1, 3, and 5, the effect control device 300 does nothing and ends the second half advance notice distribution group table change processing, and the second half notice distribution group table set by the address in step B2008 is Not changed.

When the setting value is 2, 4, or 6, the effect control device 300 determines whether the time measured by the time measuring means is within a predetermined period or whether the customer is currently waiting (B5202a). . If the time is not within the predetermined period and the customer is not waiting (the result of B5202a is "N"), nothing is done and the second half advance notice allocation group table change processing is terminated. If the time is within the predetermined period or if the customer is currently waiting (the result of B5202a is "Y"), change (address change) the second half advance notice distribution group table referred to later in step B2009. (B5203), the second half advance notice distribution group table change processing is terminated.

The second-half advance notice distribution group table when the set values are 2, 4, and 6 and there is a change may be the same as that shown in FIG. , Increase the selection rate of the late notice to inspire expectations of the lower side of the table. Also, the unannounced selection rate is lower than in the normal case.

As shown in FIGS. 156A and 156B, the effect control device 300 (effect appearance rate setting means) can be set under predetermined conditions (for example, when the time is within a predetermined period or In the case of waiting for customers), change the second half notice distribution group table according to the setting value, and set the appearance rate of the notice (predetermined effect) that appears during the second half fluctuation to differ for each setting value. do. Therefore, only under predetermined conditions, it is possible to make the advance notice that appears during the latter half fluctuation for a specific set value more intense or lively.

In FIGS. 156A and 156B, step B5202 (B5202a) and step B5204 are omitted, and the second half advance notice distribution group table is changed according to the setting value regardless of the predetermined conditions, and appears during the second half fluctuation. A configuration is also possible in which the rate of appearance of the notice (predetermined effect) is always set differently for each set value.

[Prefetching variation command processing]
Details of the prefetch variation command processing (B1216 in FIG. 38) according to the sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 158 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the prefetch variation command process executed by the effect control device 300. FIG. In FIG. 158, only step B1711a is added to FIG. 41, and the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. 41, and the description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

Effect control device 300, after loading the hold information of the prefetch target from the prefetch variation command area in step B1711, executes the prefetch effect distribution table setting process of setting the prefetch effect distribution table for each set value (B1711a). After that, a prefetching lottery process for drawing a lottery for a prefetching effect is executed based on the set prefetching effect apportionment table and the prefetching target reservation information (B1712).

[Prefetching production distribution table setting processing]
Details of the prefetch effect distribution table setting process (B1711a in FIG. 158) according to the sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 159A corresponds to FIG. 153 and is a flow chart showing the procedure of the look-ahead effect distribution table setting process executed by the effect control device 300. FIG. FIG. 159B corresponds to FIG. 154(A) and is another example of a flow chart showing the procedure of the prefetching effect distribution table setting process executed by the effect control device 300. FIG.

In FIG. 159A, the effect control device 300 first sets a normal look-ahead effect distribution table (B5401), and then executes branch processing according to the set value (B5402).

If the setting value is 1 or 4, the effect control device 300 ends the prefetch effect distribution table setting process without doing anything, and the prefetch effect distribution table set in step B5401 is not changed.

FIG. 160(A) exemplifies a normal look-ahead effect distribution table without change. In addition, in FIG. 160, the prefetch effect distribution table regarding the pending change notice is exemplified. The display mode of the suspension display (starting memory display) displayed on the display device 41 etc. corresponding to the suspension (starting memory) has a different distribution rate (selection rate ) will be selected. The display mode of the pending display is white (normal mode), blue (first color change mode), and red (second color change mode) in this order, and is more likely to be selected in the case of a big hit and less likely to be selected in the case of a loss. Expectations for the jackpot increase in this order.

Effect control device 300, when the set value is 2 or 5, determines whether or not the time measured by the time measuring means (RTC 338 or timer for time) is within a predetermined period (B5403). The predetermined period may be a period periodically set every hour, or may be a specific period of the day. When the time is not within the predetermined period (the result of B5403 is "N"), nothing is done and the look-ahead effect distribution table ends. When the time is within the predetermined period (the result of B5403 is "Y"), the prefetching effect distribution table referred to later in step B1712 is changed from the normal one (B5404), and the prefetching effect distribution table is changed. finish.

FIG. 160(B) exemplifies a look-ahead effect distribution table when the setting value is 2 or 5 and there is a change. In addition, in FIG. 160 (B), than in the normal case (set value is 1 or 4) in FIG. ) distribution rate (selection rate) increases. Here, in particular, in the case where the suspension of the look-ahead target occurs more frequently than the big win, the selection rate of the suspension display, which is more expected than in the normal mode, increases. Therefore, when the set value is 2 or 5, more pending change notices to a highly anticipated display mode occur within a predetermined period than usual, and the player has high expectations, so that the player is not bored.

If the setting value is 3 or 6, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not it is currently waiting for a customer (ie, when receiving a variable command) (B5405). If it is not waiting for a customer (the result of B5405 is "N"), it does nothing and terminates the prefetch effect distribution table setting process. If the customer is waiting (the result of B5405 is "Y"), the prefetch effect distribution table referred to in subsequent step B1712 is changed from the normal one (B5406), and the prefetch effect distribution table setting process is executed. finish.

FIG. 160(C) exemplifies a look-ahead effect distribution table when the setting value is 3 or 6 and there is a change. In addition, in FIG. 160(C), compared to the normal case (when the set value is 1 or 4) in FIG. Also, the selection rate of the reservation display (red reservation, blue reservation) with a high expectation of a big hit on the lower side of the table is further increased. Therefore, when the set value is 3 or 6, the look-ahead effect immediately after the end of waiting for customers becomes particularly lively, and the player has high expectations, so that the player tends to continue the game even after that.

In this way, the effect pattern as the appearance mode of the look-ahead effect (predetermined effect) corresponds to FIG. If the value is 3 or 6, the effect pattern is 3.

FIG. 159B is another example of a flow chart showing the procedure of the look-ahead effect distribution table setting process. In addition, in FIG. 159B, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. 159A.

In FIG. 159B, the effect control device 300 first sets a normal look-ahead effect distribution table (B5401), and then executes branch processing according to the set value (B5402).

When the setting values are 1, 3, and 5, the effect control device 300 does nothing and ends the prefetch effect distribution table setting process, and the prefetch effect distribution table set in step B5401 is not changed.

When the setting value is 2, 4, or 6, the effect control device 300 determines whether the time measured by the time measuring means is within a predetermined period or whether the customer is currently waiting (B5403a). . When the time is not within the predetermined period and the customer is not waiting (the result of B5403a is "N"), nothing is done and the prefetching effect distribution table setting process ends. If the time is within the predetermined period or the customer is currently waiting (the result of B5403a is "Y"), the prefetch effect distribution table referred to later in step B1712 is changed from the normal one (B5404). , ends the look-ahead effect distribution table setting process.

The look-ahead effect distribution table when the setting values are 2, 4, and 6 may be the same as that shown in FIG. The selection rate of the highly anticipated pending display (red pending, blue pending) on the lower side of the table increases.

As shown in FIGS. 159A and 159B, the effect control device 300 (effect appearance rate setting means) can be set under predetermined conditions (for example, when the time is within a predetermined period or In case of customer waiting), change the look-ahead effect distribution table according to the set value, and set the appearance rate of the pending change notice as the look-ahead effect (predetermined effect) differently for each set value. . Therefore, it is possible to make the look-ahead effect more intense or lively with respect to a specific set value only under a predetermined condition.

159A and B, step B5403 (B5403a) and step B5405 are omitted, and the look-ahead effect distribution table is changed according to the set value regardless of the predetermined conditions, and the look-ahead effect (holding change notice) A configuration is also possible in which the appearance rate of is always set differently for each set value.

[Lucky number distribution table]
FIG. 161 shows the lucky number distribution table set in step B2020 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 155).

Lucky number distribution table I in FIG. 161(A) is normally used, and the distribution (selection rate) of each lucky number is the same. In the lucky number distribution table II of FIG. 161(B), the distribution (selection rate) of predetermined numbers (4, 9) is lower than that of other numbers. In the lucky number allocation table III of FIG. 161(C), the allocation of specific numbers (for example, 3 and 7) to which benefits are awarded is higher than that of other numbers. In the lucky number allocation table IV of FIG. 161(D), the allocation of specific numbers (for example, 3 and 7) to which benefits are awarded is lower than the other numbers and is zero.

[Change pattern of lucky number allocation table]
FIG. 162 shows the change pattern of the lucky number apportionment table (B2020) which is set corresponding to the setting value and the previous lucky number when a big win occurs.

When the set value is 1 or 4, the normal lucky number distribution table I is always set without changing the lucky number distribution table, and the lucky number production pattern, which is the mode of appearance of the lucky numbers, is production pattern 1. becomes.

When the set value is 2 or 5, if the previous lucky number (selected at the time of the previous big win) is a specific number (for example, 3, 7), the lucky number allocation table changes from normal I to II, and then returns from II to I (I→II→I change pattern). Thus, when a specific number (for example, 3, 7) to which a privilege is given as a lucky number is selected, a predetermined number (4, 9) to which the privilege is temporarily not given at the time of the next big hit is selected. it gets harder. Therefore, the lottery (appearance rate) of the lucky numbers is well-balanced, and the amusement of the game is improved. In this way, when the set value is 2 or 5, the lucky number production pattern, which is the manner in which the lucky numbers appear, is the production pattern 2 .

After the normal lucky number distribution table I is changed to the lucky number distribution table II, the lucky number distribution table II may be set not only once but also several times in succession. Also, when a specific number (eg, 3, 7) is selected, the lucky number distribution table may return from II to I.

When the set value is 3 or 6, the lucky number distribution table III is selected by default, in which specific numbers (for example, 3 and 7) to which special benefits are distributed are higher than other numbers. If the previous lucky number (selected at the time of the previous big win) is a specific number (eg 3, 7), the lucky number distribution table changes from III to IV, and then returns from IV to III ( III→IV→III change pattern). Thereby, once a specific number (for example, 3, 7) to which a privilege is given as a lucky number is selected, the specific number (for example, 3, 7) to which a privilege is temporarily given at the time of the next jackpot is selected. is difficult to be selected. Therefore, the lottery (appearance rate) of the lucky numbers is well-balanced, and the amusement of the game is improved. In this way, when the set value is 3 or 6, the lucky number production pattern, which is the manner in which the lucky numbers appear, is the production pattern 3 .

After the normal lucky number distribution table III is changed to the lucky number distribution table IV, the lucky number distribution table IV may be set not only once but also several times in succession. Also, when a predetermined number (4, 9) is selected, the lucky number distribution table may return from IV to III.

As described above, the effect control device 300 (effect appearance rate setting means), even if the jackpot probability is the same among a plurality of set values, when the result mode of the special figure variation display game is a jackpot (special result mode) , the appearance rate of a special number notification effect (predetermined effect) for notifying a specific number (eg, 3, 7) among the lucky numbers (1 to 9) is set differently for each set value (see FIG. 161). As a result, the lucky number presentation is sharp, and the interest in the game is improved.

[Modification of 16th Embodiment]
A modification of the sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 163 to 166. FIG. In this modification, the game control device 100 changes the appearance rate (appearance mode) of a predetermined effect according to the set value (setting). Here, the predetermined effect is a ready-to-win effect.

[Special figure information setting process]
With reference to Drawing 163, the details of special figure information setting processing (A3404 of Drawing 18, A3504 of Drawing 19) concerning this modification are explained. FIG. 163 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure information setting process executed by the game control device 100 in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (FIG. 18) and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (FIG. 19).

The game control device 100 first sets a variable group selection pointer table (A4201), and acquires a variable group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information (A4202). Next, the variable group selection offset table is set (A4203), and the offset data corresponding to the target special figure reservation number (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number) and the stop design pattern are acquired (A4204).

Next, the game control device 100 adds the variation group selection pointer and the offset data (A4205), and saves the value obtained by the addition in the variation distribution information area (A4206). As a result, the fluctuation distribution information generated based on the type of stop symbol, the number of reservations, and the presentation mode is saved in the fluctuation distribution information area. This fluctuation distribution information is a table pointer and is used later to select a fluctuation group table (variation pattern group).

Details of the variation pattern setting process (A3406, A3506) according to the modification of the sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variation pattern setting process executed by the game control device 100 in the special figure 1 variation start process (FIG. 18) and the special figure 2 variation start process (FIG. 19). It should be noted that the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. 141, and the description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

The game control device 100 first sets a variable group selection address table (A4300). Next, the variable group selection address table is referred to acquire the address of the variable group table (variation pattern group) corresponding to the variable distribution information, and the variable group table is prepared (A4301a). Thereafter, a variation group table change process capable of changing the variation group table is executed (A4301b).

Then, the game control device 100 loads a random number from the target variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for reserved number 1) and prepares (A4302). Then, the variable group table prepared in step A4301a or the variable group table changed in step A4301b is referenced to execute 2-byte allocation processing (A4303).

[Variation group table change processing]
Details of the variation group table change processing (A4301b in FIG. 164) according to the modification of the sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 165A corresponds to FIG. 153 and is a flow chart showing the procedure of the variation group table changing process executed by the game control device 100. FIG. FIG. 165B corresponds to FIG. 154(A) and is another example of a flow chart showing the procedure of the variation group table changing process executed by the game control device 100. FIG.

In FIG. 165A, the game control device 100 first executes branch processing according to the set value (A4801).

When the setting value is 1 or 4, the game control device 100 does nothing and ends the variation group table change processing, and the variation group table set by the address in step A4301a is not changed.

FIG. 166(A) exemplifies a normal variation group table without change for a case where the special figure variation display game is lost in the normal state (normal game state). The fluctuation group table constitutes fluctuation pattern groups consisting of fluctuation patterns of no reach system, normal reach system, SP1 reach system, SP2 reach system, and SP3 reach system. In the order of fluctuation patterns of no reach system, normal reach system, SP1 reach system, SP2 reach system, and SP3 reach system, the fluctuation time becomes longer toward the bottom of the table, and the player expects a big win. As a result of the 2-byte allocation process (A4303), fluctuation selection tables (fluctuation pattern selection tables) of no reach system, normal reach system, SP1 reach system, SP2 reach system, and SP3 reach system are selected at a predetermined ratio. Furthermore, as a result of the sorting process (A4306) using the selected variation selection table, variation numbers (variation pattern numbers) are selected at a predetermined rate.

When the set value is 2 or 5, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of games (number of rotations) of the current special figure variation display game is within a predetermined range (A4802). The predetermined range may be a range provided periodically for every 300 rotations (for example, 50 rotations for every 300 rotations), or a specific rotation number range for a day (for example, a range from 1000 to 1100 rotations). . The number of special figure fluctuation display games may be the number of games after power-on of the gaming machine 10 or the number of games after the end of the big win. If the number of games is not within the predetermined range (the result of A4802 is "N"), nothing is done and the change group table change processing ends. If the number of games is within a predetermined range (the result of A4802 is "Y"), the variable group table referred to later in the 2-byte allocation process (A4303) is changed (changed address) (A4803), and End group table change processing.

FIG. 166(B) exemplifies the variation group table when the set value is 2 or 5 and there is a change in the case where the special figure variation display game is lost in the normal state (normal game state). In addition, in FIG. 166 (B), the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern (long reach) with a longer fluctuation time on the lower side of the table than the normal case (set value is 1 or 4) in FIG. 166 (A) increases. Therefore, when the set value is 2 or 5, many expected variation patterns (long reach performance) appear on the display device 41 in the number of games within a predetermined range, and the player is not bored.

When the set value is 3 or 6, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is currently waiting for a customer (ie, at the start of fluctuation) (A4804). If the customer waiting demonstration flag (A3210) is set, the game control device 100 can determine that the customer is waiting. If it is not waiting for a customer (the result of A4804 is "N"), it does nothing and terminates the change group table change processing. If the customer is waiting (result of A4804 is "Y"), change (change address) of the variable group table (address change) that will be referred to later in the 2-byte allocation process (A4303) (A4805) to change the variable group table. End the process.

FIG. 166(C) exemplifies the variation group table when the set value is 3 or 6 and there is a change. In addition, in FIG. 166(C), compared to the normal case (when the set value is 1 or 4) in FIG. Also, the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time (long-term reach) on the lower side of the table increases. Therefore, when the set value is 3 or 6, the ready-to-win performance on the display device 41 immediately after the end of waiting for customers is particularly long and lively, and the player has great expectations, so the player tends to continue playing the game even after that. becomes stronger.

FIG. 165B is another example of a flowchart showing the procedure of change group table change processing. In addition, in FIG. 165B, the same step numbers are given to the same processes as in FIG. 165A.

In FIG. 165A, the game control device 100 first executes branch processing according to the set value (A4801).

When the set values are 1, 3, and 5, the game control device 100 does nothing and ends the variation group table change processing, and the variation group table set by the address in step A4301a is not changed.

When the set value is 2, 4, or 6, the game control device 100 determines whether the number of games of the special figure variation display game is within a predetermined range or whether the customer is currently waiting. Judge (A4802a). If the number of games is not within the predetermined range and the customer is not waiting (the result of A4802a is "N"), nothing is done and the change group table change processing ends. If the number of games is within a predetermined range or the customer is currently waiting (the result of A4802a is "Y"), change the variable group table (address change) to be referred to later in the 2-byte allocation process (A4303) (A4803) to terminate the change group table change process.

The change group table when the setting values are 2, 4, and 6 and there is a change may be the same as that shown in FIG. 166(B). The selection rate (percentage) of the fluctuation pattern (long-time reach) that has a long fluctuation time on the lower side and gives rise to expectations increases.

As shown in FIGS. 165A and 165B, the game control device 100 (effect appearance rate setting means) can set the same jackpot probability among a plurality of set values under a predetermined condition (for example, the number of games in a special figure variation display game is within a predetermined range or waiting for customers), change the fluctuation group table according to the set value, and the appearance rate of the fluctuation pattern with long fluctuation time (long reach) is different for each set value setting. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a high expectation of a big win only under a predetermined condition.

[Functions and effects of the sixteenth embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the sixteenth embodiment generates a special game state advantageous to the player when the result mode of the variable display game that variably displays the identification information is the special result mode. The gaming machine 10 includes setting change means (for example, the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102) capable of changing setting values according to game settings. In addition, when the probability of occurrence of a special game state is the same among a plurality of setting values, the gaming machine 10 provides a predetermined effect (normal notice, ready-to-win effect, A performance appearance rate setting means (a game control device 100 and a performance control device 300) is provided for differentiating the appearance rate of special number notification performance, character performance, background performance, etc. among look-ahead performance and lucky number notification performance.

Therefore, even if the jackpot probability is the same among a plurality of set values and there is no difference in the number of winning balls (set difference) caused by the set values, the player can still see the difference in the effect patterns (effect difference) due to the set values. can be expected, and it is possible to select a gaming machine with many occurrences of predetermined effects. Then, the operation of the gaming machine is improved in the gaming hall (game parlor).

According to the sixteenth embodiment, the effect appearance rate setting means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) is set under predetermined conditions (for example, when the time is within a predetermined period or when the customer is waiting) The appearance rate of a predetermined effect is made different for each value. Therefore, it is possible to increase or decrease the appearance of a predetermined effect with respect to a specific set value only under predetermined conditions.

According to the 16th embodiment, the game machine 10 is provided with a clock means for clocking time. The effect appearance rate setting means changes the appearance rate of a predetermined effect for each set value when the time measured by the clock means is within a predetermined period. Therefore, when the time is within the predetermined period, the appearance of the predetermined effect can be increased or decreased with respect to the specific set value, and the interest in the game within the predetermined period can be significantly improved. By periodically providing the predetermined period, the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

According to the sixteenth embodiment, when the variable display game is started while the customer is waiting, the effect appearance rate setting means changes the appearance rate of the predetermined effect related to the variable display game for each set value. Therefore, it is possible to increase the appearance of a lively (flashy) predetermined effect after the end of waiting for a customer for a specific set value to arouse the expectation of the player and lengthen the operating time of the gaming machine.

According to the sixteenth embodiment, the effect appearance rate setting means changes the appearance rate of the predetermined effect for each set value when the result mode of the variable display game is the special result mode. Therefore, for a specific set value, an effect (special number notification effect) related to a special result mode (for example, a jackpot mode) or a effect (fanfare effect, jackpot middle effect) related to a special game state (jackpot state) appears. can be increased to arouse the expectations of the players and lengthen the operation time of the game machine.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes are possible within the scope of its technical idea, and it is clear that these are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. is. For example, it is possible to combine multiple embodiments. Also, for example, the present invention can be applied to other types of gaming machines (slot machines, etc.). The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, and is intended to include all changes within the scope of the claims and equivalent meanings and contents.

10 game machine 12 front frame (game frame)
25 effect button 30 game board 32 game area 36 first start winning opening (first start winning area)
37 normal variable winning device (second starting winning area)
39 special variable winning device 40 center case 41 display device 42 setting change device 44 board effect device 44a, 44b internal accessories (inner movable member)
46 board decoration device 50 collective display device (LED)
51 1st special figure fluctuation display unit (special figure 1 indicator)
52 Second special figure fluctuation display unit (special figure 2 indicator)
80 lamp display device 82 lucky number display device 93 setting key switch 95a external accessory (outer movable member)
102 set value change switch 143 probability set value display device 150 driver 152 state display device 153 LED driver 100 game control device (main substrate)
200 Payout control device 300 Effect control device (sub board)
400 Power supply device 510 Parts 513 Identification board 516 Parallel-serial converter 519 Wiring (electric wire)
630 Suspension display part 640 Suspension digestion area 640A Starting memory display background 641 Effect display area 815 I2CI/O expander

Claims (1)

A game control means capable of executing a variable display game that variably displays identification information based on the establishment of a starting condition is provided, and when a stop result of the variable display game results in a special result, a special game state advantageous to the player is generated. In a game machine that allows
a setting means capable of setting a set value according to a game-related setting;
a display unit configured with a plurality of digits and capable of selectively displaying information regarding the set value and information regarding the performance of the gaming machine by causing the light emitting member to emit light;
The setting means comprises a switch for shifting to a settable state in which the set value can be set,
the switch is convertible between a first form that allows transition to the settable state and a second form that terminates the settable state;
The game control means is
A storage means capable of holding the stored information even when the power is cut off and capable of storing the information of the set value before the power is cut off ,
The storage means includes a game work area and a game stack area related to game control, and a non-game work area and a non-game stack area related to the performance of the gaming machine,
When the power is turned on, a plurality of pieces of information stored in the game work area are targeted, and the information stored in the game stack area, the non-game work area and the non-game stack area are excluded from the object. and
If the result of the legitimacy determination is abnormal, the game stop state is continued until the power supply is cut off without initializing the storage means, and the game stop state is continued,
If the power is cut off after the game stop state, and when the power is turned on again, a specific condition for shifting to the settable state, including setting the switch to the first mode, is satisfied. , the memory means is initialized in response to the setting enabled state, and if the specific condition is not satisfied when the power is turned on again, the game is put into the game stop state again;
when the switch is in the first form and is in the settable state, display data can be set based on the set value and displayed on the display unit;
When the switch is in the second mode and the set value cannot be set, display data for displaying information about the performance of the gaming machine is set and displayed on the display unit. is possible and
When shifting from the settable state to the settable state, a predetermined display can be displayed while switching from the display of the information on the set value to the display of the information on the performance of the gaming machine,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined display is a display in which a light emission pattern that is not used in the display of the information on the set value and the display of the information on the performance of the gaming machine is displayed in all of the plurality of digits .

Images